Sodom - Five Ancient Cities

S O D OM
Fi ve An c i e n t Ci t i e s
by
Paul Justice
All rights reserved
Copyright © Paul Justice, 2010
Paul Justice is hereby identified as author of this

work in accordance with Section 77 of the Copyright, Designs
and Patents Act 1988
The book cover picture is copyright to Paul Justice
This book is published by

Grosvenor House Publishing Ltd
28-30 High Street, Guildford, Surrey, GU1 3HY.
www.grosvenorhousepublishing.co.uk
This book is sold subject to the conditions that it shall not, by way of
trade or otherwise, be lent, resold, hired out or otherwise circulated
without the author's or publisher's prior consent in any form of binding or
cover other than that in which it is published and
without a similar condition including this condition being imposed
on the subsequent purchaser.
A CIP record for this book

is available from the British Library
ISBN 978-1-907211-94-2
Dedication
Years of research preceded the writing of this book. My

mother eagerly waited for the day when she could hold in her
hands, her personal copy. Sadly she died while it was being
published.
Florence Justice
February 19, 1929 – April 4, 2010

Forward
Did you know that forty writers from various periods wrote
the Scriptures, which make up The Bible, over a period of
three thousand years? Originally written on stone, clay tablets
and papyrus and in three languages – Hebrew, Aramaic and
Greek – the Bible has survived down through the centuries,
although not in its entirety. Natural erosion and interference
by man has left us with a condensed interpretation of these
ancient accounts. Of the forty writers, all claim to have been
inspired by God. Enoch, the seventh man from Adam, com-
piled his account before Moses, who wrote Genesis; Enoch
wrote more concerning pre-flood era. Throughout the
remainder of the first century of our common era, the writ-
ings of scriptures were completed in the Greek language,
commonly known as the New Testament. However, the
gospels of Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John were written dur-
ing the second century of our common era, and the writings
of Mary Magdalene were also excluded from the Holy Book.
Those who wrote The Bible covered such a wide span of time
and were such a vast variety of writers – each one giving their
own personal slant on how their perceived supernatural inspi-
ration – that the final version leaves us with a compilation of
books that make up The Bible from Genesis to Revelation.
The Old Testament relays to us the history of ancient
civilisations of God’s people and the continuous promise
of better things to come, to be realised upon the arrival of
the promised Messiah. The New Testament introduces a
reformation of Abraham’s covenant into a new covenant,
introduced to the Hebrews and, later, all gentile nations. The
Bible certainly has its own unique history, interfered with by
I
PAUL JUSTICE
man over the centuries, translated into many languages, loved

by some, hated by others and even burned during the Middle
Ages. To translate the Bible from Latin into English, so that
the common folk could read it, educated men, who had devot-
ed their lives to making The Bible readily available to every-
one, were burned at the stake for their crime. This kind of
martyrdom was not uncommon throughout human history
with respect to attempts to ensure that The Bible and its mes-
sage were preserved.
As an introduction to a new genre in the world of books,
in 1958, biblical fiction was first met with some scepticism
among the public. However, over the past fifty years, interest
in the subject has grown to immense proportions. Take any
story from The Bible and read it in its entirety, and no doubt
you will be left to wonder: What happens next? Like an
unfinished mystery, The Bible may leave you thinking and
bemused; certain details or a conclusion may have been lost.
For whatever the reason, to read it in its entirety leaves a void
that needs to be filled. Biblical fiction fills this void by closing
the gaps, making the story more fulfilling and believable.
Although this is an embellishment upon an ancient text, it
in no way detracts from the Bible’s message. Rather, it com-
plements the original story, while leaving you with a fuller,
more meaningful, understanding. The Bible itself remains just
as it was handed down to us.
II
Introduction
Bronze Age Middle East: A nomad tribal leader named

Abram, who is later renamed Abraham, embarks on a momen-
tous journey that covers approximately one thousand miles, in
search of paradise known as the Promised Land. Abram is
accompanied by his wife Sarai, who is later renamed Sarah, his
nephew Lot, Lot’s wife and two daughters, and a crowd of
numerous followers including craftsmen, herdsmen and
slaves – all in search of paradise. The numbers of people in
this assemblage that made up the tribe grew to large propor-
tions as the journey progressed from city to city and through-
out the arid land. Ground covered included mountainous
terrain, green pasturage in the lower depressions, and some-
times the edges of the Eastern Desert en route to Egypt.
Thousands of people – men, women and children –
accompanied by numerous domestic animals, ardently fol-
lowed their leader Abraham toward the land of promise.
Their journey was not without peril, as their progression
occasionally caused them to clash with Pharaohs, Kings, and
the Military. Some of the more serious conflicts were caused
directly by Abraham’s decisions, many of which put the lives
of many of his followers in jeopardy. The entourage grew to
such large proportions that dispute arose among the assembly,
and this caused a division; this resulted with the crowds split-
ting into two groups. Abraham led one group and Lot led the
other. Abraham took his assembly into the mountains, while
Lot led his assembly into the Jordan plain, the place they call
paradise, the Promised Land.
This beautiful, large tract of land was sheltered on both
sides by twin mountain ranges, one on the east side and the
III
PAUL JUSTICE
other on the west. Set in a very low depression within the

earth’s crust and several hundred feet below sea level, the land
was blessed with levels of high humidity that created tropical
conditions and a climate where vegetation grew profusely.
A lush green pasturage was adorned with numerous species of
tropical flowers, and fruit trees bore pomegranates, figs, and
olives. Grapevines stretched the length of the valley and grew
to large proportions, accompanied by various fruit berries
which decorated the undergrowth. A large body of water
adorned the centre of the valley, a body of water so enormous
they named it the sea of Arabah, now the Dead Sea. The sea of
Arabah was well filtered and pure, with rivers that entered
from the north and exited from the south; a clean filtered
source of fresh and crystal clear water.
The Promised Land was occupied by hybrid giants and
vicious tribesmen known as the Canaanites, a black tribal race
who excelled in wickedness. The giants built five monumen-
tal and structurally sound cities that were set like gems along
the west coastline of the sea of Arabah; these people were
master builders and craftsmen. The Canaanites were
renowned throughout the Middle East for their production of
purple dye. The two largest of the five cities they named
Sodom and Gomorrah and they have become famous
throughout history for their association with these two names.
The city of Sodom featured a temple for worship, a
Palace, and a sphinx near the gates; the city was also built out
from the side of the mountain, whereas the other four cities
were freestanding.
k
As Lot enters the Jordan valley, accompanied by his wife and
daughters and a huge following of drifters, the scene before
them is breathtaking and far exceeds all that they imagined
the land of promise to be. They pitched their tents in an area
of pasturage set between the coast and the largest of the five
IV
SODOM: FIVE ANCIENT CITIES
cities and Lot admires the city of Sodom. Awestruck at the

architecture of this magnificent building, Lot stares up at the
towering walls and daydreams about what it must be like on
the inside.
As the days go by, he becomes absorbed in his want and
desire to gain access, but first he must appease Bera, the King
of Sodom. Little does he know that his infatuation with the
city is about to cost him dearly – and in more ways than he
could possibly imagine. Will Abraham and Lot ever receive
the opportunity to reunite as kinsmen? The story that is about
to unfold will take you on a journey of adventure and drama,
filled with human frailty which gives way to fear, lies, deceit
and misunderstandings, while on other occasions displaying
love, joy, hope and trust. The element of surprise and super-
natural activity heighten the excitement during this journey to
the land of promise.
V
Contents
Chapter 1: The City of Ur 1

Chapter 2: Akkad 11
Chapter 3: Nineveh 25
Chapter 4: Entering Haran 34
Chapter 5: Leaving Haran 52
Chapter 6: Between Bethel and Ai 71
Chapter 7: The Great Oaks of Mamre 90
Chapter 8: The Descent into the Negev 113
Chapter 9: The Rephaim 142
Chapter 10: Entering Egypt 150
Chapter 11: The Return 163
Chapter 12: Sodom 201
Chapter 13: Five Cities Under Siege 217
Chapter 14: The Vision 243
Chapter 15: Hagar 252
Chapter 16: Abram’s Inauguration to Abraham:
A New Beginning 265
Chapter 17: Celestials Visit 273
Chapter 18: Paranormal Assassins 285
Chapter 19: The Holocaust 294
Chapter 20: Lot’s Wife and the Fall of Salt 303
Chapter 21: Abraham’s Lament 310
Chapter 22: Lot’s Cave 317
Chapter 23: Leaving Hebron 328
Chapter 24: Same Old Dog, Same Old Tricks 334
Chapter 25: A Supernatural Dream 340
Chapter 26: The Conclusion 349
VII
1
The City of Ur
When Terah was seventy years old, he fathered Abram, who

was born in the city of Ur, situated in what is present-day Iraq.
His nephew Lot, pronounced Lut, was also born in the city of
Ur, as Abram and Haran were brothers and Haran fathered
Lot. These were direct descendants of Shem, who survived
the flood in the days of Noah. Abram and Lot became very
close and more like brothers; Haran considered them to
be inseparable, and he felt a little jealous as they bonded.
Throughout Lot’s childhood, Abram took the lead and taught
Lot how to make weapons and to hunt, spending much of his
time together with Lot in the woodlands which surrounded
the city of Ur. As time progressed, the two witnessed many
changes in their native land, and this included the refurbish-
ment of a huge temple for worship, called a ziggurat, former-
ly constructed by the Sumerians.
The ziggurat was redesigned by the Chaldeans for the
worship of the moon God, Sin. This deity was worshipped on
a daily basis and its influence spread throughout the district of
Babylon, from Ur and Northwards all the way to Haran. Even
as a young man, Abram considered the worship of false deities
as an abhorrent practice. Anyone who bowed down to man-
made sculptures fashioned in bronze he considered to be
committing an outrage against the creator of heaven and
earth. Lot followed Abram’s lead with respect to idol worship,
although his thoughts toward the practice were not as indig-
nant. As the years progressed and Abram and Lot developed
1
PAUL JUSTICE
into mature men, they decided to take wives for themselves

and, from among their kinsmen, they each chose a woman.
Abram chose his half-sister named Sarai, a young woman of
striking beauty and adored by many. Sarai was barren, a con-
dition inflicted upon her by God, as she was to be selected and
used in line with God’s purpose. Lot chose Sarai’s younger sis-
ter, with age differences of twenty years between the sisters;
she was beautiful, with jet black hair, light brown complexion,
striking green eyes, and a voluptuous figure. The woman’s
appearance was sultry and Lot kept his eye on her for years.
Lot’s wife soon became pregnant and gave birth to a daughter,
and within less than two years she was pregnant again, and
gave birth to Lot’s second daughter. The daughters grew up
to be beautiful young women, replicates of their mother.
The city of Ur expanded and flourished as the huge
ziggurat became a famous landmark; the temple stood proud
and majestic as it towered toward the heavens like a monu-
mental insult to God. People travelled hundreds of miles
from nearby towns and cities just to see, to witness, this
magnificent structure. The people assembled in droves and
willingly climbed thousands of steps to the top in order to
worship at the feet of Sin. This enormous bronze idol took
pride of place at the top of the ziggurat, instilling awe and fear
in those who worshipped. Seated on a throne, the idol was
sculpted with the body of a man and the head of a bull, and in
its hands it held a huge sphere which represented the moon.
Throughout the width and breadth of the Babylonian empire,
the Chaldeans became renowned and respected for their pri-
mal honour of the moon God Sin. Only one family in the city
of Ur stood out as exemplary, they point blank refused to wor-
ship at the feet of the bronze image. Terah and his household
were steadfast, turned their backs on idolatry, and it was to be
only a matter of time before this led to trouble.
k
2
The morning of the procession, the Chaldeans are prepared

for the night of the full moon, a unique and special occasion
where an animal is sacrificed before their God. The animal
chosen was the best from among the herd of cattle. All of the
inhabitants in the city of Ur must attend, and the military are
well equipped and prepared to keep order throughout the
inception. The King of Ur has issued a census of Ur’s inhabi-
tants and the results highlight that some have not registered.
Terah and his household have refused to attend.
The King sends orders for the Military Commander to
take some of his men and arrest Terah, along with everyone
in his household. The soldiers prepare and head off on
foot toward Terah’s house. As dusk blankets the city of Ur,
Terah and his family are relaxed and indoors, and they have
just enjoyed a meal together. They indulge in meaningful
conversations, and they have no intentions to worship at the
Babylonian inception.
Night in Terah’s house: A sudden loud knock on the door
takes everyone by surprise.
“Hush, everyone!” Terah cautions.
Abram looks at Sarai, who sits near to him, and everyone
in the room remains silent.
From outside the door they hear the voice of authority,
“Open up! The King has issued forth his orders for the inhab-
itants of this house to attend the procession. Open the door!”
Everyone in the room remains quiet; they look at one
another, they hope for the soldiers to go away. Thumps to
the door continue and begin to weaken the wood, as the
soldiers use sturdy lumber to strike down the door. Finally,
the door crashes in on the household and everyone clambers
to their feet.
The Military Commander steps forward and looks
all around the room. “Who is the head of this household?”
he asks.
Terah, steps forward, “It is I, my lord!”
3
PAUL JUSTICE
The Commander looks Terah up and down, as he has

the appearance of a withered old man well advanced in
years. The Commander studies him. “How old are you?”
he asks.
Terah answers, “One hundred and forty years, my lord!”
The Commander continues to stare. Terah continues, “I have
three sons with me, and I also have daughters whom I no
longer see or hear from!”
“Well, as wonderful as this may be for you,” the
Commander replies sarcastically, “how many are present in
this house?”
Terah begins to count on his fingers, and looks at the
Commander, “There are myself and my three sons, two of
whom have wives and one of whom is my son’s daughter and
my other son’s wife. My grandson has a wife and two daugh-
ters and also there are house servants, of which there are
a few!”
The General becomes agitated and responds, “So what
are you telling me? Are you trying to say you have around
twenty people who abide here?”
Abram steps forward and looks at the Commander, “My
father has explained who lives here, and there are twenty-one
individuals, if you wish to be precise,” he says.
The Commander’s head swings around and he glares at
Abram, “Perhaps you can explain to me the reasons why this
disobedient family fails to attend the King’s procession?” he
demands.
Abram answers, “We do not take part in rituals, my lord!”
The General moves closer to Abram, and asks, “Why?”
Abram continues, “There is one true God, the creator
of heaven and earth. Our allegiance is reserved for Elohim,
my lord!”
The Commander’s eyes widen and he strikes Abram
across the face with the back of his hand, causing Abram to
fall to the ground. The General takes a few steps back and
4
gestures for the soldiers to storm the house. “Arrest these

people and tether their hands behind their backs!” he orders.
The soldiers rush in and begin to strike everyone; this
includes the women, who are beaten to the ground and their
hands are bound with leather straps. Ushered to their feet,
Terah and his household are led away and taken to the pro-
cession in the area of the ziggurat, where a ritualistic sacrifice
is about to take place high above the ground, on top of the
temple. As Terah and his family are dragged through the
streets of Ur, they are beaten and flogged with whips every
step of the way. The soldiers revel to apportion this punish-
ment and they will not feel fulfilled until they are spattered
with human blood.
On arrival at the base of the ziggurat, Terah and his fam-
ily are forced to the ground at the foot of the steps and repeat-
edly whipped by the soldiers, until the Commander raises his
arms above his head and calls out, “Enough, before these peo-
ple can no longer walk!”
The soldiers immediately withdraw from their brutality
and stand aside. The General walks over to the families, who
are all crouched and kneel on the ground with their heads on
the sand, and looks at them. “Rise to your feet!” he shouts.
Terah and the others struggle, with hands tied, as they try
to steady themselves to their feet, and Terah stands up front,
facing the General. The Commander points to the top of
the ziggurat and looks at Terah, “By orders of the King of
Babylon, all of you will climb these steps and upon arrival at
the top, you will all do obeisance at the feet of the bronze
God. All of you will honour this sacrificial occasion. If you
refuse to obey, your execution will be swift!” He takes a few
steps back, “You all have five minutes to make your decision!”
Thousands of people have gathered for this momentous
occasion, this includes men, women and children from the
city of Ur and nearby towns. They form queues throughout
the event; the people have congregated around the ziggurat
5
PAUL JUSTICE
and they wait in line for their opportunity to worship Sin. As

time counts down, Abram gazes up into the night sky and
momentarily looks at the full moon. He shifts his attention to
the ziggurat and he notices how it appears to have a blue glow.
As time still counts down, Abram looks at his wife who stands
next to him, and he knows they are about to die; he leans over
and gently kisses the top of her head, to gesture a goodbye
kiss. The General appears to be impatient, from Abram’s per-
spective, and as the Commander steps forward, he calls out in
a loud clear voice “Your time has expired! What is it to be, life
or death?”
Terah and his family stand together steadfastly; they do
not move a muscle nor utter a sound. In a quiet voice, the
Commander says, “Very well!” As he draws his sword from its
sheath, with the intention of plunging it into Terah’s chest,
Haran, still with hands tied behind his back, rushes from
among the group and lunges himself across the front of his
father to protect him, just as the Commander thrusts his
sword forward. The sword pierces directly through Haran’s
heart and kills him instantly. He falls back against his father.
Terah’s hands are still tied, as he drops to his knees with
his son’s limp body which falls to the ground with him. Terah
cries out, “No, God, no! My son, my son!”
Terah leans over his dead son and weeps bitterly; the tears
flood his eyes. He sees the blurred image of the ground sud-
denly turn black.
Terah looks up, bleary-eyed, at the moon and he watches,
along with everyone else present, as the moon gradually turns
to black. The moon turns mysteriously in the night sky, as
though it offers its dark side to perplexed onlookers. The
atmosphere changes from one filled with celebrations to an
unsettled and eerie uncertainty. Thousands of people gaze
into the night sky, and watch as the moon disappears com-
pletely into the blackness of space. No one can see so much as
a hand in front of them, as they experience a total blackout.
6
Even the torches on the walls of the ziggurat are no more than
a faint flicker.
Panic fills the assembled people and they run aimlessly, to
flee the scene. Soldiers have drawn their swords and lash out
into the pitch black, they sever heads and limbs off one anoth-
er, and people assembled on the steps of the ziggurat fall and
plummet to their inevitable death. In the midst of the chaos
and pandemonium, Terah and his family remain huddled
together and try to undo their wrist restraints. Abram’s voice
is heard, “My hands are almost free!” The group stands with
their backs to one another and grapple at their wrist restraints,
trying to free each other. Abram’s hands are free. As he reach-
es out in the darkness, he calls Sarai’s name.
He gropes almost everyone in the group and eventually
finds her, “Sarai, have you managed to free your hands?” he asks.
“Almost!” she replies.
As Abram assists his wife, they are bumped as people rush
past in their panic. Sarai is afraid and says to Abram, “It is so
black. What are we going to do?”
“Keep a tight hold on my hand at all times!” he reassures
her, and says to all of the family, “Everyone hold hands, form
a chain; we must get away from this madness. Father, where
are you?”
Terah replies, “Here, what about my son, your brother,
are we to leave him here?”
“Father, we cannot see; we could pick anyone up in this
black void!” Abram says.
A voice is suddenly heard, “Are you saying we are leaving
my father here?”
“Lot, is that you?” Abram responds.
“Yes, of course. Surely, my father and your brother need a
respectful burial?” Lot answers.
“Yes, of course, but how? We are surrounded by pitch
black and in the midst of insanity; we must get out of here
now!” Abram replies.
7
PAUL JUSTICE
“Yes, just get us out of here; follow the North Star!” says
Terah.
Abram looks up into the night sky, which appears to mis-
lead with the absence of the moon. He eventually locates the
North Star and shuffles his feet, feeling for bodies that may
have fallen, that might block his path. Everyone inches for-
ward, follows Abram’s lead as he paves the way, and he feels
the occasional breeze from people who rush past. The cries
from terrified people can be heard for some time, as Abram
precariously leads the family away from the danger zone.
After they have shuffled for some time, the screams and
cries from the Chaldeans become a faint and distant noise and
Abram can see small lights glow in the distance: the lights
from torches that line the city walls of Ur. Abram’s hopes rise
within, as he says to the family, “Look straight ahead every-
one. We are near to the city walls!”
Abram shuffles and leads the family, as they all hobble
along, giving the appearance of a chain gang. As they reach the
city walls, the family groups together to discuss further actions.
Abram reaches up to remove one of the torches from the brace
attached to the wall and holds it in his right hand. The light
from the flames reveal who is present and who is not.
Abram peers at their faces before asking, “Where are the
slaves?” He moves closer, allows the torchlight to reveal who
is present, and he sees Terah, Nahor, Milcah, Sarai, Lot, Lot’s
wife and Lot’s two daughters. Nine souls have made it back to
the city and twelve have lost their way in the dark.
“Father, what are your wishes from here on?” Abram asks
Terah.
“We must leave Ur, for the Chaldeans will hunt us down
like jackals!” Terah replies.
“And go where?” asks Abram.
Terah says, “Have you not heard the rumours about the
land of Canaan? The people live in paradise there, where
8
every kind of fruit grows in abundance. We should go there;

the Chaldeans will never find us!”
“This sounds good, what are we waiting for?” Lot
chimes in.
“Too dangerous!” says Abram. “The Chaldeans will even-
tually find our carcasses in the desert!”
“No, it would be foolish to travel west,” Terah agrees.
“We will travel north to Haran, and follow the path between
the Euphrates and Tigris rivers and circle around and head
south into Canaan!”
Abram thinks for a moment. “As you wish, Father!”
“Father,” Nahor says, “Milcah and I will stay here, in the
city of Ur!”
Terah is shocked. “Are you serious? Am I to lose another
son? Is one son not enough, have I to lose two?”
“Forgive me father, but this journey you speak of is enor-
mous,” Nahor replies. “You will be travelling for months, it is
just too much!”
“Father is right!” Abram protests. “It is too dangerous for
you to stay here. Are you going to choose to live like fugitives
for the rest of your lives?”
“This is our native land,” Nahor answers. “We will find a
place to hide until the disturbance dies down. My wife and
I are prepared to take the risk!”
Abram looks at his father, who stands and looks disillu-
sioned. Terah reaches out with both arms and hugs his son
Nahor. A single tear rolls down the side of Terah’s nose as he
hugs his son.
Abram looks at Lot. “Lot! Go and fetch two torches from
the city wall!” he orders.
Lot nods in agreement and rushes off to collect them.
Terah now hugs Milcah and, before they leave, he says to
Nahor, “Elohim will protect both of you. Leave with my
blessing and know that I will always love you!”
9
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot returns with two torches. Abram takes one, and hands
it to Nahor. “Take this to guide you through the city. Choose
a place to hide and choose wisely!”
Nahor takes the torch and, taking his wife by the hand, he
leads her away from the family group. Terah watches as his
son walks away. He watches until the light from the torch
becomes a distant glow which resembles a firefly. His pro-
longed agony is a result of knowing, deep down inside, that he
will never see his son alive again.
Terah’s trance is broken by the sound of Abram’s voice.
“Father, we must press on!” Terah turns to see Abram and Lot
who each hold a torch, with flames that dance in the breeze,
as the light catches the faces of the women who stand close.
With no inflection in his voice, Terah says, “As we exit Ur,
head north toward the woodland!”
The family exits the city and presses on through woodland
and thick undergrowth. Arriving at the edge of the Euphrates
River, they all stop to rest. As the dawn breaks and the sun
rises, everything appears normal, as though the experience of
the blackout were just a nightmare. They rest until the sun is
high and the torches have extinguished. Moving on, they
head toward Babylon, eventually arriving in a town called
Akkad, famous for trade. Although held within the province
of Babylon, Akkad is a rural town far enough away from the
Capital that it allows Terah and his family to find refuge and
hide for some time.
As they arrive in Akkad, the dawn breaks. They have trav-
elled five full days and nights since their departure from the
Euphrates River, and without sustenance, with the exception
of a few berries along the way. It is not long before curious
townsfolk notice their arrival, and a lonely widow, who offers
accommodation to drifters, takes them in.
10
2
Akkad
The widow is a wealthy woman who owns property; this

includes a large house and a storehouse, as her husband had
been a successful merchant and had left everything to her in
his will. As the widow prepares food for the seven, Abram
gazes around the room and admires the architecture of the
widow’s house, which is fashioned in stone. He particularly
likes the large cedar wood beams which run the length of
the ceiling.
Sarai and the other women help the widow prepare the
meal. As they recline among scattered cushions and expensive
fabric, they all enjoy a well-prepared meal, accompanied by a
quality vintage wine.
“Where do you all come from?” the widow asks Terah.
“We have travelled from our hometown in Ur of the
Chaldeans!” he tells her.
Abram joins in the conversation. “We are searching for
paradise, in the land of Canaan!”
“Paradise?” asks the widow. An uncomfortable silence
ensues and everyone continues to eat.
After the lull in the conversation, Abram looks at the
widow and asks, “We need supplies for our long journey;
where might we attain these?”
“It depends,” says the widow. “What do you mean by sup-
plies?”
“Food, water-skins, cloths, tents and maybe livestock?”
answers Abram.
11
PAUL JUSTICE
The widow smiles after she hears such a long list and
looks at Abram directly, “Everyone works in Akkad. We have
craftsmen who are gifted in various arts. People trade every
day in the market square, and so you will have to earn the
things you desire!”
Terah joins in the conversation. “We did not intend to
stay here for long. Is there a way around trading that will not
involve long periods of time?”
“What you are asking for is charity, my friend,” the
widow says, laughing heartily, “and all I have to offer is food
and shelter!”
“Yes, and we greatly appreciate your hospitality,” Terah
says. “We were weak and exhausted when we arrived here!”
Silence prevails as they all continue to eat. Terah looks at
the widow, who appears to be lost in her own world as she
thinks about the needs of her visitors.
Finally she looks up, saying “There is one thing you could
do for me before you leave?” All eyes are fixed on the widow.
“Finish your meals and I will take you to the storehouse!” she
says.
Lot drinks the last of his wine and he is the first one on his
feet, eager to go. The rest of them rise from the dining area.
“Follow me, as the storehouse is a short distance across
town!” the widow says.
As she leads them across town and as they pass by the
market square, Abram notices how the area teems with trades-
men, who buy and sell everything from bronze artefacts to
tiny beads. He itches to get in on the action, but first he must
check out the storehouse.
As they arrive at the storehouse, they see a large stone
building with oak wood doors before them. The widow opens
the doors and takes them all inside. They are gobsmacked
when they look at the objects heaped up from wall to wall.
Rolls of fabric piled high, with lush designs and patterns.
Sheets of Egyptian cotton and fine linen and animal skins are
12
piled up almost to the ceiling and wooden boxes are filled with
coloured beads. Crafted ornaments in bronze, stone and wood
abound. The things that catch Abram’s attention are the care-
fully crafted camel seats. He has never seen anything like
them, carved and crafted in cedar, with a padded seat made
from leopard skins.
The widow walks over to Abram. “Found something you
like?” she asks. Abram looks at the widow, speechless. “Those
are a product from Axum and very expensive!” she tells him.
“I never even knew anything like this existed; the crafts-
manship is outstanding!” Abram says.
“Exactly!” says the widow. She turns and looks at every-
one present, before she states her purpose for bringing all of
them here. Abram remains in a trance over the camel seats.
“All of these things you see here were my husband’s prop-
erty,” the widow explains, “in conjunction with his business.
He died suddenly and left it all to me. Now, I have no need for
any of it; day after day, it all lies here, and collects dust and
moths. I need it all cleared out so that I can have this store-
house converted into accommodation for the poor, the needy
and drifters like yourselves. So, here is my proposal: when you
leave Akkad, take it all with you, or take it to market and trade
for something you do need, livestock perhaps. Do we have
an agreement?”
“Yes indeed!” everyone enthusiastically responds.
Abram rushes over to the widow and shakes her hand.
“Thank you for your generosity! Would you mind if we stayed
in this storehouse until we clear everything out?” he asks.
“You are welcome to do so. Just make sure you barricade
the doors at night!” she replies.
Abram nods in agreement and the widow leaves the store-
house. Everyone stands in the storehouse, looks at one anoth-
er in total disbelief, unable to comprehend their good fortune.
Lot rushes over to Abram and, places both hands on his
shoulders. “See, you have done it again!” he shouts. “What is
13
PAUL JUSTICE
it with you?” Lot laughs joyously, hugs Abram with the

intense grip of a grizzly bear.
Terah, who is now seated on a sack of corn due to his
weary aching legs, casually glances over to Abram and Lot.
“I have said it all along,” he says. “Even when Abram was a
boy, if he accidentally fell into a well, he would jump right on
out and land on both feet!”
Abram and Lot both laugh heartily and Lot continues
with his conclusion, “Yes, if Abram touches bronze it turns to
gold!” He continues to laugh.
Sarai and the woman have searched among the hoarded
wealth as the men were engaged in male joviality. Sarai turns
her head toward the men. “If you are all finished joking,” she
says, “you might want to come and see this?”
Abram and Lot rush over to the women who have con-
gregated in one corner of the storehouse. Sarai holds an
artefact in the shape of a pyramid in both hands. The pyramid
has been cut from red cedar and has hieroglyphics carved
into the wood on all four sides. The tip of the pyramid is
fashioned in gold and still gleams with a brilliance; the
gold tip sits on top in perfect symmetry to the remainder of
the object.
Abram, stares at the object. “What is it?” he asks Sarai.
“It’s a pyramid!” says Sarai.
Abram continues, “What I mean is, what does it symbol-
ise? What purpose does it serve?”
Sarai shrugs her shoulders and appears unconcerned as
she hands the object to Abram. He quickly shuffles the arte-
fact between his hands, tries to figure out what it does, and the
gold tip becomes loose. He removes the top and looks inside,
to discover a tightly rolled piece of papyrus parchment, placed
in a funnel cut into the cedar. Abram removes the papyrus and
hands the disassembled object to Lot. Rolling out the papyrus,
Abram looks at a three dimensional sketch of a pyramid, it
shows internal passageways and steps which lead to various
14
chambers. Abram ponders over the drawing and, looking at

Terah, he asks, “Father, what do you make of this?”
Terah looks up and rises from the sack of corn. He hob-
bles over to Abram and peers at the drawing. After a few
moments, he says, “Plans for a pyramid!”
“Yes, but look closer; look at the scale of it. The measure-
ments are in gigantic proportions!” Abram says.
Terah looks closer, “Yes, so what?”
Abram responds, with excitement in his voice, “Can
you not see it, father? These plans must be for a very impor-
tant dynasty of Pharaohs, and this makes this item highly
valuable!”
“Maybe, so how did it get here?”
“I do not know,” Abram replies, “but just think: right now,
as we speak, there could be thousands of slaves who cut gran-
ite or sandstone to the wrong size and drag it into the wrong
place and at the wrong time!”
“Abram, your wild imagination runs riot again,” Terah
laughs. “Roll that thing up and forget it!”
Suddenly, Lot chimes up, “Got it!” All eyes are fixed on
Lot, as he continues, “All of this stuff in here is contraband!
It is all illegal tender!”
“How so?” asks Abram.
Lot continues, “Think about it! The widow said her hus-
band died suddenly; he was probably caught and killed by the
Military for trading in the black market? Camel seats and
Egyptian artefacts and, as you said yourself, you have never
seen anything like them!”
Abram thinks for a moment and, looking at Lot, says,
“The widow is full of goodness and hospitality; she plans to
turn this storehouse into accommodation for the poor!”
“And you believe her?” asks Lot.
“Why should I not believe her? She has been good to us!”
“Yes!” Lot says, “And she saw us coming; she saw an
opportunity to get rid of all of this contraband!”
15
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot’s wife walks over to him and, tugging on his arm, asks,
“Are we in danger, Lot?”
Terah speaks up. “I think Lot has a valid point here. What
are we going to do with all of this stuff? I mean, there is too
much to take with us, do we not all agree?”
Abram paces the floor, thinks for a few minutes and stops.
He looks up. “The Law states: should anyone inherit illegally
obtained goods, the benefactor must return them to the right-
ful owner or pay a penance. This means that the widow should
return all of this, which would require travel, hundreds of
miles. Obviously she cannot do it; this may be why she has
asked us to remove the goods?”
“Now you are thinking!” says Lot.
“Unless…” Abram pauses to think.
“Unless what?” asks Lot.
“Unless we refashion it!” says Abram.
“Refashion it? What do you mean?” asks Terah.
“There is a loophole in the clause of the Law,” Abram
begins, “which states that the stolen item must retain its
originality. Let me explain: suppose you obtain a long
tunic from the black market and you decide to cut it into a
small item of clothing, that item of clothing is rightfully
yours!”
“I get it!” says Lot. “Disguise the stolen item.”
Terah looks at Abram, dumbfounded, “How do you know
all of this?”
“Simple. I read!”says Abram.
“So what do we do now?” asks Lot.
“Well,” says Abram, “I have been thinking. Do you see all
of this fabric? We will cut it and make tents and cloths, so that
it becomes legally ours. As for the camel seats and other items,
they will have to go to market!”
“Market!” says Lot. “What if we get arrested?”
“I know the risk,” Abram replies, “so we will trade early in
the morning before the afternoon confusion!”
16
Sarai speaks up. “I can see why the widow is so eager to

part with all of this!”
Abram, hands the rolled-up papyrus to Lot. “Replace this
in the pyramid and secure the top!” He walks over to the
women. “I take it you all know how to cut and sew?” he asks.
“Well, I do. I take pride in my embroidery!” says Lot’s wife.
“Good,” Abram says. “You can fashion my tent from the
finest cloth. What about your daughters?”
One of Lot’s daughters replies, “We have never made any-
thing!”
“Your mother will teach you and you both must learn
quickly,” Abram informs them. “Time is pressing!”
“We will need cutting tools and sewing implements,”
Sarai says.
“I will search the market tomorrow,” Abram replies.
“Now bed down with the women, as you all have a busy day
tomorrow!”
“Yes, my lord!”
Abram walks over to Terah and Lot and suggests that they
get some rest, as there is much work ahead of them. Abram
finds himself a place in one corner of the storehouse, throws
down a few animal skins and settles down for the night. He
finally drifts off to sleep, and hugs the pyramid artefact in
both arms.
k
Morning: The sun rises on a new day in Akkad and Lot is the
first one awake and on his feet. He walks over to Abram, who
is almost buried in animal furs with just his feet which pro-
trude. Lot kicks the soles of Abram’s feet until Abram opens
his eyes.
“What are you doing? Stop it!” Abram says, squinting up
at Lot.
“Why do you nurse that pyramid as though it were a new-
born baby?” Lot asks.
17
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram sits up and stretches and yawns. “It’s highly

valuable. If anyone tries to take it, I will know!”
“Who is going to take it?” Lot asks, and laughs. “You are
the only one interested in it. I suggest you hide it some-
where!”
Abram just looks at him and Lot walks over to the women,
who are still asleep, all wrapped in fabric. Abram rises to his
feet and walks over to Terah who is propped up in one corner
between two sacks of corn. Abram shakes him. “Father! Wake
up! It is not good for your back to sleep upright!”
As daylight peeps through the cracks in the doors, Abram
is ready to go to market. He calls to Lot, “I think we should
take two camel seats today?” Lot approaches, carrying two
boxes of beads.
“Give those to father and take one of the seats!” says
Abram.
They leave the storehouse, and carry the goods to market.
The women remain behind, still asleep. As the men reach the
market square, some traders have already arrived and set up
for business. Abram finds a comfortable spot under the shade
of a nearby tree. They place the camel seats side by side and
Abram reclines in one of them, while Terah sits in the other
and Lot stands. Two hours pass and the sun has risen high; it
reveals a glorious day. The market becomes very busy.
Terah, Abram and Lot have received little attention, as
their items are few compared to those of everyone else. In
fact, their appearance resembles one of spectators as opposed
to tradesmen. As soon as Terah realises the situation, he looks
at Abram and says, “No one knows we are here to trade!”
Abram, looks at his father. “What do you mean?” he asks.
“Look at us,” Terah says. “We sit here like dead wood. We
need to get in there and mingle, to spread the word!”
Abram, rising to his feet, says to Lot, “Bring a box of
beads; Father is right!” Turning to Terah, he says, “Father,
stay here and guard the seats!”
18
Terah remains seated and watches as Abram and Lot grad-

ually disappear among a mass of people. They all mill around,
anxious to buy and sell. Abram and Lot work their way through
the crowds.
“Beads anyone, beads?” Lot calls out.
“You will have to try harder than that!” Abram says.
As they progress through the crowds, Abram notices a
man who stands and holds the reins of two camels. He eager-
ly approaches the man, while Lot disappears among the
crowds. He approaches the man, and Abram asks, “Are these
animals for sale?”
“I am selling one for one thousand gold ashrafi!” the man
answers.
“I have a beautiful camel seat, a unique creation from
Axum,” Abram tells him. “Would you like to trade?”
The man enquires, “Where is this seat?”
“Follow me!” says Abram.
The man follows Abram through the crowds and people
step aside because of the camels. Terah cannot believe his eyes
when he sees Abram approach, followed by a man who leads
two camels. As they arrive, Abram lifts one of the seats and
shows it to the man.
“Look at the craftsmanship in this, have you ever seen
anything like it?” he asks.
The man looks admiringly at the seat and says, “How
much are you asking for this?”
“It is worth three thousand gold ashrafi,” Abram says,
“but I feel generous today so you may have it for two camels!”
The man takes a step back, “Your evaluation is outra-
geous! How am I going to return to Assyria with one seat and
no camel?”
“I am willing to negotiate,” says Abram. “What if I say
one camel and two thousand gold ashrafi?”
“No, no! You are trying, my friend,” the man replies. “My
final offer is this: one camel and this bag of rubies worth one
thousand gold ashrafi!”
19
PAUL JUSTICE
“Open the bag and let me see the rubies,” Abram demands.
The man tips a few rubies into the palm of his hand and,
on seeing them, Abram says, “We have a deal, my friend!”
Happy with his purchase, the man hands the bag of rubies
to Abram and takes the seat. Abram assists the man to tether
his seat to the camel, then he hoists the man up onto the seat.
It appears to be the perfect fit. The man sits, smiling from ear
to ear, and looks down on Abram, “This is luxury indeed!
Have a good day!” The man rides away and Abram stands and
watches as the seat rocks from side to side, as it accommodates
one happy customer.
Abram turns and looks at Terah, who sits and looks dumb-
founded.
“What?” asks Abram.
“You drive a hard bargain!” Terah says.
“Hard bargain?” says Abram. “Look! The man is happy
and we have a camel. Sarai will be delighted!”
Terah laughs, then gazing past Abram, he points with one
finger. “Look!”
Abram turns his head and sees Lot approaching, carrying
two chickens, one under each arm. As Lot reaches them,
Abram says, “Lot, what were you thinking?”
“I was thinking eggs for breakfast!” says Lot.
Abram turns and looks at Terah, who grins from ear to
ear. In a more serious tone, Abram says, “Father, take the
camel to the storehouse and take Lot and his livestock with
you. I will remain here for a little longer.”
“Very well, try not to be too late!” Terah replies, and he
and Lot take the animals to the storehouse. Abram reclines in
the one camel seat which remains. It is late afternoon and the
sun descends over the horizon. Abram sits and watches as peo-
ple disperse after a lucrative day, beguiled over the joyous
chatter of happy customers and tradesmen gather and prepare
for home. Abram, as a lone soul in a camel seat, goes almost
unnoticed to passersby.
20
A man from Nineveh approaches, followed by ten young

female slaves between the ages of sixteen and nineteen, joined
together with tethered ankles they shuffle behind their mas-
ter. Abram rises to his feet and, approaching the man, he asks,
“Are these people for sale?”
The man looks Abram up and down, “One hundred gold
ashrafi each or one thousand gold ashrafi for all!”
“I have an item to show you and believe me it will aston-
ish you!” says Abram.
Abram leads the man to the camel seat. The young
women follow. Abram picks up the seat and shows it to the
man. “Look at the craftsmanship and the detail,” he says. “You
are looking at rare Axum craftsmanship in this camel seat.
Worth three thousand gold ashrafi and I am prepared to trade
this for all of those women and one thousand ashrafi. What do
you say my friend?”
The man looks over the seat and studies every detail,
“All of the women and five hundred gold ashrafi is my best
offer!”
Abram looks at the man, all the while thinking, it has been
a long day and I am very tired, should I let the seat go? Abram
offers his hand to the man, “Very well, we have a deal!”
The man hands a pouch which contains five hundred gold
ashrafi to Abram, picks up the camel seat and leaves with it
upon his shoulder. The women slaves stand near and huddle
in a group, with heads lowered. Abram walks around them,
inspects their condition, and he begins to realize that he has
been duped. He looks over to the masses of people who exit
the area and sees that they are all burdened with goods to
carry. The man who carries the camel seat has mingled and
blended without a trace.
Abram inspects the women further, and he sees scantily
clad females who wear only torn soiled clothes; their dirty
skin reveals scars from injuries and their tattered hair crawls
with lice.
21
PAUL JUSTICE
“Sacrilege!” Abram retorts, under his breath, before he

beckons for the women to follow him. Abram leads the way to
the storehouse, followed by the slaves who shuffle in a tight
group. On arrival at the storehouse, Abram gestures for the
slaves to remain outside while he enters the storehouse. As he
enters, the glint of steel catches his eye. The women have
been busy all day cutting cloth, as they found boxes of knives
and swords from among the contraband.
Sarai looks up and sees Abram who stands near the doors.
She drops her knife, and she runs to greet him, “My lord, you
look tired; have you eaten today?” she asks.
Abram looks at Sarai, “Where did you get those knives?”
he asks.
“In here, in a secured box,” she answers. “Let me bring
you some refreshment, my lord. The widow came here today
with food and water!”
Abram smiles and says, “First come outside!”
Abram leads Sarai outside to look at the women-slaves.
“Who are they?” Sarai asks.
“I was duped,” Abram explains. “I exchanged a valuable
item for the women, a camel seat.”
Sarai circles around the group of women and inspects
them. “These poor girls have been abused,” she says. “Bring
them inside. We must feed them!”
“No!” says Abram, “They crawl with head-lice; send Terah
and Lot to me with knives so we may tend to the women. We
must remove their hair before all of us itch and crawl with lice!”
Sarai bows before Abram and returns indoors to alert the
men. Terah, Abram and Lot hack hair from the heads of the
slaves. Even while dusk closes in, they continue to cut close to
the scalp until the girls are almost bald.
k
The next day brings new opportunities to trade and Abram
reminds everyone that they need to clear the storehouse of
22
contraband. The women must continue to make tents as

this is their highest priority and Abram instructs Sarai to use
the women-slaves to assist. Days roll by and they all make
progress. The storehouse is almost clear of contraband and
the tents pile up. The need to kill Lot’s chickens for food, has
allowed the women to now use the fine bones and leg tendons
to sew. They suggest that Lot bring more chickens, especially
if he wants eggs for breakfast.
k
Several weeks have now passed since Terah and his family
arrived in Akkad and their favour to the widow is almost com-
plete. Abram is delighted, as he has managed to purchase two
more camels, and he managed to retain three of the camel
seats. Lot and his chickens become a nuisance, as Lot buys
them quicker than they can eat poultry. The women’s hands
are callused and sore from extensive sewing, but the slave-
women have a clean and healthy appearance for the first time.
Word has spread throughout Akkad with respect to the fami-
ly and their mission; people come and question about the
land of Canaan and their search for paradise. As Abram is an
accomplished storyteller, he convinces many more people to
join them in their quest. As the numbers grow and people talk,
likewise Abram’s popularity grows in equal measure, and they
are all ready and eager to leave Akkad.
k
The day has arrived for them to leave, and more than one hun-
dred people have congregated around the storehouse. The
three camels are burdened with tents, water-skins and other
necessary items, and this includes Abram’s treasured artefact,
which is carefully wrapped and stuffed into a pouch on the
camel seat. On one of the camels sits Sarai, looking proud like
the Queen of Sheba. The assembly who are led by Abram,
move toward the widow’s house. As they all congregate
23
PAUL JUSTICE
outside, Abram calls out to the widow, telling her in a loud

clear voice, “We are leaving Akkad!”
The widow appears at the door. “Thank you for clearing
out the storehouse,” she says to Abram. “I can set about my
business without delay!”
“Yes, indeed you can!” says Abram. And moving closer to
the widow, he says, “And you can do so without any reproach
from the Authorities!” He discreetly winks at her and takes a
few steps back.
The widow frowns. “What do you mean, my friend?”
she asks.
Abram smiles and taps the side of his nose with his finger,
and he discreetly winks again. The widow remains confused.
Abram rouses everyone ready to leave. Taking hold of the
camel’s reins and with Sarai who looks pretty and proud,
Abram looks at the widow. “I thank you again for your hospi-
tality.” he says. “May my God bless you and grant you pros-
perity, health and life in abundance so that your days may
be long!”
As Abram leads the camel that carries Sarai, all the people
follow him and they exit Akkad. The widow stands and watch-
es them leave. Still bemused over Abram’s comments, she calls
after him, “Good luck in your search for paradise!”
Abram forges ahead, not bothering to look back, as
though he had failed to hear the widow’s final comments.
24
3
Nineveh
Six weeks have passed since their departure from Akkad

and the congregated entourage has almost reached Nineveh.
A short distance from the huge walls which surround the city
of Nineveh, Abram, Terah and Lot decide it is time to rest up.
They pitch tent near the Tigris River, with the city walls in
sight; they intend to stay a few days. The people have spent
the remainder of the day as they work to erect tents and set-
tle before dusk. As night falls, Terah, Abram and Lot are seat-
ed around a campfire and they discuss their next move.
Lot stokes up the fire with a stick before asking, “When
will we be entering Haran?”
Abram watches Lot stoke the fire “Maybe in a few weeks,”
he says. “Why?”
Lot drops the stick and looks up. “I do not like this place,”
he says, “not one bit. The people of Nineveh are peculiar, or
so they say.”
“Explain?” says Abram.
“They build huge monuments half man, half bull with
wings,” Lot answers. “Why?”
“It is their culture!” Abram laughs.
“Yes,” Lot replies, “and cultures do not change, do they?
I mean, why create such things?”
Terah chimes in on the conversation. “It is all about wor-
ship,” he explains, “and they have many deities!”
“Precisely my point!” says Lot.
25
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram shakes his head. “Lot! You have nothing to worry

about,” he says. “Besides, I was thinking of travelling into
Nineveh tomorrow. We could visit the market and maybe do
some trade.”
“Oh really!” says Lot “Well, I think you will be travelling
alone, as I am most certainly not venturing into cuckoo land!”
“What about you, Father?” Abram laughs. “Would you
like to visit the market in Nineveh?”
“No, I am too tired,” says Terah. “Besides, my aching legs
are giving way; swollen and sore, veins jutting out everywhere,
and the pain is increasing.”
“Why did you not mention this before now?” asks Abram.
“Because we still have a long way to go before we reach
Haran!” Terah answers.
Abram rises to his feet and looks at the dark silhouette of
the city walls, which display a tiny flicker from night-lights.
Looking down at Lot, he says, “Well, I guess I am alone on
this one.” Stretching, he adds, “If you will both excuse me,
I am going to retire for the night.”
Lot watches as Abram walks away, and turns his attention
to Terah, “Terah! What do you think about Abram going into
Nineveh?”
Terah looks at Lot and in a more serious tone, “It is his
choice; it is not as if anyone can stop him. You know what he
is like, especially you.”
Lot lowers his head and stares into the flames of the
campfire, and after he thinks for a while, he sighs, “Come on,
Terah. I will help you back to your tent.”
Terah holds his arms out for assistance and Lot, taking
hold, helps Terah to his feet. Lot assists Terah to his tent
before he too retires for the night.
k
Early morning: The campsite is quiet, and Abram is the only
one awake. He searches the tent for items to take on his jour-
26
ney to Nineveh. He collects water-skins, a bag of ashrafi coins

and extra clothes and leaves the tent to prepare one of the
camels for the trip. The sun is only just about to peak as it
rises over the city of Nineveh. Abram mounts his camel and
begins his journey alone.
After some time en route to Nineveh, he stops to take a
drink of water from one of the skins. As he takes a drink, flash-
es of solar light sweep across the valley in waves that almost
blind him. He raises the back of his hand across his face to
protect his eyes. Abram squints at the phenomenon as he
watches the sunlight reflect from the city walls, an experience
he has never seen before. He continues to protect his eyes
with one hand, and he tugging on the reins with the other, he
instructs the camel to move on.
As the sun continues to rise, the city walls become clearer
and Abram begins to realise just how vast this city must be. As
he reaches the city gates, he dismounts his camel and walks
toward the city walls, with the intention of a close inspection.
He peers in to see delicate art which appears to have been
baked onto each brick and glazed over with some kind of
transparent substance which leaves a high gloss. Abram runs
the tips of his fingers over one of the bricks and mutters to
himself in a low voice, “This is why the walls reflect light…
amazing!”
Abram takes a few steps back and gazes up at the enor-
mous archway that overshadows the entrance to the city. Like
a tiny ant in comparison, he marvels at the architecture which
towers overhead. On either side of the entrance and carved in
granite sit two large statues, fashioned with the appearance of
bulls with wings and they feature human faces. Abram looks at
them with a certain disdain, before he proceeds into the city,
leading his camel by the reins. Abram wanders into the city
and tethers his camel to a post near the gates. As he wanders
through the streets of Nineveh, people begin to gather in
groups, curious as they watch a lonely old man find his way,
27
PAUL JUSTICE
and they whisper in secret. Prostitutes emerge from the win-

dows above; some call out to Abram, “Fifty gold ashrafi for a
good time, old man!” He ignores them and continues on his
way.
As he reaches the city square, he soon mingles among the
congregated people who barely notice his presence; children
play, people are preoccupied with their own business and
some offer trade to passersby. As he passes a blind woman
who sits on the ground, Abram feels a tug on his clothes. He
looks down to see an old woman who stares up at him with
opaque eyes; she grins, and reveals one rotten tooth, “You are
a stranger amidst predators!”
“What do you mean?” asks Abram.
The woman grabs his hand and inspects his palm, which
she scans with the tips of her gnarled fingers. She quickly
responds, “Everywhere, I see swirling flames of fire, combus-
tion abounds in this paradise you seek. Beware! Your nephew
is in serious danger.”
Abram swiftly retrieves his hand. “Your tongue crawls
with deceit and your eyes are cursed!” he says.
The woman cackles a meaningless laugh. “You will
remember my words when they unfold before your eyes!”
Abram quickly turns to make a hasty exit and rushes
through the crowds, pushing people aside. He attracts unnec-
essary attention.
“Who is this man? Stop him!” people call out. Two men
rush toward Abram and seize hold of him. They drag him to
the ground and pin him down.
“Who are you?” asks one of the men.
Abram, breathless, responds, “I arrived here alone and in
peace, only curious over the stories I have heard concerning
Nineveh: good stories!”
The man slaps Abram across the face and asks again,
“Who are you?”
“Abram, I am a prophet!” Abram replies.
28
“Prophet?” asks the man.

The controversy among the crowds has drawn the atten-
tion of the Military. Seven Military men approach on horse-
back, with their Commander who takes the lead. The soldiers
usher the crowds back and the Commander approaches the
men who kneel over Abram.
“You men, on your feet and leave!” the Commander
calls out.
Both men look up at the Commander and, without hesi-
tation, quickly disperse. Abram, lying on his back, looks up at
the Commander mounted on his horse. Abram’s vision is
impaired as the sun catches his eyes, which makes the appear-
ance of the General difficult to distinguish. The soldiers, who
have re-established order, now position themselves behind the
General and await further instructions.
The Commander looks down upon Abram and gestures
with his hand, “On your feet, old man!”
Abram struggles to his feet and, brushing the dust from
his clothes, he stands and faces the Military men. The General
leans forward on his horse to peer at Abram. “Who are you?”
he asks.
“My name is Abram, my lord,” Abram replies, “and I am
a prophet of God Most High!”
The seven erupt with laughter. As the laughter subsides,
the General, still grinning, asks, “So what is your business in
Nineveh? Are we to hear prophesying concerning us?”
“My mission is peaceful, my lord,” replies Abram. “I sim-
ply came here to purchase from the market!”
The General laughs, “Purchase? Purchase what? The star
gazers guide on how to become a prophet?” All seven laugh.
The General gestures for silence. “Where did you travel
from?”
“My journey has encompassed many days,” Abram
tells him, “as I have travelled from my home town, the city
of Ur.”
29
PAUL JUSTICE
The General laughs again, as he looks back at his soldiers,

and points at Abram. The General looks at Abram again, “You
have travelled a long way, my friend. Do they not sell aids for
prophets in Ur?” Laughter ensues from among the Military
and Abram remains silent. A few seconds pass and the laugh-
ter gradually recedes, as the General continues, “You are a
harmless old man. I suggest you be on your way.” The
General pauses to wipe the tears from his eyes as a result of
extensive laughter, then continues. “Two of my men will
escort you from the city, until you reach a safe distance.
Where are you headed?”
“Haran,” Abram tells him. “I am heading for Haran, my
lord!”
“Very well!” says the Commander. Turning his horse, the
Commander instructs two of his men to escort Abram,
and they immediately steer their horses toward the city gates.
The General looks at Abram and gestures, waving him on.
“Follow my men,” he says. “They will see to it that you have
a safe journey!”
Abram nods in agreement, and follows the two soldiers
toward the city gates. As he reaches the exit, Abram retrieves
his camel and mounts, and he continues to follow the soldiers.
It is late afternoon and they have travelled for about two
hours; throughout this time not a word has been spoken
between them. Finally, one of the soldiers pulls on the reins to
stop his horse and turns it to face Abram. “We have come far
enough, “he says. “You will be safe for the remainder of your
journey. Haran is about three weeks travel from here, just
head west!”
Abram nods in agreement and the two soldiers whip their
horses to speed them on their way. Abram continues on his
journey back to base camp. As he travels in comfort in his
beloved camel seat, which gently rocks to and fro, Abram
reflects over the city of Nineveh, and he thinks, Lot was right,
what possessed me to venture into Nineveh? And what did the
30
palm reader mean when she said, ‘Your nephew is in danger?’

Abram remains confused, though perplexed, while he ponders
these issues.
It creeps toward dusk by the time Abram can see the tents
in the valley, not far from the river. He eagerly anticipates a
warm reception, but he wonders how Lot might respond to
the news which concerns Nineveh.
Sarai is in her tent and is worried sick over Abram’s dis-
creet departure: not knowing is the force driving her madness.
Terah is on his sick bed with legs so badly swollen he can no
longer walk; the pain drives him to distraction. Lot has spent
the entire day involved in the construction of a pen for his
chickens, with assistance from his two daughters; the contrap-
tion is almost complete. He catches a glimpse of Abram in the
distance. He drops the piece of timber in his hand, and runs
toward Abram, shouting at the top of his voice, “Abram! It
is Abram!”
Sarai hears Lot shout and immediately rushes from her
tent and hurries in the direction of Abram’s approach. Lot
reaches Abram first and takes hold of the camel’s reins, lead-
ing Abram back to camp.
“Well, was the journey worth it?” Lot asks.
“No!” says Abram.
“No, just no?” Lot demands.
“I will tell you later!” says Abram.
Sarai arrives, breathless. “My lord, I have been worried
sick all day. What possessed you to take off without warning?”
Abram looks down to Sarai. “Do you not know me by
now?” he asks. “Go ahead of us and prepare food!”
“Yes, my lord!” she says and hurries toward her tent.
Lot looks up with an expression of concern. “Father is sick,”
he says. “He has not left his tent all day. His legs trouble him!”
Abram stops the camel and dismounts. “Tether this ani-
mal with the others!” he says to Lot and immediately rushes
off toward Terah’s tent.
31
PAUL JUSTICE
As he arrives at Terah’s tent, Abram sees Terah lying on

his back, asleep. As he is about to leave the tent, Abram hears
his father’s voice. “Abram?”
Abram turns to see Terah, who struggles to sit up. “Here
father let me help you!” he says. Terah takes a tight hold on
Abram’s hand while he leverages himself upright.
Terah looks at Abram. “Lot told me you went to Nineveh.
Thank God, you are back safe. How was it?”
“Overrated!” says Abram. “What about you, Father? Your
legs, tell me, how are they?”
Terah pulls the sheets to one side and reveals his swollen
legs. Abram is shocked at what he sees.
“Father, we need to get you to a Physician quickly before
infection sets in,” he says. “I will alert the others and we will
leave for Haran at dawn, so try and get some sleep.”
Abram rushes from Terah’s tent, calling out at the top of
his voice, “Lot, Lot where are you?”
Lot runs toward Abram. “What is it?” he asks.
With an urgent tone to his voice, Abram says, “Father
needs a Physician immediately. We must leave for Haran at
dawn. Quick, go and alert everyone in the camp, as they must
be ready to leave by first light.”
Lot nods in agreement and immediately rushes off to alert
everyone. Abram returns to his tent. He enters, to find Sarai
preparing food. Abram sits down on the ground, and looks at
Sarai. “Father is sick!”
“I know!” says Sarai, as she hands Abram a flask of water.
“You know?” asks Abram. “So why have you not tended to
his needs?”
Sarai passes a piece of bread to Abram. “I tried all day,”
she says, “but he said he wanted to be left alone!”
“I see!” says Abram, as he chomps on a piece of seeded
cake. Taking a drink from the water-skin, he continues, “We
need to be ready to leave by dawn. I need to find a Physician
in Haran.”
32
Sarai nods in agreement. “Tell me, my lord,” she says,

“why did you go to Nineveh alone?”
“To visit the market, maybe buy an unusual item!” says
Abram.
Sarai momentarily glances at Abram. “Oh! Did you buy
anything nice?”
Abram eats a piece of unleavened bread. “Not a thing!
I had barely arrived before the Military escorted me from
the city.”
Sarai swings around, looks and sounds surprised. “Oh!”
she says, “and why was that, my lord?”
“Because I let it slip that I am a prophet of God Most
High,” Abram tells her. “They mocked me and threw me out.”
“I see!” says Sarai, bowing before Abram. “Very well, my
lord,” she says. “I shall be resting if you need me. I shall alert
the slave women to dismantle the tent first thing!”
As Sarai settles down to rest for the night, Abram sits and
thinks about the day’s events and worries over his father’s con-
dition. After a few minutes, Lot enters the tent. “I have told
everyone to be ready to leave by dawn,” he says. “So what
happened in Nineveh?”
“Hush!” says Abram and gestures for Lot to move outside.
Abram follows him out. As they sit on the ground, side by
side, a short distance from the tent, Abram unfolds the story
to Lot, telling him every detail with reference to Nineveh, and
including the tale of the blind woman and her mystic warn-
ings. The conversation continues late into the night and Lot
questions how a complete stranger could possibly know any-
thing about their personal lives. Abram reassures Lot that
these individuals have a gift or a curse, whichever way you
look at it. Nevertheless, Lot comments on how creepy the
whole situation is and concludes the conversation, saying,
“I told you the people of Nineveh were peculiar!”
33
4
Entering Haran
As the dawn breaks and the sun rises over the valley, everyone
in the camp is busy dismantling their tents and packing their
stuff to be ready to leave. Abram checks his personal items,
while ten women dismantle his tent. Sarai tends to the camels,
making sure they are fed and watered before they leave.
On her return, Abram calls her over.
“Sarai, where is the artefact, the one shaped like a
pyramid?”
“It is stuffed into a pouch on the camel seat, where you
left it!” she says.
Abram rushes over to the camels and frantically searches
each one, as they all look the same to him. He finds the appro-
priate camel, and searches every pouch attached to the seat.
Relief spreads over his face as he finds his unique item of
treasure. He carefully unravels it and checks that the contents
are intact. His concern is the fact that he took it to Nineveh
and back without awareness to the fact, as the camel was unat-
tended all day. With the artefact intact, Abram wraps it and
replaces it so that it is safely tucked away. He takes hold of the
reins and walks the camel over to Terah’s tent while he calls
for Lot. Lot hears Abram, and meets him near the entrance to
the tent.
“Go and find two young and capable strong men from
within the camp,” Abram says to him. “We need to lift Father
onto the camel without any trauma to his legs.”
34
“Of course!” says Lot and rushes off to find the men.
Abram enters his father’s tent to find Terah sitting on the
ground and holding his right leg, the one which causes the
most pain. Abram approaches and kneels before Terah,
“Father, I have a camel prepared for your journey to Haran;
Lot will bring two men to assist.”
Without an answer, Terah groans because of the pain.
Abram collects his father’s belongings, as Lot enters the tent
with two sturdy men. Abram rises to his feet, still holding
some of Terah’s clothes, and smiles at the men, “Good day to
you, my friends!”
The men nod to gesture the same greeting in return.
Abram instructs the men to carefully lift Terah and carry him
out to the camel, and the men oblige and follow every detail
of Abram’s instructions. As Lot is about to leave the tent,
Abram says, “Lot, drop the camel!”
Lot looks over his shoulder and frowns before he
leaves.
Lot mutters under his breath, “Drop the camel, drop the
camel, I hate the damn things.”
He takes hold of the camel’s reins and tugs in a downward
thrust, “Down beast, get down!”
The animal is stubborn, insubordinate and will not obey.
Frustrated, Lot kicks the animal’s knees, causing a ruckus. In
protest, the animal flings its head to hiss and spit, showering
Lot with saliva. Finally, the animal drops to the ground with a
thud and creates a cloud of dust. A final thrust of the camel’s
head releases a collective mass of sticky goo headed in Lot’s
direction. Hitting him full on in the face, the sticky substance
dangles from his beard before the elasticity weakens and the
gunk falls to the ground. Lot wipes the slime from his face
when the two men appear carrying Terah. They place him
precariously into the camel seat, with difficulty, as the animal
insists on a struggle.
“Keep still you horrible beast!” Lot calls out.
35
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram exits the tent, carrying his father’s clothes and

personal items and approaches the men, “One last favour,” he
asks, “Dismantle father’s tent and pack it on the animal!” The
men immediately follow Abram’s instructions and very quick-
ly have the animal packed. Abram packs his father’s belong-
ings and checks over everything.
“Are you comfortable, Father?” he asks.
“Yes, I am ready!” Terah replies.
Abram slaps the camel, while he makes a strange vocal
sound produced from his throat, an unusual sound which
causes the animal to immediately rise to its feet and remain
motionless.
Lot stares in amazement. “I do not believe my eyes and
ears,” he gasps. “All you did was made a sound to achieve obe-
dience, while I had to fight with the wretched beast!”
“There are those who know and there are those who do
not know!” Abram laughs.
Lot throws his arms into the air, “Unbelievable, he even
speaks camel!”
Impatiently, Terah calls out, “Can we leave now, chil-
dren?”
Abram rushes around the camp, organises everyone
into groups and they finally form a long queue which consist
of men, women, children, animals and baggage. Abram leads
the entourage, followed by a camel which carries Terah and
Abram’s treasured pyramid artefact, followed by a camel
which carries Sarai and her belongings, followed by a camel
which carries Lot’s two daughters, their belongings and Lot’s
chickens, followed by Lot and his wife, on foot. The remain-
der of the assembled people and animals form a trail behind
Lot and his wife.
“We will climb up onto level ground in an area they call
the Assyrian plain,” Abram calls out as they leave. “The road
is straight and long and will lead us directly into Haran. Be
prepared to journey for three weeks!”
36
Abram walks and approaches the slight incline toward the

plain and the assembled crowds follow his lead.
k
They have travelled for almost one full day and it now creeps
toward dusk. Lot’s wife feels the strain and tugs on Lot’s coat.
“Lot! My feet are burning. Why did I have to walk?”
Lot looks at his wife as she limps, “Terah rides Sarai’s camel!”
“Well, Sarai should walk, not I?” says Lot’s wife.
Lot ignores her comment and continues to walk. She
nudges Lot and persists, “Abram knows not when to let up
and his persistence is gruelling!”
“Hush, woman!” says Lot.
Silence prevails between Lot and his wife for the remain-
der of the day. The dusk descends and settles in and by the
time Abram calls a halt to the assembly, many of them have
blistered and sore feet. They all pitch tent for the night.
The next morning, Lot instructs his daughters to walk
while his wife takes the camel. After three weeks, they finally
reach the outskirts of Haran. With the city in their sights, the
people become cheerful and their spirits rise. Abram chooses
an area to settle not far from the city gates. The area chosen
is appropriate for a nomadic settlement, as it is well planted
with trees and foliage, and a sustainable water supply in the
city is within their reach. They all pitch tent and settle.
Night closes in and the tribal settlement is quiet except
for the occasional grunt from the camels tethered to a tree.
Abram sits up most of the night in Terah’s tent, watching his
father as he sleeps. Eventually, Abram nods off to sleep while
he sits upright; his head drops forward almost between his
knees and he snores.
k
Morning: Abram wakes with a jolt, as he almost falls over. He
stretches, and winces over his aching back as a result of cramp.
37
PAUL JUSTICE
Terah is lying on his side, with his back to Abram, as he con-

tinues to sleep. Abram rises to his feet and after a final stretch,
he exits the tent and stands under the shade of a tree, while he
stares at the city gates a short distance away. After he contem-
plates his options, he turns and scurries over to Lot’s tent. As
he enters, he sees the family sleep. Spread across a bed of ani-
mal furs, and barely covered, are Lot’s wife, daughters and two
slave women, with Lot buried somewhere in the middle.
“Lot, wake up!” Abram whispers.
After several attempts, Lot opens his eyes and looks at
Abram, who stares wide-eyed.
“What is it?” Lot whispers.
Abram gestures with both hands, suggesting that Lot
should rise.
“Come!” Abram whispers. “We need to enter Haran. We
must find a Physician.”
Lot removes his wife’s arm that is wrapped around him,
then the slave woman’s leg that is laid across him and sits up.
He rubs his eyes, “Wait outside, I will be out shortly!”
Abram bows, gesturing with the tips of his fingers placed
against his forehead before he leaves the tent. Lot rises and
hurries to get dressed, but creates some noise while doing so.
As he is about to leave, he hears his wife’s voice, “Be careful in
Haran!”
Lot looks over his shoulder and sees his wife roll over; she
drags the thin cotton sheet off of the slave woman and leaves
her exposed. Lot refrains from saying a word and exits the
tent. Abram paces to and fro with impatience, as Lot walks
toward him.
“About time!” says Abram.
“What if Haran has no Physician?” Lot asks. “What are
you going to do?”
Abram frowns at Lot. “Every city has a Physician, come!”
Abram and Lot walk toward the city gates, side-by-side,
and they hold conversation along the way.
38
“Lot, why are there so many women in your tent?” Abram

enquires.
In a casual manner, Lot replies, “It was very cold last
night, and I needed the extra body heat.”
“Oh really!” says Abram.
As they reach the city gates, Abram is distraught to find
them securely locked. Lot suggests that they sit and wait until
the city attendants arrive. Abram has no option but to agree.
They sit together on the ground, with their backs to the gates,
and they wait. Abram is vexed over the delay. He sits with his
head down and thinks for a few moments. “I am worried
about Father. His legs are very poorly. What if he ends up a
cripple?”
Lot picks up a stone and throws it to hit another a
short distance away. “Stop worrying, Father will be fine!” he
says.
The sound of lumber scrapes against the gates and this
alerts Abram and Lot. They scramble to their feet, brushing
dirt from their clothes. The gates open inwardly, toward the
city. Two city attendants stand before them; they wear long
cloaks and elaborate headdresses. Abram notices a symbol
carved into their headbands and positioned just above their
foreheads: it is the symbol of the moon God, Sin.
“Who are you, what is your business here?” one of the
men asks, after a moment of silence.
“I am Abram and this is my nephew Lot,” Abram answers.
“We are nomads, my lords, and are simply passing through.
Only my father has become sick and we are seeking a Physician
in Haran!”
“You have many tents and livestock,” says one of the
guards, as he looks over Abram’s shoulder. “Without the
King’s permission, you will have to move on.”
“We are not poor, my lords,” Abram pleads. “I am more
than willing to reward the King for temporary residency on
this land.”
39
PAUL JUSTICE
“It is not for us to make a decision,” the attendant says.

“Come! We will escort you to the King.”
Abram and Lot follow the attendants into the city
and through the streets of Haran. En route to the King’s
Palace, Abram notices peculiar dome shaped houses,
covered in thick mud which has clearly baked in the midday
sun, the likes of which he has never seen before. As they enter
the Palace Gardens, a large body of water runs almost the
length of the city, which is rectangular in symmetry. Abram
notices the fish swim near the surface; they are very pale
with silver gills. As they reach the steps of the Palace, Abram
looks up at the arched doorway, with arc windows on either
side. The architecture of the entire city excels in its curving
techniques.
As they enter the Palace, Abram and Lot become motion-
less, as though gripped by a spirit which prevents their access.
They gaze at the walls, awestruck as they look upon elaborate
artwork glazed over with a transparent veneer. Crafted white
and silver-gilled fish decorate the Palace, which shimmers
against the flicker of torchlight, giving the illusion of motion.
The sheen spreads across the floor before their feet and each
tile is adorned with a blue disc which represents the full moon,
and almost glows from the lacquered surface. Lot looks up to
behold the face of the moon God Sin, artistically etched onto
a pale marble ceiling. The Palace Guards wait at the foot of
steps which lead to the King’s Chambers, and they watch
Abram and Lot as they gaze up at the ceiling. One of the
attendants calls out to capture their attention, “This way, if
you wish to see the King!” Abram and Lot walk toward the
attendants and follow them up steps which ascend toward the
King’s throne.
The King is seated and is attended by beautiful maidser-
vants when they enter his presence. The guards kneel before
the King, then rise to speak. One of the attendants says, “My
lord, we found these two drifters at the gates. They have
40
pitched tents among the trees and bring with them peoples
and livestock. They wish to address you concerning this,
my lord!”
The King snaps his fingers and waves his hands, dismiss-
ing the maidservants. Looking at Abram and Lot, he says
“Come closer, so I may see you more clearly!”
The guards stand aside as the drifters move closer to the
King. Abram and Lot both bow and the King asks, “Your
names?”
Abram speaks. “I am Abram and this is my nephew Lot,
my lord.”
The King looks at Abram momentarily. “My concern is
this,” he says. “You have wandered into my domain and have
pitched tents among my trees and in my gardens, without my
permission.”
“My father is sick,” Abram pleads, “and he is in urgent
need of assistance. We had to settle among the trees to be
close to the city, my lord!”
The King feels that Abram is stubborn. “Let me explain,”
the King begins, “for those who have selective hearing. The
gardens, now littered with your tents, peoples and animals, are
manmade. I had them planted by my servants, who work daily
to nurture them. This is now being interrupted by you. Today,
you must leave. You and your tribe, animals, tents – all of it –
must be gone before sundown.”
Abram responds, with urgency, “My father is very ill, my
lord. May we move our tents into the city?”
“No!” the King swiftly replies. He sits and thinks momen-
tarily. He contemplates Abram’s options and looks at Abram.
“Let me explain how things work here. The botanical gardens
are used to grow stobrum trees that produce odoriferous gum.
From the gum, we produce a clear serum that allows me to
have this beautiful glazed Palace you now stand in. The wood
from the trees is very flexible, and this allows us to build bee-
hive houses for the poor, known as “coolers.” Thus, the entire
41
PAUL JUSTICE
system is very productive and this production you have

abruptly stopped!”
“Excuse me, my lord,” Lot speaks up. “Why are they
called coolers?”
“The gum-wood retains its moisture when overlaid with
clay,” the King replies. “This keeps the inside of the building
cool!”
“Fascinating!” says Lot.
The King turns his attention to Abram. “Here is my pro-
posal,” he says. “We house your people in coolers, allow
enough land for livestock. You will pay five hundred gold
ashrafi for each cooler every lunar cycle that corresponds with
the full moon. This is on condition that your tents are dis-
mantled before sundown today. Do we have an agreement?”
Abram bows before the King. “Yes, my lord,” he says,
“just as you say. Only, may I have assistance for my father?”
The King rises to his feet. “Go and dismantle tents,” he
says. “I will send a Physician!”
Abram and Lot honour the King. They hurry toward the
settlement, excited over their new proposition. On arrival,
they find everyone at their work as they take care of daily
chores.
“Stop everything!” shouts Abram.
Sarai rushes from her tent and approaches Abram. “What
is it, my lord?” she cries.
Excitedly, Abram says, “The King has granted us residen-
cy; hurry, and get packed. We are moving!”
Sarai rushes off, calls all the women folk together and
instructs them to dismantle tents. Abram enters his father’s
tent to check on Terah’s condition. Terah sits up and rests, as
Abram approaches.
“We are moving, Father!” says Abram. “We are entering
Haran to settle in houses!”
Terah smiles for the first time in weeks. “That is wonder-
ful news,” he says. “This nomadic existence is killing me!”
42
“The Physician is here!” cries Lot, as he enters the tent.

“Good, show him in!” says Abram.
The Physician kneels at Terah’s feet and thoroughly
inspects his legs, “How long have they been like this?”
“Long time, since we left Ur!” says Terah.
The Physician gently presses on the old man’s legs, starts
at the ankles and works up. When he presses the upper thigh,
Terah cries out in pain. The Physician stops and looks at
Terah. “You may have a slight fracture of the thigh bone,
though not a clean break. Have you fallen recently?”
“When leaving Ur, I stumbled over some rocks. The pain
increased day after day.”
“Father, why did you not tell me?” retorts Abram.
Terah takes hold of Abram’s hand. “Relax, my son,” he
says. “You are a busy man with enough to tend to without
adding my problems.”
Abram sits and shakes his head and the Physician
says, “His legs must be individually bound in cloth, from
his ankles to his upper thigh, so that he cannot bend his
legs. He must keep them bound in this way for about eight
weeks.”
“Go fetch two slaves,” Abram calls to Lot, “and bring the
best Egyptian cotton, and plenty of it.”
Lot leaves the tent without question. The Physician
reaches into his cloak and produces a small bag made from
hide. He opens it and tips what look like crystals into the palm
of his hand. He offers them to Terah.
“These are opium crystals,” he tells Terah. “They are rel-
atively harmless in small doses and they will lessen the pain in
your legs.”
He replaces the crystals, and hands the bag to Terah, who
takes it with enthusiasm. The Physician rises to his feet and
says to Abram, “Your father will be comfortable now; I reside
in the Palace if you need anything!” Abram shakes his hand
and escorts him from the tent.
43
PAUL JUSTICE
Outside the tent, Abram sees Lot approach with plenty of

linen and two slave-girls. He wishes the Physician “Good
day!” and sends him on his way.
“Give father one or two opium crystals with a drink of
water,” he tells Lot, “and have the girls bind his legs tight!”
“Opium crystals?” asks Lot.
Abram says, “Father has them in a small pouch!”
Lot takes the slave-girls into Terah’s tent. Time presses on
and Abram tours the settlement, rousing everyone to be ready
to enter Haran. The three camels are packed and ready to
leave; people are lined up at the city gates, awaiting permis-
sion to enter. Abram instructs two capable men to carry his
father; the slaves have bound Terah’s legs.
In the late afternoon, they all begin to enter Haran, single
file and in an orderly fashion. The procession is relatively
quiet, with the most noise from Terah as he sings; the opium
has more than numbed his pain. Abram and Lot are up front
as they lead the people. As they listen to Terah’s tuneless
rhythms, Abram says to Lot, “How much opium did you give
father?”
“I gave him five crystals!” Lot says, and laughs.
“Five?” says Abram. “I said one or two; no wonder he
sings!”
People merge from their homes and are curious as they
watch the train of men, women, children and animals as they
continue through the city in an orderly fashion. Two Palace
Guards stand and wait near a collective group of dome style
houses, with orders from the King to house the people in
batches of ten. The entourage approaches the guards and
Abram calls them to a halt. The attendants greet Abram.
“We have selected ten bee-hive style houses,” one of them
says, “which will provide adequate homes for all!” The guard
points to where the houses are situated. “The King suggests
ten family members for each dome. Make the appropriate
arrangements before sundown!”
44
Abram gestures his approval and the guards leave. He

turns to the people, and Abram calls out in a loud voice, “All
family heads congregate around me for further instructions!”
One by one, various men from the group begin to filter
through and gather around Abram, and this includes Lot.
Abram faces the men and gives clear instructions. “Each one
of you, choose a house for yourselves and your family. Each
family will accommodate slaves to make up the numbers. Go
and choose your home!” As the men disperse and advance
upon the community, Abram calls out, “Not you, Lot, you are
in my household!”
Lot’s shoulders droop; he appears visibly disappointed. He
looked forward to choosing his very own cooler. As the men
make their choices, all the people begin to arrange themselves
into groups and the slaves are allocated to various homes.
Abram has chosen the dome with the most land attached to
accommodate both his and Lot’s livestock. As the dust settles
over Haran, all the people are settled into their homes and
Abram feels that this is cause for celebration.
“Bring out the wine and let us rejoice!” he says to Lot. Lot
searches among the skins, looking for any remnants of wine
that may have been carried over from Akkad. He finds a skin
swollen and heavy, and notices the seal is unbroken and he
rejoices; he thinks that this must be wine. He hurries to where
Abram sits.
“Look, Abram, this must be wine as it is sealed!”
Abram takes the flask and breaks the seal. He removes the
top, and places his nostrils over the lip of the hide and sniffs.
Abram’s face contorts.
“Potent, very potent, whatever it is?”
“Take a sip!” says Lot.
Abram hands the flask to Lot. “You, you take a sip!” he dares.
Lot takes the skin and after a prolonged drink, he
says, “This is good!” He takes another drink. “Barley spirit,
I think?” He takes another drink, “And enough for all!”
45
PAUL JUSTICE
“Not at this rate!” says Abram. “Pass the skin around, only
none for father as his head remains in the clouds from the
opium!”
Terah perks up. “I will make my own decisions as to what
I consume, and in fact, I am going to sing about it!”
“Please. No!” says Abram, while he blocks his ears with
both hands.
Lot passes the skin to his wife, who takes a drink and
almost chokes. His daughters both take a drink and appear to
like it. Three slaves each take a drink and react enthusiastical-
ly over its potency. Sarai takes the flask and very calmly takes
a drink, without a fluster. She hands the flask to Abram, who
now drinks without hesitation and, bypassing Terah, he
hands the skin back to Lot. Terah feels left out and sings a flat
melody, with repetitive lyrics.
“I shall drink and be merry, for that is my wish and if
Abram refuses he might feel my fist.”
As the flask repeats its cycle, handed from one to another.
Abram hears a young female voice drift in from outside the
door. “Lord Abram, are you there?”
Abram rises to his feet and exits the dome. Standing out-
side the doorway, he see a beautiful young woman. “Who are
you, my child?” says Abram.
“I am Alicia, my lord, one of the slaves you purchased in
Akkad!”
Abram fails to remember or recognise the woman.
“I remember buying slaves…” he says.
The woman looks into Abram’s eyes. “They left me here
all alone,” she says, “and as the night fell, I became afraid!”
“They?” says Abram.
“Yes, my lord! The slaves, they were allocated to houses
and I was left alone to wander the city.”
Concerned over the woman, Abram says, “Then you must
reside as a member of my household. Come! I will introduce
you to Lot’s daughters.” Abram takes the young woman inside
46
and the merry-making continues late into the evening. Terah’s

singing has become infectious and all have joined in, although
the lyrics have changed. Singing praises to God for blessing
them in Haran brings a conclusion to a very fruitful day.
k
Morning: Abram rises first and the others remain asleep; they
nurse hangovers. A beautiful day fills him with vigour, as he is
keen to explore the city and meet the locals. He gathers a few
personal items, then leaves the dome and wanders the streets
of Haran, stopping occasionally to chat with passersby. He
remembers the lake in the Palace Gardens and decides to pay
a visit, as it intrigued him the first time. On arrival, he sees a
man who stands by the water’s edge; he appears to mutter
silently while he stares into the water.
“Good day, my friend!” Abram says, as he approaches.
The man appears not to have heard and continues to
mumble in silence.
“Good day!” Abram says again, moving closer.
The man stops his silent chant and looks at Abram; he
does not speak.
Abram looks at the fish as they swim near the surface.
“Unusual fish…” he says.
The man looks at Abram again, then looks at the water.
“Yes, it’s a unique breed and very sacred!”
Abram frowns, then looks again into the water. He quick-
ly glances at the man and asks, “Why are the fish considered
to be sacred?”
The man looks at Abram. “You are a stranger here, as
everyone in this town knows about the sacred fish.”
“I arrived yesterday!” says Abram. “We are many and the
King has granted our citizenship!”
“I see!” says the man. They both continue to stare into the
lake, with a few moments of silence. The man speaks again.
“The fish are considered sacred because they represent the
47
PAUL JUSTICE
spirits of our ancestry. The locals call them ‘Gava-dag,’ mean-

ing ghost-fish!”
Abram looks at the man. “Spirits?” he asks.
“Yes! We come here to pray!” says the man. He looks
at Abram, “I lost a son in battle almost a year ago; a vicious
warrior from Babylon closed his eyes forever. I come here
each day for solace and to connect with my son’s spirit. I love
him dearly!”
Abram almost musters a tear while he listens to the man’s
tale. “I feel for you, my friend!”
Both stand and gaze over the surface of the waters as a few
moments of silence pass by.
A single tear trickles over the man’s cheek and falls gently,
then dissolves into his beard. Aware of the man’s sadness,
Abram puts his hand consolingly onto the man’s shoulder.
“Maybe it is time for you to let go, my friend!” he says softly.
The man ignores his advice, but Abram continues, “I lost a
brother in the city of Ur not long ago, struck down by the
sword as the Military Commander made an attempt on my
father’s life. I did not even have time to bury him, as we had
to flee the city that night.”
The man turns to face Abram. “And you miss him?”
he asks.
“Of course!” says Abram.
Abram peers into the man’s eyes, while he places both
hands on his shoulders. “Listen!” he says, “As painful as it is,
we need to let go and move on!”
The man lowers his head. With momentary silence, he
looks at Abram. “My son will live in my memory for the rest
of my life, as my heart yearns for him every waking moment.
Only in dreams do we walk side by side!”
Abram lowers his arms, which fall to his side as he slowly
backs away and he observes the man’s sadness for one final
moment. “Good day to you, my friend, may your life be pros-
perous!” Abram turns and leaves the Palace Gardens.
48
On arrival in the community, Abram sees that people are

busy; they mill around and tend to animals and other daily
tasks. A man sits in the doorway of his new home, carving a
piece of wood into a toy for one of his children. Abram notices
and approaches the man.
“Good day!” Abram says. “Can you tell me about Alicia?
Do you know her?”
The man looks up. “Yes, my lord,” he says, “the Assyrian
slave-girl!”
“She came to me late last night, homeless!” Abram says.
“Why had no one taken her in?”
The man rises to his feet. “My lord, Abram!” he says. “No
one would take her in as she is a thief!”
“Thief?” says Abram.
“Yes my lord! She searches the personal belongings of
others and when she finds anything of value, she sells it. This
is how we caught her!” says the man.
An image of the artefact immediately flashes into Abram’s
mind. He stands and strokes his beard while he thinks.
“Thank you for informing me!” he says. After a few moments,
he slowly walks away.
“Do not be taken in by her beauty, my lord, it is just a
veneer!” the man calls after him. Abram continues to walk,
deep in thought, and he does not acknowledge the man’s final
comment.
As Abram enters the cooler, Sarai and Lot’s wife prepare
to bake bread. Abram asks, “Where is Alicia?”
“Who?” asks Sarai.
“The young woman I took in last night,” says Abram.
Sarai points out back. “She is outside milking the goats!”
Abram swiftly exits and approaches the animal enclosure,
where he sees Alicia milking a goat. He approaches her.
“Alicia! I took you in over my concern for you, now I am hear-
ing tales concerning you?”
“Tales, my lord?” she says, as she pulls on udders.
49
PAUL JUSTICE
“Yes,” Abram says. “Tales that concern you having your

hands among other’s belongings?”
Alicia stops work and rises to her feet. She faces Abram.
“Is it wise to listen to tales, my lord, as I belong to you, do
I not? Is my lord suggesting that I may steal from him?”
Abram looks Alicia in the eye. “Did I call you a thief?” he
asks.
Alicia lowers her head, which suggests guilt and Abram
walks away. As soon as her master is out of sight, Alicia picks
up the container of milk and smashes it on the ground,
screaming during her fit of rage. As Abram enters the dome,
Sarai leaves on her way to collect the goat’s milk. Abram stops
Sarai. “Keep your eye on Alicia, she has nimble fingers!” he
says.
Sarai frowns and continues on her way to collect the milk.
On arrival at the animal enclosure, Sarai sees Alicia who
stands in a pool of milk, which soaks into the ground at her
feet. Sarai stops.
“What happened?”
Alicia turns her hands to the sides, which face palms up.
“It slipped!” she says, in a cheeky tone.
Sarai rolls her eyes and looks. “Stupid girl!” she says and
hurries back to the cooler.
k
As the months pass by, the tribe of nomads becomes very set-
tled in Haran. Abram becomes very popular among the
natives and continues to tell his story about his quest and his
search for paradise in the land of promise. Many of the locals
are intrigued by what they hear and join ranks with Abram’s
tribe; this includes the man who yearns for his son lost in bat-
tle. Terah’s legs have healed and he is back on his feet, contin-
ually under everyone else’s feet as he is too old to partake in
most of the daily events. Lot has lost interest in his chickens
and has taken to the art of making wine. The flat plain of
50
Haran, with its unique, rocky and almost dry soil, is perfect
for growing the vine. Lot has purchased a piece of land for
this purpose and considers himself an expert in his field. Lot’s
wife and daughters spend their days making wine skins,
amongst other daily chores, and the family business is making
Lot wealthy.
Five years pass and the people who were once drifters are
now settled. Abram rarely mentions the Promised Land and
his thoughts toward his search for paradise have completely
left his mind. Everyone is happy in hospitable Haran.
Until one night, God approaches Abram in a dream
and reminds him of his responsibilities, and instructs him to
move on.
51
5
Leaving Haran
Abram awakes, lathered in sweat, with the dream still fresh in

his mind. Looking at his surroundings, he sees it is still dark
and very early in the morning. Searching the cooler, he finds
a water-skin and washes his face and hands over a bowl. He
then looks for Terah among the people who sleep. Finding
him, Abram wakes his father, “Father! Wake up. A dream has
disturbed me!”
Terah does not open his eyes. “Just a nightmare, go back
to sleep!” he says.
“No, father, listen. God Most High approached me in my
dream,” says Abram.
Terah opens his eyes and sits up. “You heard God’s voice?”
he asks.
“Yes!” says Abram.
Terah rubs his eyes. “We have heard nothing for more
than five years,” he says, “and now we are settled. He...What
did the voice say?”
Abram takes hold of Terah’s hand and peers into his
father’s eyes. “The voice said that I must leave my father’s
house and continue the search for paradise in the land of
Canaan, and that He will show me the way!”
Terah moves his eyes from Abram’s stare. “Then you must
obey, but not me!” he says, and thinks for a moment.
Abram briefly hugs his father, and looks him in the eye.
“Father,” he says, “this is the chance of a lifetime. Think about
52
it! God is leading us to paradise, to prosper in a glorious land

similar to the garden they call Eden.”
Terah smiles and very gently squeezes Abram’s hand.
“Not for me. I am too old and too tired, besides I have
enjoyed a good life with happy times and sad. Listen! I have
lost two sons whom I think about daily, and now I am losing
you. All I want is to rest and remain settled. Abram, I love you
and you will always reside in my heart, but one thing I do
understand. Elohim has chosen you to lead the people and
you must follow His guidance. Only you must promise me
one thing!”
“What?” asks Abram.
A short distance away, Sarai is lying on her side and pre-
tends to be asleep. In secret, she listens to every word of the
conversation between Terah and Abram.
Terah speaks to Abram. “Come outside, where we can talk
in private.”
Unaware that Sarai listens, Terah and Abram move out-
side to continue the conversation. Abram is quick to take up
the point about a promise. “Tell me about the promise,” he
requests of Terah.
Terah places both hands on Abram’s shoulders and peers
into his eyes. “Forget about the Egyptians,” he tells Abram.
“They are dangerous people and steeped in superstitions.
Why incite God’s wrath by going to Egypt? Promise me that
you will not go to Egypt!”
Abram lowers his head and remains silent. He
looks at Terah. “Father, I cannot make a promise only to
break it!”
Terah loosens his grip on Abram’s shoulders and takes a
few steps back. “That pyramid, that ridiculous artefact,” he
says. “Is that what this is all about? I say burn it!”
Abram’s eyes widen as he raises his voice slightly.
“Father,” he chastises, “do you realise what you are saying?
A dynasty of Pharaohs may be dependent upon this.”
53
PAUL JUSTICE
“Nonsense!” shouts Terah. “This is all about wealth;

you are chasing riches and why? Elohim are leading you into
paradise, why do you insist on gathering riches?”
At that moment, Sarai appears in the doorway of the
house. “I heard raised voices,” she says. “Is something wrong?”
“It is nothing!” says Abram, in an abrupt attempt to brush
her aside. Sarai glares at Abram with a look of disapproval,
then turns and disappears inside the dome.
A few moments of silence prevail, and Abram looks at
Terah. “Let us discuss this another time when we are not so
tired,” he says. “Look! The dawn is almost upon us.”
Terah looks over the horizon, catches a glimpse of sun-
light which just peeks. “I suggest you gather the people and
tell them your plans,” he says. “I will be inside if you need
me.” Terah walks away from Abram’s presence.
k
Late morning: The people have been informed that an
important meeting is to be held in the town square at midday.
They organise their families into groups, the people surge in
droves toward the centre of town, near the Palace Gardens.
Abram’s followers are joined by almost every resident in
Haran; they all stream toward the city square and curious to
hear the news. The time has arrived and two men assist
Abram to climb as he positions himself on top of a dome; this
gives him elevation over the masses. The rumble of human
voices deafens as they congregate around Abram. From his
elevated position, Abram can see that almost everyone is pres-
ent. As the sun soars intensely, high above his head, he feels
the need to proceed quickly.
He raises his arms above his head and calls for silence.
The sound of human voices recedes to murmurs before
silence prevails. Abram lowers his arms, but remains silent,
like any seasoned orator before he speaks, and the masses gaze
up at him in anticipation of his words. The man who lost his
54
son in battle is present in the crowd. In a loud and clear voice,

Abram addresses the people:
“The creator of heaven and earth and the only true God,”
he begins, “spoke to me last night in a dream.” Murmurs rip-
ple throughout the assembly and Abram continues. “Elohim
has promised to guide me into a land that gleams with beauty
and exuberant in its foliage, with trees that issue forth life
giving substance as in the garden of God, the garden they call
Eden.”
Whispers continue among the congregated people, and
one man calls out to Abram, “Where is this paradise you
speak of?”
Abram replies, “Paradise lies in the valley of Siddim, in
the southern regions!”
Another man calls out, “How can we be sure this paradise
even exists?”
“Please!” Abram requests, “No more questions. Not now,
as time is pressing!” Mutters continue throughout the assem-
bly. Abram presses on.
“For those of you who wish to follow me into paradise,”
he begins again, “be packed and ready to leave by dawn
tomorrow. Anyone who wishes to stay in Haran may do so,
with my blessing!” After Abram finishes his speech, the
people begin to disperse and once again the air is filled with
people’s voices. Two men assist Abram down off the roof,
and immediately some individuals flock toward him with
questions.
k
Late afternoon: Abram sits in his beehive home and relaxes,
while Sarai prepares a meal, assisted by Lot’s wife and
daughters.
“Where is Lot?” asks Abram.
Without turning a hair, Lot’s wife says, “Where he spends
all of his days, my lord – in his vineyard!”
55
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram remains silent. Sarai kneads the bread and ques-

tions, “When were you going to tell me about your dream,
my lord?”
Abram looks at Sarai as she continues to knead the bread.
“Why do you always insist on being the first to know?”
Instantly, she swings around, her hands covered in flour,
and she snaps, “Because I am your wife!”
Abram looks down at his feet and remains silent, while
Sarai stares at him for a while. She turns, then continues to
knead the bread.
A loud knock on the door alerts Abram, who calls out,
“You may enter!”
Two Palace Officials enter the room and look around at
everyone present, “We need to address the one called Abram!”
“Yes, that is I!” says Abram.
One of the Officials addresses Abram, “The King would
like to see you in his quarters!”
Abram replies, “We were about to eat a meal, would you
care to join us?”
The Official responds swiftly, “Now! The King will see
you at once!”
“As you wish!” says Abram and rises to his feet.
They are about to leave, when Sarai says, “What is this
about, my lords?”
Before they leave, one of the Officials looks at Sarai,
“Nothing that concerns you, enjoy your meal!”
The Officials leave and escort Abram to the Palace. Sarai
continues to prepare the meal and passively says to Lot’s wife,
“How do you cope with being kept out of the picture?”
“What picture?” says Lot’s wife “I was present at the
assembly today, what more do you need to know?”
“Well, you know, inside information!” Sarai explains.
“I do not share your enthusiasm for insight,” says Lot’s
wife. “Besides, would you like to carry Abram’s responsibili-
ties?”
56
“I do!” snaps Sarai. Without another word, they both con-

tinue to prepare the meal and Lot’s daughters remain as silent
witnesses.
Abram arrives at the Palace escorted by the two Officials.
They climb the familiar steps which lead to the King’s quar-
ters. Abram looks up to see the King seated on his throne – his
facial expression is very serious. Abram approaches the
throne, then kneels before the King. The Court Officials
stand aside and Abram rises to his feet. The King looks at
Abram and, in extreme annoyance, demands, “What is this
I hear about paradise in the valley of Siddim?”
Abram responds, “Yes, my lord, a very fertile land. My
God has told me to go there, so I intend to leave tomorrow
and search for this land.”
“Oh really!” says the King. The King rises to his feet and
steps down from his throne to stand face to face with Abram.
Leaning forward, he whispers in Abram’s ear, “Who is this God
who is about to disrupt my Kingdom?” The King takes a step
back, while he retains eye contact with Abram.
“Our ancestors called Him Elohim, Creator of Heaven
and Earth, my lord,” Abram explains.
The King swiftly retorts, “And is your God prepared to
compensate me for my loss?”
“What do you mean, my lord?” Abram asks, frowning.
Abram’s response incites the King’s anger, causing the
King to raise his voice. “Do not play innocent with me,
Abram,” he shouts. “I heard about your speech today and you
have everyone in Haran talking about ‘life giving trees.’
Almost everyone is prepared to leave and follow you.”
Abram responds, “Come with us, my lord!”
The King laughs at such a ridiculous comment, “Ha, we
have a jester in our midst!” he says sarcastically. The King
walks around the court in a slow pace. Approaching one of the
arched windows, he stands and looks out over Haran as
though to think. A few moments pass, then the King turns to
57
PAUL JUSTICE
look at Abram. “Think about it Abram,” he says. “Think

about my loss. In just one day, I am about to lose nearly all of
my subjects; this will create a ghost town overnight and all
because of you, the teller of tales. Just think for a moment
about the extent of my loss. The loss of revenue and dome tax,
the loss of workers and slaves, and even the women in my
harem are keen to leave! So tell me, Abram, what amount of
compensation can equal that?”
Abram responds enthusiastically, “My lord, I can guaran-
tee it. God will reward you as much as one hundred fold. You
will be unable to build houses quickly enough to house your
new subjects!”
The King erupts in spontaneous laughter, which soon
becomes infectious as the Court Officials begin to laugh; even
Abram managers an enthusiastic grin. The laughter subsides
and the King walks over to Abram, who still grins. The King
sits on his throne, “Your voice has the distinct ring of a char-
latan. Do you really expect me to trust a God that I do not
know?” Abram remains silent.
The King looks at Abram, waiting for an answer.
Receiving none, he speaks again, “Your silence leaves me no
choice but to have you pay the compensation!”
Abram looks wide-eyed and shocked at the King. “How is
this possible, my lord?”
The King responds quickly, “Exactly! How do I evaluate
this predicament you have caused?”
One of the Court Officials listens intently and steps for-
ward to address the King. “My lord,” he says, “may I make a
suggestion?”
“Speak!” says the King.
“In cases of battle it is customary to hand over a tenth of
the spoil!” the Official says.
“And your point is?” asks the King.
The Official replies, “As each resident in Haran pays
tax, charge Abram a tenth for each individual’s taxable value
58
covering a period of one year; this will buy you enough time
to repopulate the city, my lord!”
The King mulls it over in his mind, “Very well! Have the
treasurer check the register for every individual in Haran and
have him work out a cost in total, calculate a tenth of the total
and bring me a figure!”
“Yes, my lord!” says the Official and he leaves im-
mediately.
“Before you leave in the morning,” the King says to
Abram, “come to the Palace and meet with the treasurer, who
will issue you with a statement of compensation to be paid to
the King’s treasury. If you cannot meet the figure as present-
ed in the statement, the gates will remain locked and no one
may leave! Understood?”
“Yes my lord!” says Abram.
“Then you may leave!” says the King. Abram bows before
the King and turns to exit the Courtroom.
On arrival back in the community, Abram sees that
the people have already begun to prepare for their journey.
He rushes past them, and he hurries toward Terah’s house. He
enters, and he finds everyone is prepared to leave.
“We have until morning!” says Abram, as he stands in the
doorway and looks at everyone.
“Abram!” cries Sarai, as she runs to greet him. She leads
him by the hand. “Come and sit, you must eat!” Abram sits
upon a pile of animal furs while Sarai serves him with bread
and lamb cooked in the kiln, accompanied by a flask of Lot’s
homemade wine. Abram is starved and weak and digs into his
meal with keen enthusiasm.
At almost dusk, Lot arrives home from the vineyard, fol-
lowed by his two daughters. After he washes his hands in a
bowl, Lot sits opposite Abram and Sarai serves him a similar
meal. Lot chews the tender lamb, swallows and looks at
Abram. “I heard you were taken before the King. What was
his request?”
59
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram finishes a drink from the wineskin. “This wine of

yours is good!” he says, wiping his mouth on his sleeve. “The
King, you ask? He wants compensation!”
“Compensation?” repeats Lot.
Sarai serves a bowl of olives and bitter greens, then asks,
“Why is the King asking for compensation; for what reason?”
Abram looks up at Sarai. “Because almost everyone in
Haran is leaving with us tomorrow, the King is losing tax
income,” he explains.
Lot immediately laughs out loud, while he picks the
remainder of the lamb from the bone.
“This is no laughing matter!” says Sarai to Lot, with a ring
of concern in her voice.
Lot, still grinning, says to Abram, “Should we pay him or
just leave?” and continues to laugh.
Annoyed, Sarai says, “Lot, you are intolerable!” and walks
away angrily.
Abram takes a handful of olives from the bowl. “The King
has ordered the treasurer to calculate a sum which we must
pay, or the gates remain locked, preventing our departure.”
Terah now approaches Abram. “I have been sitting listen-
ing to this conversation,” he says. “What is the sum of the
penalty?”
Abram looks up at Terah. “Unknown! The treasurer is
working it out and I must meet him in the morning before we
attempt to leave.”
Lot jumps to his feet and searches among his belongings;
he finds a leather pouch which bursts with gold ashrafi. He
places the bag before Abram and says, “Give him this, and we
will be clear of the gates before he has time to count it!”
Abram laughs. “These people are not fools, Lot, and they
will retain us until they have counted every last coin.”
A silence prevails throughout the room and the mood
is sombre. Abram sits with his head down, digests his food
and thinks long and hard over the situation, when a flash of
60
inspiration suddenly occurs to him. He looks up and says to

everyone present, “I know the answer!” Everyone in the room
stares at Abram wide eyed. In keen anticipation, they all wait
to hear his revelation. “All of this was God’s idea,” Abram
continues, “and it was God who told me to leave Haran!”
“You have lost me Abram, what do you mean?” Lot says,
frowning.
“Think about it, Lot!” says Abram, “It is God’s will that
we leave Haran, and if God wills something, it happens,
regardless of what we do!”
Lot sits and thinks. A subtle smile crawls across his face.
He looks at Abram. “If you are right, then it is impossible for
this plan to fail, right?”
“Exactly!” says Abram. “Elohim will deal with the King,
and this is in God’s hands, not mine!”
“You are confident, I will give you that!” says Terah.
As night falls and the room darkens, Sarai and Lot’s wife
remove the door from the kiln; this allows heat to escape and
the dying embers cause the room to glow.
“Good idea!” says Abram and suggests that everyone
get some rest, as they all need to rise early. The people
settle down and Lot fluffs up a pile of cloth, and before he
rests his head he calls out, “I still fail to see how we will come
up with the money!” His rhetorical question precedes his
head, which hits the pile of soft fabric, and everyone ignores
his comment.
Throughout the night, Abram is restless; he tosses and
turns, which keeps Sarai awake as she lies with her back to
him. The loud snores ascending from Terah and Lot are
almost synchronized and it irritates Abram as he struggles to
sleep. A little more time passes and Abram lies with his back
to Sarai, facing the door to the dome. He watches as the
orange glow from the kiln fades away. The room is dark and
the snores have temporarily subsided. Abram’s eyelids become
heavy and begin to droop, as drowsiness overshadows him.
61
PAUL JUSTICE
Soft breathing is the only sound in the room, when Abram

hears a calm voice whisper in his ear, “Abram, give the King
what he is entitled and leave Haran!”
Abram’s eyes shoot open, as he thinks, Am I dreaming? He
turns onto his other side and peers over Sarai’s shoulder. “Did
you speak Sarai?”
She remains silent and sleeps. Abram gently shakes her,
then whispers, “Sarai, did you speak?” She remains asleep.
Lying on his back, Abram stares up into the pitch black
and very gently whispers, “Elohim, is it your voice I hear?”
Abram receives no reply, so closes his eyes and drifts off
to sleep.
k
Morning: Most of the population of Haran has risen and is
packed ready to leave. The activities and voices of the people
flood into Terah’s home, while the family sleeps. The noise
from the hive of activity finally wakes Abram, who sits up,
yawns and stretches. As he shakes Sarai to wake her, some-
thing catches his eye. A short distance from his feet, Abram
sees a box placed on the ground, a box that was not there the
night before. He stares at it, bemused, and wonders, ponder-
ing over the possibilities as to how it may have gotten there.
He leans forward and gets onto his hands and knees. He
crawls cautiously toward the box, as if it might suddenly jump
up and bite him. He slides his hand over the smooth dark
wood. Abram is perplexed that the box has no marks or sym-
bols, no décor– it is just plain. Very carefully, Abram removes
the lid and looks inside. His jaw drops as he beholds the
sparkle of what appear to be many newly minted gold ashrafi.
A yellow glow covers Abram’s face as he stares into the box, as
his eyes reflect the brilliance of what lies within. He does not
touch its contents; instead he replaces the lid, picks up the box
and rises to his feet. He struggles with the weight of the box.
“I have the keys to the gates!” he calls out.
62
No sooner has he said these words, he drops to his knees

and clings to the box like a mollusc; he will not let go.
The commotion has stirred Lot, who approaches Abram.
“What on earth are you doing with that box and how did you
find the keys?” he asks.
“What keys?” asks Abram.
“You just said you have the keys to the gates?” says Lot.
Abram shakes his head. “No! No! Not keys. The contents
of this box are what will get us out of Haran. It is so heavy that
I cannot get up. Help me, please!”
Lot struggles to help Abram to his feet, as Abram will not
loosen his grip on the box. Abram and Lot take a firm hold on
either side of the box, and they stumble with it, all the way to
the Palace. As they reach the Palace steps, they place the box
on the ground and sit down on the bottom step to rest.
“What is in the box?” asks Lot.
Abram takes a moment to regain his breath, “Gold
ashrafi, thousands of them!”
Lot thinks for a moment, then asks, “Where did they
come from?”
Abram looks at Lot and smiles; he says not a word. Two
Palace Guards descend the steps. As they reach Abram, they
stop.
One points to the box “Is this for the treasurer?” he asks.
“Yes, my lords!” says Abram.
The Palace Guards proceed to lift the box between
them and, while they climb the steps, one of them calls out,
“Follow us!”
Abram and Lot rise to their feet and follow the guards to
the treasury. The treasurer, sitting in his counting house,
inscribes the final signature on a piece of papyrus approved by
the King – the statement reveals the final sum owed by
Abram. The two guards enter the room and carry the heavy
box, closely followed by Abram and Lot. The treasurer sits
behind a counter, fashioned in oak with a flat surface; the
63
PAUL JUSTICE
papyrus parchment is in his hands. After the guards place

the box on the counter before the treasurer, they both stand
aside. The treasurer looks at the box momentarily and rises
to his feet.
“The one called Abram, step forward!” he says.
Abram steps forward until he is close to the counter, the
treasurer hands him the Official Document. Abram takes the
parchment and reads it. As he reads the monetary figure
spelled out in Akkadian consonants, he reads it twice, due to
disbelief. His face remains void of any expression. He feels
numb, then his numbness is broken by the sound of the trea-
surer’s voice.
“If you agree with what is written, you must sign it.”
Abram spits onto the parchment, then hands it to the
treasurer, who reacts with a facial expression of disgust.
“What is this? Are you saying you refuse to sign?”
“No, my lord!” says Abram, “My mucus is my signature.
You will see when it dries!”
The treasurer frowns as he carefully takes the parchment
between the tips of his fingers and lays it on the surface of the
counter. He looks at Abram and asks, “How do you intend to
pay the required sum?”
“With gold ashrafi, my lord,” Abram responds, “as you
will see in the box!”
The treasurer laughs, as he doubts Abram can cover the
costs. Abram smiles confidently. Lot becomes impatient, as
he hates having to wait. The treasurer removes the lid and
stares for a long time into the box. He leans forward as he
peers at its contents. His face glows yellow and his eyes absorb
the brilliance of the glistening coins. He looks up at Abram,
“Gold ashrafi?” Abram nods in agreement. The treasurer
stands upright, “These coins are newly minted; how did you
attain so much gold?”
“Gold!” shouts Lot, as he lunges forward, only to be
quickly seized and subdued by the guards.
64
Abram stares at the treasurer, who calls for his assistant.

Behind the counter are steps which lead down to the base-
ment beneath the counting house, where the King’s treasure
is kept. The treasurer peers down the steps and shouts,
“Sepias, come here at once!”
A young man with the appearance of a Greek approaches
and runs up the steps. He momentarily looks at Abram before
he turns his attention to the treasurer. “What is it, my lord?”
he asks.
The treasurer instructs his assistant to go and bring the
King immediately; the young man obeys and exits the room.
Abram waits patiently, rarely taking his eyes off the treasurer,
and the guards continue to restrain Lot at the rear of the
room.
The King makes his way through secret chambers which
lead directly from his private quarters to the treasury. He
climbs the basement steps, just as the King enters the room
and approaches the treasurer.
“Do we have a problem with these men?” asks the King.
The treasurer points at the gold coins and the King peers
into the box; an image of the treasure is reflected in the King’s
eyes.
“Gold!” says the King in a rather unusual tone of voice.
The King looks up at Abram, “How could you possibly
have attained so much gold?” Abram remains silent and the
King continues, “Not just gold, but pure gold with not so
much as a blemish. Perfect, you might say. So where did you
get it?”
Abram remains speechless and Lot calls out from the back
of the room, “My Lord, we...”
The King raises his hand to silence Lot, his eyes still on
Abram. “Are my words falling on deaf ears? How did you
attain this gold?”
Abram remains silent for another moment. “My lord, if
I told you, you would not believe me!”
65
PAUL JUSTICE
The King leans over the counter so that he is face to face

with Abram. “Try me!”
Abram replies, “My lord, when I woke this morning, the
chest was placed at my feet and it was not there the night
before.”
The King laughs, followed by a serious expression. “You
want me to believe in miracles now, is that it?”
“I speak only the truth, my lord,” Abram says. “The
arrival of the gold is as much a mystery to me as it is to you.
Why should I lie when this gold can fulfil the agreement we
have between us?”
The King renders a long stare at Abram and paces the
room as he thinks. A few moments pass and the King looks at
Abram. “Very well! I shall store the gold in my treasury for
some time; should someone turn up seeking lost or stolen
treasure, I will send them in your direction!”
Abram nods in agreement, as he knows with full confi-
dence that this will never happen. The King turns and looks
at the guards. “Take these men to the gates and show them on
their way,” he says. “Have the people follow them in an order-
ly procession!” The guards immediately escort Abram and
Lot from the Palace, while the King returns to admire his
newly acquired chest of gold coins.
Hundreds of people have gathered for the journey and
the sun begins to rise on this new day. The town square
brims with men, women, children and animals and the noise
deafens. The King’s men parade through the city on horse-
back, making sure that an orderly procession is steered
toward the city gates. Very soon, Haran will resemble a ghost
town; a whole new experience for a city that once bustled with
trade. The King’s gardens are absent of its workers and the
houses are free of residents. People stream toward the gates,
where Abram, Lot and Terah stand and wait. As the people
gather at the gates, Abram searches among the people, look-
ing for Sarai who is mounted on a camel and one of the last
66
few to leave Haran. As he catches sight of her, Abram hurries

toward her.
“Did you pack everything?” he asks, as he looks up at her.
“Of course!” says Sarai. “Do not worry, Abram. Your
pyramid artefact is safely tucked away!” Abram smiles and
hurries back to the gates.
“We will travel west along the Assyrian route, and we
must reach the mountains by dusk!” Abram calls out, as he
looks at the masses. He looks at Terah, and adds, “Well, this
is it, Father!”
Terah hugs Abram with a prolonged grip; he does
not want to let go. Abram whispers in his father’s ear, “I love
you!”
Terah loosens his grip and Abram moves away from
his father to rouse everyone to begin their journey. Abram
leads, with Lot by his side, while Sarai and Lot’s family take
up positions near the back of the long train of people and
animals. As Sarai exits on the camel, she looks down and
smiles at Terah.
“Goodbye, Father!”
Terah reaches up to take hold of her hand, “Farewell, my
daughter. Take care of Abram for me!”
She smiles and waves for some time, as the people
progress. Terah stands at the gates and watches, teary-eyed, as
the masses exit the city. Even though his son is no longer visi-
ble, Terah continues to gaze, as almost everyone leaves Haran.
k
Three months later.
Three months have passed since the mass exodus from Haran,
and this leaves the city virtually empty. Terah lives alone in the
original home and he struggles to pay his taxes, as the money
and valuables that were left for him by Sarai have almost dried
up. He is anxious and worried, as he has no substitute or
67
PAUL JUSTICE
source of income. The thoughts of eviction and abandonment

fill him with fear.
One morning, Terah stands in his doorway and looks out
over the city. As he sees two Palace Attendants who run at
high speed toward the King’s Palace, he instinctively knows
something is going on. The guards hurry up the steps and
rush toward the King’s throne.
Breathless and excited, one of the guards says, “My lord,
you must come and see this with your own eyes. There are
thousands of people at the gates requesting residency in
Haran!”
The King rises to his feet. “Have the people returned?”
“No, my lord, these people are tenfold more; they num-
ber into the thousands!”
“From where?” asks the King.
“I do not know, my lord. Come and see!”
The King follows the guards to the city gates and upon
arrival, he cannot believe his eyes. Thousands of people queue
at the gates and claim to be homeless. The King arranges for
them to be housed immediately, and within one day, the city
is packed from wall to wall with potentially loyal subjects.
Terah wanders the streets and watches, amazed, as thousands
of people make their way toward their new homes. Terah
thinks about the time when he and his family arrived, but this
is on a much grander scale.
The next morning, Terah is awakened by the sound of a
loud knock on his door. He sits up in bed, and calls out, “One
moment!”
He gets out of bed, and makes his way to the door.
As he opens it, he sees two Palace Guards who stand and
face him.
“The King would like to see you immediately!” one of
them says.
“Is it about the city tax?” asks Terah. The guards remain
silent. Terah says, “One moment please, while I dress!”
68
He slips into a long cloak to cover his nightgown and

places sandals on his feet. He joins the guards and follows
them to the King’s Palace. Taken before the throne, Terah
kneels at the King’s feet.
“You may rise!” says the King.
The guards assist Terah to his feet and stand to one side.
Terah looks at the King, “My lord, may I explain my debt
to you!”
The King raises his hand to block Terah from saying
another word. He smiles and says, “Debt, you say?” Terah
nods in agreement.
The King continues, “You have no debt, let me
explain! When Abram emptied the city, I was angry and
felt betrayed as your ruler. However, your son made me a
promise – a guarantee, he called it – and he has proven true to
his word!”
“This is good news!” Terah says, and smiles.
“In all fairness,” the King continues, “I feel that you
should reap the reward. Until the day you die, or for as long
as you live in Haran, you are exempt from paying any city tax
and the home you live in is now your property. No longer will
you need to pay rent. As a senior citizen of Haran, you are
entitled to regular payments from the Palace Treasury every
month; a figure is yet to be agreed.”
Terah bows before the King “Thank you, my lord,” he
says. “Your generosity overwhelms me!”
The King gestures his approval and smiles, “You may
leave and enjoy your day!”
As the guards escort Terah from the courtroom, the King
calls out to him, “One moment?”
Terah stops and looks over his shoulder at the King. “Tell
me!” the King says. “This God that Abram speaks of, is this
God living?”
Terah smiles “Of course, my lord; living and true, my
lord!”
69
PAUL JUSTICE
The King remains silent and the guards escort Terah from
the Palace.
Over the following sixty-five years, Haran becomes a
lucrative and bustling city, a centre for trade which attracts
people from far and wide. Although he never sees his sons or
daughters again, Terah remains in Haran, content and happy
for the remainder of his life. He dies at the age of two hun-
dred and five.
70
6
Between Bethel and Ai
Night: The settlement is quiet, as people sleep in their tents;

the tents have been pitched beneath trees on a plateau at the
base of the mountains, in an area between Bethel and Ai. An
owl lets out a screech from the trees above, before it takes to
the wing. Momentarily it hovers, then it suddenly darts to the
ground to retrieve its prey. Abram is restless in his sleep, with
rapid eye movements and he babbles nonsense. Sarai nudges
him, which causes him to turn onto his side, and helps
him drift into a more restful sleep. Before the dawn breaks,
Abram just begins to dream, when he hears a voice which calls
his name.
“Abram! This country I will give to you, both you and
your offspring and for all eternity!”
Abram wakes, feeling sluggish and confused. As he has no
children, he finds it difficult to differentiate and separate his
dreams from divine revelations. Why would God speak to me
about children when I do not have even a son? He thinks. He
momentarily looks at Sarai, who remains in a peaceful sleep.
He rises from his bed, gathers his clothes and gets dressed. He
leaves the tent; the air outside is fresh and crisp and early
morning dew settles on the grass beneath his feet. He stretch-
es and inhales deeply, as the fresh clean air rushes into his
lungs and expands in his chest. He begins to feel more awake.
Abram walks toward a rocky incline and finds a suitable
place to climb onto an elevated ledge. His clumsy footholds
71
PAUL JUSTICE
occasionally cause him to slip but he finally reaches a secure

platform. He steadies himself and looks out over the settle-
ment; his position is as high as the tops of the trees. From this
elevated position, Abram looks up into the sky. With his arms
outstretched, and in a clear voice, he calls out to his God
“My Lord, Most High. Tell me, what am I to do concern-
ing your promise?”
A breeze whistles past Abram’s ears, and this is all he
hears. His arms drop to his sides, as he stands and gazes into
an empty sky. Again, Abram calls out to God.
“Speak to your servant, if you will! Or am I to continue
stumbling on my way?”
As the breeze buffets against Abram, it causes his clothes
to flap; his supplication remains unanswered. He carefully sits
down on the ledge, with his legs dangling over the edge, and
with slumped shoulders, his head drops forward. He is disillu-
sioned as to what to do. Alone and cold, Abram sits and thinks
for quite some time. A thought suddenly occurs to him. I need
a name for God and words are not enough. I need to build a sacri-
ficial altar and sacrifice from the best of my livestock. Only then will
God Most High show me the way!
Abram’s spirits rise and he begins to position him for the
descent, only he makes a mistake and looks down so that he
freezes with fear. “What if I slip, fall and die?” thinks Abram.
He sits on the ledge, as positioned previously, and looks down
over the settlement. All he can do is wait.
k
Five hours pass. Abram sits and watches the movements of
the tribe as they go about their daily chores; the noise from
children as they play has assisted Abram’s cries for help to fall
on deaf ears. No one knows he is stuck on the mountain.
Abram notices a small stone lying on the ledge not far from
him. He picks it up and begins to doodle and scratch marks
onto the ledge. He thinks, I wonder if I can create a name for
72
God. He mulls over in his mind all of the letters in the

Akkadian alphabet, and begins to scratch letters onto the sur-
face and in various combinations. Finally, he comes up with
four Akkadian consonants that he likes and he marks them in
bold on the surface rock: YHWH. He thinks, Yes, I like the
name and from now on I will address God Most High by the name
YaHWeH!
k
Sarai sits in her tent, and holds a conversation with Lot’s wife.
They both sew cloth, as Lot enters the tent.
“Where is Abram?” he asks.
Sarai shrugs her shoulders. “I assumed he was with you!”
She drops the cloth and rises to her feet. She walks over to
Lot. “Where might he be?” she asks.
Lot replies, “Did he not say anything to you, before he
left this morning?”
Sarai sniggers. “He tells me nothing, you know that!”
Lot stares at Sarai, then turns to leave. Sarai rushes out
after him, “Where are you going?”
Lot hurries away. “To organise a search!” he calls back
to her.
Sarai stands and watches as Lot runs from one tent to
another and gathers men. Lot informs six capable men that
they need to search for Abram; the seven begin their search.
They decide not to split up; instead they all group together
for the search and Lot suggests that they begin to search every
tent. From the tents, they move to where livestock is kept, but
both Abram’s and Lot’s herdsmen say they have not seen him.
Lot is perplexed as to where to look next.
“We have no option but to search the mountains!” he says
to the six.
As they reach the base of the mountains, they all begin to
climb the rocky incline. Abram looks down and, sees them,
cups his hands around his mouth and shouts, “Lot, up here!”
73
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot hears his faint cry and looks up to see Abram dangling
his legs over the cliff’s edge. Cups his hands around his
mouth, Lot shouts, “What on earth are you doing up there?”
“What?” shouts Abram.
Lot shouts up, “Do not move a muscle until we reach
you!”
The six men climb the mountain face and very soon they
reach Abram. Four stay beneath him to break a possible fall,
while the other two take hold of Abram’s arms to assist him
from the ledge. Once they have recovered Abram to ground
level, Lot seizes hold of him.
“When are you going to cease these dangerous escapades?”
he demands.
Abram, although weak and hungry, manages to reply,
“As your spiritual leader, I need to do these things!”
Lot quickly retorts, “Climbing mountains will not get you
closer to God; it will only get you killed!”
Abram pulls away from Lot’s grip, walks a short distance,
stops and turns. He says, “I appreciate your concern and the
help from these men; however, what you must understand,
Lot, is this: spiritual decisions are my concern!”
Abram turns and continues to walk, while one of the men
looks at Lot. “Why is he speaking in riddles?” he asks Lot.
Lot looks at the man, devoid of any expression, and with-
out an answer he hurries to catch up with Abram. The men
follow at a short distance, while Abram and Lot walk togeth-
er back to camp.
En route, Lot says, “I did not intend to usurp your
authority on these matters!”
Abram replies, “I understand, Lot, and I know that
you care!”
As they reach his tent, Abram turns and gestures a
thank-you to the six men, “Good day my friends, you will
be blessed!” He looks at Lot. “Say nothing to Sarai, even if
she asks!”
74
Lot nods in agreement, and follows Abram into the tent.

Sarai is busy preparing lunch when the two men turn up. She
sees them and screams, “Abram, you are back!”
She is all excited; she paws him and kisses his cheeks.
Abram struggles to take a seat due to all of the fuss. Sarai looks
at Lot and asks, “Where did you find him?”
Lot looks at Abram, but does not dare to speak. Abram
says, “What is this? You have discussed my absence?”
“Why yes!” Sarai responds. “You were missing. What!
You think we do not care?” Before Abram has chance to
respond, Sarai continues, “Lot was concerned; he immediate-
ly organised a search group.”
“Yes, I know!” says Abram.
“So, why question?” Sarai asks. “Why not just accept that
we care, my lord?”
Lot slowly closes his eyes as he listens to Sarai, as much as
to say, “Please shut up!”
Abram’s head thumps from within, as he sits and listens to
Sarai nag. He waits for a few moments of silence, then asks,
“Any food?”
Sarai walks over to where she has prepared some lunch,
then looks at Abram, and she says, with sarcasm in her tone,
“Something light, my lord? Now that we have no kiln!”
Abram refuses to look at Sarai, so as not to incite another
lecture, and simply holds out his hands. “Anything!” he says.
Sarai places into his hands a bowl filled with fruit, nuts,
grain and bread, followed by a flask of water to help with the
dryness. Abram digs in, grateful for any form of sustenance.
As he eats, he looks up.
“Some for Lot, too!” he orders, as bits of dry seed shoot
from his mouth.
Lot quickly replies, “No I am not hungry, really!”
Sarai ignores Lot and hands him a bowl of the mix, also
accompanied by a flask of water. Lot thanks Sarai and begins
to eat, with far less enthusiasm in his approach.
75
PAUL JUSTICE
While he enjoys a dry meal, Abram looks over to Lot.

“After lunch we need to start work on that sacrificial altar!”
“Altar?” asks Lot, frowning.
Sarai approaches from the rear of the tent and, with an
inquisitive tone in her voice, asks, “Have you received inspi-
ration in a dream, my lord?”
Abram looks up at Sarai and responds, “I am not sure,
maybe?”
Sarai persists. “What do you mean? How can you be
uncertain?”
Abram stares into his bowl of food as he reflects. He looks
up, then says, “Remember before we came here, we camped
for a few days at Shechem?”
“Yes!” says Sarai.
“One day, and in private, I walked alone to the Great Oak
of Moreh!” Abram says.
Lot interrupts. “The oak that stands on sacred ground, is
this not forbidden?”
“Why yes! Though I went undetected!” says Abram.
In a very quiet voice, Sarai asks, “What happened?”
“I was sitting with my back leaning against the oak
and just relaxing and thinking, when God appeared to me!”
Abram says.
“You have seen God?”Sarai gasps.
“No man can see God!” says Abram.
“So what do you mean?” asks Sarai.
Abram continues the story. “This is difficult to explain,
you see! It was dull and overcast that day, the sun was high in
the sky, but hazy. Suddenly, I was immersed in a flood of light,
a light so bright it was blinding and brighter than the sun.
I covered my eyes with the backs of my hands and yet I felt no
fear. In fact, I was calm and the voice that spoke to me, well,
it was...”
Abram pauses as though to think, and Sarai says, “What,
it was what?” as she clings to the edge of her seat.
76
Abram finishes the sentence. “Soothing, it was soothing!”

Lot sits next to Sarai and stares at Abram, wide-eyed, with
jaw dropped. The bowl of food slips from his fingers and falls
to the ground, he fails to notice it. Sarai is excited and wants
to hear more. She moves closer to Abram and kneels at his
feet. She places both her hands over his, looks up into his eyes,
then says, “What did the voice say, my lord?”
Abram appears to be in a trance, when he quotes, word for
word, “I shall give this country to your progeny!”
After a long pause, Sarai says, “Was that all the voice
said?”
Abram remains silent and continues to stare. Sarai rises to
her feet and keeps her eyes fixed on Abram. “Why did you not
tell us?” she asks. “The entire congregation should know this
information!”
Abram snaps out of his trance and looks up at Sarai,
“What? Moves like that will only burden the people,” he says.
“I should not have told you or Lot. However, both of you are
my closest kin, and I trust you both!”
Sarai says, “This is good to hear, my lord. Only, how will
this news burden the people?”
Abram slowly rises to his feet and stands, then looks Sarai
in the eye. “If the people know that I have basked in the very
presence of the living God,” he says, “this may incite them to
worship me and the last thing I need is people falling at my
feet and doing obeisance. Nothing infuriates God Most High
more than idolatry. Do you want me to endanger the lives of
these people?”
Sarai stares up into Abram’s eyes and gulps. Lot sits
with a look of concern upon his face; for once, he feels sorry
for Sarai, as he knows she is about to cross the line with
Abram. Sarai remains silent, then looks up into Abram’s
eyes; finally she plucks up the courage and says, “I was only
thinking of the tribe, my lord. The people have hopes and
dreams; they look to you for guidance and have followed
77
PAUL JUSTICE
you faithfully. Is it too much to ask for you to fulfil their

spiritual need?”
Lot closes his eyes and lowers his head into his hands,
then just waits for Abram to erupt in an angry display. To his
surprise, Abram calmly sits down and, looking up at Sarai, he
says, “Yes, I am responsible for their spirituality; and no, this
is not the way to fill it. I will tell you what I have already told
Lot. I make all of the decisions concerning matters of spiritu-
ality and worship; no one else has the right, no one!”
Sarai bows before Abram to signify respect. “Forgive me,
my lord. I spoke out of turn!”
“Yes you did!” Abram replies. “Now promise me one
thing – you must not talk to Lot’s wife or to anyone else about
this. If this leaks out into the camp, there will be anarchy. Do
I have your word?”
Sarai curtsies. “Yes, my lord, you have my word!” She is
about to walk away, but has second thoughts. She stops and
says to Abram, “About this morning and your dream, is there
any connection with what you have just told us?”
Lot looks up in disbelief that she has continued to persist,
and Abram says, “Maybe! You see, I woke feeling drowsy, not
refreshed. So, maybe God spoke and maybe He did not, who
knows?”
Sarai probes even further, asking, “Forgive me, my lord
but, what do you think God may have said?”
Abram replies, “That the land of promise will be inherit-
ed by my children and for all eternity!”
“Well then, that settles it! You were simply dreaming!”
says Sarai.
“Why do you say that?” asks Abram.
Sarai smiles and says, “Because you have no children!”
She speaks these words of wisdom, then she simply turns and
walks away. Abram looks at Lot, gobsmacked, and Lot returns
the same vacant stare. A few moments of silence pass before
Abram says, “Come, Lot, let us get to work on that altar!”
78
Lot immediately replies, “Yes, of course. I think we

should!” Both men rise to their feet and Abram pats Lot on
the back as they leave the tent.
Outside the tent, Abram says to Lot, “Go and regroup
those six men. Tell them to collect timber and pile it up near
the base of the mountains!”
Lot acknowledges and goes in search of the men, while
Abram makes his way toward the herdsmen. Abram passes
through the camp en route and people who catch a glimpse of
him call out, “Good day, my lord!”
Abram has his mind on important issues and appears to
ignore them. One of the herdsmen sees Abram approach and
rushes to greet him.
“Good day, my lord!” says the herdsman.
Abram says, “How many young calves do we have?”
“We have four my lord!”
“Good!” says Abram and continues to instruct the
herdsman to choose the best one, clean and unblemished,
and to prepare it for sacrifice. With that, the herdsman goes
about his duties and Abram makes his way to the base of
the mountains.
On arrival, Abram begins to search for a suitable spot for
the sacrificial altar, and finds a level platform surrounded by
large rocks; he decides this is a good spot. He kneels down on
the centre of the plateau, then picks up a small stone and
begins to draw an image of how he wants the sacrificial altar
to appear. The image is rough and sketchy and shows that the
structure will have four legs, a platform with a square hole in
the centre and bundles of sticks underneath. After he finishes
his sketch, Abram sits with his legs crossed and waits.
k
Mid afternoon: The large flat rock where Abram sits is burn-
ing hot from the midday sun, and he becomes impatient.
A lizard suns itself, laid over a boulder nearby. The noise of
79
PAUL JUSTICE
men who approach alerts the lizard and it swiftly darts from
the rock. Abram rises to his feet, then calls out, “About time!”
As the men arrive and drop the bundles of sticks, Abram,
stands on the plateau, points down at his artwork, and says
“Look! This is how I want the structure!”
Lot, stands opposite Abram, leans over and looks at the
art. “Why are four legs pointing up?” he asks.
“Because you just looked at it upside down, come around
this side!” says Abram.
Lot moves around and peers at the sketch from the new
perspective. “Yes, I see!” he says.
The group of men have gathered round to try to see the
sketch. Unable to make either head or tail of it, one of the
men says, “What are we looking at, exactly?”
Abram responds quickly, “We need more wood. Hurry,
we must have this built before sundown!”
The men oblige and return to the woodland. Lot remains
behind and helps Abram get a start on building.
Four hours later, the sacrificial altar is built exactly to
Abram’s specifications, even though Lot questioned the hole
in the centre, since the entire structure was only going to burn
to the ground. Word has spread throughout the entire camp
with respect to the sacrifice, and the people gather in droves.
Teenagers climb the rocks and nearby cliffs for a birds-eye
view, as they particularly enjoy the part where Abram pros-
trates himself before the flaming altar: this is something they
enjoy and they giggle as spectators. A seven-year-old boy
loosens the grip of his mother’s hand and runs toward the
cliffs. She runs after him as she screams, “No, too dangerous!”
The boy throws himself to the ground in a tantrum.
“Do you want to go back to the tent and miss the
occasion?” asks his mother. She takes a firm grip on the boy’s
hand and drags him toward the assembly. Two of the herds-
men approach and carry a pole over their shoulders. The calf’s
carcass hangs with its feet tied to the pole. The assembled
80
people create a pathway, as the herdsmen walk through and

approach the structure. Abram and Lot stand on either side.
The herdsmen attempt to lift the carcass up on to the sacrifi-
cial altar while the calf is still attached to the pole, but Abram
stops them.
“This is not a banquet. Remove the pole and untie the
calf’s feet!” The men obey and follow Abram’s instructions.
Abram continues, “Split the animal open and expose the inter-
nal organs, as God must smell the burning aroma for this sac-
rifice to benefit the people!”
The large tribal group begins to sing and chant as the car-
cass is split and laid upon the altar. As the men lift the carcass,
some of the people can see that they are completely spattered
in the calf’s blood. The sight of blood arouses excitement and
their chant increases in volume.
Abram instructs Lot to light the fire, which takes him sev-
eral attempts as he uses friction. As the sun descends behind the
mountains and the flames leap into the dusk, the people sing
praises to God, and this reaches a crescendo. Abram throws his
arms into the air, calls for silence, and Lot knows it is time to
back away. A silence falls over the entire assembly and the
young people in the hillsides look down with eager anticipa-
tion, for they know that Abram is about to entertain them.
Abram waits and looks up at the thick smoke which ascends
into the sky; he waits to be sure that the scent has reached the
nostrils of his God. Suddenly, and very dramatically, Abram
throws himself to the ground and prostrates himself evenly.
He cries out in a loud voice, “My Lord Yahweh, creator of
heaven and earth, we offer you this sacrifice as atonement for
the error of our ways. Please allow us to glorify you and offer
praise to the one who gives the gift of life. Guide me in right-
eousness, so that I may lead your people to the land which you
have promised!”
Abram remains flat on the ground and silence prevails; all
that can be heard is the crack from burning wood. After he
81
PAUL JUSTICE
waits for some time and receives no reply, Abram rises to his
feet and turns to face the assembled people. In a loud voice,
he says, “Rejoice and let us celebrate, for today God Most
High has blessed us!”
The crowds begin to cheer. They all sing and dance; they
continue to praise God late into the night. As the night draws
on, many of the people become tired and begin to disperse
toward their tents. Lot approaches Abram with concerns over
the fire. He suggests that it be extinguished because of the
continuous smoke which rises. He also questions the name
Yahweh.
Abram fails to detect any problem and suggests that
the fire be left to burn itself out. He tells Lot that Yahweh is
God’s new name. As Abram has the final say, Lot decides to
retire for the night and leaves Abram alone to sit and gaze into
the dying embers. Most of the people have retired, when
Abram hears a soft female voice say, “My lord Abram, may
I sit with you?”
Abram looks over his shoulder and sees Alicia who stands
behind him. “Alicia!” he says, “I was deep in thought!”
She sits down next to Abram. “I am curious about these
festivities?”
“Oh?” says Abram.
“This God that you talk to, do you hear a reply?”
Abram smiles. “Sometimes,” he says. “Why?”
“I just wondered if this God was real,” Alicia says, “as
many of them are not, are they?”
Abram responds, “You are right my child, and what an
interesting observation on your part. Do you believe in my
God?”
Alicia answers, “The one the people call Elohim and the
one you call Yahweh?”
Abram nods in agreement and Alicia continues, “Not
sure! I mean, we never see anything or hear anything. Who is
this Elohim and who is Yahweh?”
82
Abram answers, “Elohim is God’s family and Yahweh is

the head and Most High”
Alicia giggles and says, “I never thought of God in that
way, as having a family?”
Abram smiles and says, “You are a peculiar girl, and beau-
tiful too!”
Alicia smiles and lowers her head, while she keeps her eyes
fixed upon Abram. Alicia slides her dainty little hand over
Abram’s hand and says, “I am so tired. May I sleep in your tent
tonight, as Lot’s daughters keep me awake as they chatter
until late into the night?”
“Of course!” says Abram. Alicia reaches up and kisses
Abram tenderly on the cheek and slips her hand inside his
tunic. She feels for something of value.
This goes undetected by Abram, who says, “Come my
child! I will walk you back to the tent!” Abram and Alicia walk
side by side toward the tent, and the remnants of smoke
ascend from the remains of a smouldering fire.
k
The Hittites are a band of vicious warriors who live in the
mountains which surround the settlement. The continuous
clouds of smoke which ascended from the plateau have not
gone unnoticed, and the Hittites intend to investigate. These
warriors prepare during the night until a band of archers are
ready and well equipped.
k
The Ambush
Morning: It is early. Some of the people in the settlement
are still asleep, while others have risen and work on their
daily chores. Abram sleeps with Alicia on one side and Sarai
on the other; the atmosphere in the tent is peaceful. The
calm is about to give birth to a storm, as the Hittites have
83
PAUL JUSTICE
surrounded the camp. Archers are strategically placed within

the hills, while warriors with swords and knives stealthily
close in. The Hittite leader is positioned in the mountains,
which overlooks the tents, and he is poised and ready to sig-
nal the attack.
The Commander blows the ram’s horn and the archer’s
release simultaneously, which causes a shower of arrows to
penetrate the tents. Some of the people are wounded and pan-
demonium breaks out in the camp, as men, woman and chil-
dren flee toward the hills and directly into a trap. The Hittites,
armed with swords, strike without mercy. The archers have
reloaded and a second wave of arrows descends onto the set-
tlement. Arrows whizz past Abram as he runs in search of Lot,
who has already begun to gather men and arm them with
swords. In the midst of a scene of complete panic, Abram sees
Lot who hands out swords from a box. He rushes over to him.
“Have the men spread out into the hills,” he says. “We
must bring down those archers!”
Lot nods in agreement and hands Abram a sword. “Lead
the way!” he urges Abram.
Abram calls out in a loud voice, “Listen men! One group
spread out into the hills to take out those archers. The second
group will follow me!”
The men from one group disperse quickly and head off in
all directions. Abram says to Lot, “Come! We must protect
the women!”
With swords in hand, Abram and Lot, accompanied by
the second band of men, run through the settlement. Between
the tents, they see Hittite men drag women by the hair. As the
women kick and scream, Hittite heads are lopped off, and this
causes the women to be spattered with blood. The women are
hysterical and Abram, accompanied by his men, continue to
target the Hittites, who target the women.
Meanwhile, Abram’s first band of men has reached the
hills on either side and they strike down the archers in a mass
84
slaughter. The Hittite Commander sees Abram’s men gain the

upper hand and decides to call a retreat. He takes the ram’s
horn from his side, then blows a continuous sombre note to
signal a retreat. The Hittite army immediately stop the fight
and run for the hills.
The settlement is littered with corpses which consist of
men, women and children from Abram’s tribe, and the Hittite
bodies are scattered as far as the hills. With a sword drenched
in blood, and spattered from head to foot, Abram walks
around the settlement in disbelief over what has just hap-
pened. All he can hear is the whimper from women and the
cries from children who have survived. Their weeping and
screaming drive Abram crazy. As he looks down, he sees a
Hittite head near his feet. A violent rage builds within him
and he skewers the head with his sword. He looks up into the
heavens and stretches his sword toward the sky, so that the
Hittite’s face points toward the heavens. In a loud and angry
voice, he says, “Yahweh, God Most High, creator of heaven
and earth, look at what these vile Hittite dogs have done!”
He falls to his knees and weeps bitterly. Lot stands,
drenched in blood, and watches from a distance as Abram
weeps. Never before has he seen Abram angry with God.
A few moments pass and Lot walks over to Abram. He
kneels beside him, then puts his arm across Abram’s shoulders.
“My lord, you did everything you possibly could. We were
taken by surprise.”
Abram looks at Lot, his face drenched in tears and says,
“Help me regroup the remaining survivors!”
Lot rises to his feet and offers his hand to Abram. He
assists him to his feet and says, “Where do we begin?”
“Gather the men to help you round everyone up,” Abram
replies, “and have everyone congregate by the remains of the
burnt-out altar!”
Lot nods in agreement and immediately sets about his
task. Abram returns to his tent.
85
PAUL JUSTICE
As he enters the tent, Abram sees Sarai, Alicia, and Lot’s

wife and daughters all huddled in a group in one corner of the
tent; they are petrified. Abram says, “You all need to congre-
gate around the ashes of the sacrificial altar!”
He leaves his tent and walks over to the foot of the moun-
tains, near to where he had built the structure. He climbs a
few large rocks, which gives himself elevation, ready for the
assembly. There he stands and waits, while the people regroup
and gather before him. He waits until the masses have gath-
ered and gives out instructions to all.
In a loud clear voice, he says, “Today, we are filled with
sadness over this unprovoked attack. However, we must lift
our spirits and fight on. Those of you among us who are
injured will be given assistance, and those of you among
us who have lost loved ones will be comforted. The carcasses
of the Hittites we will leave for the jackals and the birds of
prey, after we have buried our own. We will journey into the
mountains under the cover of night, and you all have the
remainder of this day to pack your things and prepare the
beasts of burden. Get to work, people; we have much to do
before dusk!”
After the speech, Abram climbs down from the rocks and
he searches for Lot among the people. With bodies scattered
everywhere, chaos remains in the camp. When Abram finds
Lot in conversation with a group of men, he approaches him
and interrupts them.
“I want you to organise three hundred men equipped
with swords to guard the assembly when we leave tonight.”
Abram orders, and then enquires, “Do we have enough
swords?”
“Along with the knives we have, there may be enough.”
Lot replies.
“Good! Employ strong capable men!” Abram leaves Lot
to it and goes off in search of his own men to assist in the bur-
ial of the dead.
86
Abram finds fifty capable men and instructs them to

carry the dead and pile them up on to the plateau near the
ash remains. The men oblige and begin to carry bodies
toward the base of the mountains, while Abram continues
to supervise the process. As the men carry corpse after
corpse, Abram thinks he recognises one of the bodies. He
rushes toward the two men who carry the body and calls out
to them.
“Stop!” he shouts.
The men pause on the spot and Abram looks at the body,
which has two arrows protruding from the chest; the man’s
eyes are open. As Abram looks at the body, his mind traces
back to Haran; he thinks about the time he stood by the sacred
lake and talked with this man, who grieved over the loss of
his son.
Abram looks at his lifeless face. “Finally, you rest in
peace!”
He slides the tips of his fingers down the man’s face so as
to close his eyes for the last time. “May Yahweh remember
you, my friend.”
Abram gestures for the men to take the body away. As the
day draws to a close, all the bodies of the dead have been piled
up and are completely buried and overlaid with stones. Abram
stands and looks at the burial site, as the congregated throngs
surround him, all packed and ready to leave. Abram raises his
palms to the heavens.
He looks up and says, “My Lord, Yahweh, here are the
bodies of those who trusted you and whose hopes and dreams
have ended this day. Why have you abandoned us and deliv-
ered us to the Hittites?”
The sun sets over the horizon as Abram walks away from
the burial site with his head lowered; he watches his feet as he
walks over rocky ground. He climbs a slight incline, attains
elevation over the masses of people gathered, and raises his
arms, then he calls out to them in a loud voice.
87
PAUL JUSTICE
“The journey ahead of us is going to be perilous. We will

climb into the mountains under the cover of night, and there
will be predators and night crawlers. You will be tired, cold
and afraid; however, we must press forward and head south
toward the Negev, where greener pastures await us. Be brave,
people, and continue to trust in Yahweh, who has brought you
this far. For God knows your heart’s desire and He will reward
those who are trusting!”
Abram’s speech has filled the assembly with fear and
some have mixed emotions, yet they remain silent and
ready to follow his lead. Abram steps down and searches
for Lot.
He finds him, and says, “Lot! Here is how we must pro-
ceed. Send fifty armed men ahead of us to search for preda-
tors and assign fifty to the rear to guard our backs. To each
side of us assign one hundred armed men to parade the left
and one hundred armed men to the right. We must be pro-
tected from all sides!”
“Do you think the Hittites will regroup and attack?” Lot
replies.
Abram responds, “I cannot be sure, but we must be
prepared. Now, go quickly and apportion the men to their
posts!”
Lot nods in agreement and leaves to organise the men.
Abram searches among the assembly for Sarai, and as he pass-
es through the crowds, some individuals call out to him.
“My lord, Abram, is God going to protect us?”
“For how long will we remain in danger?” another man
calls out.
Abram presses forward without comment. When he finds
Sarai, he says, “Sarai, are you ready, for we must leave?”
“Yes, my lord. Everything we own is packed onto the
camels!”
“Good!” says Abram. He returns to where Lot assigns the
men to serve as guards.
88
“Are we ready?” he asks.

“Yes! Fifty armed men have taken the lowest incline into
the mountains!” Lot replies, as he points to show Abram the
direction in which the men have preceded them.
“We must follow them quickly!” Abram says, then rouses
up the assembly. He leads them toward the lowest incline,
which cuts a pathway through the mountains. Without torch-
es to guide their way, hundreds of men, women and children,
accompanied by domestic animals, begin to flow toward the
mountains. They do not know what to expect.
89
7
The Great Oaks of Mamre
Night: Fifty men lead the way, with swords in hand, as

fearlessly they search for predators under the cover of dark-
ness. They are closely followed by Abram and the tribe, who
press forward with difficulty. The noise from animals that
struggle to find their feet over rocky terrain has them all
unsettled. The band makes slow progress as some stumble
over rocks. The ravine is unforgiving, with mountain ranges
which tower over them on both sides. Gone unnoticed are the
Hittite warriors, who silently creep among the hilltops; they
keep a watchful eye over the mass exodus. They slither like
snakes between rocks, while they keep watch from above. The
Hittites have become accustomed to seek out their prey under
the cover of night, so their dark eyes gleam with eager antici-
pation. They whisper to one another as they plan their strat-
egy of attack to be implemented at dawn. That is when the
people are most vulnerable, as they have been exposed all
night and without rest or sleep.
A harsh and brutal southern wind howls throughout the
ravine, as it pushes against the train of people. With their
heads lowered, they battle forward, and they press against the
extreme conditions. After several hours of trudging over
rough and rugged terrain, their pathway begins to decline
away from the mountains that surround them. Within a short
distance, a level clearance opens up to them, and this offers
what appears to be a safe haven, surrounded by trees and
90
bracken. The black silhouette of trees gradually becomes vis-

ible. Abram calls a halt to a very tired assembly.
In a loud voice, Abram calls out, “We will camp here for
the remainder of the night, and the guards must keep watch!”
The people begin to pitch tent and tether their livestock,
while Abram and Lot gather sticks to light a campfire. As
the collective tribesmen are exhausted, they are keen to quick-
ly retire, and within a short period, only Abram and Lot
remain awake. They both sit around a campfire a short dis-
tance from the tents. The gusts of wind have dropped to a
friendly breeze in the lower plain and the campfire burns with
ease, as Abram and Lot sit over it. A warm glow reflects over
their weary faces. Despite his tiredness, Lot tries to strike up
a conversation.
“How did we gain the upper hand over the Hittites?”
he asks.
Abram almost nods off to sleep, but he looks up and says,
“Lot! I really do not want to talk about this right now!”
However, Lot persists. “Do you think God had a hand
in it?”
Abram becomes agitated. “Well, if you insist,” he says,
“the answer to that question is no!”
A few moments of silence prevail, while Lot ponders over
Abram’s answer. He probes further. “Your answer surprises
me. You always give the glory to God, why not this time?”
Abram’s eyes are heavy. He looks at Lot. “Listen!” he says.
“We gained an advantage because we had superior weapons.
You will know, without doubt, when Yahweh shows his hand.
Now get some sleep!”
Abram removes his outer garment and rolls it into a ball.
He strategically places it away from the fire before he lays
down his head, and within seconds he is sound asleep. Lot sits,
gazes into the fire, and thinks about Abram’s words. His head
drops, while he fights to remain awake. Lot loses the battle
and drifts off to sleep, unaware of the Hittites, who now close
91
PAUL JUSTICE
in from the hills in the west. The hills on the east side of the
camp crawl with Canaanites, who are also nocturnal hunters.
The Canaanites are a tribe of black-skinned head-hunters,
cannibals, who are particularly vicious. They are about to
stumble upon the settlement.
k
Dawn: The sun just begins to rise, and it creates an orange
glow which infiltrates the tops of trees. Lot sits cross-legged,
leaning over the ash of a campfire which has burnt out, in the
midst of a light sleep. A whizzing sound suddenly alerts him
and he opens his eyes to see a spear penetrate the ground near
his feet. He looks toward the mountains in the east and sees a
vicious band of Canaanites, armed with spears. Their fear-
some war cry unnerves him.
He cries out in a loud voice, “Abram! Abram! We are
under attack!”
Abram wakes in a panic, and stumbles over Lot as he
struggles to his feet. He stands, alarmed, and he swiftly
glances from east to west. An angry band of Hittites fast
approach from the west; with swords drawn, they release an
unsettling scream.
Abram shrieks at the top of his voice. “Everyone run! Run
for your lives!”
Some of the guards have fallen asleep, while others run
toward their enemy and wave their swords in the air. The
settlement is disrupted into sheer chaos; men and women
run from their tents and some carry their children. The
warriors advance and close in; they are about to strike without
mercy. The sun continues to rise above the trees as the
enemy begin to lash out at every man, woman and child, all of
whom continue to run for their lives. The screams from the
hunted deafens.
The Canaanites continue to throw their spears, only to
miss their targets. The Hittites wield their swords, without
92
effect. A blanket of darkness creeps over the settlement, as the

sun goes into a total eclipse. The people are in panic and the
victims continue to run, until they find refuge among the
trees. In the darkness and engulfed in confusion, Canaanites
strike down Hittites and Hittites thrust their swords into
Canaanites; the screams continues and a bloodbath ensues.
The momentary darkness begins to lift, as the sun
gradually emerges from its unusual eclipse, and the people
continue to hide among the trees. The light creeps over the
settlement, then reveals an unusual but strange result; the
ground is littered with the dead. Canaanites and Hittites are
laid everywhere, with severed heads and limbs; their blood
oozes as it soaks into the earth, while Abram and his followers
remain unscathed.
Abram emerges from among the trees and surveys the
area. As he walks amongst the dead and looks down, he sees
what he believes to be Divine intervention. Abram raises his
face and palms to the heavens, and he cries out in a loud voice.
“Today, Yahweh has delivered us from our enemies. It is
God’s will that we live, and He has proved this by hiding the
sun and causing confusion among our enemies!”
The crowds hear Abram’s words; the people gradually
begin to show themselves from among the trees, with a timid
uncertainty, and they approach and regroup around Abram.
Lot, who had hidden among the crags, reveals himself as
though unaffected; in reality, he was terrified. Sarai, Lot’s wife
and his daughters, followed by Alicia, appear from among the
long grass near the west side, at the base of the mountains.
The tribe gathers near Abram, and they step over the dead.
Some of the children vomit as a result of the trauma. Abram
waits patiently as the crowds close in and gather all around.
“This monumental slaughter which lies before you all is
God ordained,” he tells them, “and for this reason, this patch
of land will remain “marked” for all eternity. For this is where
Yahweh’s Angel struck down our enemies, causing the plain to
93
PAUL JUSTICE
become saturated in enemy blood. Yahweh will never allow

this land to have to endure the stink of these tribes; no never,
for this land is ours and rightfully ours as a result of Divine
providence. So, who, may I ask, is going to take it from us?”
The people stare at Abram with uncertainty and remain
fearful, since they do not know what to expect. He continues
his speech.
“Listen people! Today we are moving on to greener pas-
tures and to inherit what is rightfully ours. Gather your
belongings and pack your tents, for today Yahweh has offered
His hand so that you may be blessed!”
With that, the people begin to disperse and set about their
work. They dismantle their tents, so that, by noon, they are all
ready to leave. The entourage forms an orderly train and
Abram, up front, takes the lead, assisted by Lot. The journey
ahead of them is arduous, as it takes them through woodland
and brush, and a constant descent through the mountainous
region makes the journey especially difficult for livestock and
the heavily laden camels.
k
Dusk: The people have travelled for eight hours under
treacherous conditions. They arrive at a large plateau in the
mountains, surrounded by oak trees. Abram decides to call a
halt to the assembly near the Great Oaks in an area they call
Mamre, close to the city of Hebron. The people begin to
organise themselves into groups and, in haste, they are eager
to pitch their tents before nightfall, as many of them are com-
pletely exhausted from the trip. Abram retires to his tent early
that night, as he has plans for the next day – plans that are not
yet known to Lot and plans that are not going to make him
happy. The settlement is quiet and a full moon lights up the
sky over Hebron.
k
94
Morning in Abram’s tent: Abram wakes to the sound of Sarai

who sings as she prepares the remainder of the dried figs for
breakfast; she is being assisted by Alicia, who prepares the
unleavened bread. Abram sits up in bed and runs his fingers
through his long white hair. He pulls it away from his face.
“Do we have to sing?” he asks.
Sarai stops her melody and looks at Abram. She rushes
over to him, kneels at his feet, she says, “My lord! My heart is
full of joy, and I like this place. This morning, I spoke to God
in private and I thanked Him for bringing us here!”
Abram looks at Sarai with a surprised expression. “You
spoke to Yahweh?” he says.
Sarai frowns, “Who?” she asks.
Abram smiles. “Yahweh, the name I have given to God
Most High.”
Sarai replies, “Yes and I did experience a feeling of eupho-
ria, which makes me feel safe here!”
Abram scratches his cheek through a mound of beard.
“Good for you!” he says. “Now, will you please desist from the
singing?”
Sarai rises to her feet and says, “Yes, my lord!” She bows
before Abram and returns to her chores.
While Abram gets dressed, Sarai approaches. “Excuse me,
my lord. May I make a suggestion?”
Abram looks at Sarai as he ties a length of cord around his
waist. “Yes, speak.” he says.
Sarai says, “We are running low on supplies and I thought
I might take some of the servants into Hebron today, to visit
the market and replenish our stocks?”
Abram continues to dress and says, “Of course, but it will
take you about three days.”
“I see!” says Sarai.
“You will need to take six armed men for protection
and about four servants to help you with the supplies. Look
for an inn while in Hebron and stay there for one night.
95
PAUL JUSTICE
You will need to take about three thousand ashrafi to cover

the costs!”
Sarai curtsies and says, “Yes, my lord. I will organise this
immediately!” She leaves the tent.
Abram is dressed and almost ready to leave, when Alicia
approaches him, carrying a bowl of figs. She curtsies and
says, “I have prepared food for you, my lord. Would you care
to eat?”
Abram smiles, takes a fig from the bowl, and he eats.
Alicia looks up at Abram, wide-eyed, and says, “I overheard
your conversation with Sarai concerning the market in
Hebron, and I wondered if I may go with her?”
Abram takes another fig. “Why, do you have something to
sell?” he asks.
Alicia giggles and flutters her long eyelashes, before saying,
“What do you mean my lord? I simply wish to assist Sarai.”
Abram swallows, before saying, “One of the herdsmen
tells me he has not seen hide or hair of you for several days
and that you have not been milking the goats. So, how have
you been filling your time?”
Alicia backs away from Abram and drops the bowl of figs,
before saying, “You are checking on me? Since leaving Haran,
we have experienced nothing but stress; people have died and
animals have suffered too, and the goats have become unpro-
ductive. And if you must know, I have been helping Lot’s
daughters with their tasks. Ask them.”
Abram is shocked over Alicia’s response. “I do not appre-
ciate your tone, young woman, keep it in check,” he says.
“And if you are telling me the truth, then you have nothing to
worry about!”
Alicia fills up with powerful emotions, as her eyes well up
with tears. The tears stream over her face, as she begins to
scream at Abram.
“I have honoured you as my lord and master and you have
nothing but disdain for me.” she cries. “You shaved every hair
96
from my head and nicked my scalp; did I complain? No!

I have tried to get close to you and that God of yours; have
I been blessed? No! You treat me like a trash!”
“Well you are a slave, are you not?” Abram replies.
Alicia displays her anger vocally, and runs from the tent,
as she cries hysterically. She almost knocks Lot off his feet as
he approaches the tent.
Lot enters the tent, and immediately says to Abram,
“What is wrong with Alicia?”
Abram responds, “Nothing! Women are unpredictable,
you know that!”
Lot replies, “Yes, I have three of my own!”
“Do me a favour,” Abram says. “Sarai is going to Hebron
today to purchase goods and she needs protection. Will you
organise six armed men to guide her way?”
“Of course!” says Lot, and he immediately leaves the tent.
Noon and the sun soars high. Abram wanders with his
head down, looks over level ground. He searches for a suitable
place to build the structure; the area he chooses is not far from
the Great Oak at Mamre. He ponders over his chosen loca-
tion, he hears Sarai’s voice call to him. As Abram looks up, he
sees Sarai mounted on a camel and ready to leave. The six
armed men and four slaves surround the camel, as Abram
approaches them. Abram looks up at Sarai seated, and says,
“Before you leave, will you look for Alicia and take her with
you on the back of the camel?”
“Why?” says Sarai.
“She asked!” says Abram.
Sarai leans over and tells the four slaves to go and seek
Alicia. Abram checks over the camel. “You have plenty of gold
coins?” he asks Sarai.
“Yes I am taking five thousand to be sure!” she answers.
Abram continues to search around the camel, and Sarai
says, “What are you looking for?”
“The pyramid artefact; it is not for sale!”
97
PAUL JUSTICE
Sarai laughs. “I am not selling, I am buying!”

“Yes I know, but if Alicia goes with you anything could
be sold!”
Sarai laughs again. “You listen to too many tales, and
besides, the pyramid is tucked away safely in your tent!”
The four slaves return, accompanied by Alicia, who is
happy to have been included in the trip. Abram cups his hands
to assist Alicia onto the camel. He places her foot in his hands
and her hands on his shoulders. She looks into his eyes and
says in a quiet soft voice, “Thank you, my lord!”
Abram nods and hoists Alicia up onto the camel. He slaps
the camel’s backside, as he calls out, “Enjoy your stay in
Hebron!” and the camel lets out a disgruntled cry. Abram
stands and watches them leave and smiles as Alicia looks back;
she waves like an excited child.
Abram returns to the plateau where he had pondered over
the dimensions of the altar he plans to build. He stands and
stares at the ground while he thinks.
Lot approaches and asks, “Have you lost something?”
Abram looks up at Lot. “I am figuring out the best way to
build it!” he says.
“Build what?” asks Lot.
“The sacrificial altar, this time, I am thinking of building
in stone: a permanent structure for which we can use rocks
from the mountains!”
Lot’s countenance falls, as his shoulders slump. “Please
tell me you are not serious?” he says.
“Of course I am serious!” says Abram.
Lot moves closer to Abram and places one hand on his
shoulder. “Have we not seen enough death?” he asks. “You
know, the smoke that ascends will alert our enemies. Have you
considered this?”
Abram looks Lot in the eye and says, “I consider every-
thing when I make my decisions. And I have also taken into
consideration the fact that I cannot and will not refrain from
98
offering Yahweh pure worship, just because we have enemies.

Tell me, Lot; are you for pure worship or against it?”
Lot steps away from Abram and lowers his head, and he
thinks and strokes the fringes of his beard with his right hand.
Suddenly he looks up and says, “I am for pure worship of
course, but only in safe locations!”
Abram stares at Lot and, with a sense of righteousness,
says, “Maybe you should search your heart and find your faith,
before God searches it for you?”
Lot feels hurt over Abram’s cutting remarks and, without
another word, he walks away. Abram turns his attention to his
mission and begins to draw up his plans.
Lot wanders aimlessly, while he thinks about Abram’s
comments. He drifts toward the mountains on the east side
and eventually sits down on a rock and rests. His thoughts
about Abram are negative when he thinks, Stubborn fool! He
will not be happy until he has us all killed. Altars here, altars there,
altars every God-damned where, the man is obsessed! Lot rises to
his feet, looks up at the mountains which overshadow him and
thinks, I wonder? He looks for a low elevation and begins to
climb. The sun is burning hot, high above, as Lot weaves
through the midst of shady crags. He stops occasionally to rest
after he secures his footholds. After some time, he eventually
reaches the top and momentarily looks back over the ground
he has covered. Lot raises his hands to shade his eyes from the
sun, while he looks into the distance in the direction of the
east. What he sees is mountain after mountain, and they
stretch as far as the Eastern Desert. As Lot surveys the terrain,
he thinks to himself, My God, is there no end to these mountains?
He looks down into the valley below, and he cannot believe
his eyes; the land is irrigated everywhere, with lush green veg-
etation as far as the eye can see. A fine mist hangs over the
large body of water that is centrally located in the valley, and
the purest of springs provides a filtered water stream from the
north, deep within the Jordan valley. Fruit trees and tropical
99
PAUL JUSTICE
flowers flourish in abundance in this humid and beautiful

land. Lot’s heart begins to race, as his eyes struggle to take in
the enormity of what he has discovered. One thought crosses
his mind. The land of promise, I have found it! Excited, Lot hur-
ries to descend the mountain, and he retraces his steps. The
descent is arduous and Lot struggles with his footholds in
the wake of his excitement. In his haste to quickly get down
the mountain face, he slips and tumbles, tears the skin from
his shins on both legs, until a cliff edge breaks his fall. He lies
on his back and looks up, with the sun in his eyes; the burn-
ing sensation in his legs causes him discomfort and the blood
trickles down to his feet. Feels dizzy and nauseous, Lot thinks,
I must calm down, as another fall could kill me!
Lot covers his eyes to block the sun and waits for the
queasiness in his stomach to pass. After some time, stunned
and with the feeling of discomfort, he makes an attempt to
steady himself to his feet, while the sun beats down upon him.
Several attempts are made, and Lot finally feels his ground
and secures a new foothold in the mountain face. The descent
continues with greater care and the continuous sting in his
shins serves as a bitter reminder to feel for each step with cau-
tion. As adrenalin pumps through his body and visions of par-
adise fuel his enthusiasm; Lot finally experiences touchdown
onto more level ground at the base of the mountain. Excited,
he quickly locates the settlement and heads toward it. His
attempts to run cause pain to shoot through his legs, as he
limps from one foot to another, yet he hurries every painful
step of the way. En route, he passes Abram at a distance, who
is preoccupied with the erection of his newfangled altar fash-
ioned in stone. Lot glances over quickly, shakes his head as
though to gesture disapproval, and continues toward his tent.
Lot slows the pace as he reaches the tent, and limps as
though he walked on hot ash. He falls through the entrance,
hits the ground, face down and completely breathless, as his
heart pounds beneath him. Lot’s wife and daughters sit
100
together, engrossed in embroidery. They jump to their feet

almost simultaneously and rush to help him. They all kneel on
the ground, and roll Lot onto his back. Lot’s wife cradles his
head on her lap. When she sees his wounds, she immediately
cries out.
“Lot!” she screams, “What has happened to you?”
“I fell!” says Lot, still breathless.
Lot’s wife instructs her daughters to fetch clean linen and
fresh water. As the daughters gather the items required, Lot
looks up into his wife’s face and says, “I have found it!”
“Found what?” she asks.
“Found paradise!” says Lot “In the east, beyond the first
ridge of mountains and deep in the Jordan valley, there lies the
land we have only dreamed of, the lost paradise.”
As the daughters approach, one carries the linen and the
other a flask of water. The older one, with the linen, says, “Is
father delirious, mother?”
Lot looks at his daughter. “Come, my child,” he says,
“and I will explain to you what I have seen with my very
own eyes!”
Both of Lot’s daughters kneel by his side and listen intent-
ly, as he unfolds to them, in vivid detail, all that he has seen in
the valley. He impresses upon them how beautiful it is and
that it far surpasses anything he ever imagined it to be.
Lot’s wife abruptly interrupts him. “Did Abram witness
this too?”
“No, just I,” says Lot.
She lays Lot’s head on the ground and rises to her feet.
“Have you told Abram?” she asks.
“No!” he replies.
“Huh!” retorts his wife, “I thought you two were insepa-
rable and confided in every detail about everything?”
“Why yes, but...well, a dispute arose between us concern-
ing the building of altars and we disagree on the subject. So
we are no longer speaking!”
101
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot’s wife throws her arms in the air, “Wonderful! Just as

we are about to reap the reward, you decide to fall out with
our spiritual leader.”
Lot closes his eyes and winces from the pain in his legs.
His wife hurries to exit the tent. The elder of Lot’s two daugh-
ters tears a piece of cloth from the linen and uses it to absorb
the sweat from her father’s brow. While she does this, she
speaks to her father in a soft voice. “Do not worry, Father,
dear. We will dress your legs and find something to lessen
the pain!”
Lot smiles and replies, “First help me up and place me
onto that pile of animal skins at the back of the tent, you can
bath and dress my wounds!”
“Yes, Father!” she replies and beckons for her sister to
help. The young women take hold of Lot’s arms and pull him
up off the ground; he drapes both arms over their shoulders as
they assist him to the rear of the tent. He occasionally cries
out with the pain as he hobbles toward the pile of animal furs.
A distance from Lot’s tent, Abram is engrossed in build-
ing his altar and he has commissioned numerous men to help
him. Some carry large rocks from the base of the mountains,
while others mix mortar from clay, grass and water, and this
depletes their water supply. Abram is almost covered head to
foot with the mix, as he pushes it between the gaps of each
stone. He works with earnest enthusiasm, then he sees, in his
peripheral vision, Lot’s wife who runs toward him. Abram
stops work and turns to face the woman, who fast approaches.
As she reaches Abram, she is breathless and immediately
begins to entreat him.
“My lord Abram, come quickly, as Lot has been seriously
injured!”
“Where is he?” asks Abram.
Lot’s wife replies “In his tent, my lord!”
Without hesitation, Abram hurries to follow Lot’s wife
directly to the tent. They both reach the tent and Abram
102
follows Lot’s wife through the entrance. He stands and looks

for Lot.
“Where is he?” he asks.
One of Lot’s daughters approaches him and curtsies, she
says, “This way, my lord!”
Abram follows her to the back of the tent, accompanied by
Lot’s wife. He sees Lot, who sits and nurses his bandaged legs.
Lot looks up, surprised to see Abram soiled from head to foot
in builder’s clay.
“What happened to you?” asks Abram.
Lot reveals a cheeky grin. “I see you have been busy since
I left!” He pauses to await a reply, but one is not forthcoming.
He continues, “After leaving you late this morning, I wan-
dered over to the mountain range in the east and climbed a
lesser incline in order to reach the top!”
“Why?” asks Abram.
“Curiosity!” Lot says. “Anyway, it was during my
descent that I fell and ripped the skin from both legs. Could
have been worse; you could be standing there looking at
a corpse!”
Abram frowns. “I still do not understand why you went up
there in the first place?”
Lot’s wife intercedes. “Tell him, Lot, tell him what you
discovered!”
Lot’s face is serious when he looks at Abram. “Remember
I was angry with you and you said some things that were
uncalled for!”
“Nevertheless, I felt the need to correct your thinking!”
says Abram.
“Yes, and you did!” says Lot. He lowers his head, and Lot
begins to fumble with his fingers and feels uncomfortable.
A momentary silence thickens the atmosphere in the tent.
Lot looks up at Abram and says, “This paradise you are lead-
ing us to...well, I have found it!”
“Found it? Found it where?” demands Abram.
103
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot responds, “To the east and over the mountains, it lies
deep within the valley and stretches for miles. It stretches
from the Jordan plain in the north, all the way to the Deep
South, as far as Siddim. It is overshadowed by mountain
ranges east and west. The place is well hidden; we would have
missed it completely had we continued to the Negev!”
Abram stands and stares at Lot momentarily. “You do
realise, Lot, that this discovery has come prematurely, and
that in no way at this point in time can we even attempt to
enter the Promised Land!”
Lot’s wife is shocked and steps forward, as she says, “Oh,
really? Why, my lord?”
Lot also quickly adds, with sarcasm, “Yes, indeed, why my
lord?”
Abram looks at Lot, devoid of any expression. “I believe
you trust me as your spiritual leader, am I correct?”
“Yes, go on!” says Lot.
Abram continues. “God has not instructed me to enter
paradise just yet; first we must continue in the mountains,
under cover from our enemies, and keep moving south toward
the Negev, a suitable place for everyone and with adequate
pasturage for our livestock!”
Lot lunges forward from his stack of skins and shouts at
Abram, with raised voice, “Nonsense! This is all about that
pyramid artefact. This has nothing to do with God and every-
thing to do with accumulating wealth, is this not the truth?”
Abram is shocked at Lot’s response and immediately
replies, “Is that what you think? And if you are going to con-
tinue in this tone and with that disgraceful attitude, then I am
leaving!” Abram turns to exit the tent and, as he leaves, Lot
calls out after him.
“Every move you make is taking you one step closer to
Egypt, is this not true...my lord?”
Abram ignores Lot’s final comments and hastily exits the
tent. Lot’s wife and daughters huddle together to one side
104
when dispute erupts, and after a few moments, Lot’s wife steps
forward and says to him, “Do you not think you overreacted?”
Lot swings his head around and glares at his wife. Lot’s
wife says, “Well, how are we supposed to enter paradise now?
Are you going to lead us?”
Lot replies, “I will if I have to!” Lot’s daughters look at
one another in disbelief and, without a word, the expressions
upon their faces reveal disapproval.
k
Two more days pass and it is late afternoon. Sarai is due back
from Hebron. The structure is complete and Abram collects
dry timber in preparation for the next sacrifice, which is cur-
rently unscheduled. Lot remains in his tent, as he sulks and
nurses his wounds, and he has not spoken to Abram since the
dispute in his tent. Lot’s wife and daughters have gone back to
their embroidery, as nothing else takes priority at present.
The young daughter hears a ruckus and jumps to her feet,
then rushes to exit the tent. As she reaches the exit, she stops
and peers outside. She hears her mother call after her.
“Where are you going, child?”
The daughter looks over her shoulder and says to her
mother, “It is Sarai, she has returned!”
She quickly exits the tent. As she hurries toward the two
camels, the young woman sees Sarai seated on one, with Alicia
seated on the other; men servants assist them down from
heavily laden camels. She suddenly stops dead in her tracks,
when she sees Abram approach from a short distance away.
The young woman stands and watches as Abram hugs his
wife, and she hears him say to Sarai, “I see you purchased
another camel?”
Sarai’s voice is full of enthusiasm. “Yes, my lord, the
market in Hebron far exceeds anything we have ever experi-
enced and the people trade with ease, as they are all willing
to haggle!”
105
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram laughs, with a ring of approval. “Wonderful!

It appears as though you have bargained very well!”
“Indeed, my lord!” says Sarai. “Please wait one moment,
as I have brought you a gift!”
Sarai reaches up to the camel and retrieves a long stick,
which is tied to the straps of the camel’s seat. She hands it to
Abram. “Your gift, my lord!”
Abram stands with it in his hands and examines the crafts-
manship; it is crafted in dark and toughened rosewood, with a
sheen. He takes a closer look at the carvings etched into the
wood and peers at what appear to be symbols of an unfamiliar
language. After a prolonged study of the item, Abram looks at
Sarai and asks, “What is it?”
Sarai laughs. “It is a staff, my lord. I thought it may help
support you during your journeys, you know, something to
lean on!”
Abram lifts a smile, which struggles among a mass of
beard, before he mumbles a response. “Yes, I see where this
could be useful!”
“You will notice how it is slightly crooked, due to the nat-
ural curvature of the wood,” Sarai tells him, “but worry not,
as it is tough enough to support your weight, my lord!”
Abram laughs heartily. In a loud voice, he says “So,
maybe I should use it to thrash some sense into Lot?”
Abram speaks aloud, before he realises that Lot’s youngest
daughter stands nearby and listens. As he glances over to
her, she immediately turns her face away, so as to gesture
her disapproval. She quickly turns and runs back to her
father’s tent.
Abram looks at Sarai with a serious expression and Sarai
rolls her eyes.
“You may be joking about Lot,” she tells Abram, “but she
fails to comprehend the joke!”
“Joking I am not, Sarai,” Abram says. “His attitude
recently is appalling!”
106
“Maybe, but the young woman is clearly upset!” Sarai

points out.
Abram gives Sarai a prolonged look, but Sarai stares
straight back; not another word is spoken between them.
Back in her father’s tent, the young woman kneels at her
father’s feet and relates to Lot what has just occurred. She
opens the conversation by saying, “Tell me, Father, why is
there animosity between you and Abram? I perceived you to
be like close brothers, is this not true?”
“Why do you ask, child?”
She looks up into her father’s face. “I went outside to
greet Sarai on her return from Hebron, and I overheard
Abram say that he should beat you with a stick to bring you to
your senses!”
“Oh, did he really?” says Lot, as he struggles to rise to his
feet. “Bring him here now and let him try it. He may walk in
but he will crawl back out!”
The young woman places both hands on Lot’s shoulders.
“Relax, Father. You see, this is what I mean! You both bicker
continuously!”
Lot slumps down to where he was previously seated and
his daughter continues to stand. “I wish you and Abram could
make peace,” she says. “You see, Father, we need him to lead
us into the land promised to us, is this not true?”
Lot sits with his head down, thinks, then looks up. He says
to his daughter, “Maybe not. You see, if we could leave here
now, with Abram’s blessing, then surely God will keep us safe
and continue to bless us?”
“Do you think?” replies his daughter.
Lot’s wife approaches, as she has finished her embroidery,
and with a curious tone in her voice, she asks, “Is this a private
discussion, because I overheard parts of it?”
“Which parts?” Lot replies.
“It sounds like you intend to proceed into the valley with-
out Abram. Is this wise?”
107
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot rises to his feet, although unsteady due to his injuries,

and says in a low tone, “Listen, both of you, we can do this
without Abram. Besides, he is determined to drag all of us
down to Egypt. Think about it...we could end up sold as
slaves?”
Lot’s wife laughs, “Nonsense! Your imagination defies
logic!”
“Oh really!” says Lot. “Well, just you wait and see!”
Lot’s wife replies, “Well before you make any decisions,
I suggest you attend the meeting before dusk!”
“What meeting?” Lot replies.
“Have you not heard? Abram has organised for all of the
assembly to congregate around the sacrificial altar before dusk
and I think we should attend!”
“Not a sacrifice, I hope?” says Lot.
“No! Just a speech, instructions about our next move, we
really should attend, do you think?”
Lot sits down “No! I cannot stand for long periods, as my
legs are weak since the accident, but you should go and take
the girls with you. I can tell you both now though; Abram
plans to move to Egypt!”
With that said, Lot’s wife instructs her daughters to pre-
pare to leave for the assembly and they immediately begin to
gather extra cloths to prepare for the cold night air, they
expect a long speech. Lot’s wife leans over and kisses him.
“Rest up until we return. In the morning, we should remove
those dressings from your legs, to assist healing!”
Lot nods in agreement and his wife and daughters leave
the tent together.
Outside, a huge crowd has formed around the structure.
Lot’s wife and daughters hurry to join the stragglers as they
make their way toward the crowd. Abram has positioned him-
self at a level that gives him elevation over the people and the
final remnants of the congregation close in, including Lot’s
family. The noise of people who talk spreads across the plain
108
and the sun now sets over the horizon in the west. Abram
stands poised, with staff in hand, and waits for the noise of the
people to die down. He raises his staff above his head and he
calls for silence. A few moments pass and the crowds become
quiet, as they wait to hear Abram’s words.
Abram lowers his staff and surveys the crowd. A sea of
faces looks up at him, and they wait for his instructions. A few
moments pass and Abram begins his speech.
In a loud clear voice, he begins, “Murmurings and gossip
have passed through this camp like poison. The telling of tales
has issued forth and questions are raised about who should
lead us into the Promised Land. Well, let me tell you this,
people! God Most High is the one who will lead us into
paradise, and Yahweh’s instructions will be issued through
me, and only me. Has anyone here present heard the voice
of God?”
Silence remains among the assembly and Abram contin-
ues, “Well then, your silence confirms that Yahweh has not
spoken to any one of you. So, tell me please, why are some of
you questioning my authority concerning spiritual matters?
Whether to my face or in secret, Yahweh knows who the
guilty ones are. Rebellion will not be tolerated among His
people, so take this speech as a warning to you all. If gossip
continues, this will cause divisions among us, incite God’s
wrath and cause him to choose from a divided congregation.
I, for one, do not want to see disharmony among us. No, we
must stand united in our quest for freedom. Do we not have
enough enemies surrounding us, without fighting and bicker-
ing amongst ourselves?”
A man named Ussiah reaches out from the crowd and
shouts at Abram.
“If God is protecting us, then why did we lose so many to
the Hittites?’ Ussiah asks. “And why are we drifting like sheep
without a shepherd? And where is this promised paradise with
trees offering the gift of life?”
109
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram continues his speech. “Paradise lies deep within

the valley and beyond those mountains to the east!” While
Abram points toward the mountains with his staff, the dis-
gruntled Ussiah again calls out to Abram.
“In that case we should go there at first light and take
what is rightfully ours!” Ussiah shouts.
Many in the crowd cheer in agreement; Abram raises his
arms to silence them. After a few moments silence, Abram
continues his speech.
“Listen, people, we cannot enter paradise at this point in
time, as it is far too dangerous. The valley is infested with
Canaanites, unruly vicious savages who will tear you apart on
sight. No, our numbers are few compared to them; we simply
will not survive!”
A lone voice calls out from the back of the crowd. “Surely,
God will give us the victory on your command!”
Another man calls out, “The land is ours, so we should
claim it!”
Abram raises his voice. “Yahweh will give the word when
it is safe to proceed. Until then, we must remain in the moun-
tains, under cover from our enemies!”
The noise in the crowd gradually subsides. Abram
continues.
“Tomorrow, we will leave for the Negev, a tract of land in
the low plain which is well-watered and suitable for pasturage.
We may reside there until Yahweh grants us permission to
enter the Promised Land, by which time we may make our
entrance from the south, by passing through the valley of
Siddim!”
Abram can sense that he is winning his audience over, and
concludes his speech, “Fear not, people, for Yahweh is your
stronghold, your shield and protector. Go to your tents in
peace, knowing that, this night, Yahweh has issued forth a
blessing to you all. Get plenty of rest and sleep well, for
tomorrow we have a long journey ahead of us!”
110
With that said, Abram climbs down and the people begin
to disperse in all directions throughout the settlement. Abram
remains behind to hold a discussion with Sarai and Alicia,
while Lot’s wife and daughters make their way home toward
Lot’s tent.
Night has fallen and it has turned very cold. As Lot’s fam-
ily enter the tent, they talk to one another about the evening’s
events, and Lot sits alone in the dark. He suddenly speaks and
startles the women, who hold onto their chests, with hearts
pounding. Lot’s wife shrieks, “Lot, you almost scared us to
death. What are you doing sitting in the dark, moping or
something?”
“Calm down,” Lot says. “I stayed up to hear the news!”
Lot’s wife, still breathless, says, “Oh, you scared me so;
I thought you would be in bed asleep by now?”
With impatience in his tone, Lot says, “Well, are you
going to tell me or not?”
His wife takes a seat near him. “One moment please,
while I catch my breath!” she says. “Abram’s speech was
very much to the point; first he warned us against gossip
and explained the reasons why we cannot enter the valley
just yet!”
“Huh!” says Lot. “Notice how he links the two together;
he always was clever when it came to public speaking. Is there
anything else?”
“Why yes!” His wife responds. “He said we were leaving
for the Negev tomorrow!”
Lot quickly sits forward. “I told you, every move we make
he just gets closer and closer to Egypt!”
Lot’s wife rises to her feet and says, “Lot, what on earth,
are you talking about? Abram never mentioned Egypt once,
not once!”
In another part of the tent, Lot’s daughters dress for bed
and after they lie down together, the younger says to the elder,
“Do you worry about Father?”
111
PAUL JUSTICE
The elder sister replies, “Worry...of course not, why do

you ask?”
The younger replies, “It is just that...lately…he seems so
touchy and, you know, unhappy about everything!” She sighs
from deep within.
The elder sister responds flippantly, “Father is Father.
You know, he speaks first and thinks later!” She then rolls onto
her other side, ready for sleep.
112
8
The Descent into the Negev
Early the next morning: Lot wakes as his elder daughter

shakes him. With urgency in her voice she says, “Father!
Wake up! We need to remove the cloth from your legs and
you need to bathe before the journey.”
Lot rolls over onto his back, peers up at his daughter
through squinting eyes, then he says in a tired voice,
“Journey?”
His younger daughter stands at a distance, holding clean
linen in her arms. She steps forward, “Yes, Father, have you
not heard? Today, we journey down the mountain to the low
plain. Abram says it is lush with green pasturage, with rivers
and streams that provide adequate water. Exciting, is it not?
We need to get ready to leave!”
Lot, who can barely open his eyes, responds, “Do not
build your hopes up my child, Abram is guessing!”
At that moment, Abram enters the tent and approaches
Lot. “I heard my name mentioned?”
Lot sits up in bed and momentarily rubs his eyes. “What
is this I hear about the descent into the Negev?”
Abram smiles. “I take it you were absent last night due to
sickness? Well, I told the entire congregation that we cannot
enter paradise just yet, and I explained the reasons why. Also,
we cannot remain static in the mountains; sooner or later, our
enemies will find us and strike. Our best option is to descend
into the lower plain, into the Negev!”
113
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot lowers his head and his appearance is deflated.

Without a word, he exhales a deep sigh. His daughters stand
and gaze at Abram, but they do not know what to expect. He
looks at them both and says, “Remove the dressings from your
Father’s legs. The air needs to circulate in order to heal
them!”
The young women both curtsy and, in one voice, say “Yes,
my lord!”
Abram turns to leave, and before he has time to exit the
tent, Lot calls out to him.
“Just tell me one thing?” Lot asks.
Abram stops and looks over his shoulder.
“If you intended moving on,” says Lot, “why did you
spend two days building a permanent structure?”
“A landmark – I want something to identify my territory!”
Abram replies.
Lot invokes a deep frown before he flops back onto his
bed. Abram exits the tent.
Keen to get ready to leave, Lot’s daughters begin to
unravel the cloth from his legs, but the dried blood makes it
difficult. Lot shouts through the discomfort, which causes his
wife to run toward him. She sees her daughters remove the
cloth and says, “Keep tugging, it is the only way!” The two
daughters persist, eventually they reveal Lot’s lower limbs,
which are red raw, although a crust has begun to form on the
surface skin. They take hold of Lot’s arms and both daughters
lift him. The elder daughter says, “Come, Father, we will help
you bathe and dress for the journey!”
k
Late morning: everyone in the camp is ready to leave. Abram
rushes around with staff in hand, reminding everyone he pass-
es to keep children nearby and to look out for predators. He
moves away from the crowds, and Abram advances toward a
clearance in the mountains. He looks down toward their path
114
of descent, but he thinks, this is not going to be easy! He turns to

face the crowds, raises his staff above his head, and calls out in
a loud voice, “This is the way, everyone. Follow my lead!”
Abram begins his descent over rocky terrain, while the
tribesmen, women, children and animals all follow him at a
close distance. Eight hours have passed and the people strug-
gle. Their descent is arduous and many receive cuts and bruis-
es. Women and children cry and the noise from their livestock
drives them to distraction. The territory is unforgiving as the
dusk closes in. Abram finally calls a halt to a caravan of tired
and disillusioned people. They call out from the crowd.
“How much further is it?”
“You have led us into a death trap!” one man cries out.
“You promised us paradise, and led us into a barren land
only fit for jackals!” another man says.
Abram raises his staff. “Listen people, this is just a means
to an end. You will see the fulfilment of the promise and
paradise is your ultimate reward. Yes, you will suffer a little
hardship along the way, and this is to be expected. Hold on
to your dreams with intensity and do not weaken. Now,
pitch your tents and rest!” With that, Abram climbs down
from the rock and begins to gather dry timber to light a
campfire.
k
Nightfall: Abram sits alone around a campfire that gently
crackles with each burning ember, when he hears someone
approach.
A voice says, “I heard what you said about dreams!”
Abram turns and looks up to see Lot who stands there; the
glow from the fire highlights his face.
“Lot, how are your legs?” asks Abram.
Lot sits down near the fire, so as to face Abram. “Better.
They have scabbed over so they must be healing!”
“Good!” says Abram.
115
PAUL JUSTICE
A few moments of silence pass and Lot continues to look

at Abram. “You know, the people have followed you faithfully
for hundreds of miles and without complaint; only now, are
people beginning to lose heart, and quite frankly, I cannot
blame them!”
Abram removes his stare from the fire and looks directly
at Lot. “Explain?”
Lot continues. “Do you not think you are pushing the
people a little too hard, promising them everything while giv-
ing them nothing?”
Abram’s facial expression is one of shock and he is
dumbfounded. He struggles to answer. After a few moments,
he says, “Let me tell you something, Lot. Since we were
boys, you agreed with everything I said. You took part in
everything I did. Now, suddenly, and after all these years,
you turn against me. I fail to understand it. What have
I done?”
Lot lowers his head momentarily, looks up and says, “I am
not against you, Abram, and I respect you as my leader and
kinsman. I want to believe that God guides your path, but
I sometimes feel that it is you guiding everyone’s path.
Leading us into danger and costing us lives!”
Abram quickly responds, “Trust me. Can you continue to
do that much?”
“Why, yes!” says Lot, “but you still have not answered my
question.”
Abram replies, “Trust me, Lot, and rest assured that
everyone who trusts my direction will be blessed. Yahweh will
bless those who trust me and follow me without question, just
as He will curse those who do not!”
Lot stares at Abram and gulps. “In that case, I guess we
have no choice!”
“Oh, you do have a choice, believe me!” says Abram.
Lot glances into the fire, which has burned low. “Time
I retired for the night, and I will see you at dawn!”
116
Abram nods in agreement. Lot rises to his feet and stands,

looks down at Abram, then places his left hand upon Abram’s
shoulder to reassure him. “I am with you Abram,” he says, “I
always have been and always will be!” Lot then slowly walks
away toward the settlement and enters his tent.
The smell of burnt wood lingers around Abram as he
sits and stares into the campfire, as the distant cries from
frightened animals continue into the night. The settlement
is restless, for the people are anxious over what the next day
will bring. Although the people’s hearts are filled with hopes
and dreams, it is the cloud of uncertainty which prevails
among them.
k
Morning: Abram remains curled up by the ashes of a dead
campfire, while a congregation of hundreds of people are busy
as they dismantle their tents. Lot approaches Abram.
“Abram, wake up! It is time to leave!”
Abram sits up and leans on one arm to look up at Lot.
“Is it time?”
“Yes, look. The sun rises in the east, and it looks like it is
going to be a glorious day. Come, breakfast is ready!” says
Lot.
He helps Abram to his feet and leads the way toward the
tent. On arrival, they both enter Abram’s tent, only to see the
tribeswomen grouped over a bowl; its contents resemble thick
lentil stew. The women dip their fingers in and consume the
red stew as though it were their last meal. Sarai looks up and,
after she swallows the red, she says, “My lord Abram, come,
you must eat!”
Abram gestures; with the tips of his fingers he touches his
forehead, bows, and approaches the women. The gesture has
gone unnoticed by most and misunderstood by others, and
Abram breaks a piece of bread and dips it into the stew and
eats. His face contorts.
117
PAUL JUSTICE
“The mix is cold!”

“Of course!” says Sarai. “We made it last night, while you
segregated yourself to the open fire outside!”
Abram replies, “Yes, I needed to reflect!”
Sarai pushes the bowl toward Abram. “Eat your fill.
Another gruelling day awaits us!”
Abram dips more bread and Sarai begins to question him,
asking, “What were you reflecting over?”
“The journey,” Abram replies. “I have been informed not
to push the people too hard!”
Lot stands near the entrance of the tent, pricks up his
ears and listens while he looks at Abram. Sarai appears
intrigued.
“Oh, another dream, my lord?” she says.
“No!” says Abram. “Just a friendly tap on the shoulder!”
He continues to eat.
Sarai looks at Lot’s wife and giggles. “A new approach
I think?”
Lot’s wife frowns and completely fails to understand Sarai.
A ruckus occurs outside the tent, which distracts Lot from the
conversation. He quickly exits the tent to find two men who
brawl over a goat. One man hangs on to the horns while the
other grips its back legs; the goat is suspended and struggles.
Lot rushes over to the men.
“Enough! Enough!” he exclaims. “What are you trying to
do to this poor animal?”
The man that holds the back legs loosens his grip, then
lets the goat drop.
“He is claiming this animal, when it is mine…I mean
yours, my lord!”
Lot looks at both men and glances at the goat. “Well, this
one is easy to solve; all of my animals have their ears clipped,
while Abram’s do not. I suggest you check its ears?”
The man who holds the goat makes a thorough
inspection of both of its ears, then looks up and says, “The
118
goat has one ear clipped; this could have happened in an

accident?”
“Nonsense!” retorts Lot. “We only clip one ear, why clip
two? Hand it over!”
The man pushes the goat with his foot toward the other
herdsman. He brushes the palms of his hands together, so as
to gesture the washing of his hands with respect to this issue,
then he swiftly turns and quickly walks away. Lot looks at the
herdsman who stands and holds the goat by one horn.
“Take the goat and put it with the others,” Lot tells him.
“We will be leaving after breakfast!”
The herdsman bows. “Yes, my lord!”
The man leaves and drags the goat by one horn.
k
Mid morning: The people have congregated as they are now
packed and prepared to leave. Lot is up front with Abram and
is ready to assist to lead the people in their final descent into
the Negev. As they continue to negotiate every slope and
jagged rock which cascades down, the sun continues to rise,
high above them and the heat burdens all. With intensity, the
sun beats down and some of the people begin to weaken,
stumble and fall. The cries from children begin to increase.
Abram turns to Lot.
“I do not want the people exhausted like yesterday. By
midday, we will pitch tents and rest. We must get the children
out of the sun before the hottest part of the day!”
“Good, you are now trying to think of others!” says Lot.
Abram looks up at him and does not answer; he is a little
lower on the decline. The jagged slopes continue until Abram
notices level ground just beneath them, with mountains to the
west and cliffs to the east. The plateau is a suitable place to
rest. Abram and Lot are the first to touch down; they sit and
wait for the others to catch up.
k
119
PAUL JUSTICE
Noon: Everyone has gathered on the plateau and many pitch

their tents. Children hide among shady crags, out of the sun’s
rays, and wait for their parents to call them. Abram stands near
the cliff edge, looks down, then tries to negotiate in his mind
just how difficult the remainder of the decline into the Negev
will be. One of his herdsmen approaches him from behind.
“My lord Abram, how much further before we reach the
bottom!”
Abram glances over his shoulder and says, “Come here
and look!”
The man moves closer and stands next to Abram, “What
are we looking at?”
Abram points his staff over the valley, “Look down there.
I can see the Negev from here and I think another day’s jour-
ney should do it.”
The man follows a line of sight from the tip of Abram’s
staff. “I do not see any green, and it looks like desert!”
Abram replies, “That is because we are so high up; just
wait though and you will see just how lush a pasturage we will
find when we get there!”
“I hope so my lord!” says the man. “You see, our animals
are suffering; some of them are just skin and bones. I have no
idea how much longer they will last.”
Abram turns away from the cliff’s edge and walks toward
the plateau; the herdsman walks alongside him. Abram places
his right hand upon the man’s shoulder as they walk.
“Do not be overly concerned about the animals, my
friend. You see, animals are expendable, whereas humans are
not. Your first concern is your wife and children!”
The man nods in agreement, just as Abram stops and
points with his staff.
“What on earth are they doing?” he asks.
Lot and several other men are laid face down to the
ground and peer over the cliff’s edge, which faces toward the
east. Abram rushes over to them.
120
“What are you doing?”

Lot looks over his shoulder, waves his hand and says,
“Shush, get down!”
Abram lowers himself to the ground and crawls over to
position himself next to Lot. He peers over the cliff’s edge and
whispers, “What, what is it?”
Lot whispers back, “Look, women and children, and they
are many!”
Abram whispers a reply, “Yes, cave dwellers!”
“So where are the men?” asks Lot.
Abram whispers back, “Hunting!”
“The men hunt?” Lot questions.
“Yes, they hunt for food!” says Abram.
A few moments of silence prevails, while the men contin-
ue to watch. Lot whispers to Abram, “Notice how the women
wear very little clothing, just a loin cloth!”
“Yes, I noticed!” says Abram.
Lot continues. “Who do you suppose they are?”
“Perizzites!” says Abram.
“Who?” says Lot.
“Perizzites!” repeats Abram.
Lot frowns and looks at Abram. “Where do you get these
names?”
“God tells me,” Abram replies. “Yahweh knows all of the
tribes in this region!”
“Yes, of course!” says Lot.
One of the men raises his head and says to Abram,
“Should we go down and investigate, my lord?”
“Shush,” Abram says, then waves his hand for the man to
get down.
They all continue to watch the women, until Abram turns
to Lot, “We are behaving like adolescent boys. Come, we will
go down and greet the women!”
The men rise to their feet and follow Abram down the
lowest descent they could find, and within the hour, the
121
PAUL JUSTICE
twelve of them have reached the lower plateau, which features

several caves within the mountain which faces west. The
women are a short distance from the caves and are engaged in
their daily chores, while their children play nearby. Abram
and his men approach and Lot points ahead of him.
“Look Abram, fruit trees and foliage!”
Some of the women have noticed the men as they
approach, and with a shrill cry, they alert the others.
Pandemonium breaks out as the women begin to grab their
children and run to the caves. They all quickly hide and, with-
in seconds, the area is cleared. Abram stops the men, as he
does not want them to advance any further, and he alone
approaches one of the caves, then stops a short distance from
the entrance. He calls out to the women.
“We come in peace and we mean you no harm!”
A few moments pass, no result. Again Abram calls out,
“We came because we were curious about this settle-
ment!”
A young woman appears, then crouches at the entrance.
She peers at Abram, wide-eyed, while the rest of the women
hide. Abram offers his hand to her.
“I will not harm you, come!”
He gestures with his hand for her to approach. The
woman stares and remains slightly crouched, as she cautious-
ly moves a little closer to Abram. Suddenly she stops, makes a
vocal sound, and she invites other women to appear at the
entrance. Abram is intrigued and smiles. The rest of the men
remain at a distance and watch. The young woman advances
a little further. With caution, she reaches out and feels the
fabric of his long tunic, never taking her eyes away from his.
She places her hand around his staff, and Abram loosens his
grip, then allows her to take it. With a stern frown upon her
face, she closely examines the inscriptions carved into the
wood; then she looks up at Abram and says in her native
tongue, “Old man, explain the symbols?”
122
Abram frowns as he fails to understand her dialect. She

hands the staff back to him and takes hold of his hand. “Come
and see!”
She leads Abram toward the cave, and he cannot help but
notice the tattoo of a winged creature which covers almost the
entirety of her back. The young woman gestures for the other
women to stand aside; they quickly recede into the cave. As
they enter the cave, the woman takes a lit torch from the wall
and leads Abram deep within its cavities. The other women
watch as the torchlight gradually disappears. As Abram and
the woman progress, a large hollow opens up before them and
she stops and points at the walls. Waving the torch from side
to side, the woman reveals to Abram a display of art, and
painted on every wall, sketches which depict scenes, with each
sketch which tells its own unique story. Abram moves in a lit-
tle closer and takes hold of the woman’s arm to steady the
light; his face frowns as he peers closely. The woman babbles
in her native tongue at high speed, as she attempts to relate
the stories behind each fragment of this unusual art; Abram
struggles to decipher a single word of it.
He loosens his grip upon the woman’s arm and Abram
runs the tips of his fingers over one of the painted scenes. It
appears to be ancient, with a feel of authenticity. Abram won-
ders how old this art might be. He peers into a scene which
depicts giant men who kill smaller men, with winged creatures
which represent birds of prey and they hover in mid heaven.
The birds resemble eagles, very similar to the one tattooed on
the woman’s back. Abram begins to draw up a connection in
his mind, as he sees a pattern develop between the native girl
and the sketches on the walls. Abram looks at the woman and
takes the torch from her hand, then gestures for her to turn
around. The woman looks at him with uncertainty, turns her
back to him, looks over her shoulder and keeps her eyes fixed
on him. Abram stands, holds the torch with the light which
illuminates her back, and he examines the detail embedded in
123
PAUL JUSTICE
her tattoo. He starts at the base of her neck, runs the tips of
his fingers down the length of her spine and stops when he
reaches her loincloth. She giggles and stretches her arms out
either side of her body, which shows the tattoo of the eagle’s
wings that run the length of her arms.
She runs a circle around Abram, then laughs and flaps
her arms to replicate a bird in flight, while she skips and
dances around him. Abram watches, amused, while unable
to take his eyes off the young woman’s beautiful body. Her
slender thighs ripple with every skip, and her arms flap
continuously while the rest of her body glides with ease; her
firm breasts move with regular recurrence with every skip.
The woman charms and is happy to entertain, and she has
certainly bought Abram’s attention. He grins from ear to ear,
as he moves the torchlight and follows her every move. The
warm glow from the torch seems to accentuate the woman’s
beautiful bronze skin, which complements her pleated black
hair. Abram is transfixed. The young woman suddenly
stops dead in her tracks, turns to face Abram and offers her
palms to him, while she stares wide-eyed, in a soft voice she
says, “Come!”
Abram chuckles heartily, as her soft feminine voice and
strange accent have tickled him. She reaches forward and
takes hold of Abram’s hand and after she tugs, she leads him
deeper into the cave and into another cavity. This hollow is
even bigger, with more art on the walls. Abram waves the
torch near to the painted artwork and sees a different story
unfold. The woman rambles again, in an attempt to tell the
story, but Abram fails to listen, as his attention is fixed on the
art. The pictures themselves tell the story to Abram, as he sees
floodwaters teeming from the heavens and images of every
living creature drowning. He moves his torch across the walls
and advances upon more art, the likes he has never seen
before. Pictures of mammoths frozen in ice, fossils in various
shapes, animals he has never seen before, snow-capped
124
mountains and frozen lakes. Abram thinks for a moment, he

thinks, “I knew it; I knew there had been an Ice Age!”
He swings the torchlight around next to the woman.
“How old is this art?”
The woman frowns, as she fails to understand him.
Suddenly men’s voices can be heard, which echo throughout
the cavities. Abram turns and rushes to make his exit, until the
torch which lights his path reveals four spears; they point
directly at his throat, each one held by a Perizzite hunter. The
woman screams and rushes forward alarmed. “No, he is
my friend!”
One of the men looks at the woman and, in a harsh tone,
says, “Who is this man and where did he come from?”
“A drifter, he wandered into our settlement and I gave
him shelter. He admires the drawings!” the woman explains.
The man gestures for the others to lower their spears and
stand aside. He gestures for Abram to light the way toward
the cave’s exit, and the woman holds on to Abram’s clothes
while she follows. The men follow closely behind. When
Abram steps outside the cave, he sees that the sun is low in the
sky and that it must be late afternoon. He looks for Lot and
the others, but they are nowhere to be seen; they ran for the
hills on sight of the hunters return. The man who is the young
woman’s father is introduced to Abram, as he is the only one
among them who speaks Akkadian. After a brief introduction,
the man says, “Stay with us for the banquet, as our hunting
was fruitful today!”
Abram responds, “Thank you, I will stay until dusk!”
k
Sometime later: just before dusk. The Perizzites are grouped
around an open fire near the entrance to one of the caves. The
carcass of a mountain goat turns on a spit over the flames of
the fire and Abram sits opposite the young woman who enter-
tained him all afternoon. She sits next to her father, who
125
PAUL JUSTICE
opens a conversation in Akkadian, when he says to Abram,

“What brings you into these parts?”
“The search for paradise,” Abram responds. “We have
travelled from Ur of the Chaldeans, a journey lasting a few
years now!”
“You said we?” the man notes.
“Yes, we are many; we camp in the mountains above!” says
Abram.
The smell from the cooked meat lingers as Abram watch-
es the man cut into the animal with a knife. He cuts loose a
chunk of tender meat and hands it to Abram.
He hands the knife to his daughter. “Carve the meat and
share it among everyone!”
The girl takes the knife and cuts the meat. As Abram eats
his share of the roast, the man continues the conversation.
“I know this paradise of which you speak. It truly is a
beautiful place; takes ones breath, with its exotic flowers and
fruit trees. They say it produces life-sustaining fruit, just like
the original garden of ancient fables!”
Abram eats the meat and, fat drips from his beard, he
wipes his mouth, “You have seen this paradise?”
The daughter hands a leg of meat to her father, before he
continues.
“Beyond these mountains to the east, it lies deep within
the hidden valley and stretches over great distances, from the
rivers in the north all the way down to the Deep South and
into the valley of Siddim!”
Abram wipes the grease from his beard and says, “Have
you and your tribe ever attempted to settle there?”
The man laughs. “It is almost impossible to get in. You
see, from the north are the lowest declines but it is too open
– you will be spotted quickly and attacked. To the west are
extremely high mountains; likewise, to the east. In the south
is marshland which contains bitumen wells and if you get
caught in the marsh, you slowly sink to your death!”
126
Abram finishes the last of his meat and cleans his hands.
“You said something about being attacked – by whom?”
The man rips meat from the bone and eats. “The
Canaanites, the Rephaim and the Edomites all occupy
the tropical plain. The Canaanites outnumber the rest of the
tribes and they have built five large cities, constructed with
huge walls, with the sole intent to keep everyone else out.
They hunt at night, creeping like chameleons, with their
black skin as camouflage. All you will see is the whites of
their eyes, and by then, it will be too late; they will have your
head on a spike, portrayed to warn others. It is not worth it,
believe me!”
The daughter looks up at her father. “What are you say-
ing, father?”
He strokes his daughter’s hair, smiles, and says in his
native tongue, “I was telling our visitor about the hidden val-
ley and paradise!”
The young woman becomes very animated and, in her
strange dialect, she says, “No, you must not go there, for the
valley of death will curse you and you will surely die!”
Abram smiles and looks at her father. “What did she say?”
The man smiles. “My daughter believes that the
Canaanites are black because they descended from the marsh-
land as demons who seek to inflict their curse upon others,
and because of this, the Gods have banished them to the
deep valley!”
“Your daughter is superstitious?” Abram asks.
“No!” replies the man. “She simply perceives everything
in literal terms and on neutral ground!”
Abram smiles and says, “Before you arrived, your daugh-
ter escorted me into the caves, and she showed me the paint-
ings and tried to explain them; however, I failed to understand
her dialect. How old are those drawings?”
The man responds, “Thousands of years old, since the
dawn of the Ice Age!”
127
PAUL JUSTICE
The man turns to his daughter and says, “Relate the sto-
ries again and I will translate to our friend!”
The young woman tells the tale with much enthusiasm;
her face beams and she is animated. Her father translates for
Abram:
“In the beginning of time and after the Ice Age, our ances-
tors were visited by creatures from another world. These enti-
ties were beautiful, more beautiful than man. So our women
married them and bore their children, but the children grew
up to be giants, towering above the trees. They were wicked
and began killing everyone in their path, and this angered the
Gods, who, in their wrath, deluged the earth with water, so
that the waters covered the mountains. Now, some of our
ancestors survived the flood, kept retained in a huge box made
from timber. After the waters subsided, our ancestors faced a
new world and they recorded the events on the walls of the
cave to inform future generations.”
Abram listens intently. “Your daughter fascinates me and
speaks with much conviction. I wish my people had as much
faith and enthusiasm!”
The man laughs as he listens to Abram’s comments.
Abram continues. “I noticed you all have an eagle tattoo
on your backs, why is this?”
The man responds, “After the deluge, when the waters
had dropped, the earth was strewn with dead bodies; bloated,
offensive, rotten flesh which could have brought forth disease
and pestilence. The Gods sent birds of prey, mainly eagles, to
consume the flesh quickly, to protect our ancestors. For this
reason, we honour the eagle, and for this reason we wear it!”
Abram is so intrigued over these tales that he has entirely
forgotten the time. Night has fallen, which has escaped his
notice, until the man speaks, “I thought you were only staying
until dusk?”
Abram looks away from the fire , looks over his shoulder,
and sees the blackness of night. He rises to his feet and picks
128
up his staff. “Forgive me, I did not intend staying this long,
however your stories intrigued me!”
The man rises to his feet and smiles. “It has been our
pleasure, and I hope you reconsider about your move into the
valley. It may be beautiful, but it is the most dangerous place
on earth!”
Abram thinks for a moment. “Thank you for the advice;
however, my God will tell me when the time is right!”
“Who is your God?” asks the man.
Abram raises his staff to the heavens and looks up.
“El Shaddi, creator of heaven and earth!” Abram says proudly.
Abram looks at the man, then bows with the tips of his
fingers placed against his forehead, and backs away slowly.
“May my God bless you, Perizzites, and grant you the land
that once belonged to your ancestors!”
Abram stops and looks up at the Perizzites, who all stare
at him with expressionless faces. “Farewell, my friends!” says
Abram, as he turns and walks off into the night. The
Perizzites stand together and watch him as he gradually dis-
appears into the darkness.
k
Early the next morning: Lot runs toward Abram’s tent and, as
he enters, he sees Sarai lying in bed alone. Alicia and three
other maidservants prepare breakfast, Alicia notices Lot stand
within the entrance. She approaches him and curtsies. “We
have prepared breakfast, my lord. Would you care to join us?”
Lot ignores Alicia, but looks at Sarai and asks, “Sarai,
where is Abram?”
Sarai opens her eyes, sits up in bed, and covers herself
with the bed sheet, “I assumed he was with you all night?”
Alicia feels her presence is unwanted and returns to pre-
pare the bread. Lot moves a little closer to Sarai, “He was with
me until late afternoon, and then the Perizzites turned up!”
“Who?” says Sarai?
129
PAUL JUSTICE
Again Lot says, “The Perizzites, a tribal community in the

lower mountains!”
Alarmed, Sarai stretches forward. “Are these people dan-
gerous? Their name suggests they may be dangerous?”
“No!” says Lot. “Abram thinks up these ridiculous names
and tags them to tribal groups. Who knows who the Perizzites
really are?”
“Abram could be in danger! Quick, we must organise a
search!” says Sarai. As Sarai rises from her bed and wraps the
bed sheet around herself, Lot bows before her and quickly
exits the tent.
He searches for the ten men who had accompanied him
the day before. Lot’s imagination runs riot as, in his mind, he
sees Abram abducted and subjected to all kinds of heinous
tribal ritualistic practices, and these could involve lurid sex, he
thinks.
Filled with panic, he eventually rounds up the men, who
accompany him in his search. They cascade down the moun-
tain in a tight group, and all keep their eyes peeled as they look
for Abram. As they reach the cliff’s edge, the men crouch
behind rocks and peer out over the Perizzite settlement.
Grouped together like spies, they keep watch. One man says to
Lot, “My lord, look! The tribes’ people surface from caves!”
Men, women and children begin to make their appearance
from caves and spread out to cover the plateau; they appear to
search for something.
Lot whispers, “No sign of Abram!”
The men watch for some time, until one of them speaks,
“The women are beautiful and yesterday they showed them-
selves to be timid!”
Lot replies, “The women portray themselves as timid,
while using their bodies to lure you in, an act of deception!”
“What do you mean, my lord?” whispers the man.
Lot answers, “Ritualistic and lurid sexual ceremonies
offering their bodies and Abram’s to the fertility Gods and
130
Goddesses from ancient times. He will have been subject to

one woman after another until he perished!”
The man quickly replies, “What a way to go!”
Lot swiftly turns his head, as he looks at the man with a
serious expression. “I am not joking about this. Abram could
be hung from stalactites with his throat cut!”
A sombre silence prevails, while the men watch the tribe
below. Lot comes up with an idea that he presents to the men.
“They may have dumped Abram’s body in the mountains.
We should split up and search as far as we can before noon.
I will head south, and if you fail to find him by noon, head
back to camp and I will meet you there. Agreed?”
The men are unanimous and voice their agreement, and
quickly they all go their separate ways. Lot continues his
descent toward the Negev, as he looks for Abram, and after
some time, he reaches a secluded plateau in a lower section of
the mountain – it faces south. The area is covered with grav-
el, sand, loose rocks and dry bush. The midday sun scorches
the ground and Lot sits down to rest. Tired and weary, Lot
shades his eyes from the sun, then places his right hand
against his brow. He squints as he looks out over the low
plain, as far as the eye can see. He loses heart and continues to
imagine the worst-case scenario. He thinks, With Abram dead,
this puts me in command. Only, I am unable to lead the people with
the same measure of authority. Will the people listen to me? No,
I must return to camp and tell the people to find their own way from
now on!
Lot rises to his feet and is about to climb and retrace his
steps, when he sees, to the west, a hollow in the mountain,
surrounded by loose rocks which appear to have been placed
there on purpose. Curious, Lot approaches the mound of
rocks with caution and as he reaches them, he looks over and
peers into the hollow. He sees that fringes of red and blue
cloth protrude from the entrance and, in a low voice, he says,
“Abram?”
131
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot begins to remove boulders one at a time to create a

clearance and lowers himself to the ground on his hands and
knees, then he shuffles in closer to the hollow until his eyes
peer in. He sees Abram, scrunched in a ball with his head
buried in his knees. He shakes him, “Abram, it is I, Lot!”
Abram raises his face and squints his eyes, while he peers
at Lot. A few moments of silence prevail before Abram offers
the end of his staff to Lot. “Take hold of this and pull me out!”
Lot grips the staff with two hands, shuffles back on his
knees, and drags Abram from the dark hollow. As Abram is
dragged into the daylight, the sun immediately hurts his eyes,
causes him to flinch, and he drops face down to the ground.
Lot lets go of the stick, then flops back and lies on the ground,
breathless. Abram raises his head slightly and squints at Lot.
“Where were you and the men last night, when I needed
you?”he asks.
Lot sits up, looks at Abram and answers, “The tribesmen
returned with spears; we became afraid and ran for the hills!”
Abram still squints. “Huh, you left me on my own!” he
says, after which his head flops to the ground.
Lot stares at Abram and says, “Have you been abducted
and subjected to ritualistic sexually themed tribal cere-
monies?”
Abram barely has enough strength to answer. “Lot, this is
no time for jokes. I have spent most of the night beating down
jackals with my staff, one of which jumped and snapped at my
face until I caught it just right with a severe blow to the head.
Soon after, I found that hollow and barricaded myself in!”
Lot rises to his feet and brushes the dust from his long
tunic. “Forgive me, Abram,” he says, “I should never have left
you alone. Only, please do not tell Sarai; she will never let me
hear the last of it!”
Abram slowly steadies himself to his feet and leans against
his staff. He looks at Lot and says, “You can count on me, Lot;
just help me back to camp!”
132
Lot approaches and takes hold of Abram’s arm to

support him and Abram uses his staff as leverage each step
of the way. It is now past noon and the slow arduous climb
begins.
k
Five hours later: The sun is low over the mountain peaks, as
it is now late afternoon and creeps toward dusk. Within the
settlement, the people have been restless throughout Abram’s
absence and Sarai is beside herself with worry, although she
has been comforted and reassured by Lot’s wife all day.
Nevertheless, the entire congregation has lost one full day
toward their final descent into the Negev. Children play in a
clearance among trees, when some of them catch sight of
Abram and Lot return. A few of the children run toward the
settlement and shout, “Abram, Abram!”
Sarai runs from her tent, followed by Lot’s wife, and they
run until they meet up with Abram and Lot. Sarai throws her
arms around Abram as she reaches him, and she is complete-
ly breathless when she says, “My lord, what has happened to
you? You are covered in cuts and bruises!”
Abram replies, “I was attacked by jackals last night.
I thought for a moment it was all over for me, but I found a
place to hide!”
Abram drapes his arms over the shoulders of Sarai and
Lot’s wife, as they lead him toward his tent. Lot stands and
watches as they leave. The ten men who gave up the search
before noon approach Lot and one speaks, “I see you found
him, and found him alive!”
Lot keeps his eyes fixed on Abram and the two women as
he answers, “Yes, thank God!”
The man joins in and watches Abram and the two women,
“So had he been abducted?”
While he keeps his eyes on Abram, Lot says, “No, just
attacked!”
133
PAUL JUSTICE
The man replies, “Well at least he survived to tell the

tale!”
After a few moments silence, while the men stand and
watch, Lot says, “What is it with Abram and women? They
just seem to flock to him!”
“Power!” says the man.
“Excuse me?” says Lot, and turns his head to look at the
man.
The man replies, “Abram is an authority figure; he is pow-
erful and this draws women like moths to a flame!”
Lot turns his attention back to Abram, who now
disappears into his tent with Sarai and Lot’s wife. Abram
spends the remainder of the day, pampered by Alicia and three
other maidservants, while Sarai and Lot’s wife tend to his
injuries. Night falls and the close of another day settles over
the camp.
k
Rebellion erupts
Two more days pass as the masses make their final descent
into the Negev. Abram and Lot take the lead up front, as men,
women, children, all accompanied by domestic animals, make
their way down the slopes and into the low plain. By the end
of the second day, the congregated people finally step foot
into the Negev, only to find that the land suffers from a severe
drought. Abram has taken another calculated risk and has put
the lives of hundreds of people in danger. The land is barren;
there is no grass, no foliage, and no water. The riverbeds are
dry, the trees are dry and brittle, parched bleached animal
bones decorate the cracked landscape, while the atmosphere
engulfs and diffuses deathly silence. Hundreds of people
have congregated amidst the desert plain. Abram and Lot
search the perimeters of the valley, but they quickly become
disillusioned as they behold what unfolds before them. Tired,
134
hungry, frightened and disheartened, the congregated throngs

begin to erect their tents on a parched and abandoned land.
Animals are tethered to rotten trees and children play in the
dirt, and they fail to understand the peril that awaits them.
Abram and Lot return with bundles of sticks for a campfire
and the people are far from impressed. By nightfall, the fire is
lit and the people have settled for the night. Segments of the
community are appalled over Abram’s leadership and a rebel-
lion, implemented by a small group of men, begins to take
root and fester. As the spirit of resistance germinates in their
hearts, the men congregate in one of the tents to discuss their
plan of action. Now Abram and Lot are unaware, as they sit
around the campfire and discuss their next move.
k
Night: A clear sky full of stars glistens over the settlement,
which remains uneasy and silent. The only sounds are crack-
les from the fire and occasional noises from tethered animals.
Lot sits next to Abram, and while he prods the fire with a
stick, he stirs a conversation, “We must move on, first thing.
We cannot stay in this barren land!”
Abram replies, “Of course, I was thinking Egypt!”
Lot drops the stick and looks up at Abram. “Egypt! You
have had Egypt on your mind since we left Akkad almost ten
years ago!” Lot pauses momentarily. “Why Egypt?”
“Where else can we go?” Abram asks.
Lot says, “Why not the valley of Siddim? After all, this
entire mission was to search for the hidden valley, the land of
promise and the garden of God!”
Abram exhales a deep sigh, then looks at Lot as he says,
“It is too early to negotiate taking paradise from the hands of
vicious tribesmen. If we head east and try to enter the valley
from the south, we will meet with the Rephaim. If we get past
those, we will meet with the Edomites. If we get past those,
we could fall victim to the bitumen wells and if we survive
135
PAUL JUSTICE
the marshland, we will clash with the Canaanites head on.

It is too risky!”
Lot replies, “There you go again with those ridiculous
names. Who, dare I ask, are the Rephaim?”
“Giants!” says Abram.
Lot laughs but his laughter gradually subsides as he sees
the serious expression on Abram’s face. He says, “You are not
joking, are you?”
Abram shakes his head to confirm that he is not
joking. Lot says, “I thought those giants perished in the
deluge?”
Abram replies, “So did I, until I heard recent stories about
the Rephaim, cousins of the Nephilim, the men of renown.
Apparently, they coexist with the Edomites and Canaanites in
the valley of Siddim.”
“So I guess we are going to Egypt?” Lot says in a low
tone.
Abram nods in the affirmative.
Lot stretches and yawns, “Well, I think I will pay my wife
a visit; not that I will sleep tonight with those giants so close
at hand!”
Abram laughs momentarily. Lot rises to his feet and bids
a good night to Abram before he leaves. En route to his tent,
Lot passes a dimly lit tent not far from his and momentarily
overhears part of a conversation, which sets alarm bells to
ring. He moves in a little closer to listen, and he hears men’s
voices; they plot a conspiracy against Abram.
Lot rushes into the tent and begins to shout at the men,
“Treachery and treason, how could you speak of Abram in this
way?”
The leader of the rebel group, named Ussiah, rises to his
feet and says, “Come on, Lot. We know you are disgruntled
with Abram. Why, rumour has it that you avoid him for days
on end?”
“Not so!” says Lot.
136
The rest of the men rise to their feet and all seven of them
surround Lot. One of the men prods Lot’s chest with his fin-
ger. “Rumour has it that you found paradise weeks ago and
kept it to yourself, you pathetic scoundrel. We should be
enjoying our reward right now!”
Lot takes a few steps back, stretches his palms out, “No.
You are wrong. Abram will tell us when it is time to enter the
hidden valley!”
One of the men replies, “It is hidden, yes! Hidden from
us!”
The men close in on Lot and one reaches out and grabs a
handful of Lot’s tunic. Lot wriggles free, quickly turns and
flees the tent, but leaves his outer garment in the man’s hands.
He runs to Abram, who remains by the fire.
Lot calls his name as he runs. “Abram, Abram!”
As soon as he hears, Abram rises to his feet and looks at
Lot who runs toward him. Abram rushes to meet him. “What
is it, Lot?”
Lot rambles, breathless, “The men, they are conspiring
against you!”
Abram looks over Lot’s shoulder and sees seven men
emerge from the darkness; they all have angry expressions
upon their faces. Abram moves Lot to one side and steps for-
ward to face the men head on. The men stop a short distance
away and Ussiah steps forward.
“Why, Abram, why have you led us into the valley of dry
bones?” Ussiah demands.
“This was unintentional. The Negev flourishes during the
wet season!” Abram replies.
Ussiah responds, with sarcasm, “Well then, I guess this is
not the season?”
All seven men laugh scornfully. Ussiah continues, “Look,
Abram. We all have wives and children. We can no longer
allow you to lead us to our peril. If we keep following you,
we will surely die, all of us, and we are not going to let this
137
PAUL JUSTICE
happen. Beginning at dawn, I shall lead the congregation and

there is nothing you or your side-kick can do about it!”
The man backs up to the others and they all turn to leave.
As they walk away, Abram calls out, “It is a matter of choice
for everyone!”
The men stop and Ussiah, turns to look at Abram,
“Excuse me?” He walks closer to Abram, and he stops and
says, “Choice! You dare speak to me about choice?”
Abram stands his ground and replies, “When were any of
you taken against your will? You chose this path and I supplied
the directions. Paradise is just a few days journey from here,
so what is your complaint, exactly?”
Ussiah is furious and steps a little closer to Abram,
“Empty promises! For years, we have trusted your leadership
and believed that God was guiding your path. Suddenly,
neighbouring tribes began to attack us and we lost some who
were dear to us. You have had us drifting from pillar to post
and back again. Add to this the building of altars, sending
smoke signals into the heavens, alerting our enemies as to our
whereabouts. And you bring us here, the valley of death. And
now you stand there and have the audacity to say, ‘What is
your complaint exactly’?”
Abram replies, “Very well, it is clear to me that there are
divisions among us. We must settle this by dawn tomorrow.
I will arrange for the entire congregation to meet by the with-
ered oaks and you will have the opportunity to present your-
self as their new leader. Those who wish may follow you into
the valley of Siddim, and those who wish to continue follow-
ing me will remain. Agreed?”
The man bows before Abram to gesture his approval and
leaves with the other men.
Lot approaches Abram. “Have you made the right deci-
sion over this?”
Abram replies, “These rebels must be expelled. If they
remain in the camp, they will turn others against me, for sure!”
138
“You have just appointed him as our leader,” Lot replies,

“and now innocent people may follow him?”
“People are not stupid, Lot. The only ones he will gain
are fools like himself!” Abram says.
“Yes,” Lot quickly answers, “and their wives and children
will fall victim to their actions!”
“I have no control over domestic households,” Abram
replies. “It will be the wife’s responsibility to do what she
thinks is best for her children!”
“Let us hope so!” says Lot.
Abram places his left hand upon Lot’s shoulder to reassure
him, as he states, “It is late. Come, we must rest and rise early
for the assembly!”
Early the next morning, before the sun has begun to rise,
Abram and Lot have risen and rush from tent to tent, as they
alert the people to gather by the withered oaks. Their tone of
voice alerts people to the urgency of this matter. Within a
short period of time, men, women and children head in droves
toward the withered oaks, just as instructed. The man they
call Ussiah, the leader of the rebel group, has positioned him
on an elevated ledge near the mountains which overlooks the
dry plain. The area is surrounded by the withered oaks and
people congregate near them. Abram, accompanied by his
entire family, stands at the back of the crowds, next to one of
the oaks. The six rebel leaders and their families stand at the
base of the mountains and face the crowds. A large patch of
ground separates the rebels from everyone else in the congre-
gation. Ussiah, who is positioned just above the rest of the
rebel group, is about to begin his speech. He stands and
watches as the remainder of the people stream in from the
nearby settlement. The people are confused and wonder why
Ussiah stands where Abram should be. Loud mutters perme-
ate throughout the masses. Ussiah raises his arms and calls for
silence, and very quickly, the noise from the people begins to
recede and drop, until there is complete silence.
139
PAUL JUSTICE
Ussiah calls out in a loud and clear voice, “Abram, your

leader, has been found wanting. He promised us paradise and
brought us to a land more barren than the Eastern Desert.
The man is old and confused, or he has quite simply lost the
plot and this calls his leadership in to question! Perhaps our
God has abandoned him?” Ussiah pauses, as a ruckus erupts
among the congregation, and he waits for the noise to die
down before he continues. “This day, I, as your new leader,
promise you freedom; I will lead you into paradise and help
you all to realise the fulfilment of the promise and you will
experience the reality of your dreams!”
A man steps forward from the crowd and he is furious,
“This is treason,” he says. “What proof do you have to say
that Abram is no longer our leader?”
Ussiah says, “You all have a choice: you can follow me
into paradise or you can stay here with Abram in the valley of
dry bones!”
Murmurs ripple throughout the crowd. Ussiah continues.
“Those of you, who wish to join my group, move forward
and congregate at the foot of this mountain. And those of you
who wish to remain with Abram must stay where you are!”
Ussiah waits while the people make up their minds over
this issue, and many of them are fearful and unsure as to
what to do. A little time passes, no one makes a move, until
a man and his wife, who are elderly, emerge from the crowd
and join ranks with the rebels. Like sheep, others begin to
follow, so that the size of the division becomes clear. Abram
is saddened to see that the division splits some families, as
he stands and watches a man and his wife as they grapple
over their only son. The mother wins the fight and retains
her son within Abram’s tribe.
By late morning, Ussiah assembles all of his people
together to the number of two hundred and ten, and this
includes men women and children. They have no livestock, as
all of the livery belongs to Abram and Lot. So, by noon, all of
140
the rebels are ready to leave on foot, they carry on their backs
everything they own. They set off for the valley of Siddim, a
journey that may take them the better part of five days to
reach, maybe seven days, as this depends on how the people
cope with the sudden change in leadership. As for Abram, he
commends the people that remain with him, and they number
eight hundred and eighty nine, this includes livestock and all
of Abram’s family, and Alicia. After he praised his congrega-
tion, Abram also warned them, he tells the people that rebels
will always be expelled from the camp and that the incidents
that have just occurred must never be spoken about again, as
gossip is also condemned. Abram clears the air, and he con-
tinues to instruct the people to prepare for a few weeks jour-
ney, as they need to leave the Negev before their supplies
deplete to dangerous levels. So the people dismantle their
tents and follow Abram to Shur in the West Country.
141
9
The Rephaim
The valley of Siddim lies at the southern tip of the Jordan

vale, which stretches over one hundred miles from the north,
just below the King’s Highway in the Assyrian territory.
Mountain ranges overshadow it on both sides; the Jordan val-
ley is a tropical paradise with its very own sea, a huge body of
water that the natives call the sea of Arabah, meaning ‘an oasis
adjacent to the Eastern desert’. The sea of Arabah is later
renamed the salt sea after losing its life supporting qualities. And
more recently it is renamed the Dead Sea. On the mountain range
to the west side of the valley are five monumental cities and
the two largest of the five are nestled near to the southern tip,
and they overlook the sea of Arabah. All five cities were built
by the Rephaim with bitumen supplied by the Canaanites.
The Rephaim were giants, genetically designed by their
fathers for the sole purpose of construction with their over-
sized hands and feet, which featured six fingers and six toes.
The Rephaim were not the ugly unintelligent ogres as depict-
ed in fables; quite the opposite. Their appearance was dis-
tinctly human and they were highly intelligent, with
superhuman strength. Their only flaw was the extra digit and
huge hands and feet, which were purposely engineered for
building work. As builders, they could achieve construction
tasks impossible for humans to even contemplate, and they
did just that in the Jordan plain. They built five cities with
enormous double walls to protect them, and they named each
142
one, from north to south, begins with Zeboiim, Admah,

Gomorrah, Sodom and Bela, later renamed Zoar after its
King. On completion of the five cities, each one was appoint-
ed a King from among the Rephaim. King Shemember ruled
over Zeboiim, King Shinab ruled over Admah, King Birsha
ruled over Gomorrah, King Bera ruled over Sodom and King
Zoar ruled over Bela. Zoar was the smallest of the giants, and
he stood nine feet tall and built the smallest of the five cities
alone. The Canaanites were the King’s subjects and they were
many; thousands of them infested the hidden valley like
swarms of locusts. Like a black pestilence, they inhabited all
five cities and each group worshipped their own King.
The remainder of the Rephaim, and they also were many,
were barred from entrance to the five cities for fear they
might attempt to usurp the Kingdom from the others. This
caused rebellion and unrest among them, forced them to join
ranks with the Edomites on the east side of the valley. The
giants managed to coexist with the Edomites although their
houses situated on the east side with some scattered in the
mountains, were too small to accommodate them. So the
Rephaim would troop the valley day and night, served as
watchmen, while they protected the Edomites, and they did
this for food and small favours. Throughout the excavation
and construction of the five cities, the Canaanites worked in
huge numbers, while they dug for bitumen. This work was
carried out in the southern depression of the low plain and the
Canaanites dug in one place after another, until they covered
the whole area with large pits. Because this area is thirteen
hundred feet below sea level, the conditions were hot, humid
and sticky. As soon as the Canaanites had finished and had
fully mined the area for tar, they left it as a trap, to ensnare any
potential enemy who might try to enter the valley from the
south. Over time, the whole area became a lethal quagmire of
black goo the same density as quicksand. The disturbance
caused from mined bitumen, triggered the earth’s crust to
143
PAUL JUSTICE
move, and this allowed boiled fluids mixed with lumps of tar
to rise to the surface, filled each pit with a lethal gunk. The
odour rose from the swamp and could easily stifle one’s
breath, as the smell was potent and vile. The night air cools
the surface of the bitumen wells, and this allows a thin crust
to form; to anyone unfamiliar with the area, it would appear
to be solid ground. The slightest weight would crack the
surface, and allow the lethal substance beneath to claim
another victim.
k
Ussiah, the rebel, leads his people toward the valley of Siddim
and they have not the slightest inkling about the hell they
are all about to face. They have been en route now and have
travelled for six days; they are all tired, weary and weak and
their supplies are low. It is the close of the sixth and it is night.
The people have pitched tents in the hills and they are only
half a day’s journey from Siddim. Their intentions are to rise
early and storm the land which was promised to them by
their God through Abram. They have all failed to realise that
God is not with them, nor will He protect them. Very early
the next morning, Ussiah is quick to rise and rouses the peo-
ple. Men, women and children gather their things together
to get ready for the journey. Ussiah climbs high upon a hill
and stretches his palms up to the sky as he calls out to his
God, “My Lord, Sovereign of the Universe, may your humble
servant lead your people into the land which you have prom-
ised us. For today, we plan to take it and reap our reward. May
we press forward with your blessing and see the fulfilment of
our dreams?”
Ussiah stands, with a brisk wind which buffets around
him…he waits…and he waits…but no reply descends from
the heavens above. Ussiah assumes that he has God’s blessing
and climbs down the hill to meet with his people congregated
below. As Ussiah reaches the people, he calls out to them,
144
“God has sent his blessing to you all; today we will experience
the fulfilment of our dreams. Come people, let us press for-
ward and reap what is ours!”
Ussiah continues to lead the people and, by sunrise, they
are well on their way; they make their descent into the valley
of Siddim. The people rejoice and believe that God was
with them.
k
Noon: The people have gathered in the low hills, surrounded
by trees, and the low plain beneath them is lush with vegeta-
tion. They spy out the land and struggle to see through the
leaves of trees, which are large and thick. The atmosphere is
humid and dense throughout the land and large mosquitoes
swarm in to torment this lost group of people. Ussiah looks
over the cliff’s edge, to see large vines creep over the entirety
of the cliff face. He turns to the people and says, “This is our
way down to the valley. We will use these vines to climb
down!”
“Is it safe?” asks a man from the crowd.
Ussiah says, “The vines are plentiful; each man carry a
child upon his back and the women will follow!” The people
begin to organise themselves for the descent, and each child is
secured to a man’s back by a length of cord. The men go first
and climb down the rock face, followed by the women. It is
now the hottest part of the day and the sun burns without
mercy. The descent is strenuous, but the vines are strong and
assist the people to the ground. Insects bite and persist, but no
one dare loosen their grip for a second. The deeper they
descend, the more humid the air becomes, makes breathing
difficult. By the time they reach the ground, they are all
breathless and lathered with sweat. On the ground, the chil-
dren are cut loose and many tear cloth from their clothes to
wipe moisture from their faces. The people are congregated at
the base of the rock face and all of them begin to survey the
145
PAUL JUSTICE
area. They look all around, and they see enormous fruit trees,
tropical plants in abundance and various green leaves and
shoots, the likes of which they have never seen before. Ussiah
looks at the crowd of people and says, “See how beautiful a
land this is! God has truly blessed us as every patch of this
is ours!”
A woman from the crowd steps forward “Why is every-
thing so large, even the fruit look, they grow so big!”
Ussiah looks at the fruit trees. “It is the climate which
affects them. This is a lost paradise and we have found it. Just
think what the climate will do for us. We may even live for
eternity?”
“Are you sure? We have not investigated the entire val-
ley!” says a man from the crowd.
“Fear not, for God is with us. Come, we must press on
deep into the valley before sundown!” Ussiah replies.
Ussiah leads the way, heading north, and the congregation
follows him. They press forward, but the underbrush makes
progress difficult and the sun continues to beat down upon
them. They continue to push large leaves aside, but some of
the people begin to stumble and fall, while children are unable
to see above the brush. Some children are carried on the
shoulders of their fathers. It is late afternoon and the people
are tired and hungry, although determined to press on, until
the sound of wood that cracks and snaps, together with
thumps to the ground that causes vibrations, makes them
freeze in their tracks. The noises continue and they can feel
the earth beneath their feet tremble. Motionless, the people
stare ahead, while terror encapsulates their faces.
Suddenly, two large hands cleave the vegetation on either
side, as one abnormally broad face peers in at the crowd of
people. Ussiah screams out at the top of his voice,
“My God, no! The Rephaim, everyone run for your lives!”
The petrified congregation disperses in every direction, as
screams of terror fills the air, except for Ussiah who is numb
146
with fear; his legs become weak and he drops to his knees and
stares up at the giant. A large hand seizes his body and Ussiah
is lifted skyward. The giant rips the clothes from Ussiah until
he is almost naked, sinks its teeth into his shoulder, tears
Ussiah’s flesh and begins to eat him. Ussiah screams momen-
tarily, before he blacks out. The blood still clings to the giant’s
lips when he loosens his grip on Ussiah’s limp body, then
allows it to fall to the earth. The body hits the ground with a
thump, and releases sounds of broken bones, but Ussiah is still
alive. His heart continues to pump blood, so that when he
regains consciousness, the plight of his agony will overwhelm
him before he dies.
Men, women and children run, terrified, clueless as to
where to go, other than back where they came from. More of
the Rephaim close in and grab hold of those who cling to the
vine. There is no escape from the valley of Siddim, and the
giants treat it as a sport, as they hunt down every last person
before they gorge themselves on the victims’ flesh. The peo-
ple’s screams for mercy go unheard and no one is able to help.
The giants rule until God decides to become tired of them,
but at this moment in time, the bullies continue as there is no
assistance, not even for the sake of the children. A group of
children between the ages of eight to twelve, and they are
seven of them in total, have temporarily escaped the Rephaim
and have run north toward the Jordan plain. They fight their
way through large leaves and brush, and they eventually make
it to a wide-open clearance. Something the children see caus-
es them to stop dead in their tracks, and they all stand and
stare, dumbfounded.
The cities gleam in the sunlight and huge walls tower into
the heavens from a child’s perspective, and they are mesmer-
ized. The children, four boys and three girls, turn their atten-
tion to the sea of Arabah. How it ripples ever so gently and
glistens like a bed of diamonds as though to reflect sunlight.
The vegetation which surrounds the body of water is lush and
147
PAUL JUSTICE
plentiful and the trees bear every fruit imaginable. The chil-
dren are so focused on their discovery that they fail to notice
or even feel that the ground beneath them melts away. Up to
their knees in bitumen, the children begin to struggle in
silence, as they dare not scream. They struggle profusely,
which accelerates their plight, and in a short time, the chil-
dren have sunk to their waists.
One boy says to the others, “Stop struggling!”
A girl replies, “So how do we get free?”
Another boy says, “One of us should pull against another
to get free, and then pull the others out?”
Another girl says, “But the one pulling will sink quicker!”
A sudden pound to the ground brings a swift silence to the
children, and they all stare at one another, gripped with fear.
Moments later, one of the Rephaim emerges from among
trees. He carries two naked women, one under each arm, and
the women hang limp, lifeless, with loose flesh that hangs
from their arms. The giant approaches the children and sits
down on the ground, some distance away from the bitumen
pits. After he lays the women on the ground, he just sits there
and stares at the children. One of the girls calls out to the
giant. “Help us, big man?” she says in her dainty sweet voice.
The giant laughs, the depth and volume of his voice scares
the children even more, this causes two of the boys to strug-
gle and the girls scream. The Rephaim enjoy their play with
children, in the same context as a cat plays with a mouse, with
every intention to kill and eat it. So the children are doomed
either way, but what appears to be a glimmer of hope is when
the giant rises to his feet and approaches the bog, while he
keeps to the perimeter. The giant gets down on one knee and
lifts one of the boys out of the tar pits. He looks at the boy
momentarily, as an expression of sadness spreads over the
giant’s face, before he utters a deep sounding “Ah!” He rises
to his feet, with boy in hand and looks down upon the chil-
dren who continue to sink, he looks up into the sky, and his
148
stare lingers for some time. Suddenly, and with tremendous

power, the giant swings his right arm and hurls the boy into
the sky at lightning speed. The other children stare upwards
with mouths wide open. The boy continues his flight and
soars into the sky at high speed, and the other children watch
wide-eyed as the boy gets smaller and smaller and smaller
with distance. Natural momentum weakens and the boy rolls
over in midair, before he plummets to the earth at the speed
of a bullet. Like a dart, he shoots into the bitumen wells, and
the impact causes a line of liquid tar to shoot up into the air,
before it drops to the sound of plop.
This tickles the giant, who bursts into a bout of thunder-
ous laughter, and this terrifies the children, who begin to
scream hysterically, as the bitumen levels creep over their
shoulders. The giant stops his laughter, glances at the chil-
dren, “It will not be long now children, good night!”
His final words shake the children and fill them with an
eerie chill; their fate is now only minutes away. The giant
walks away and picks up the two women before he leaves.
Some of the children watch as the giant recedes into the dis-
tance, while others watch the beautiful sunset over the hori-
zon. A final image before everything turns black.
149
10
Entering Egypt
The sun rises over Shur; Abram is in a panic as he rushes

around tethered camels and searches every pouch on every
camel seat. He eventually comes away empty-handed and
hurries toward his tent. As he enters his tent, he sees Sarai and
Alicia as they prepare breakfast.
He hurries over to Sarai. “Sarai, where is it? I have looked
everywhere!”
Sarai frowns as she looks at Abram and says, “What?”
Abram says, “The artefact! I cannot find it anywhere!”
Sarai rolls her eyes. “Have you looked in the box?” she
asks.
“Box?” repeats Abram, frowning.
Sarai reminds him. “Remember, you hid it among the
knives. You said, ‘If anyone tries to steal it they will at least cut
themselves’!”
Abram stands, thinks for a few moments, then rushes to
the rear of the tent. He locates the box, opens it and looks
inside. He removes some knives and sees the bundle wrapped
in Egyptian cotton. He lifts the wrapped item from the box,
unravels it and checks the artefact to see if it is intact. The
sight of blood startles him, as it soaks into the cloth. Abram
looks at his right hand and sees that he has nicked the palm.
He rips a strip from the cotton, ties it around his hand, wraps
the artefact and carries it under his arm.
As he walks past Alicia, Abram asks, “Where is Sarai?”
Alicia replies, “She has gone to feed the camels, my lord!”
150
Abram swiftly exits the tent. He sees Lot approach and

waits to hear if there is any news with respects to Egypt.
Abram calls out, “Have the spies returned?”
Lot reaches Abram. “No, they are probably lost. What
happened to your hand?” Lot asks.
Abram looks at his bandaged hand. “Nothing,” he says,
“just a plan that turned around and bit me!”
Lot stands, frowns and squints, absolutely clueless. “Let
me know when the spies return!” Abram says and he walks
away to look for Sarai.
The frown on Lot’s face remains as he stands, mutters
under his breath, “The plan that turned around and bit me?
The man talks in riddles and invents peculiar names; he must
be losing his mind!”
Alicia approaches. “It is not healthy to talk to oneself in
private, my lord,” she says. “Care to join us for breakfast?”
Lot follows Alicia into the tent but his confusion over
Abram remains.
Sarai prepares the camels for the journey, when she sees
Abram hurry toward her with a bundle tucked under his arm.
Abram reaches her. “Are you almost done?”
“Yes, my lord!” says Sarai.
Abram hands her the artefact and tells her to secure it
within the pouch of the camel seat, whichever one she decides
to take. After she has done this, and has finished with the
camels, Abram and Sarai walk back to the tent together. En
route, Abram says, “Sarai, I have heard, concerning the
Egyptians, that they can be ruthless, which is why I have sent
ten spies ahead of us. And you know how beautiful you are.
I was thinking if they know that you are my wife, they will kill
me to get to you!”
Sarai stops and looks up at Abram. “Maybe we should stay
away from Egypt?” she says.
Abram replies, “No, I have a plan. You tell them that you
are my sister and they will treat me well because of you!”
151
PAUL JUSTICE
“Are you sure?” says Sarai.

Abram says, “Yes, I am sure!”
“Very well, my lord, just as you wish!”
They both walk and return to the tent.
By late morning, the entire tribe is prepared for the long
journey into Egypt. Abram and Lot lead the way, follow the
same route the ten spies took three days earlier. The journey
will take about five days travel and Abram is anxious.
k
The fifth day and it is noon. Abram calls a halt to the
assembly, as they arrive in the hill country which overlooks
Egypt to the west and the Red Sea to the south. The sun
soars above them and it is hot. With staff in hand, Abram
climbs a hill to achieve an elevated view, and as he reaches
the top, he stands and looks over the valley which faces
west. He holds his staff with his left hand and with his right
hand, which bears cloth, he shades his eyes from the sun.
He looks out over Egypt, turns and looks down the hill
and whistles through his fingers to draw Lot’s attention. Lot
looks up and Abram waves to him, gestures for Lot to come
up and see.
Lot climbs the hill, reaches Abram and asks, “What is it?”
Abram puts his right arm across Lot’s shoulders, as he
points with his staff, “Look at those pyramids. Look at the
way they gleam in the sunlight!”
Lot shades his eyes with his right hand. “Yes I see, and
your point is?”
Abram replies, “They are beautiful; they glisten like dia-
monds in a bed of sand!”
“I fail to muster the same enthusiasm, Abram,” Lot says,
“You are obsessed with pyramids and this is not good!”
“Nonsense!” says Abram. “Remember my words. People
will marvel over these for thousands of years to come!”
“Really?” says Lot.
152
Abram pats Lot on the back and says, “Come, let us press
on and we may be entering Egypt before sunset!”
Lot assists Abram down from the hill and they rejoin the
assembled tribe, who wait patiently beneath the midday sun.
Before they continue, Abram says, “One moment, I need to
have a word with Sarai!”
Lot rolls his eyes. “If you must, but hurry!”
Abram rushes around the perimeter of the assembled
crowd, looks for Sarai. He finds her; she sits on a camel and
looks as beautiful as ever. He advances toward Sarai and
looks up, “Sarai, what have you done to your eyes? You have
excelled yourself, woman!”
Sarai laughs and says, “I used a much darker eye shadow!”
“Outstanding!” says Abram. “Remember what we agreed:
you are my sister. Please make no mention of wife!”
Sarai responds, “Trust me, my lord, you have my word!”
Abram nods in agreement and hurries up front to join
Lot. The entourage starts to move and the journey toward
Egypt continues. After some time and travel, Abram turns to
Lot and says, “What do you think happened to the ten spies?”
Lot shrugs his shoulders, “No idea,” he says, “Maybe they
lost their way?”
“Or their lives!” says Abram.
Lot looks at Abram, frowns, as they continue to walk.
It is late afternoon by the time they reach Egypt in the low
plain, and everyone is tired and hungry. Surrounded by palm
trees and foliage, Abram is keen to pitch tents, but Lot is not
as sure, as this is civilised territory and he remains apprehen-
sive. So Abram decides to take the entire congregation on a
tour of the pyramids and Lot is furious. Hundreds of people,
exhausted from the trip, drag their feet as Abram leads them
to the base of one pyramid after another; they all follow
Abram’s steps before he leads them toward a very large sphinx,
fashioned in the image of a panther. As all the people gaze up
at the sphinx, a group of Egyptian men on horseback, carry
153
PAUL JUSTICE
spears, and approach the people. They come from central

Egypt, from the walled city close to the river Nile. They are
dressed in royal attire and when they reach the people, the
men surround them and lock spears, and they allow no room
for anyone to escape. Their leader steers his horse a little clos-
er to the congregation, calls out in a loud voice, “Who are you
people and where do you come from?”
Abram steps forward from the crowd and looks up at the
leader. He struggles to decipher the man’s strange accent and
harsh voice. He answers, “We are nomads, my lord, and we
have travelled in from the Negev as there is a severe drought
in the land!”
The leader surveys the people and notices Sarai seated
upon a camel. He points at her and tells her to approach.
Sarai quickly removes the veil which covers her mouth before
she steers the camel toward him. Sarai’s camel is almost
next to the leader’s horse when he stops her, and he looks
at her through dark eyes, “Your beauty surpasses that of
other women. What is your name?” he says, with intrigue in
his tone.
Sarai replies, “My name is Sarai, my lord!”
The Egyptian feasts his eyes upon her. Abram speaks
up, “Sarai is my sister, my lord, and we tour everywhere
together!”
The leader looks down at Abram and says, “What is your
purpose in Egypt? Why are you all here?”
“I wish to meet with the Pharaoh, my lord,” Abram
replies, “as I have in my possession something of great value,
something of interest. May I show it to you, my lord?”
The Egyptian nods in agreement and Abram walks over
to Sarai’s camel and removes the artefact from the rear of
the seat. He unravels the item and hands it to the Official.
The man takes hold of the pyramid artefact and examines
it carefully, he looks at Abram, and he asks, “Where did you
get this?”
154
Abram replies, “I found it in Akkad almost ten years ago!”

The Egyptian hands the artefact back to Abram and says,
“I will take you and your sister to see the King, so you can
show him this. I think you have something that may interest
Khufu. Mount the camel with your sister and I will show you
the way!”
Abram stuffs the artefact into the pouch and climbs up
onto the camel, behind Sarai. The leader instructs his men to
watch over the crowds until his return; he leads Abram and
Sarai toward the Pharaoh’s Palace. The sun is low over the
horizon and palm trees shade the beaten path, which accom-
modates the horse and camel side by side. En route to the
Palace, Abram looks over to the Palace Official and asks,
“Who is Khufu, my lord?” Abram struggles with the correct
pronunciation of the Egyptian dialect.
The leader answers, “Khufu is King of Egypt. He is our
Pharaoh and you will address him as My Lord Pharaoh!”
Abram nods in agreement and spends the rest of the jour-
ney absorbed in what he sees, as he admires the Egyptian
architecture.
Sarai speaks up. “Look,” she says, “The Nile! It is bigger
than I imagined!”
The Egyptian smiles, looks at Sarai and soon after he
draws his horse to a halt, “We are here, dismount!”
As they all dismount their animals and tether them to a
palm tree, the sun sets over the horizon. Abram removes the
artefact from behind the camel seat and tucks it under his arm,
then walks toward the Palace. A short distance away, he stops
and looks up at two obelisks, which bear inscriptions and are
placed either side of the Palace Gate. On either side of these,
just in front of the pylons, are two large sphinxes, each with a
feminine appearance; these bear the faces of women. The
Palace Official approaches Abram; Sarai follows him. He
looks at Abram, who is transfixed with what he sees, and says,
“Come, I will show you the way!”
155
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram and Sarai follow the Official down a long path with
rows of sphinxes which decorate both sides. The Palace gar-
dens are adorned with palm trees and mixed foliage. They
climb the ramp that leads to the entrance, see four guards who
stand, two either side of the doors. The guards open the doors
to allow entrance and not a word is spoken, as the Official, fol-
lowed by Abram and Sarai, pass through. Centrally located in
the Palace is a large pool, rectangular in shape, and the walls
are decorated throughout with hieroglyphics. From the pool,
the Official leads them through corridors which lead to the
Royal Chambers, where the Pharaoh’s throne is situated, adja-
cent to the sunken gardens.
As they enter the room, they see a man of large stature
seated on the throne. The atmosphere within is tranquil and
calm. The Pharaoh is attended by servants who cater to his
needs, while two of them fan the air with palm leaves. At the
rear of the throne are four tall men of heavy build, who stand
with their arms folded and their faces void of any expression.
The wall lights burn gently, the flames dance, casts a glow
over the two sphinxes seated on either side of the Pharaoh’s
throne. Fashioned in red granite and feature the face of
Khufu, the sphinxes complement the Majestic Ruler, as he sits
on his throne overlaid with pure gold.
The Pharaoh’s clothes are the purest of white, bear an ele-
gant gold trim. The headdress, which drapes his shoulders,
features an array of colours similar to a prism as it reflects
light. The symbol which covers his forehead is fashioned in
gold and silver. Such a contrast against his dark skin is the
Pharaoh’s Imperial attire and the beard which protrudes from
his chin is cut square, while it embraces a silver mantle.
The Royal Official leads Abram and Sarai toward the
Pharaoh and all three kneel before him a short distance away.
The voice of Khufu reflects power, when he says, “Rise!”
All three rise to their feet and the Official steps to one
side. The Pharaoh sits, looks at Abram and Sarai and moves
156
his eyes to look directly at the Official, and he waits for an

explanation. The Palace Official speaks.
“My lord Pharaoh, I caught these people gazing up at the
large sphinx outside the city!”
The Pharaoh replies, “Since when has this been a crime?”
The Official continues, “My lord Pharaoh, no crime has
been committed; only they have arrived in droves and there
may be as many as one thousand nomads. This man is their
leader!”
“I see!” says the Pharaoh.
Abram looks at Khufu, when the Pharaoh, turns his atten-
tion to him, and asks, “What is your name?”
“My name is Abram, my lord Pharaoh!” Abram replies.
Khufu shifts his eyes toward Sarai and addresses Abram,
“This beautiful woman; is she your wife?”
“She is my sister, my lord Pharaoh!” says Abram. The
Pharaoh continues to stare at Sarai for a prolonged period.
Sarai begins to feel uncomfortable and lowers her head.
The Pharaoh moves his eyes across to Abram, “What is
your business here, other than sightseeing?”
Abram removes the artefact from under his arm and says,
“I have brought this for your attention, my lord Pharaoh;
I believe it to be of great value?”
Khufu beckons for his attendant to retrieve the item, and
the attendant hands the artefact to the Pharaoh. He shuffles
the item between his hands, then Khufu finally manages to
remove the lid and looks inside. He removes the papyrus with
care, as the parchment is brittle. The Pharaoh hands the outer
case to his attendant, and he delicately unrolls the papyrus
over his lap. He peers at the drawing and text, then he looks
up at Abram and says, “Where did you get this?”
“In the regions of Babylon, my lord Pharaoh,” Abram
replies, “in the city of Akkad!”
The Pharaoh continues his stare. “The text on this papyrus
is undecipherable; are you able to translate this for me?”
157
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram replies, “No, my lord Pharaoh; I assumed it was

Egyptian!”
Khufu examines the papyrus further, then looks up at
Abram. “Do you understand these measurements?”
Abram continues to look at Khufu with a vacant stare.
“My lord Pharaoh, I do not!”
The Pharaoh carefully rolls the papyrus and hands it to
his attendant. “Take this to the priests and the astronomers
and have them decipher it. I want names, dates, language and
origin. Have them report to me with a conclusion!”
“Yes, my lord Pharaoh!” says the attendant and quickly
leaves with the artefact and papyrus.
The Pharaoh looks at Abram and says, “If this find of
yours is useful to me, what are your wishes in exchange for the
papyrus?”
Abram replies, “Residency in Egypt, my lord Pharaoh, for
my kinsmen, myself and for all of the people that have accom-
panied me, and this includes livestock!”
Khufu sits back in his throne, folds his arms and he
appears to think. He looks at Abram and says, “I will not allow
the land to be littered with tents; however, if this item you
have brought is truly valuable, you will be rewarded in full,
and allowed occupancy among the houses on the banks of
the Nile!”
Abram bows before the Pharaoh in gesture of his appreci-
ation.
Khufu continues, “Until I receive my report, you may
pitch your tents in the East Country, toward the Red Sea!”
The Pharaoh gestures for the Official to step forward and
addresses him. “Return this man and his sister to his people
and lead them to open pasturage, not too far, and keep them
within reach!”
“Yes my lord Pharaoh!” says the Official and immediately
escorts Abram and Sarai from the palace.
k
158
The next morning, as the sun rises over the hills in the east, a
glimmer of light cascades over the settlement at the foot of
the mountains that separate the people from the coastline
of the Red Sea. Some of the people begin to rise and many of
them are excited over their new location, this includes the
children, as Egypt has a beautiful landscape with new territo-
ry for them to explore. Abram, however, rests in his tent,
exhausted from the previous day’s journey. Lot rests also, in a
tent near to Abram’s, and he is calm, now that he has accept-
ed the new arrangements. However, the vision of paradise
remains at the forefront of his mind, seated in his heart, is the
strong motivation to attain it. He sees Egypt as a temporary
plan, manoeuvred through Abram’s cunning diversion, and
that once the issue over the artefact is settled, and Abram
has received his reward, it will be time to quickly move on.
However, Abram has other plans – plans that could require a
prolonged stay in Egypt.
k
Mid-afternoon: The suns heat descends over the Palace in
Lower Egypt. Four men run through the courtyard of the
Palace Grounds; one of them carries the artefact. Four men,
who consist of two priests and two astronomers, quickly
approach one of the guards and converse with him. The guard
escorts the men to one of the Palace Attendants and more
conversation is shared between them. Finally, the Palace
Attendant enters the Royal Buildings and approaches the
throne where Khufu is seated. The attendant bows and
kneels before Pharaoh, “My lord Pharaoh, the priests and
astronomers are bearing news and they have solved the arte-
fact mystery!”
“Rise and show them in!” says Khufu.
The attendant responds quickly and alerts the four men.
The priests and astronomers approach Pharaoh, bow before
him, the one who holds the artefact says, “My lord Pharaoh,
159
PAUL JUSTICE
we have deciphered the drawings and translated the text.

The artefact is genuine and dates back to the first civilisation,
to a people who lived in Sumer, in the district of Babylon,
my lord!”
The priest removes the papyrus from the artefact
and hands it to Khufu, and the attendant takes the papyrus
and unrolls it before the Pharaoh. As Khufu peers at the
drawings, the priest explains what they mean in descriptive
detail.
“The pyramid, to scale, is profoundly large, according to
these measurements, and the twelve chambers are aligned
with twelve stars. The tip of the pyramid is gold and the foun-
dations are granite.”
Khufu’s expression is one of confusion, when he says,
“What are you telling me, exactly?”
One of the astronomers speaks, “My lord Pharaoh, all
twelve chambers are perfectly aligned with the stars, using
intricate precision and advanced mathematics, so they are
timed in conjunction with earth’s natural rotation!”
The Pharaoh becomes agitated, “Again, you are telling
me everything, while telling me nothing! Will someone
explain its purpose?”
The other astronomer speaks, “My lord Pharaoh, we
believe these drawings to be the plans for a huge structure
that serves as a link between heaven and earth, a gateway to
the Gods!”
“At last, an explanation!” says Khufu. “So, where is this
enormous structure? Babylon?”
One of the priests answers, “My lord Pharaoh, we feel it
was never built, as intuition tells me that the details in the plan
surpass human knowledge and understanding!”
“Explain!” says Khufu.
The priest continues, “Human hands did not design these
drawings, my lord Pharaoh, and I feel that the Gods who
mixed with the ancient civilization of Sumer designed these
160
drawings, to create a gateway for the Gods to return from

where they came.”
The Pharaoh sits and mulls the information over in his
mind. “A man named Abram brought this papyrus to me and
he found it in Babylon, so there may be some truth to your
theories. If I have this built, I could follow the path of the
Gods and gain immortality. Would it be possible for us to
implement these plans?”
One of the astronomers answers. “Yes, my lord Pharaoh.
If we translate the details into Egyptian, we can certainly learn
from it!”
“Can we build it?” asks Khufu.
“Yes, my lord Pharaoh,” the astronomer answers,
“although you will need to hire highly skilled craftsmen, and
highly skilled craftsmen who are able to work to such tight
precision only come with a price!”
Khufu thinks for a while. “The cost is of no concern; my
concern is hiring enough highly skilled craftsmen. How long
would the project take before completion?”
“I estimate between twenty and thirty years depending on
the workforce, my lord!” the astronomer says.
Khufu replies, “Very well, this project must take priority.
Take the papyrus and translate it into numerous copies for the
builders. Have the chief of construction brought to me imme-
diately. Go, there is no time to waste!”
The four men bow before the Pharaoh and one of the
priests gathers the papyrus; they quickly exit the Royal
Buildings and begin to prepare for the work ahead.
k
The next day: it is late morning. The settlement near the
base of the mountains is a hive of activity, as the people tend to
daily affairs. Children run, play and laugh. Abram sits near the
entrance to his tent and talks to Lot, when he sees a large crowd
of Egyptians approach, accompanied by a vast array of animals.
161
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram rises to his feet and says to Lot, “Look!”

Lot looks as the crowds approach and says, “Now what?”
As the Egyptians advance, they bring with them sheep,
oxen, donkeys, she-donkeys and camels, ten of each kind, sixty
animals in total. There are also ten men-slaves and ten
women-slaves. Abram recognises the ten men-slaves to be the
ten spies he sent out three days ahead of him. Luckily for
Abram, they remained silent about their mission.
Two Palace Officials approach Abram and one of them
says, “These are gifts for you, from the Pharaoh. He requests
your presence immediately. Come, we will take you to the
Palace!”
Abram bows before the men and accompanies them, with-
out question, although en route to the Palace, Abram asks, “Is
this about the gifts?”
One of the Officials responds, “No, the Pharaoh requests
your attendance!”
Not another word is spoken for the remainder of the
journey and it is afternoon by the time they arrive. The
Officials take Abram directly to the Royal Chambers and
present him before Khufu. As Abram approaches the throne,
he sees a beautiful young Egyptian woman who stands near
the throne and she faces Abram. On delivery of Abram, the
Officials stand aside and Abram bows and kneels before
the Pharaoh.
The Pharaoh speaks, “Rise, Abram, as we have business to
discuss!”
Abram rises to his feet and looks at Khufu, and he can feel
the young woman’s eyes upon him. The Pharaoh says to
Abram, “The artefact and papyrus you brought have proved
to be, authentic, genuine, they date back to the earliest times
of human history. The papyrus is so valuable an item that I am
about to reward you greatly!”
Abram bows, “My reward I received with much apprecia-
tion, as your men have already delivered, my lord Pharaoh!”
162
Khufu laughs, “No, my friend. My men delivered gifts.

Your reward will be paid in silver and gold, making you very
rich. And as a token of good will, you will receive accommo-
dation in Royal Chambers situated in the Palace Gardens, for
you and your closest kin. As for the remainder of your tribes-
men, they will be housed in clay buildings along the banks of
the River Nile, with adequate pasturage for livestock!”
Abram replies enthusiastically, “Your generosity over-
whelms me, my lord Pharaoh, and I am happy you found a use
for the artefact!”
The Pharaoh looks at the Egyptian girl momentarily,
then turns his attention to Abram, as he says, “You see this
beautiful woman to my right? Her name is Hagar and she is
yours…in exchange for your sister!”
Abram gulps and remains speechless; he can only stare
at Khufu. Hagar raises her head slightly to peer at Abram.
An uncomfortable silence ensues, before the Pharaoh says,
“What are you waiting for, Abram? Take the girl!”
Abram bows before the Pharaoh and walks over to Hagar.
He takes hold of her hand and he sees the young woman up
close. She is sixty years his junior. She looks up at Abram with
her beautiful dark eyes that peer over the veil draped across
her nose. Her elaborate headdress glistens with particles of
gold and flows down to drape her shoulders with elegance.
The remainder of her Royal Attire befits a Princess adorned
with outstanding beauty. Abram is perplexed over the offer of
exchange and makes a hasty exit, with Hagar by the hand. As
soon as they have left, Pharaoh gives orders to the two
Officials, “Follow them, and bring his sister to me!”
The Officials acknowledge the Pharaoh and quickly dis-
perse to follow Abram and Hagar. En route to the settlement,
Abram hurries as fast as he can, as he almost drags Hagar
behind him. The occasional soft feminine cries of protest fail
to stop Abram as he tugs on her wrist, and he increases the
pace toward home. They reach the settlement, Abram rushes
163
PAUL JUSTICE
into his tent and Hagar makes a final leap, as she flies into the
tent behind him. Alicia stands and stares at them both, wide-
eyed, and Abram asks, breathlessly, “Where is Sarai?”
Alicia says, “To the rear of the tent, my lord!”
Alicia smiles at Hagar as Sarai approaches. “My lord
Abram, you have returned!”
She notices Hagar and says, “Who is this? She looks like
a Princess.”
“She is Hagar, from the Palace,” Abram explains. “Sarai
listen...”
Sarai butts in, “Have you stolen her? Is this what the panic
is over?”
Alicia giggles, then quickly covers her mouth with her
hand.
“Sarai listen,” Abram pleads, “Remember what we agreed
upon, about you hiding the fact that...”
Before Abram has time to finish the sentence, the
Pharaoh’s Officials enter the tent.
“We are here by order of the Pharaoh. Abram, where can
we find your sister?”
Sarai steps forward, “It is I, my lords, and my name is Sarai!”
One of the Officials says, “Come with us; the Pharaoh
requests your presence!”
Sarai looks at Abram, who tries to talk to her with his eyes,
as he rolls them around his head, which makes him look
ridiculous. Sarai stands and frowns, while one of the Officials
says to Abram, “What is wrong with your eyes?”
Abram blinks fast. “A fly… I…I have something in my
eye, my lord!” The Official looks at Hagar and Alicia, and he
looks at Abram, “The girl’s will take care of it!” Both Officials
escort Sarai from the tent and take her to the Palace.
k
Mid morning: the next day. Abram and Lot discuss the alloca-
tion of animals received as gifts from the Pharaoh and their
164
decision is to share them in equal measure. Abram says to Lot,

“You take five of each animal and mark them as your proper-
ty; this will prevent squabbling among the herdsmen!”
Lot agrees and they sort the animals. The women-slaves
have been allocated to various families throughout the settle-
ment, and the men-slaves, who served as spies, are glad to be
reunited with their families. Abram and Lot lead their ani-
mals, accompanied by herdsmen, when they see an army of
Egyptians approach on horseback. Each one carries a spear
and a shield.
Abram, Lot and the herdsmen stop and Lot says, “This
looks like trouble?”
Abram agrees. “Yes, I hope Sarai has not divulged our
secret!”
Lot still frowns over Abram’s comment, when the army
advances and surrounds them all. The Official who leads the
army steers his horse toward Abram, then stops just a short
distance away. In a clear voice, he calls out, “We are here by
the authority of the King of Egypt, and the Pharaoh sends his
greetings; however, before the close of this day, all of your
tents must be dismantled and everyone moved closer to the
Nile. Clay houses will be provided for everyone, except you,
Abram!”
Abram answers, “What am I to do, my lord?”
The Official responds, “The Pharaoh wants you in the
Palace as a point of reference; he is undertaking an extensive
building project and he needs you on hand!”
“I am not a builder, my lord,” Abram says. “I am a simple
nomad, a traveller!”
The Official laughs. “Do not toy with us, Abram. You are
from Babylon and you are educated in the craft of measure-
ments, numerals and the four points of the compass, knowl-
edge which may be useful to us!”
Abram bows before the Official and says, “As you
wish, my lord; only Lot here is my assistant and he has a
165
PAUL JUSTICE
wife and two daughters. May they reside in the Palace

with me?”
The Official replies, “Your residence has ten large rooms
and a pool in the sunken gardens adjacent to the building,
which is situated near to the Pharaoh’s quarters, so you may
bring whomever you wish, within reason!”
Abram gestures in agreement and shows a willingness to
comply. The Official orders his men to round up the people
to dismantle their tents, before they are led to the banks of the
Nile. Abram prepares to leave for the Palace and chooses to
take with him Lot, Lot’s wife and two daughters, Alicia and
Hagar, his newly acquired Princess.
Late in the afternoon in the Palace, a conversation takes
place in one of the Royal Buildings, the one allocated to
Abram. He sits in one of the rooms, plush with Egyptian fab-
ric which screens every wall, and Abram sits and thinks about
Sarai while Lot paces the floor. After some time, Abram looks
up at Lot and says, “Stop pacing and sit down!”
Lot stops, then looks at Abram. “You know something,
Abram? I struggle to figure you out. Here you are in the lap
of luxury and you sit there moping. We could be out in the
garden next to the pool or touring the Palace!”
Abram responds, “You have your wife and Khufu has
my wife!”
Lot replies, “Ah, so the problem is the Pharaoh having
Sarai. Have you forgotten, Abram, that you have Hagar and
that she is young and beautiful?”
Abram lowers his head and continues to sulk in self-pity.
Lot becomes agitated and says, “So what if Pharaoh takes
Sarai into his bed? You take Hagar into your bed. I would!”
Abram looks up at Lot, raises his voice, and shouts, “LOT,
ENOUGH!”
Lot rolls his eyes and continues to pace the floor.
Abram rises to his feet and walks over to Lot and stops him,
as he says, “This is not about me and what I want; this is
166
about the implications which could result if Khufu sleeps

with Sarai!”
“What do you mean?” says Lot.
Abram continues. “Think about it. God has kept Sarai
barren for all these years, and why?”
Lot shrugs his shoulders and Abram continues. “Because
God has a plan pertaining to Sarai’s womb, and if Khufu inter-
feres, well, I dread to think!”
A puzzled expression encapsulates Lot’s face, when he
says, “Plan, what plan?”
Abram replies, “I am not yet sure, although I do have a
slight inkling!”
“Inkling?” says Lot.
Abram continues. “God is protecting Sarai’s womb until
the seed of promise is ready, the child she conceives will be a
boy, a gift from God!”
Lot replies, “Do you not think God has left all of this a bit
late, considering Sarai’s age?”
“God’s time and our time are like two opposing magnetic
fields, they do not correspond!” Abram says.
Lot frowns and says, “There you go again, talking in
riddles!”
Abram answers, “I do not expect you to understand
the deeper things concerning spiritual matters, Lot, and as
regards Sarai, we must get her back!”
Lot begins to look disillusioned, when he says, “I can see
big trouble on the horizon!”
Alicia enters the room and curtsies. “The Pharaoh
approaches, my lords!”
Both Abram and Lot make a swift exit and hurry toward
the inner courtyard, next to the Royal Buildings. Under shel-
ter from the sun, they stand side by side in the shade, Abram
and Lot watch as the Pharaoh approaches with Sarai, accom-
panied by four attendants. Two attendants carry a large box,
while the other two carry another large box. As Khufu and
167
PAUL JUSTICE
Sarai arrive, Abram and Lot lower themselves on one knee

and bow before the Pharaoh and Khufu tells them to rise. As
Abram and Lot rise to their feet, Khufu gestures for the atten-
dants to place both boxes before Abram. As Abram looks
down at the boxes, the Pharaoh says, “This is your reward,
which I promised. In one box, you will find items of silver to
the highest value and in the other, items of gold, and the com-
bination of both have made you very rich!”
While Abram bows to show gratitude, he can feel Sarai’s
eyes burn into him. The Pharaoh says, “The artefact you
brought me is a gift from the Gods and the information it
contains will give us knowledge beyond our richest dreams.
Work has already begun on the pyramid, and once complete,
it will be a landmark for all eternity, as well as a gateway for
the Gods. And you yourself failed to grasp the significance of
what you had in your possession, did you not?”
Abram replies, “I could not read the inscriptions and
assumed it must be Egyptian property, my lord Pharaoh!”
Khufu laughs and says, “Enjoy your prosperity!” The
Pharaoh leaves with Sarai and the attendants follow. Abram
watches them leave, while Lot examines the contents of
each box.
After his eyes gloat over the array of valuable items, Lot
says, “I do not know anyone but you who could do this:
become rich in one day!”
Abram stands and watches as Sarai disappears into the dis-
tance, and walks alongside the Pharaoh. As he watches, he
says, “What good is wealth when you have lost the one clos-
est to your heart?”
Lot looks up at Abram, closes his eyes, and he shakes his
head in disbelief.
k
The months roll by: Abram remains concerned over the issue
with Sarai, while Lot enjoys the prosperity in Egypt. The
168
Pharaoh has become so engrossed in the details and plans of

his pyramid that he has not had time for Sarai, and neither has
he slept with her. Abram and Lot have become louts, sit in the
shade cast by the rear of the sphinx, and they watch as hun-
dreds of men map out the foundations of what will become the
largest pyramid in history. Their evenings are spent in the
Palace, and they bask in all of the luxury that the Egyptian
lifestyle has to offer. Their wealth and power has created a
diversion for their minds; anything Abram or Lot asks for is
given to them without question, and beautiful maidservants
pander to their every need. They live like Kings and this has
extinguished their main purpose and goal, to offer leadership
and strength for their tribesmen, while they search for the
Promised Land. The people have been left to their own
devices, live on the banks of the River Nile, mix with Egyptians
and learn a new culture; a culture that promotes the worship
of numerous deities. Abram’s God is displeased and things are
about to change.
k
Evening in the Palace: Centrally located in one of the Royal
Chambers sits a large sunken pool which features beautiful
mosaic tiles. Each tile features a unique symbol of hiero-
glyphics and the water is crystal clear. Torches hang from each
wall with gentle flames that cast a warm glow over the pool.
Water splashes, the sound of which fills the hollow room, as
two attendants stand nearby, they hold robes, wait for their
Pharaoh to finish his bath. The two very young and beautiful
women hold Khufu’s attention, while they play and bath with
their King. With the occasional echo of feminine laughter,
Khufu relaxes as he is more than entertained. After some time,
an unusual chill enters the room and Khufu becomes over-
whelmed with goose-bumps as he shivers. He looks up at the
two attendants who stand and hold robes while they stare
ahead, and he notices how their breath is visible, like a fine
169
PAUL JUSTICE
mist. Khufu’s sudden abrupt exit from the pool startles the
girls and one of them responds with a serious expression. She
asks, “What is wrong, my lord Pharaoh?”
The attendants drape the robes over Khufu’s shoulders
and he makes a hasty exit from the room. Both attendants
look at the girls in the pool, as though they were to blame
for the Pharaoh’s alarmed behaviour. And the girl’s simply
stand side by side, naked, shiver and remain speechless. The
Pharaoh hurries through the Palace corridors, leaves a trail of
water droplets behind. The shadows on the walls depict two
figures which move at speed, even though Khufu is alone and
only one of the shadows belongs to him. He reaches his bed-
chamber, and two maidservants dress his bed with clean
sheets. They see their King stand in the doorway, so they stop
work and bow. Khufu looks at the slaves and says, “Go and
alert the guards that we may have an intruder!”
The slaves quickly respond and exit the room. The
Pharaoh stands alone in his bedchamber; he feels cold and
unsettled and the atmosphere in his room is chilled. He
hears footsteps in the corridor and jumps with fright as
two guards suddenly enter the room; they bear swords. The
guards bow before the Pharaoh and one of them says, “The
maidservants tell us that you think there may be an intruder,
my lord?”
Khufu says, “I was bathing, when suddenly, I sensed a
presence. The attendants and bathers were with me; only,
I felt there was another. Search the entirety of the Palace and
find him!”
The guards acknowledge and quickly exit the room. The
Pharaoh searches his bedroom, looks under drapes and under
his bed; he searches everywhere, only to find no one. He sits
on his bed and looks all around. The room is luxurious and
plush and the wall lights flicker, and casts shadows throughout
the room. The Pharaoh sits and waits for quite some time,
suddenly he hears the guards return. They enter the room and
170
bow before Khufu, and one of them says, “We have searched
everywhere, my lord Pharaoh, and there is no sign of anyone
other than who we know!”
The Pharaoh rises to his feet and paces the room, thinks;
looks at the guards, he says, “A King needs his wife in times of
stress. Have one of the attendants bring Sarai to me and make
sure she is dressed appropriately!”
The guards acknowledge and exit the room. The Pharaoh
removes his robes and climbs into bed to lie and wait.
Watches shadows dance on the walls from the torchlight,
this makes him feel drowsy. He almost falls to sleep, when
the voice of his attendant wakes him. “Sarai, my lord
Pharaoh!”
The attendant exits the room. Khufu rolls over in bed and
rests his head on his arm, while he stares at Sarai, who stands
a short distance away. Khufu smiles. “Your beauty takes my
breath away!” he says admiringly.
Sarai stands motionless and looks at Khufu. The torches
behind her shine through the light cotton gown, which makes
it translucent. Pharaoh follows the contours of her body with
his eyes. His eyes rove over her breasts which protrude with a
firmness usually associated with a much younger woman.
Khufu rolls back the bed sheets and pats the bed, as he beck-
ons for Sarai. She approaches his bed with a slow idle swank,
before she slips under the covers and lies on her back. She
remains very still. Khufu leans over her body to peer into her
beautiful face, dark eyes and deep red lips. He moves in close
and kisses her, for the first time. Suddenly, he feels an awk-
ward prod in his back, which startles him. He swiftly turns and
expects to see someone by his bed, only to find there is no
one. He turns his attention back to Sarai; she lies and stares up
at him with a serious expression. Khufu looks at Sarai admir-
ingly, while he gently strokes the side of her face, and sud-
denly he withdraws his hand and sits back. He watches with
disbelief as Sarai morphs into something hideous. Her face
171
PAUL JUSTICE
contorts into a mass of ugly warts and breasts deflate and fall
to the sides, while her arms and legs wrinkle like prunes.
Infected skin hangs from her arms and she reaches out to him.
In a deep manly voice, Sarai says, “Come to me, my lord!”
The Pharaoh jumps out of bed and runs from the room, and
he screams at the top of his voice. He runs through corridors
naked; he continues to run through the Palace, trips, falls and
bumps off walls. Finally, two of the guards see the Pharaoh’s
dilemma and run to his aid, and as they reach him, they
remove their cloaks to cover his nakedness. One of the guards
says, “What is it, my lord?”
Khufu says, “Something hideous is in my room!”
One of the guards remains with Pharaoh, while the other
rushes off to his room to investigate. On arrival at Pharaoh’s
bedchambers, the guard rushes in with a sword, only to find
Sarai, who sits on the end of the bed and looks as beautiful as
ever. The guard approaches her. “Is there something hideous
in this room?”
Sarai looks up at the guard and shrugs her shoulders. The
guard swiftly replies, “Stand on your feet when I address you,
woman. What have you done to the Pharaoh?”
Sarai replies, “Everything is fine; he just suddenly ran
from the room screaming, my lord!”
The guard’s reaction shows he does not believe her and he
begins to search throughout the bedchamber, he finds noth-
ing. He returns to Sarai, “I suggest you return to your quar-
ters and talk about this to no one!”
Sarai curtsies and exits the room. The guard returns to the
Pharaoh and says, “I have searched thoroughly, my lord
Pharaoh, and I fail to find anything that we could consider
hideous!”
Khufu says, “What about Sarai?”
The guard says, “Yes Sarai was there, my lord Pharaoh,
but she is far from hideous, if you do not mind me saying, my
lord Pharaoh!”
172
“So what is it?” asks Khufu. Both guards remain silent.

The Pharaoh says, “Do not dare stand with blank expressions,
as though I were imagining things!”
One of the guards speaks, “Forgive us, my lord Pharaoh,
and we do believe there is something going on. Would you
like us to do a second thorough search?”
The Pharaoh thinks for a while, and says, “This is ridicu-
lous. Take me to my room!”
Both guards escort the Pharaoh to his room and stay with
him until he is settled. The Pharaoh says, “You men have to
get back to your posts. Send me two concubines for company
for the remainder of the night.”
The guards acknowledge and leave. Minutes later, two
women arrive and join Khufu in his bed, and they keep their
Pharaoh propped up between them until exhaustion sends
him to sleep.
Over the next three nights, similar weird incidents
occur because Khufu insists that he wants Sarai in his bed.
Not until the fourth night does the Pharaoh relent with
his persistence and finally gets the message. However, he is
far from happy and fails to understand why he is being
targeted with supernatural activity. The final straw is when
his concubines become sick with fever, and other members
of his household are struck down by various diseases. In a
matter of weeks, the Palace is riddled with pestilence and
some have died. Now Khufu is angry and he wants answers.
And to set the next chain of events in motion he calls in
the priests.
k
Another week has passed since the haunting began and
Khufu has commissioned twelve priests to attend his throne
for a briefing. The priests prepare by shaving their heads
completely bald and they dress in attire that distinguishes
them from everyone else. It is mid-morning by the time the
173
PAUL JUSTICE
twelve arrive. They all approach the throne and bow before
the Pharaoh. Khufu tells them to rise.
The Pharaoh addresses them all. “Pestilence, disease and
supernatural phenomena have ripped through this Palace like
a torrent, and I want to know why. I have my suspicions, as
this all began after the arrival of the Sumerian artefact. I want
you all to work on this and get to the bottom of it!” the
Pharaoh demands.
The one who acts as spokesman says, “What exactly
would you like us to do, my lord Pharaoh?”
The Pharaoh responds, “Investigate, research, travel to
Babylon if you have to. I want to know about the Sumerian
culture, how they lived and why they mixed with their Gods.
For all we know, the artefact may be cursed?”
The spokesman responds, “My lord, people are sick and
dying; a journey to Babylon would take months, even on
horseback!”
Khufu jumps to his feet, raises his voice and shouts, “Do
not remind me about people who fall sick, I have concubines
who swim in their own vomit and faeces. I do not care how
you do it, just get me some answers!”
The priests all bow before the Pharaoh and exit the room.
Khufu beckons for one of the attendants to approach and says,
“Get me a bowl of water and a cloth!”
“Yes my lord Pharaoh!” says the attendant and leaves,
quickly returning with the bowl. After the Pharaoh freshens
up, he summons six Officials to accompany him to the con-
struction site of the great pyramid and they all leave the
Palace by noon. On arrival, the Pharaoh sees some of the
foundation stones are already in place and progress is better
than expected. As he walks around the perimeter, followed by
his Officials, he stops and watches one of the builders shave a
huge sandstone with a copy of the papyrus by his side for ref-
erence. He moves a little closer. Khufu notices sweat drip
from the man’s brow and drops hit the papyrus which causes
174
it to discolour and the ink to run. A moment of inspiration

clicks in Khufu’s mind, as a revelation seizes him. He quickly
turns to the Officials and says, “Bring me two of the priests
and tell them to bring the artefact with the original papyrus;
also, I need a flask of vinegar!”
The Official frowns, “Yes, my lord Pharaoh!” He says.
And Khufu hurries back to the Palace, followed by the six
Officials.
k
Later that afternoon, the Pharaoh sits on his throne and waits
for the priests, a slim pottery vase gripped in his hands. The
sound of voices in the corridor outside the doors disrupts him
as he sits and thinks, and two priests, accompanied by two
Officials, enter the room and bow before the Pharaoh. One of
the priests has the artefact in his hands.
“Rise!” says Khufu, “Roll out the papyrus and lay it on the
ground before me!” The priest removes the papyrus and lays
it out on the ground before the throne near the Pharaoh’s feet.
Khufu says, “Tell me, what will happen if a pour acetic
acid?” He says this while he holds the vase of vinegar over the
papyrus.
One of the priests says, “It will destroy it, my lord
Pharaoh!”
Khufu places his thumb over the narrow spout and
allows a few drops to fall onto the centre of the papyrus.
As the liquid hits, it beads and rolls over the surface, causes
no damage.
Everyone present is amazed and Khufu says, “I watched
one of the builders today and his sweat destroyed a copy of
this, and here acetic acid does not even touch the original.
This is not papyrus; so tell me, what is it?”
The priests look at one another and one speaks to the
Pharaoh, “My lord Pharaoh, without extensive tests, we could
not possibly know!”
175
PAUL JUSTICE
Khufu rises to his feet and says, “I pay you men to solve
riddles and here I stand, puzzled over the unknown?” Khufu
points down to the artefact plan and says, “Take this and find
out what it is!” The priests all bow, and one gathers the plan,
and they leave together. The Pharaoh spends the remainder of
the day with his Physicians, being updated on the state of
everyone’s health, as more and more of the people who work
in the Palace fall sick.
k
Mid morning, the next day: The Pharaoh is seated on
his throne, with two priests who stand before him. One
holds the artefact and the other holds the drawing rolled up
in his hands. The one who holds the artefact speaks to the
Pharaoh.
“My lord Pharaoh, first we ran tests on the artefact and we
found it to be crafted of red cedar and all four sides have
scribed letters chiselled in Sumerian symbols. The removable
tip is crafted in pure gold and this is symbolic!”
“Symbolic? Explain!” says Khufu.
The priest who holds the plan unravels it and begins
to explain, “My lord Pharaoh, the drawing depicts the tip of
the pyramid separated from the body and this is after comple-
tion. We believe the tip hovers by some force capable of defy-
ing gravity, while the body of the pyramid represents the
landing base!”
Khufu laughs momentarily. “I am looking for proof, not
imaginary tales. The drawing: what is the substance matter?”
He replies indignantly.
The priest who holds the drawing responds, “The sub-
stance matter is unknown, my lord Pharaoh. We tried to burn
it and it will not burn; it heats and recoils from the corners
and, after it cools, the sheet becomes brittle!”
Khufu says, “Recoil, you mean like a serpent?”
“Yes my lord!” says the priest.
176
The Pharaoh sits and he thinks for some time. “We are
solving nothing here, so we may have to bury the artefact in
the desert for some other victim to find!”
One of the priests speaks up, “May I make a suggestion
my lord?”
“Yes, speak!” says Khufu.
The priest continues, “The construction project for the
great pyramid progresses well, my lord. Surely, if the artefact
were cursed work would be hindered, would it not?”
Khufu replies, “If you assume correctly, then why does
strange phenomena haunt this Palace?”
The priest answers, “My lord, I speak on behalf of the
priesthood, Officials and guards when I say this. We all
believe the problem lies not with the artefact but with the
messenger who delivered it!”
“You mean Abram?” Khufu questions.
“Yes, my lord Pharaoh,” says the priest. “Abram is a
scoundrel and a liar, my lord Pharaoh, and we feel he is hid-
ing something!”
Khufu asks, “Do you have any proof?”
“My lord Pharaoh, if you were to question Abram, we
believe you would have all the proof you need!” the priest
reassures him.
Khufu sits back in his throne and meditates over the infor-
mation. He looks at the priests and says, “Very well, alert the
guards and have him brought to me at once, and bring his
side-kick, in case he knows anything!”
The priests acknowledge and bow before they leave. The
Pharaoh gets the attention of one of his attendants.
“Go to my harem and collect Sarai; bring her here!”
Khufu says.
“Are not the women sick, my lord Pharaoh?” the atten-
dant asks.
Khufu says, “You will find that Sarai is the only one not
sick. Go!”
177
PAUL JUSTICE
The attendant acknowledges and quickly leaves. The

Pharaoh sits and works everything out in his mind. He waits
for some time, while two slaves fan the air above the throne
with palm leaves. His concentration is interrupted by the
sound of the attendant’s voice, “Sarai, my lord Pharaoh!”
Khufu looks up and sees Sarai who stands before him; her
face bears a guilty expression. He abruptly says to her, “Stand
at my right and do not move or speak!”
Sarai curtsies and obeys. A little time passes before the
doors open and in walk Abram and Lot, escorted by two
guards. They bow before the Pharaoh and the two guards
stand aside. Khufu tells Abram and Lot to rise, and they both
stand side by side, with the distinct appearance of charlatans.
The Pharaoh looks at them both and addresses Abram. “Do
not lie to me or I will have both of your heads!”
Sarai gasps and places her hand over her mouth. Khufu
points at Sarai, “Is this woman your wife?” Abram looks at
Sarai, who is in tears, and he looks at the Pharaoh. Abram says,
“Yes, my lord Pharaoh, she is my wife and also my sister!”
“So you lied?” says Khufu.
Abram replies, quite coyly when he says, “Well, she is my
sister!”
Khufu’s anger is roused. “Do not play with me, Abram.
You hid the truth concerning this woman. Why?”
Abram replies, “Sarai is protected and I feared for my own
life, my lord Pharaoh!”
Khufu laughs scornfully and says, “Protected? What are
you saying?”
Abram says, “God Most High and the one I call Yahweh
protects her womb, as He has promised a seed to issue forth
Kings, my lord Pharaoh!”
Khufu’s eyes widen with rage and he abruptly says,
“Kings? What on earth are you rambling about?”
Abram replies, “God is supreme my lord Pharaoh; the
ancients called Him Elohim, the God of the universe!”
178
The Pharaoh thinks momentarily, then he speaks, “Is this

God to blame for my dilemma, over this woman?” Khufu
points at Sarai when he says this.
Abram replies, “Yes my lord Pharaoh. This is true!”
Khufu raises his voice, “Get out of my Kingdom! And get
out of Egypt before sundown!”
Abram continues, “My lord Pharaoh may I...”
Khufu cuts him off and shouts, “Silence, you are a man
full of lies and tricks!”
Abram so incites Pharaoh’s rage that he lunges from his
throne and grabs hold of Sarai’s shoulders and forcefully
throws her to the ground at Abram’s feet. Sarai screams as she
hits the ground with a thump. In his rage Khufu shouts, “Go!
Here is your wife! Take her and go! Get out of Egypt and take
all who are yours!”
The Pharaoh beckons for the guards and they quickly
rush in and seize hold of Abram, Lot and Sarai. The three are
whisked away at great speed and their feet barely touch the
ground, until they are outside the Palace. Once outside,
the guards throw them to the ground before they return to the
Palace. As they lie on the ground, Lot looks up and says, “My
wife and daughters remain inside the Palace; what do you
think will happen to them?”
Abram looks up and sand sticks to his face and beard.
“The same thing that will happen to Alicia and Hagar: evic-
tion!” he says.
Sarai’s voice is muffled when she says, “Do not count on
Hagar; she is one of them!”
They lie on the ground for some time, a little scuffed and
shaken, but the sun beats down upon them; it is unforgiving.
Lot is the first one on his feet and he assists Abram and Sarai.
All three brush sand from their clothes, when dark shadows
invade their space. They look up to find themselves sur-
rounded by Officials on horseback and each of them carries a
spear. Seated on the backs of horses as they keep tight hold on
179
PAUL JUSTICE
to the Officials are Lot’s wife, daughters, Alicia and Hagar,

who have been evicted. They are ordered to dismount and
join Abram and the others. Four attendants arrive and they
carry the boxes of treasure, which are delivered to Abram.
The Official in charge calls out, as he points his spear toward
a group of his men, “You ten remain where you are and guard
these rebels, while the rest of us gather the others. If any try
to escape, kill them!”
After he says this, the Official in charge leads the rest of
his men toward the banks of the Nile, and they speed their
horses as they exit. Abram and the others huddle together in
a group, too afraid to move or speak. The Officials on horse-
back keep them surrounded for a lengthy period of time while
they wait for the others. Finally, they see a huge entourage of
people and animals approach and their volume has doubled,
compared with the number that originally had arrived in
Egypt. The Official in charge leads while the other men on
horseback parade the sides of the congregation, to keep them
orderly. Over the months, many Egyptians have befriended
the foreigners and they have decided to leave with them, this
action expands the size of Abram’s followers.
On approach, the Official who leads calls out to Abram
to tell him and his group to fall in behind him, then joins
the front of the queue, and the horsemen usher them on.
As the assembly makes their exit from Egypt, they all pass
the construction site of the great pyramid. Abram notices
another construction site not far from that of the pyramid
and he is curious. So curious is he that he plucks up the
courage to approach the Official who leads. He scurries
alongside the leader’s horse, and Abram looks up and says,
“My lord, what is being built on the far side of the pyramid
construction site?”
The Official looks down at Abram and says, “Houses
for the workers and their families. Khufu is drafting
hundreds of craftsmen, highly skilled men to work on the
180
pyramid and you will not witness its completion. Now get
back in line!”
Abram bows and recedes back until he is behind the
leader’s horse. The sun is about to set over the hills; by the
time the entourage of almost two thousand people plus
animals, reach the outskirts, it will have set. With a beaten
path which leads toward the hills in the east before them,
the Official in charge calls a halt to the assembly. He steers
his horse almost full circle, then he beckons for Abram to
approach.
As Abram approaches, the Official says, “You lead your
people from here and make sure you are in the hills before you
pitch tents for the night!”
Abram bows and acknowledges, then turns to approach
the congregation to instruct them, Abram hears the Official
say, “One moment!”
Abram turns to face the Official, who now leans forward
on his horse, and he says to Abram, “You are fortunate to face
eviction after your acts of deception; I would have had you
killed!”
Abram acts out one of his peculiar bows and places the
tips of his fingers to his forehead, then he turns and walks
away. He approaches the crowds, and Abram calls out to
them, “To the hills, people! Follow me!”
Abram leads the way toward the beaten path and the
congregation begins to move; they surge forward and follow.
The Officials sit and watch as the masses move out and their
watch continues till dusk, until the people are completely out
of sight. They whip their horses and the Officials make their
speedy return to Egypt.
From the first night after Abram and Sarai’s eviction,
the supernatural activity in the Palace stops. As the weeks roll
by, the pestilence and sickness leaves the Palace and the peo-
ple return to a fullness of health. Throughout the eight
months that Sarai resided in the Pharaoh’s harem, twenty-five
181
PAUL JUSTICE
members of Khufu’s household died of pestilence; including

children and babies; the remainder recovered. Khufu contin-
ued his reign for twenty-three years and he lived to see the
completion of his Great Pyramid. The pyramid was magnifi-
cent in its glory days, overlaid with highly polished limestone
and it featured a tip layered with the purest gold. It was like a
giant gemstone, which gleamed in the sunlight, in honour of
Khufu; the Pharaoh’s master plan was a success.
182
11
The Return
Two months have passed since the eviction from Egypt and
the huge assembly is now settled in the low plain of the
Negev, camped near streams of water, now that the wet sea-
son has returned. Pasturage is sparse, even though the earth
replenishes rapidly. Abram remains unsettled, despite tribe’s
people who show a keen spirit to cultivate the land and rework
the red soil mixed with sand and sediment. Abram is crouched
down, as he pokes at the ground and spreads particles of red
soil between his fingers Lot approaches, sits on the ground
next to Abram and says, “Why is the soil red?”
Abram, who does not bother to look at Lot, says, “This is
no good; the soil is weak; a few blades of grass for the animals
are the best we can expect!”
Lot stands up and assists Abram to his feet. “Maybe it is
time to travel into the valley of Siddim?” Lot suggests.
Abram stands, thinks, and looks at Lot. “Siddim is out of
the question; I will not speak on this subject again!” Abram
says furiously.
He walks away and Lot calls after him. “Why?” Lot asks,
while he throws his arms in the air.
Abram ignores him and continues to walk toward his tent
while tribespeople wish him good day as he passes and chil-
dren get under his feet. On arrival at the tent, Abram enters
to find that Hagar stands half-dressed, being measured by
Lot’s daughters for new clothes. Abram is surprised, so he
says, “Hagar, why are you wrapped in cheap cloth?”
183
PAUL JUSTICE
Hagar frowns as she struggles with the Akkadian

accent. As one of Lot’s daughters pins the fabric close to
Hagar’s thigh, she looks up at Abram and answers, “Sarai’s
orders, my lord!”
“Where is Sarai?” asks Abram.
Lot’s daughter replies, “Sarai took Alicia to the herdsmen.
She told Alicia she has lived off the fat of the land long enough
and that she needs to work, my lord!”
Abram rolls his eyes and takes a final look at Hagar, who
stands scantily clad. He turns and exits the tent. Outside the
tent, it is hot and humid and Abram wipes a little sweat from
his brow before he continues to where the animals are kept.
On arrival, he sees Sarai who stands over Alicia like a madam,
and Alicia tries to squeeze the last few drops of milk from a
dry goat. Abram takes hold of Sarai’s arm and leads her away
from Alicia, before he counsels, “Why are you dressing Hagar
as a slave?”
Sarai cannot hear for the noise from animals, so he leads
Sarai further away and repeats the question.
Sarai laughs before she answers, “Yes I noticed you had an
eye for Hagar!”
“Meaning?” says Abram.
Sarai laughs again and says, “Come now, my lord, when-
ever Hagar is present, you cannot take your eyes away from
the woman.”
“Nonsense!” says Abram. “Why not give me a straight
answer?”
Sarai replies, “Very well, my lord, Hagar is wearing slave’s
clothes because that is what she is: a slave!”
Abram shakes his head. “Hagar is the daughter of a royal
family. Her roots lie in a great dynasty of Pharaohs!”
Sarai snaps back, “Yes and they evicted her. What does
that tell you about the great dynasty?”
Abram paces, while he thinks with his head lowered and
Sarai says, “My lord, you may have a fondness for Hagar, just
184
as you have with Alicia; only, please do not allow your feelings
to cloud your judgment.”
Abram stops and raises his face, he looks at Sarai with
a serious expression. “Very well, as you are appointed to
lord it over the women folk, it shall remain your decision,
and please pardon me for my intrusion!” Abram says a little
curtly.
Abram gestures with his unusual bow, fingertips to the
forehead.
Sarai bows in return. “Your pardon is accepted, my lord!”
Abram turns and makes his exit. En route toward Lot’s
tent, Abram passes children play; he pats a boy on the top of
his head as he drifts on by. As he reaches Lot’s tent, he enters
to find him in a discussion with his wife about the valley of
Siddim. Abram interrupts, “Pardon my interruption, Lot.
I need to speak with you in private!”
Lot gestures for his wife to leave and she quickly rises to
her feet and curtsies before she leaves the tent. As she steps
outside, she briefly glances over her shoulder to look back at
Abram and Lot. She pretends to walk away and quickly dou-
bles back, to crouch by the side of the tent and she listens
from outside. Inside the tent, Abram sits next to Lot and says,
“Sarai is wielding authority over the women and we have
barely settled!”
Lot says, “Is this not her position, my lord?”
Abram says, “Why yes, only she has demoted Hagar to
position of slave!”
“Oh, what was she before?” Lot asks.
Abram looks at Lot seriously and says, “This is no time to
be facetious, Lot. If Sarai keeps lashing the whip without
cause, we will have a revolt on our hands!”
Lot begins to conceive of the seriousness and says, “Have
you spoken with Sarai about this?”
“Yes and she was quick with sharp answers; more or less
told me to bow out!” Abram says with concern.
185
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot sits with his head down, thinks, and after some time
he looks up at Abram and says, “So what are we going to do?”
Abram smiles, as he half expected a revelation from Lot.
“We should alert the people to be ready to leave here by
dawn!” Abram advises.
“And go where?” asks Lot.
Abram answers, “Up into the mountains, heading north
toward Bethel!”
Lot swiftly replies, “Bethel again, it will take months to
get there!”
“Exactly!” says Abram.
“What do you mean, exactly?” says Lot.
Abram looks at Lot and says, “Think about it, we will
move through the mountains in stages, absorbing much of our
time. Sarai will be too tired to cause disruption among the
women. She will be too busy trying to survive!”
“I am not sure about this. Would it not be easier to
remove Sarai’s authority over the women?” Lot muses.
Abram responds negatively, “Huh no, that would create a
whole new heap of problems to have to deal with. Besides,
could you do Sarai’s job, dealing with touchy women all day?”
“I get the point!” says Lot.
A few moments of silence pass between them, then Lot
says, “The idea of climbing those mountains and covering old
ground; it is daunting and this time we have many more peo-
ple and animals to lead!”
“It will not be as bad as you think,” Abram says. “Come,
and let us alert the people before sundown!”
Outside, Lot’s wife scurries to the back of the tent and
hides before she can be caught and Abram and Lot exit the
tent, unaware that the woman heard everything.
The next day, as the sun peaks over the mountaintops.
The huge assembly gathers their belongings in readiness for
their gruelling trek into the hill country. Abram and Lot dis-
cuss and make final decisions over the best route to take and
186
Lot makes a final comment. “Before we leave, promise me one

thing Abram?”
“What is it?” asks Abram.
Lot continues, “Promise me you will not build any altars
or burn any animals?”
“Why?” asks Abram.
Lot answers, “Because the thick clouds of smoke billow-
ing into the heavens alerts our enemies!”
Abram manages a slight laugh. “Stop worrying, Lot!”
He quickly turns his attention to the assembly and begins
to shout instructions on how to proceed. Within the hour, the
people move and they are on their way north toward a ravine
within the hills. The need to keep close to the lowest incline
and make their journey longer is beneficial for women, chil-
dren and animals. Abram has sent a group of fifty men ahead
of them to spy out the land, and this creates high morale for
the assembled people and makes them feel safe. The journey
continues for months, while the congregation only stops in
various places for no more than two nights. Abram leads
the people and drives them hard, as he is keen to return to
Bethel, to the place where he first erected the sacrificial
altars. After several months of trudging under severe heat and
tough conditions, the congregation finally reaches their desti-
nation and they are all exhausted. Abram chooses his desig-
nated area close to Bethel and the people finally pitch their
tents and settle.
One week has passed since their arrival near Bethel and
the tribespeople begin to feel settled. Ironically, it is when the
people are settled that disputes begin to erupt among them.
While under trial and tribulation, they are all united and assist
one another, and Abram often says this is simply human
nature. However, they have barely had time to organise them-
selves into groups before the herdsmen begin to fight over the
animals. Despite some of the livestock being marked as Lot’s
property, the herdsman bicker and argue over who owns what.
187
PAUL JUSTICE
Eventually, the men become violent and begin to brawl; fists

fly and some men fall to the ground injured. The squabble is
mainly over camels and oxen, the most prized of the beasts.
Abram knows about this and his patience is about to expire.
k
Morning on the tenth day: Abram rises early and leaves his
tent before breakfast and hurries over to Lot’s tent. As he
enters, he sees Lot sleep, lying next to his wife. Abram whis-
pers loudly, “Lot, wake up!”
After several attempts, Lot sits up and rubs his eyes. He
looks at Abram, while he squints and asks, “What is it?”
“We need to meet with the herdsmen,” says Abram.
“There is trouble over the animals!”
Lot rises from his bed and gets dressed. Abram sits
down and waits. After he collects a bowl of fruit and a flask of
water, Lot sits down opposite Abram and they begin to share
the breakfast. As he eats a fig, Lot says, “The return to Bethel
has reminded me of something I have always wondered
about!”
Abram sits and picks seeds from a sliced pomegranate and
asks, “Wondered about what?”
Lot replies, “I know you like to create names for people
and groups, and it was here that you conjured up the name
Yahweh and pinned it on God. Why?”
Abram removes a seed and eats it. “You are probing
again, Lot!”
Lot continues to eat and says, “I am curious and I fail to
understand. Why not keep with tradition and address God as
Elohim, in line with our forefathers?”
Abram brushes seeds from his beard and says, “The name
Elohim identifies the family of God, and God and Lord are
titles. I wanted a name to identify God Most High. So I shuf-
fled some consonants around in my head and came up with
YHWH, so I now call Him Yahweh.”
188
Lot says, “Do you believe God accepts the name?”

Abram chuckles quietly, “He does accept the name, and
I would go so far as to say, Yahweh loves His name!”
Lot stops and stares at Abram, wide-eyed. Abram finishes
breakfast, rises to his feet and he looks down at Lot. “Come,
and let us deal with those rebels!”
Lot wipes his mouth on his sleeve, rises to his feet and
hurries to join Abram as he exits the tent. Upon their arrival
at the site where the herdsmen tend to the animals, one of the
herdsmen looks up and sees Abram and Lot approach. The
man continues with his work and as Abram and Lot arrive,
Abram says, “Alert the other herdsmen that we are here and
tell them all to gather by that oak tree!”
Abram points at the oak tree when he says this. The man
acknowledges and hurries to alert the others. Abram and Lot
walk away and position themselves under the oak. Soon after,
the men begin to gather around the oak, so they face Abram
and Lot.
Abram calls out to the men, “It has come to my attention
that you men squabble over livestock, in particular the oxen
and camels. Is this accurate?”
One of the men calls from the crowd, “My lord, Lot’s men
have more of the oxen, which is unfair!”
“Nonsense!” says Abram, “Ten oxen equally split with five
allocated to each group, and with Lot’s oxen branded. Tell me,
where lies the confusion?”
“Not true, my lord!” says one of the men.
Abram looks at Lot and says, “Do you know anything
about this?”
Lot sheepishly looks at Abram and says, “I ordered my
men to brand my oxen, assuming they would stop at five.
They were branding number eight by the time I returned. So
it appears I have eight and you have two!”
Abram endures a long stare at Lot, “Wonderful!” he
exclaims.
189
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram turns his attention to the men and calls out,

“A misunderstanding has occurred and to solve this problem
I am going to have all ten oxen slaughtered. The beast’s car-
casses will be presented before Yahweh and burned as sacrifi-
cial offerings!”
All the men begin to cheer in unison and Lot’s expression
shows that he is alarmed, although he tries to conceal how he
feels. Abram raises his arms to silence the men. “As for the
camels, they are simply beasts of burden; they are not to
be honoured or prized as some worthy possession. The camels
will be kept as one group and segregated from all other ani-
mal groups. Now, there is work to be done concerning the
oxen; I want them slaughtered and laid out before sundown!”
The men disperse and prepare for their duties and they
begin to round up the oxen.
Abram turns to face Lot, who says, “Abram, you prom-
ised!”
“Promised what?” asks Abram.
Ever so seriously, Lot says, “You promised you would not
burn animals in the mountains and alert our enemies!”
“When?” says Abram. “Come, I will explain as we walk!”
Abram and Lot walk side-by-side, back to base and Abram
explains his reasons. “Previously, the Hittites found us because
I was burning wood, animal fat and a whole mix of com-
bustible materials; this sent thick smoke up into the heavens.
This time, however, I will not be building a structure; we are
going to pile up the oxen and burn them with minimal smoke,
if any. This is a time for celebrations not doom and gloom!”
Lot shakes his head and his negative attitude remains. He
stops Abram’s walk and says, “What you have just said makes
no sense; whatever you burn creates smoke and especially ten
oxen!”
Abram thrusts the point of his staff into the earth, leans
forward upon his staff, and he looks at Lot and says, “What do
you propose I do?”
190
Lot takes two steps back and says, “If you are going
to burn those oxen, you can start by sharpening all those
swords and knives ready for the Hittites, Canaanites,
Girgashites, and anyone else who comes teaming over those
mountains!”
Abram’s eyes widen as he feels a rage build within, he pulls
his staff from the ground and points it toward Lot. “Step
back!” Abram says angrily.
Lot begins to move away slowly, while he keeps his eyes
fixed on Abram.
He stretches his staff at arm’s length, so that the tip touch-
es the ground, Abram begins to drag the rod in a circular
motion so that a deep line is carved into the dirt. Now Abram
stands in the centre of his circle, with his staff in his right
hand, and he calls out to Lot.
“Lot, do you have the faith and conviction to cross this
line and enter my space?” Abram says, with authority in his
tone.
Lot becomes fearful and says, “What do you mean, my
lord? You know I hate riddles?”
Abram stands fast and is clearly enraged when he shouts,
“This is no riddle. Either you are with me or you are not. You
decide!”
Lot begins to back away further, turns, and runs back to
his tent. Abram stands and watches as Lot leaves the scene.
One hour later, Lot sits near the entrance to his tent with
his head down, almost between his knees. The ground near
his feet darkens, as someone stands and overshadows him. Lot
looks up, teary-eyed, and sees a blurred image of Abram as he
looks down at him. He hears Abram’s voice, in gentle tone,
say, “Come, I have something to show you!”
Lot rises to his feet and brushes the dust from his cloths;
he walks with Abram toward the mountains in the east. En
route, Abram says to Lot, “The congregation is too big and
there are no trustworthy men to appoint as leaders. The
191
PAUL JUSTICE
responsibility of the people falls upon the shoulders of two

men, and it is too severe for us to bear any longer!”
Lot looks at Abram and says, “My lord, I am with you
always and you know I am, I only fear for the people in this
dangerous land!”
Abram says, “I understand, Lot, I understand more than
you realise!”
Lot looks at Abram seriously, as though there were some
hidden meaning. But Abram keeps his eyes ahead and contin-
ues to walk. After some time, they reach a large plateau at the
base of the hills and Abram stops near a low incline. He faces
Lot and says, “What I am about to show you will clarify any
uncertainty in your mind; this will be an awakening for you!”
Lot frowns, stares at Abram, and Abram says, “Come, fol-
low me!”
Abram begins to climb the hills and Lot follows. It is mid
afternoon and very hot by the time Abram and Lot reach the
top of what is the lowest peak of the mountain range, yet it is
high enough to give a perfect view of the valley below. Abram
puts his arm across Lot’s shoulders and says, “Look all around
you, as far as you can see. Is it not beautiful?”
Lot can see that the land is irrigated everywhere and lush.
So Abram says to him, “Yahweh has given this land to me as a
gift, and I mean all of it, as far as you can see. Now, I am pre-
pared to share it with you, as you are my closest kin. So choose
for yourself. If you choose east, I will go west and if you
choose south, I will go north. So choose and tell me which
area do you want?”
Lot looks all around and looks down into the Jordan val-
ley; he sees the way the sun glistens over the surface of the Sea
of Arabah and it is breathtaking. So Lot points down into the
valley and says, “I want this, the paradise we travelled all this
way to find!”
“So be it!” says Abram. They make their descent down the
mountain, Abram leads and Lot follows. Lot’s spirits have
192
risen since they settled their differences, although he does not

yet have the full picture. As they reach the plateau, Abram
stands, shades his eyes, and looks toward the west.
Lot catches up and approaches. “Abram, the sun is low
and it must be late, we should head back!”
Abram looks at Lot. “Yes, I will tell you the rest of my plan
as we walk!”
Abram and Lot begin to walk side by side, toward home,
and Lot says, “Plan, what plan?”
Abram says, “When you leave for the Jordan tomorrow,
half the congregation will join you. We will leave it for the
people to decide whether they wish to go with you or stay
with me!”
Lot says, “So you took me into the mountains to tell me
about a split?”
“Not exactly,” Abram says. “You had to see it to believe
and you had to see it to choose!”
“Yes I know only,” Lot says, “I chose for myself, my wife
and daughters not hundreds of people!”
“Lot, you said you feared for the people, now here is your
chance to help them!” Abram says.
Lot’s mouth clams shut and he does not say another word
for the remainder of the journey. The sun sinks below the
mountains in the west by the time Abram and Lot return to
base camp. The herdsmen have slaughtered the oxen and the
carcasses are piled up ready for the sacrificial offering to
Yahweh. People gather in droves around the carcasses and
many are excited, and they wait for the festivities to begin.
k
Night: The oxen are ablaze and flames leap into the night sky;
as the carcasses burn they illuminate the entire encampment.
The people celebrate and they are happy as even the children
dance in circles and hold hands. As the people rejoice the wine
flows and the beef is tender between their teeth. Lot is the
193
PAUL JUSTICE
only one who refuses to partake so he sits alone in his tent.

Lot’s wife is unaware and she has searched everywhere for her
husband. Finally she spots Abram and hurries toward him.
Abram carves cooked beef as she approaches him. She
says, “My lord, where is Lot? I have searched everywhere.”
Abram cuts a piece of beef and eats, “In his tent, sulking!”
The woman turns quickly to leave and Abram calls after
her, “Wait, give him this!” Abram hands her a chunk of the
tender meat, which she takes and hurries toward Lot’s tent.
Lot sits on the floor in one corner of his tent with his arms on
his knees and his head is bowed low. The light from the flames
flash intermittently across the side of the tent, and this causes
shadows from people who pass outside and the noise from the
people is loud. Lot sits in the dark even though the firelight
occasionally illuminates his presence and his tear stained face
is sombre.
His wife enters the tent, with the meat held in both hands
and at first glance she cannot see him; her eyes adjust before
the glow from the fire outside reveals his presence. As she sees
her husband, she hurries toward him and kneels on the floor
at his feet, and Lot slowly raises his head and looks at his wife
with eyes filled with sadness. She speaks to him with a soft
voice. “Abram sent you this food, my lord!”
“I am not hungry!” Lot says, in a low tone.
She places the beef on the floor, wipes the fat from her
hands, then takes hold of Lot’s hands and looks into his eyes.
“I have never seen your eyes tell the story of sadness before,
my lord. Tell me, please, what causes your spirit to fall so
low?” she asks.
Lot looks his wife in the eye and says, “I have been
expelled and rejected by Abram, today he took me on a long
journey into the mountains; his way of breaking the news
gently!”
His wife cannot believe her ears and says, “My lord,
I believed you and Abram were inseparable?”
194
“As did I!” says Lot.

His wife lowers her head, thinks, and looks up. “What has
caused this?” she asks.
“A long standing disagreement between us!” Lot says.
“What?” says his wife?
Lot continues. “Abram insists on building altars and sac-
rificing animals to the God he named Yahweh, and I refute
this practice as I believe it throws all of us in harm’s way!”
His wife says, “Do you not support the worship of
Yahweh, my lord?”
Lot says, “Of course I do, only not in dangerous territory.
Surely Yahweh is prepared to wait until we have found a per-
manent resting place. Oh no, not Abram, he puts Yahweh
before life itself!”
Lot’s wife continues to look at him and says, “My lord,
I am beginning to understand the rift between you both. Can
this be resolved?”
Lot shakes his head negatively and says, “No, we have to
leave and I have to take half of the congregation with us!”
“What?” retorts Lot’s wife, she rises to her feet and
stands, visibly alarmed, folds her arms like a madam and says,
“And where are we suppose to go with hundreds of human
baggage? You do realise, Lot, that you will be responsible for
them?”
Lot looks up at his wife and says, “I cannot believe you
just referred to the people as baggage!”
She quickly responds, “Well, are they not? You will have
to carry them and they will come to you with problems!” Lot’s
wife unfolds her arms and leans over him, “Lot, you cannot
lead the way Abram does. And Yahweh will not feed you with
spirit the way He does with Abram. The people would fare
better fending for themselves!”
Lot quickly rises to his feet and says, “I thought you came
here to raise my spirits?” Lot’s wife lowers her head and
remains silent. Lot says, “Abram will address the people
195
PAUL JUSTICE
shortly and I think you should attend!” She looks at her hus-
band momentarily and storms from the tent, Lot calls after
her, “If you see Abram, tell him I want half the wages, half the
silver and gold he has stashed away!” Lot’s wife walks fast and
does not answer. Lot looks down on the chunk of beef on the
floor and in his rage, he stamps on it with his foot, which caus-
es fat and juices to squirt in all directions.
Outside the tent, Lot’s wife sees that Abram has taken a
position of elevation over the masses and people everywhere
close in and gather around Abram. The fire has burned low
and a faint glow spreads over the settlement. Abram stands
and holds torchlight over the people closest to him for visibil-
ity. Lot’s wife approaches the crowds and keeps to the outer
fringes, she looks for her daughters but she cannot see them
anywhere. A silence falls over the congregated people as they
wait to hear their leader’s words.
A few moments pass and Abram begins to speak, and in a
loud clear voice he says, “This congregation has grown insur-
mountable for the greatest of leaders to handle. So Lot and
I have decided to split the assembly into two parts. We have
agreed to allow you the people, to chose who you want to fol-
low. So you may continue following me or you may follow Lot
into the Jordan plain!”
A hum of voices can be heard and mutters among the
people. Abram continues, “If you choose to follow Lot then
you must be prepared and ready to leave soon after sunrise
tomorrow. You will travel east over the mountains before
making your descent into the hidden valley where paradise
flourishes!”
Cheers erupt from some among the crowds. Abram con-
tinues. “Those among you who choose to stay with me must
remain in your tents tomorrow. Do not leave your tents until
you are instructed otherwise. Those of you who choose Lot
must congregate near his tent tomorrow to signify your
choice. Beasts of burden will not be allowed, as all livestock
196
remains with me. So, your journey will be on foot and your
belongings you will carry on your backs!”
Another gust of mutters erupts from the crowds. Abram
concludes, “Choose wisely people and may Yahweh bless
you all!”
After the people hear these words, they begin to disperse
and move in groups toward their tents. They are all steeped in
conversations as they walk and the noise from voices fills the
air. Throughout night, many people struggle to sleep as they
anxiously consider the best decision for their futures.
k
Morning of the next day: Abram rises just before dawn and
makes his way over to Lot’s tent. As he enters he is surprised
to see Lot and his family have risen and are busy as they pack
their belongings. Abram approaches Lot.
“Lot, are you prepared for the journey?”
Lot avoids eye contact with Abram. “Almost!” he says
abruptly.
Abram can sense tension. “How is your family taking
this?”
“Ask them,” says Lot, and after a pause, he looks at Abram
and says, “As I am leading half of the congregation, I think
I am entitled to half the wages.”
“What do you mean?” asks Abram.
“I want half of the silver and gold you have stashed away!”
Abram prolongs his stare. “Lot, why this animosity?”
Lot stares straight back at Abram and remains silent.
Abram says, “So be it. Meet me in my tent when you are
done and we will split the treasure in equal measure!”
Abram turns and quickly exits the tent. Lot’s wife, who lis-
tened, approaches Lot and says, “Is this wise, my lord?
Leaving Abram with bad blood?”
Lot does not bother to look at his wife, and says, “Finish
the packing, while I collect my wages!”
197
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot exits the tent. On arrival at Abram’s tent, Lot enters

to find Alicia packed and ready to leave. She approaches Lot
and curtsies, “I am leaving with you, my lord!”
Lot smiles and says, “Good girl. Go to my tent and join
the others!”
She curtsies and leaves. Lot approaches Abram, who kneels
on the floor near two empty boxes, with a pile of silver trinkets
on one side and a pile of gold items on the other. The trinkets
sparkle and glisten, as Abram sits and stares at them. Lot kneels
on the floor next to Abram and asks, “Is this all of it?”
Abram frowns, then looks at Lot. “What, you no longer
trust me?”
Lot fails to answer and Abram says, “Very well, we will fill
both boxes by alternating between silver and gold, until we
both have equal amounts, agreed?”
Lot nods in agreement and they begin to sift through the
treasure, until both boxes are shared equally. It takes them
some time to get through it all, on completion, Abram offers
to help Lot carry his share to the tent. As Abram and Lot carry
the box between them and approach the exit of the tent, they
can see that the sun has risen to a height that identifies mid
morning. They step outside, and they both drop the box in
astonishment, a large crowd of people have gathered where
Lot’s tent once stood.
Abram looks at Lot and says, “I had no idea you were so
popular!”
Lot says, “It is not I who is popular, it is the paradise they
seek!”
Abram notices Alicia near the front of the crowd and hur-
ries over to her. As he reaches her, he asks, “Are you sure
about this Alicia?”
She answers, “Yes, my lord. I have longed for the day
when we would experience life in the beautiful paradise, until
today it was only a dream. I will miss you, my lord!” She
reaches up and tenderly kisses Abram on the cheek.
198
Abram smiles at Alicia, steps to one side and he calls out,

“I need two capable men to carry this box.” Abram points at
the box as he says this. Two men step forward from the crowd,
approach Lot, and they lift the heavy box onto their shoul-
ders. Lot bows before them to show his appreciation. Abram
approaches Lot with his arms outstretched and he hugs Lot in
a bear grip and kisses him from cheek to cheek; however, the
gesture is not returned.
Lot walks away from Abram and begins to call out
instructions to the people, tells them to head east toward the
mountains. As the people begin to move, Lot turns to face
Abram, who stands a short distance away, and Lot mimics
Abram’s peculiar bow before he leaves. Abram stands, watch-
es, as the assembly leave. Sarai approaches him and slips her
hand in his, and while they watch the people, she says, “Do
you think they will be safe, my lord?”
“I hope so!” says Abram. Both stand and watch in silence
for quite some time, until the people have created some dis-
tance between them. Abram says, “One thing puzzles me,
though…”
“Oh and what puzzles you, my lord?” asks Sarai.
Abram says, “Lot made a point of splitting the treasure,
and yet he did not ask for any weapons?”
“Weapons?” says Sarai.
“Yes you know the swords and knives!”
Sarai frowns and says, “Is this a problem?”
Abram says, “It simply means they will be entering the
hidden valley unarmed, and the low plain is infested with
Canaanites!”
Sarai chooses not to answer and remains quiet. They both
stand and watch until the train of people is almost out of sight.
Abram and Sarai walk hand in hand toward their tent. As they
walk, Abram says, “How many people do you suppose went
with Lot?”
Sarai says, “I would say in excess of one thousand, my lord!”
199
PAUL JUSTICE
“And how many have remained?” says Abram.

“I guess about five or six hundred, why? Sarai says.
“Just curious!” says Abram, “The people can now leave
their tents if they wish.”
So Sarai calls for Hagar and says to her, “Hagar, go and
inform everyone they are free to roam around if they wish.”
Hagar bows before Sarai and exits the tent. A little time
passes and while Sarai prepares a meal, Abram approaches her
and says, “Sarai, we should move to Hebron tomorrow, down
by the great oaks where I built the stone altar. Now that the
congregation is more depleted, we should work toward a new
beginning and become settled. Besides, we are too old to be
trekking these hills!”
Sarai turns to look at Abram, and smiles, “As you wish, my
lord!” She says.
Hagar returns from informing the people, and after they
enjoy a meal together, the three settle for the evening. That
night, as Abram slept, Yahweh approached him in a dream and
questioned his motives. “Abram, why do you loiter in the
mountains? Look all around you, from north to south and east
to west, for all the land within sight I shall give to you and
your descendants forever. Travel the length and breadth of the
country, for I mean to give it to you!”
200
12
Sodom
Several weeks have passed since Abram and Lot parted com-
pany and the arrival of the masses in the Jordan plain has not
gone unnoticed by the Canaanites. They watch from the
underbrush, and the Canaanites are curious as to why such a
vast number of people have pitched their tents on the out-
skirts of Sodom. The land is a paradise – hot and humid and
flourishing with thick abundant vegetation which includes
numerous trees, and the palm trees that decorate the coastline
of the sea of Arabah are dense. It is easy for the Canaanites to
disguise themselves in their home territory, as they stealthily
creep without a sound, watching and planning their moves.
They decide not to attack; instead they plan to use scare tac-
tics at night to unnerve their victims. For six nights, the pred-
ators lie in the underbrush and hide among the trees, as they
make strange vocal sounds that carry in the stillness of night.
Each night the people stay in their tents, afraid, and it is the
unknown that fuels their terror. The period of scare tactics
weakens the people until they all become mentally and physi-
cally drained. Tension arises among them, and this causes
them to argue and fight, while the Canaanites remain hidden
and watch and enjoy the display.
Lot is troubled and the concern he had for the people
diminishes rapidly, as now he feels resentment and plots in
his mind to get rid of them. The once heightened euphoria
experienced by the masses as they entered paradise has sadly
201
PAUL JUSTICE
dissolved into one of fear and dread of the unknown, while

unfamiliarity with their surroundings is breeding contempt.
When Lot first arrived in the Jordan plain, he marvelled over
the five majestic cities and their enormous size baffled his
imagination; he was especially impressed with Sodom. Now
though, his enthusiasm over the structures has drained away,
and this leaves him with the feel of emptiness. Six days in par-
adise has shattered the people’s dreams, turning them into a
nightmare. And the Canaanites are not only vicious; they are
cunning and evil.
k
Morning after sunrise on day seven: All of the people are in
their tents. Exhausted from lack of sleep, they sit around and
mope over their dilemma, while children whimper and babies
cry. Lot is beside himself with anguish and he has had enough.
He looks at his wife, his two daughters and Alicia and says,
“I have had enough of this insanity, I am leaving!”
Lot’s wife and the women watch in silence as Lot rises to
his feet and exits the tent. Outside, Lot stops dead in his
tracks, as he is shocked to see that a large crowd of Canaanites
have silently surrounded the settlement. The warriors stand
motionless and quiet, while they stare at Lot. Their dark faces
are devoid of any expression. Lot’s eyes rove over the men as
he stands, gripped with fear. He can smell their sweat mixed
with humidity in the damp air as the sun continues to rise, and
it sends a heat which stifles. The men are barely dressed and
wear no clothing; only animal bones decorate their wrists,
biceps and ankles. Necklaces of bird skulls decorate their
necklines and human skulls, tied to their waists, cover their
crotches. The bones are bleached white, a contrast to their
black skin, and purple dye decorates their eyes.
What Lot sees before him is a tribe of hunters and canni-
bals and he begins to wish he had listened to Abram. Lot can
feel the sweat as it trickles down his back and his stomach is
202
empty, and this makes him feel sick. One of the men
approaches Lot and stops a short distance away. He asks,
“Why do you people defecate our land with your dung?” The
hunter says this in a deep, slow and deliberate voice.
Lot drops to his knees and pleads with the man, “We did
not intend to trespass, my lord. I promise we will be gone
before sundown!”
The warrior shouts at Lot, “On your feet, you are a weak
liar!” Inside the tent, Lot’s wife and the girls huddle together,
terrified.
Lot rises to his feet and faces the hunter. “My lord, I am
rich and I wish to offer you silver and gold!”
“Where is the silver and gold?” asks the hunter.
Lot points to his tent and says, “May I bring it, my lord?”
The man nods in agreement and Lot hurries into his tent,
and moments later he backs out of his tent, and drags a large
box, which he places at the feet of the leader.
The warrior looks down upon the box and says to Lot,
“Open it!”
Lot opens the box and its contents sparkle. The leader of
the clan crouches down and peers into the box; he takes hand-
fuls of the jewellery and throws it to his men, who begin to
fight amongst themselves to retrieve some precious item of
value. The commotion and noise has alerted many through-
out the settlement, who peep from their tents, too afraid to
come out. As the men are occupied, their leader turns to Lot
and says, “Come, I will take you to see Bera!”
Lot follows the Canaanite and, en route to Sodom, Lot
looks up at the man, who is tall and asks, “Who is Bera, my
lord?”
The warrior looks ahead. “Bera is our God whom we
worship; you may be alarmed when you see him!” the warrior
says.
Suddenly, fear of the unknown grips Lot and his legs
weaken. The two men continue to climb the hills and finally
203
PAUL JUSTICE
they arrive outside the city walls, which are huge and tower
towards the sky. They move onward toward the city gates,
and they pass a large sphinx which bears the face of Bera.
As they reach the gates, Lot stops and looks up. He shades
his eyes, as he sees rows of human skeletons which hang
from the tops of the walls and bleach in the rays of the sun.
He looks up at the warrior, “Who are they? Are they crimi-
nals?” Lot asks.
The man laughs and says, “No! They were previous
visitors!”
Lot looks at the man to see if he may suggest a joke, but
the man’s face quickly resumes a blank stare. Lot gulps and
becomes apprehensive and the man says, “Come, we are
almost there!”
They pass through two large solid stone gates that were
opened at dawn, and Lot gazes all around as they enter the
city, he is enthralled at what he sees. He feels dwarfed, like an
ant in a large box. A short distance from the entrance, Lot sees
a watchtower the height of the walls with a very large base. On
either side of that are square mud houses with flat roofs –
homes for the poor. He notices that the inner walls are lined
with poor people who appear to be starved, as their ribs pro-
trude through their skin. They continue on. Lot follows the
man toward large stone steps that run the width of the city. As
they climb the steps, he sees that the houses ahead and to
either side of him are more elaborate and fashioned in stone,
with gardens on the roofs. As they approach the centre of the
city, Lot sees a huge ziggurat that dominates its space and
stands prominently, soaring toward the sky. The monument
consumes most of the inner city.
They walk through the streets of Sodom, Lot sees
prostitutes – both male and female – who are desperate for
money; they lure from alleys between houses, day and night,
like permanent fixtures. Finally, they reach a mound of high-
ly polished stone steps with the appearance of white marble,
204
which gleam in the sunlight. The steps lead up to large dou-

ble doors fashioned in solid gold. The doors are embedded
into the mountain face, as the Palace is cut deep into the hills.
Spring water trickles from the crags above and streams down
to the hanging gardens adjacent to the steps on either side of
the Palace. Ten guards line up with their backs to the doors,
and they watch the city continuously from their position of
elevation, and positioned either side of the doors are panthers
carved in black granite.
As Lot and the warrior climb the huge steps toward the
Palace, a flash of light almost blinds them as the sun reflects
from the gold of the doors. Lot covers his eyes with the back
of his hand and squints as he continues his approach. As they
reach the doors, Lot notices that each door has an identical
symbol embossed onto the gold: the symbols represent snakes
entwined, which lead to a pair of wings.
Lot points at the symbols and asks, “What do these sym-
bols mean, my lord?”
The man runs the tips of his fingers over the image
embossed onto the gold and says, “These symbols represent
the serpent class who are the fathers of our Gods!”
Lot frowns and says, “Serpent class?”
The man responds, “The Gods who fell from the
heavens!”
Lot fails to understand and he is jerked to one side as the
guards open the doors. It takes all ten men with all of their
strength to open the heavy gold doors, which open inwardly.
The sound of the grind against stone is loud. The men step
inside and the guards close the doors behind them. The
atmosphere changes instantly to cool, as though the room
benefited from air conditioning.
Lot stands and gazes all around the huge hollow, with lim-
ited light from torches that burn in stands on either side of the
hall. The large throne ahead of him is fashioned in gold.
Drapes hang behind the throne, with embroidery which
205
PAUL JUSTICE
features the serpent symbols in what appears to be gold and

silver thread, and the cloth is dyed purple with a rich texture.
As they advance closer to the throne, Lot is alarmed to see two
black panthers, one on either side of the throne. Lot’s pres-
ence seems to have gone unnoticed, as the panthers are pre-
occupied as they rip strips of meat, and they each have a large
piece of flesh. The two young women, who stand near each of
the panthers, hold chains that are attached to each panther’s
choker, and Lot feels relieved that they are tethered, even
though the girls do not look strong enough to control them.
Lot looks at the shapely women who wear no clothes and the
only items which cover their bodies are a necklace of animal-
s’ teeth, elaborate hair braiding and blue eyeliner which splay
like whiskers. He lowers his eyes and sees two severed panther
feet which hang on either side of the girls’ hips and their pubic
hair is shaved into one vertical thin line. Lot struggles to
absorb all of what he sees and is startled by the sound of the
leader’s voice, as he suddenly addresses one of the women.
“Where is Bera?” he demands.
The woman says, “Bera eats, my lord, he will be with us
soon!”
The leader turns his attention to Lot and says, “When
Bera is present, do not look at the women or the panthers, as
he has an obsession with cats. You will lie face down on the
floor and only look at Bera if he invites you to do so. The
skeletons you questioned that hang from the city walls are
from those who did not obey these rules. Get face down on
the floor and do not move or speak unless requested!”
Lot immediately lies on the ground, face down before
the throne, and he remains still and quiet. A little time passes
and it becomes apparent that Bera, the King of Sodom
approaches from the rear of the Palace. The women bow
their heads and look at the ground and the leader lowers
him to one knee and bows his head to face the ground. Lot
lies and trembles, the unknown fuels his terror, as he feels
206
vibrations beneath him. Bera enters the room, a giant of a

man who stands fifteen feet tall and six feet across the shoul-
ders. His braided hair drapes his shoulders like dreadlocks
with gold ringlets which dangle from the tips. The crown
upon his head is fashioned as a serpent in the purest of gold
and is embedded with finely cut diamonds, while two emer-
alds position the serpent’s eyes. He wears the crown in hon-
our of his father of the serpent class, a fallen angel. His skirt
is cut from the finest cloth dyed purple and features hiero-
glyphics embroidered in silver thread. The bands on his wrists
are pure gold and his fists are huge, and likewise his feet. Bera
is two thirds transcendental and one third human, and this
makes him a monster. King Bera approaches his throne and
sits down, looks at his women-slaves, he says, “You may raise
your heads!”
The women obey immediately and keep their eyes fixed
straight ahead. Lot listens to the depth of Bera’s voice and
feels the temptation to look. Bera turns his attention to the
Canaanite and says, “Servant, you may rise!”
The man rises to his feet and keeps his eyes down until
Bera says, “Look at me, what is this?”
And King Bera points down at Lot when he says this. The
servant looks at Bera and says, “My lord, my God and my
King, I found this man on the outskirts of the city; he is rich
and he brings a great multitude with him, including men,
women and children of mixed race!”
Bera appears intrigued as he hears this news. He turns his
attention to Lot and says, “You, on the floor, rise to your feet!”
Bera’s voice booms when he says this and Lot immediately
rises to his feet and keeps his eyes down.
Bera looks Lot up and down and says, “Why are you here?
And why do you loiter around my Kingdom?” The volume of
Bera’s voice increased with each word.
Lot keeps his head down. “I would like to live in this city,
my lord. It is indeed impressive!” Lot says timidly.
207
PAUL JUSTICE
Bera erupts with abrupt laughter and Lot cannot resist

counting his six toes on each foot over and over. Bera says,
“Look at me!”
Lot slowly raises his head and looks at Bera, and he
cannot believe the man’s stature and enormous hands. Bera
wriggles six fingers with one hand in Lot’s face and says, “Tell
me what you have to offer me, Bera, the King who has every-
thing?”
Lot says, “More silver and more gold, my lord?”
Bera leans forward closer to Lot and shouts, “WRONG
ANSWER!”
Lot takes a shower from the blast and the Kings breath
smells of decayed flesh. Again Bera says, “You have something
that I desire; what is it?”
The harder Lot thinks, the more his mind draws a blank
and finally he says, “My worship my lord?”
Bera thunders back at Lot, “Wrong, one more incorrect
answer and I will have you hung from the city walls to bake
under the sun. You have something I want, what is it?”
Lot thinks long and hard and finally it clicks, the mass of
people he has brought with him is what Bera wants. So Lot
looks at Bera and says, “The people, my lord, you want the
souls who accompany me!”
Bera slams his fists down onto the arms of his thrown and
shouts, “YES, AT LAST!”
Lot lowers his face and he is worried sick, when he hears
Bera say, “I know what you think. I could go out there and
take the people, and tell me, where is the fun in that. Look
at me!”
Lot raises his head and looks at Bera, tears roll down his
face, and Bera says, “Yes you can live in Sodom, but you will
pay the price. Your people will know that you delivered their
souls to me for your own selfish need!”
Lot drops to his knees and begins to plead with Bera,
“No, my lord, I beg of you, not this, not this way!”
208
Lot slumps to the ground, sobs, and the two women look
at him directly, as it arouses them to see a frail human plead
before their God. Bera looks down on Lot and says, “Look at
me and tell me your name?”
Lot looks up at Bera, tears stream over his cheeks, and his
voice quivers. “Lot, my lord!” Lot says with a high pitch tone.
And Bera responds, “Lot, do you have any family?”
Lot raises his arms to Bera and as his hands tremble he
says, “Yes, I have a wife and two daughters, my lord!”
Bera says, “Very well, I will give you this much in return,
you may keep your wife and two daughters!” Even though Lot
is relieved over this shard of mercy, he slumps to the floor and
weeps bitterly.
Bera turns his attention to the Canaanite and says,
“Servant, remove this wreck of a man and house him not far
from the Palace, collect his wife and daughters and take them
to him. After which, you must gather your men and round up
the people; you will imprison them all within the temple and
prepare them for my inspection!”
The servant bows before Bera and says, “Yes, my lord, my
God and my King!” The servant walks over to Lot and lifts
him from the ground. He serves as a prop for Lot as they
make their exit, and Lot drags his feet and is weak. The slave
women watch as Lot is removed and with heads tilted back,
they roll them over their shoulders while they gently bite their
bottom lips, for the whole experience has aroused within them
passion and lust for their God.
k
The next day mid morning at Lot’s house: Lot’s wife and
daughters search the house, which is fully furnished from pre-
vious occupants; they look to familiarise themselves with their
new home. From the living quarters are stone steps which lead
to a first floor, with two large bedrooms adjacent on either side
of the steps. Each room contains a large bed fashioned in
209
PAUL JUSTICE
bronze and overlaid with fine linens. The walls are draped
with plush cloth, dyed purple, as the Canaanites are obsessed
with their unique purple dye. A few contrast colours are used
in various locations, and mainly consist of reds and greens.
From the master bedroom, stone steps lead to the roof of the
house which features botanical gardens and these grow every
plant used for medicinal purposes, this includes sleep-inducing
sap for those with insomnia. Even cannabis grows prolifically.
A regular supply of water is channelled from the mountain
springs to the roof of the building, and the city of Sodom is as
much a paradise on the inside as in the valley outside the walls.
Lot’s wife and daughters are delighted with their new
home and they hurry down the steps to tell Lot about their
discoveries. Lot sits in the living quarters upon a mound of
luxuriant fabrics which bear mixed colours, and he sits with
his head lowered, as he wallows in sadness with his face devoid
of any expression.
His wife hurries toward him, “Are you sleeping, my lord?”
Lot fails to answer and keeps his head lowered. She gets down
on her knees, looks up into Lot’s face, which appears blank.
She takes hold of his hand. “What troubles you my Lord?”
she says in soft voice.
He stares past his wife and does not answer. His daughters
approach slowly and the elder daughter says, “Mother, what is
wrong with Father?”
His wife rises to her feet and leads the daughters away.
“Leave him be, he will come round in his own time!”
The younger daughter says, “Why? What is wrong with
him?”
The mother shakes her head. “My daughter, I truly do not
know!”
k
Late afternoon that same day: A group of Canaanites lead
their King Bera toward the temple ziggurat, and many of the
210
people of Sodom watch from the windows of their houses as

Bera strides through the city. As they reach the entrance to the
temple, a long ramp cut into the ground leads down to a large
rectangular gap in the wall, and the Canaanites hurry down
the ramp ahead of their God. Bera follows close behind and
his head and shoulders only just clear the entrance. Inside the
temple it is cold and dark with limited light from torches
which burn softly. Priests line the walls and each holds a bowl
of incense oil with a small flame which burns low, this causes
their faces to glow as they mutter a silent chant in the pres-
ence of their God. Throughout the walls are chambers which
house the prisoners and all are gagged, as screams incites
Bera’s wrath.
The door to each cell is fashioned in stone with a small
square slit near the top for viewing, and in each chamber, the
prisoners are segregated into groups in accord to age and sex.
Bera instructs the Canaanite men, “In two nights it will be the
arrival of a full moon with clear skies. The sacrifice will be a
girl or a young woman and she must be a virgin. Take me to
the chamber of the girls!”
The men bow before Bera and lead him down a corridor
to another part of the temple, and Bera is crouched with lim-
ited space as he follows the men. Finally, they all stop along-
side a chamber and Bera peers in through the slit, and he sees
girls around the age of ten and some nurse babies. Bera looks
at the men and shouts, “Fools, why have you put babies with
girls and not their mothers?”
One of the men says, “It seemed logical to us my lord!”
Bera says, “Have I not told you before, a lactating moth-
er and her baby are a delicacy?”
“Yes my lord!” says one of the men.
Bera raises his voice, “Return the babies to their moth-
ers!” Bera’s voice echoes through the temple and the prison-
ers are terrified. Two of the men lead their King to the
chamber of the young women, while the others remain behind
211
PAUL JUSTICE
to relocate the babies with their mothers. On arrival at the

next chamber, Bera peers in and sees a group of women
between the ages of twenty through thirty, and he spots Alicia
and something about her draws his attention. He turns to his
servants and says, “The woman with the red shawl, bring her
to the centre of the temple!”
The men bow and Bera returns to the centre of the tem-
ple where the priests serve with incense. Moments later, Bera
stands, waits in the centre of the temple, the highest point
inside, and he stretches his arms and flexes his muscles, as he
hates being inside the temple; it makes him feel claustropho-
bic. The two servants appear from one of the corridors and
they escort Alicia who is gagged. On sight of Bera, she panics
and begins to wriggle, makes muffled vocal sounds and her
eyes extend wide with terror. The men approach Bera, with
Alicia who wriggles in their arms and Bera looks down on her
and says, “Stop squirming or I will crush you like a grape!”
Alicia becomes still and she can feel her power drain away
as she becomes dizzy. The giant lowers himself to his knees
and yet still he towers over Alicia; he looks at his servants and
nods his head. The two men understand what he means and
they remove the woman’s shawl and rip her dress so that it
hangs down over her hips and wrists. The top half of Alicia is
exposed as she stands and trembles with fear, and she stares at
the giant. Bera leans over the woman, places his face close to
her body. He sniffs, and with his eyes closed, he inhales deeply
and breathes in the woman’s scent. He rises to his feet. “This
woman is unblemished; have her prepared for the sacrifice!”
Bera thunders.
Suddenly, Alicia faints and falls to the ground in a heap at
the giant’s feet. The King instructs his men, “Take this woman
to the priests and have her prepared, they have two days
before the full moon!” After saying this, Bera exits the temple.
Four hours later, in the temple, Alicia is laid on a cold
stone slab; she is still unconscious and her body is naked as she
212
faces the ceiling. Two priests stand on either side of her, and
the two priests are Canaanite women, their clothes are white
cotton skirts which hang from their hips, drape their feet and
split full length on both sides. The priests massage olive oils
into Alicia’s body and the only light in the room is from four
torch stands which burn in each corner.
Alicia’s eyelids begin to flutter and as she opens her eyes,
she says, “Where am I? What are you doing to me?”
“Hush, my child!” says one of the priests.
Alicia still feels drowsy and becomes alarmed over her
nakedness. She tries to leverage herself up and calls out, “Let
go of me, please, let me go!”
One of the priests takes a piece of cloth from tucked in her
skirt and quickly presses it over Alicia’s nose and mouth,
which sends her back to sleep within seconds as the cloth is
soaked in a sleep inducing serum. One of the priests takes
hold of Alicia’s legs and the other her shoulders, and they turn
her body until she is face down on the slab. One of the priests
massages the oil into the woman’s back and buttocks, while
the other cuts Alicia’s hair to the scalp. By the end of the
evening, Alicia is dressed in a white cotton gown and every
hair on her body has been removed, and the odour of her skin
is sweet.
k
The virgin sacrifice.
Two days have passed and it is the night of the full moon.
Alicia is drugged, shaved and not entirely aware of what is
going on, although she is semi-conscious. Four male priests
carry her above their heads; climb the many steps of the zig-
gurat to the top. She is dressed in a white robe and her entire
body is bald. Alicia feels sick to her stomach as she is carried
and each time she opens her eyes and looks at the night sky,
she sees two moons cross from side to side, as a result of her
213
PAUL JUSTICE
stupor. As they reach the top, Alicia is lowered to the floor and
she stands, sways from side to side, and almost everyone from
the city has gathered around the slab of granite that sits cen-
tral at the top of the ziggurat.
King Bera, who sits in a stone throne at the head of the
slab, holds a bowl fashioned in gold. Even the steps which sur-
round the temple are littered with onlookers who did not
arrive early enough to get close to the sacrificial stone. The
priests remove Alicia’s robe so that she stands exposed and
naked and they lift her; she is placed upon the slab so she faces
the night sky. The priests spread her arms and legs and tether
her wrists and ankles. With Alicia’s head close to Bera’s throne,
she tilts her head back to look at the giant. She tries to focus
upon his great stature, which proves difficult as her vision is
blurred; she is so highly subdued with drugs that none of this
makes any sense to the woman who is about to die.
The King hands the bowl to the priest, who holds the
knife. He presses the bowl against Alicia’s neck, he thrusts in
the knife and severs her artery; the blood squirts for some dis-
tance and spatters the priest. The sight of blood throws the
crowd into frenzied hysteria. The people begin to chant in
meaningless rhythm as evil spirits infuse their bodies and the
bowl gradually fills with the woman’s blood. The priest lifts
the bowl high above his head, while he offers it to his God,
and Bera takes the bowl. The King rises to his feet, he raises
the bowl high in one hand, calls out in a thunderous voice,
“Here in this cup is the substance of life and for those who
drink – it brings immortality!”
The King lowers the bowl to his lips and drinks Alicia’s
blood while it is yet still warm. On sight of this, the masses of
Canaanites who have gathered prostrate themselves before
their God, mutter in undertones, and their droning voices fill
the night air with a foreboding hum.
As Bera sees the people worship him, he stretches his
arms toward the heavens and with blood stained teeth,
214
cries out in a loud voice, “Yes, worship your God, as I am

forever!”
As the people hear their God speak, the crowds begin to
chant his name repeatedly and some convulse with ecstasy.
After he absorbs their adoration for some time, Bera steps
down from his thrown and moves along side Alicia’s body. He
removes the knife from her neck, and he uses it to cut chunks
of flesh from her body, which he eats. He throws her flesh to
the crowds; they all eat like ravenous wolves that gorge them-
selves on her body. This continues through the night until all
that is left of Alicia is her skeleton, and this is left for the birds
of prey to pick clean any fragments of flesh that remain.
k
Time shift
One year later. King Bera has consumed almost half of the
prisoners in ceremonies similar to Alicia’s, repeated over and
over. This included men, women, children and babies. The
giant believes that to consume human blood and to eat their
raw flesh will bring him eternal life. Lot’s wife and daughters
have settled in Sodom and somehow have managed to ignore
the atrocities and acts of sorcery which surround them, and
they have closed their minds to reality; they have fooled them-
selves into thinking that so long as they avoid the temple, they
will be fine.
Lot, however, has become a recluse and his experience
with Sodom has destroyed him; he is no longer the man he
used to be. He sits on the roof of his house most days and
nights, watches the revellers in the city streets below, while he
smokes his pipe and drinks hard liquor. Cannabis and barley-
corn are readily available in Sodom’s market square. The pipe,
however, Lot designed himself from a length of palm wood.
Over many days he carved and fashioned the pipe to be long,
and carved Abram’s name into the wood with Akkadian letters;
215
PAUL JUSTICE
he thought this would bring him peace of mind, as Abram

used to a long time ago.
Regardless of his reasons, Lot feels empty and his sorrow
has swallowed him whole. Lot’s daughters mix with the
Canaanites and flirt with the men, and two men in particular
have consumed a lot of their attention, promised to marry
them one day. The two men are not serious though, and they
simply tease the women. Over the months, Lot watches his
daughters come and go as he sits on his roof and puffs his
pipe, stuffed with cannabis. He has noticed how their dress
code has changed from modest to provocative, yet he remains
unperturbed, drowns in his own self-pity. Lot’s wife occasion-
ally visits him on the roof to see if he needs anything, and he
can hear her approach long before he sees her as she jingles all
the way. She wears extreme amounts of jewellery and is
obsessed with the purchase of more, so she visits the market
square twice weekly. Her wealth and luxurious lifestyle feeds
her greed and she has become overly concerned with the col-
lection of material treasures. One evening, while Lot sits on
his roof, reclines among his plantation of hemp and stares into
a star-spangled sky, he feels a dread which suddenly overshad-
ows him, yet he fails to understand why. Lot rises to his feet
and looks down into the streets and senses that something big
is about to happen. His intuition is correct: Sodom is about to
face a momentous change.
216
13
Five Cities Under Siege
Subjected to the Babylonian Empire for twelve years, the

Canaanites paid their taxes to Chedor-Laomer, the King of
Elam, and supplied him with merchandise throughout the
period; this included fish packed in salt, shells, linen and pur-
ple dye, to name a few. Regular trains of camels packed with
goods were sent to the King of Elam, with little in return,
other than protection from marauding bands that dared to
attempt to cross the Eastern Desert. By the close of the
twelfth year, the constructions of the five cities of the plain
were complete, and this caused a revolt against the King of
Elam. The Canaanites severed all ties with Chedor-Laomer
and cut him off completely; they sent no further supplies or
tax. As the thirteenth year began, the Canaanites turned their
allegiance to the five Kings from among the Rephaim, and in
honour of these giants, they offered their worship and treated
them as Gods. In return, the five giant Kings protected their
loyal servants from within the five cities, as their large high
double walls seemed impenetrable.
Now, in the fourteenth year, Chedor-Laomer made plans
to meet with his close allies and began to draw up plans to
attack the Canaanites. He held discussions with three other
Babylonian Kings, Amraphel, Arioch and Tidal (named because
of his periodic assistance), and these discussions continued for
days. They drew up strategic battle formations and the best
plan of attack. Each of the four Kings possessed large armies
217
PAUL JUSTICE
of highly skilled men and women who were born for war, and
each of the Kings agreed to take four thousand of each from
among their platoons. The combined army of sixteen thou-
sand, and this includes the four Kings, were made up of four
thousand horses with swordsmen who charge in for the final
onslaught, four thousand men with spears on foot for inter-
mediary attack, four thousand men on foot with bow and
arrow who serve the front line and four thousand women
with sling-shots who move in first because of their stealth and
agility. The occupants of the five cities of the plain and sur-
rounding areas appeared to be doomed to annihilation.
k
Dawn breaks and the sun rises in the east: The four Kings and
their armies have camped overnight in the mountains which
overlook the Jordan plain, and they are positioned strategic-
ally in preparation for the attack. Chedor-Laomer and Arioch,
with their forces, are in the mountains on the east side.
Amraphel and Tidal, with their forces, are in the mountains
on the west side and overlooks the five cities. The two Kings
on the east side send two thousand women with slingshots to
the low hills close to the plain. Their plan is to cripple the
Rephaim, before the swordsmen charge in and finish the
giants. The women wear light armour which consists of boar
hide as breastplates; this leaves their arms and shoulders free.
Their skirts consist of strips of hide, which barely cover their
thighs, and their sandals are strapped up to the knee. The
forearm, which bears the slingshot, is protected with hide,
as the armband and the sling are one. The women’s hair is
pleated and pulled tight to the scalp and tied at the back, so
nothing restricts their line of vision. The women are light,
agile and lethal. Gathered among the rocks in the low plain
the women load their slings and wait for the signal, when the
four Kings blow the rams horns. King Arioch remains in
the hills on the east side positioned just above the women. In
218
the western hills, the two Kings have sent two thousand men
on foot with bow and arrow to position themselves in the low
hills which overlook the five cities. King Amraphel oversees
the archers.
Both Sodom and Gomorrah have watchtowers, with four
men posted at the top of each one. The men rotate in shifts,
and survey the valley day and night. Four thousand horsemen,
who bear swords and shields, are positioned in the north
plain, behind Zeboiim, and they wear heavy amour with
bronze breastplates. They spread out among the trees on both
sides of the Jordan River, ready they wait to ambush anyone
who may attempt to escape the valley. Tidal has oversight of
these men. Four thousand men with spears have spread
out and surrounded all five cities; they keep crouched and
close to the cities walls and wait for the occupants to flee
before they attack. Chedor-Laomer, accompanied by two
thousand archers positioned at the southern tip, beyond the
marshland in the valley of Siddim; the archers will take out
those who manage to escape the bitumen pits. Two thousand
women with slingshots stand in line at the edge of the marsh-
land, face the city of Zoar, so that anyone who flees south
to escape will fall into the bog-trap, as the women move to
one side or another. The Sea of Arabah is centrally located in
the battlefield and anyone who flees into it has no guarantee
of survival.
k
The sun rises and the traps are set. Chedor-Laomer sounds
the horn, followed by Arioch, Amraphel and Tidal, until all
four Kings sound the signal. As the trumpet sound fills the
valley, the watchmen in the towers of Sodom and Gomorrah
begin to sound the alarm to their inhabitants and Amraphel
signals for his archers to take them out. Waves of arrows strike
down the watchmen, followed by a second volley of arrows
which descend into the five cities. The women on the east
219
PAUL JUSTICE
side swirl slings above their heads, and the sound from two
thousand slingshots creates a whirring noise that fills the val-
ley. The Rephaim are bemused, look all around. They see the
women and they charge toward them; the giants crush trees
and vegetation in their haste to reach the enemy. The women
release their shots, and send a hail of smooth stones at the
speed of bullets. Kneecaps crack and pop as the giants fall to
the ground, while some of the Rephaim continue injured and
they hobble toward their enemy. The women quickly reload
and a second hail is flung at the giants who clumsily approach,
and as one huge man reaches the base of the hills, one of the
women reloads with a large smooth stone and swings it above
her head until it gathers tremendous speed. The whirring
increases and she aims for the giants head. She releases the
shot, the stone shoots through the air at great speed and
embeds in the man’s eye socket, and as the blood oozes from
around the stone, the giant crashes to the ground face down.
The women reload and continue to pound the giants.
On the west side of the valley, archers fire wave after wave
of arrows into the five cities and some of the Canaanites have
perished, this includes men, women and children. Even with
the cities in complete chaos, with people panicked as they run,
Lot stands on the roof of his house while arrows whizz past,
as if he were indestructible, and he watches people die in the
streets below. Not until an arrow whooshes past his ear, which
causes him to feel the draught and jars him to his senses, does
Lot run into his house and join his wife and daughters, who
hide under their beds. The city gates of Zeboiim open and the
Canaanites stream out. Many are cut down by the men who
throw spears. Men and women carry children and run toward
the sea of Arabah, and some fall with spears in their backs.
The giant King flees the city and heads for the western hills,
takes monstrous strides and manages to escape. The gates of
Admah open and its King is the first one out. He too flees to
the western hills and escapes.
220
As the Canaanites run from the city, many of them are cut
down by spears. Zoar’s gates open and Giant King Zoar
emerges with two shields, one on each arm. The warrior
women have formed a long line at a distance and have loaded
their slings with smooth stones. The whirring begins and
King Zoar gets down on one knee and shields himself as thou-
sands of stones hurtle through the air at high speed. The noise
deafens, as some of the stones ricochet from Zoar’s shields.
While the women reload, the giant makes leaps and bounds
toward the hills in the east, only to be faced with another
shower of stones, which he shields. He keeps his head covered
and he flees into the mountains.
As the Canaanites flee the city of Zoar, the archers posi-
tioned in Siddim release two thousand arrows into the sky,
which clear the women on the front line and fall upon the
Canaanites. This kills most of them; some of them escape
toward the west. The gates of Sodom and Gomorrah remain
closed, as these are the largest of the five cities and most dif-
ficult to penetrate. Tidal, King of the Goiim, who is posi-
tioned north, releases the first wave of horsemen; these
number two thousand, who charge the valley on both sides of
the sea of Arabah. A thousand of them charge on the east side
and a thousand of them charge the west and they storm in,
and they wield their swords. The Rephaim who drift injured
are finally cut down by the sword and some of their heads are
lopped off at such speed they appear to spin in midair before
they drop to the ground. However, some of the Rephaim have
made it as far as the hills in the east and they climb and grap-
ple at the women with slings. Some of the women are caught
by the giants, who mercilessly bite off their heads and hurl
their bodies down the mountainside.
King Arioch signals a retreat and the women begin to
climb the hills and cliffs. The Edomites, who hid themselves
in the mountains on the east side, begin to show themselves in
support of the Rephaim and some of the Edomite men begin
221
PAUL JUSTICE
to drop boulders onto the female warriors who climb the rock
face. The men release large rocks to roll down the cliffs and
this makes the women’s climb lethal. One woman looks up a
split second before a boulder takes half of her head clean off
and yet her body still clings to the rock face. Arioch signals for
backup and the men with swords dismount their horses and
charge the mountains in the east, strike down many of the
Edomites. Tidal, in the north, releases the second wave of two
thousand warriors on horseback, who charge through the val-
ley, to strike down the Rephaim, the Canaanites and the
Edomites; this includes men, women and children.
The war is now in full battle and the Babylonians have the
upper hand; only Sodom and Gomorrah remain protected
with their high walls and heavy gates. So Chedor-Laomer
sends one thousand archers to surround Gomorrah and one
thousand archers to surround Sodom. He commissions six-
teen of his horsemen to open the gates, eight he sends to
Gomorrah and eight he sends to Sodom. The gates of Sodom
are solid stone, twenty feet high and twenty feet wide, the
width of each gate is ten feet and three feet thick. A row of
four huge alloy rings are attached to each gate with large
chains which hang from each ring. The soldiers fasten the
chains to eight horses and command the horses to bolt, but
the animals struggle with the weight, rear up with a horse’s cry
and snort through their nostrils. Soldiers whip the horses
repeatedly and Chedor-Laomer insists they continue to drive
the horses and the gates begin to move with the sound of
stone as it grinds upon stone, yet the movement is marginal.
The gates begin to quicken the pace as Bera pushes them from
inside the city, and he emerges from between the gates, holds
a huge sword and shield. Chedor-Leomer is awestruck at
Bera’s immense size, as he is the largest of the giants. The
Babylonian King signals for his archers to release their
arrows. The giant pushes the horses to one side and blocks the
hail of arrows with his shield. He charges the archers before
222
they have time to reload and he hacks them to pieces with his
long sword, which cuts through flesh and bone like a hot knife
cuts wax. Bera has wiped out almost five hundred men in less
than a minute and as Chedor-Leomer sees this, he runs into
the city to escape Bera.
The giant turns his attention to the southern tip between
Sodom and Zoar, and he sees thousands of soldiers with
swords and spears in the low plain who strike down
Canaanites and Edomites. He strides into the battlefield and
with his long sword he begins to cut down the Babylonians.
The length of his sword cuts four men in two with one swoop.
Bera hears the whirring of the slingshots and looks at the
women in battle formation. As he turns to face them, they all
release simultaneously and Bera raises the large shield and
blocks most of the stones. As the women reload, Bera charges
toward them and wields his sword. The women wait until he
is close before they create a divide. Half move left while half
move right and they create a large gap between them. The
giant’s momentum leads him to plunge into the tar pits, where
he becomes trapped. The women regain their positions in line
and the whirring begins. Birsha, the King of Gomorrah,
appears from behind the city walls of Sodom. He is complete-
ly spattered in blood after he cut down the archers who sur-
rounded Gomorrah. He surveys the plain with a large sword
in one hand and a large shield in the other, and he runs, tak-
ing long strides toward four horsemen. The four soldiers on
horses charge toward Birsha, who charges them, and the point
of collision with the giant proves fatal for them. One swoop of
Birsha’s sword removes four soldiers’ heads in a split second
and as horses rear up, the giant swings his sword around a sec-
ond time and cuts the horses in two. Suddenly, a hail of stones
target Birsha and hurtle toward him at speed. He lifts his
shield in the nick of time to block them, although some have
grazed his scalp. Blood trickles down Birsha’s face and he
looks furiously at the line of women. Within a second, he
223
PAUL JUSTICE
charges them. The female warriors wait until he advances

closer, and suddenly they split, to create a large gap. As the
giant lashes out with his sword, he severs arms and legs, which
take to the air and some of the woman fall. Birsha is knee deep
in bitumen before he realises it and he looks at Bera who has
sunk to his thighs.
Both giants look at the women, who have regrouped and
reloaded their slings with smooth oval shape rocks perfect for
the kill, and a whirring sound fills the giant’s ears to torment
them. The women are about to release the fatal blow, when
suddenly the rams horn releases intermittent blasts to signal a
retreat. Slings stop whirring and stones sporadically hit the
ground as the woman look toward the cities of Sodom and
Gomorrah. Chedor-Laomer has climbed to the top of
Sodom’s watchtower and he signals for his armies to retreat
and regroup in Sodom. As the soldiers make their way toward
Sodom, the Canaanites and Edomites who survived flee to the
hills on both sides of the valley. The war is over and what were
once five cities and busy centres for trade are now ghost towns
littered with their dead. The Jordan plain is awash with blood
and flesh. Bera and Birsha remain stuck in the marshland bog
and continue to struggle, while the birds of prey gather on
cliffs and circle the skies overhead. The cities are desolate and
bare, with the exception of Sodom, where between five and six
hundred prisoners remain in the temple’s dungeons Lot and
his family remain hidden in their home.
The female warriors are the first to arrive in Sodom
and Chedor-Laomer immediately gives orders to loot the
houses and to take hostage anyone found alive. The women
honour the King and scatter themselves throughout Sodom,
to pillage every house. More soldiers arrive in Sodom and
they are ordered to look for hostages within the temple
and the Palace. As the soldiers begin their search, the three
Kings arrive in Sodom and regroup with Chedor-Leomer.
The four Kings begin to discuss their resources and estimate
224
their losses, while a group of one hundred soldiers enter the

temple ziggurat.
Inside, the temple is dimly lit from torches which burn
low and the soldiers hear multiple cries for help echo through
hollow corridors. The men quickly locate the chambers filled
with prisoners and begin to release them. As the prisoners
emerge, many of them try to run for freedom, only to be
knocked to the ground by the military. Only one man escapes.
The soldiers round up the hostages into a tight group and lead
them out of the temple and into the city square. As the
hostages climb the ramp to the surface, they cry out and hide
their faces from the sun, as they have not seen daylight for
over a year. The soldiers encircle the group in the city square
to keep them guarded, while the men tether their hands and
join them one to another, ready for the long journey north.
Two soldiers enter the Palace and find two slave-women
who hide behind black panthers; the women release the
vicious cats which run and attack the two men, but the men
quickly cut them down with their swords and kill them both.
The women slowly rise to their feet and the men stand and
gape wide-eyed at the semi-naked females; the soldiers look at
one another and laugh like adolescent boys. The men rush
forward and seize the women, who hiss like cats and spit in the
men’s faces, before they are dragged away and taken hostage.
The female warriors continue to loot and have gathered
a mass of merchandise. Four of them rob Lot’s house, while
he and his family hide under the beds. Two of the women
climb steps and drop jewellery and trinkets onto Lot’s bed,
while Lot lies still and silent and looks at the warrior’s feet.
The women wrap the booty in a bed sheet before they
descend the steps and they are just about to leave when one of
Lot’s daughters sneezes. The women stop at the door and
drop the sacks. All four of them run up the steps and quickly
overturn the beds,
“On your feet!” cries one of the warriors.
225
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot and his family are escorted from the house and
taken to the city square. By the time the four Kings, their
armies and the hostages leave Sodom, the sun is low in the sky
over the horizon. The armies regroup with those who have
pillaged Gomorrah and they all head north. They leave the
Jordan plain, follow the river and plan to camp out in the
hills before nightfall. Their resources are depleted and so are
their numbers; the four Kings have lost over eight thousand
soldiers in battle. Their bodies decorate the plain. The five
cities have been reduced to a third of the populace, by the
time their survivors return. It will not be the community
which thrived over former times, even though the five cities
remain intact.
k
Night: A partial moon reflects a pale blue light over Sodom.
A man by the name of Zekk, around mid thirties, has hidden
himself in a cavity beneath the sacrificial block on top of the
temple. As the prisoners were set free and while a ruckus pre-
vailed, this man managed to slip through the net and escaped
to the top of the ziggurat. Now alone, cold and afraid, he sits
and listens to the howls from the jackals of the plain as they
feed on scattered flesh. Sodom is devoid of the living, other
than evil spirits who parade the streets and gloat over the
dead. Zekk can feel their presence as an eerie chill cascades
the length of his spine, which causes the hairs of his neck to
tingle. Gripped with fear, he feels an urgency to escape the
city. His teeth chatter and clip his fingernails, as he stares out
into the cold night. He musters courage and creeps on hands
and knees from beneath the slab, then rises to his feet. He
walks to the edge of the ziggurat and looks down into
the streets. A low mist clings to the ground, which makes vis-
ibility poor. Zekk takes a deep breath before he attempts his
descent. He runs down the flight of steps that seem to never
end, eventually the mist rises to meet him. He loses track of
226
his foothold and trips and stumbles over the last few steps.
After he realises he is laid on his back over a corpse, Zekk
quickly jumps to his feet and peers through the mist, as he
attempts to find his bearings.
He locates the gates and begins to walk slowly toward the
exit. The mist slows him down and the damp air smells musky.
As he proceeds toward the gates, he precariously steps over
the dead, until he feels the hand of an evil spirit brush past his
cheek. Like an icy breeze, it wafts near him; it jolts his fear. He
panics and runs, while he steps on the dead and continues to
run until he is clear of the gates and close to the sphinx. He
crouches over, with his hands on his knees, and allows time to
regain his breath before he looks all around and surveys the
area. He looks toward the mountains in the west and begins to
run toward the hills, to get away from Sodom.
k
Bera and Birsha are stuck in the swamp and try to free them-
selves, without success. Bera repeatedly stretches his arms full
length, while he holds onto his sword across the bog, to try to
pierce solid ground. Unable to reach, he roars in anger, now
that he has sunk to his waist. Birsha has sunk to his thighs and
has thrown his sword which has stuck into solid ground, but
now he cannot reach it.
Bera looks at Birsha. “Fool, you threw too far!”
Birsha retorts, “At least I made an attempt!”
Bera tries to turn in the goo, but he feels nothing beneath
his feet. He says to Birsha, “Lie back on the swamp, so that
I can leverage over you and grab that sword!”
Birsha says, “No, you lie back over the swamp!”
Bera shouts back, “Fool, the sword is behind you!”
Birsha leans forward and begins to wrestle with Bera over
his sword. He wins the sword from Bera and throws it over
Bera’s head, so that it sticks into solid ground behind him.
Birsha bellows, “Now, the sword is behind you!”
227
PAUL JUSTICE
Bera roars and lunges forward to attack Birsha. Birsha

takes hold of the other’s shoulders and pushes him down
deeper, while he leverages himself free. He clutches the han-
dle of Bera’s sword and drags himself out from the swamp. As
Birsha stands and wipes tar from his body, bats swoop down
toward him and dart up again. This irritates Birsha, as he
hates bats, rats and any kind of vermin. He pulls Bera’s sword
from the earth and begins to lash out at the bats as they swoop
near him. He fails to clip any, as they are too agile and swift.
This angers the giant more, so he persists to swing the sword
in the air, as though shadow fencing. Bera watches him as he
sinks into the tar, which now creeps up to his chest. Anger
wells up in Bera, who begins to talk quietly and finishes in
loud thunderous voice when he says, “Birsha, when you are
finished playing, YOU MIGHT WANT TO GET ME OUT
OF THIS PIT!”
Birsha looks over his shoulder at Bera as he sinks and
chooses not to answer. He looks up into the night sky and
sees two bats fight over a moth in mid flight. He aims
and throws the sword as a spear; it kills them both before
the sword turns and falls into the sea of Arabah and sinks
to the bottom. He walks away and looks for a suitable tree,
one with few branches and streamlined. He finds one and
uproots it with little effort. He returns to Bera, who is furi-
ous. Birsha stretches the tree toward the other giant, who
takes hold with a firm grip. Birsha grips near the roots and
walks backwards until he has dragged Bera clear of the
swamp. Birsha drops the tree and approaches Bera, “We had
enough time!”
Bera just looks at Birsha and begins to walk toward
Sodom. Birsha walks with him. En route to Sodom, Bera
looks at Birsha and says, “I wonder about you and for a King,
you are quite dense. I can imagine you allow your subjects to
do as they please. Perhaps we should rename Gomorrah the
city of anarchy?”
228
Birsha says, “My subjects worship me because I feed

their lust and greed. Your subjects obey through fear, as you
terrify all!”
Bera says, “I follow my father’s lead, whereas you pander
to the people, and this is where we differ. Enough said!”
The giants continue to walk toward the cities and not
another word is spoken between them. Birsha walks into the
hills toward Gomorrah, while Bera stops outside the gates of
Sodom. Bera stands and stares into an empty city and the mist
that hangs low to the ground covers the dead. The giant walks
slowly into the city and as he reaches the city square, he stops
and looks toward his Palace, while the mist swirls around his
ankles at his feet. Suddenly, Bera turns his head to the left as
though someone has approached, yet he stands alone. He says,
“Father, what am I to do concerning the five cities?”
A voice, as though it ascends from the darkness, says,
“Restore them to their former glory, as the blood must con-
tinue to flow like a vintage red wine!”
Bera says, “Where do I begin? The cities are desolate!”
The voice from the darkness says, “You can start by
retrieving those hostages, as the Babylonians have taken what
does not belong to them!”
Bera says, “How many of the serpent class are present?”
The voice says, “We are a legion!”
Bera says, “Father, will they assist me?”
The voice says, “This is your Kingdom, not ours!”
“Rah!” Bera retorts and walks away disgruntled.
k
The next morning after sunrise: The man Zekk sleeps in a
cave in the mountains on the west side of the valley. The cry
of a falcon which hovers in midair wakes him, before the bird
swoops to the ground. He rises and looks outside the cave; the
sun blinds him and it is hot. He feels parched and hungry.
Zekk wipes his dry mouth with the back of his hand, then he
229
PAUL JUSTICE
continues on his journey. He climbs among the rocks and

heads toward Abram’s settlement at the great oaks of Mamre.
The journey is rugged and long and it is late afternoon by the
time he arrives. As he enters the settlement, he sees Abram,
who sits in the shade of a large oak, with his back against the
tree and his head lowered. Zekk runs toward him, as he calls
out, “Abram, Abram!”
Abram looks up and sees the man who runs toward him.
He rises to his feet and greets the man. “Zekk, I thought you
were with Lot?”
Zekk, breathless, says, “Abram, Lot has been taken
hostage by the Babylonians, my lord!”
Abram is alarmed. “What, what happened?” he asks.
Zekk, catches his breath. “A huge army attacked the five
cities and took many hostages including Lot. I ran and hid
until they were gone, my lord!”
Abram responds, “Come, we must gather an army and
pursue them! Which way did they go?”
Zekk says, “They went north, my lord, and I have not
eaten for days!”
Abram says, “Go to Sarai and she will fix you food, and
once refreshed, report this news to the three named Eshcol,
Aner and Mamre, as they are my allies!”
Abram hurries off to gather his men from among the set-
tlement. A few hours later, just before dusk, the men have
grouped near Abram’s tent in preparation for the chase, and
they pass swords and knives to one another, to make sure they
are adequately armed. The combined army numbers three-
hundred-and-twenty-three, this includes Abram, Zekk,
Eshcol, Aner and Mamre, and by the time the sun sets they all
head north into the hills in hot pursuit of the Babylonians.
k
God watches and listens and ponders in His mind the conse-
quence of Abram, who is about to put himself in harm’s way,
230
so the Word reassures the Most High, “I will go down and

give Abram the victory!” And the Word descends one million
times the speed of light and before man has time to blink, He
arrives in the camp of the Babylonians, long before Abram
and his army are anywhere near. The Word is invisible to man
and goes undetected. Several hours later and it is late into the
night, the Word is aware that Abram and his men lie face
down in the hills and spy over the mountain peaks as they sur-
vey the Babylonian camp. So the Word, who is a spirit, moves
next to Abram and listens to him as he gives orders to his men
over the plan of attack. Abram, however, has it all wrong, so
the spirit transmits into Abram’s mind a better strategy.
Abram, after he thinks it over, instructs his men for the sec-
ond time and tells them to ignore the first plan of attack.
Abram has no idea why he changed his mind.
The Word begins to search among the settlement and
moves in and out of tents, and each tent He visits, He leaves
one soldier with an idea which the spirit plants in each war-
riors mind as they sleep, and the thought is to kill their col-
leagues without question. A wind stirs in the camp and causes
fabric to flap against the tent, in which sleeps twenty female
warriors and this wakes one of the women. She sits up and
looks at the others who sleep, and without knowing why, she
removes a knife from the sheath that lies upon her armour by
her side. With perfect stealth, she creeps to the nearest
woman and places her hand over the victim’s mouth and she
quickly slits her throat; blood jets and pumps from the artery
and the woman struggles in silence. The warrior holds her
down until the woman’s body is limp and without the breath
of life. She repeats the same process until all have died in their
sleep and inside the tent are fountains of blood.
The woman slowly rises to her feet, stands naked and
spattered with blood, then runs from the tent. She screams
with the knife in her hand, suddenly stops and looks up at the
moon, and the blood which covers her body appears black
231
PAUL JUSTICE
under the moonlight. She screams out, “Why, why, what have
I done?” Naked men run from their tents, while others fall
over themselves as they try to dress as they run. Chedor-
Leomer appears from his tent and he wears little other than
the sword in his hand. He marches directly toward the woman
and looks her over, before he charges into the women’s tent.
As he stares over the mass slaughter, he says quietly, “She has
lost her mind!”
He quickly exits the tent and without hesitation, he
plunges the sword into the woman’s back and the blade
bursts out from between her breasts. He withdraws his
sword; the woman’s body drops to the floor in a heap. Six
men with knives in their hands stand and watch Chedor-
Laomer murder their co-worker and without hesitation,
they charge the King and begin to stab him repeatedly; his
stab wounds are close to one hundred as his body hits the
earth. Ten men with swords in hand have witnessed their
King’s murder and without hesitation, they attack the six men
and the swords have punctured their bodies several times as
they fall and bite the dust. Twenty female warriors from
another tent who have stood and watched the ten murder
the six, with slingshots they hurl stones repeatedly until they
have killed all ten men. This scenario continues throughout
the camp until the Babylonian army is reduced to a few hun-
dred men.
Abram and his army stay hidden in the hills and watch
as the Babylonians slaughter one another. Abram turns to
Eshcol and says, “See, this idea of mine has paid off; their
numbers fall!”
Eshcol says, “Abram, how did you know this would
happen?”
“Just a hunch!” says Abram, then ducks his head down and
continues to watch. The slaughter continues well into the
night and the plateau below the hills is scattered with the
dead.
232
Abram looks at Eshcol and says, “It is time!” He looks

over his shoulder and signals to the men that it is time to
attack. All three hundred and twenty three men rise to their
feet simultaneously and lift their swords above their heads
with a fearsome cry. They warble from their throats and
scream like rabid wolves as the men charge from the hills
toward the encampment. The Babylonians cease to strike one
another and look toward the marauding bands fast approach.
They drop their weapons and begin to run in the opposite
direction and they continue to run. They run northeast
toward Damascus in Syria and Abram and his men keep up a
relentless chase. Abram could have given up the chase much
sooner, which could have reduced the return journey, but he
persisted regardless and chased the Babylonians as far as
Hobah, north of Damascus.
k
Four days later in the camp of the Babylonians or settlement
of the dead: Lot and the other hostages who remain tethered
to trees, all choke from the stench of decayed flesh, as the birds
of prey flock. The persistent sun beats down and this adds to
their misery. One woman sits and retches with nothing in her
stomach to eject. Lot looks at her and says, “This is just typi-
cal of Abram, he comes to the rescue, then disappears for days.
He will chase them to hell and back, just to prove a point!”
The woman looks forlornly up at Lot and says, “Would
you stop talking, please!”
Lot turns his face away from the woman and in his tem-
per, he tries to kick a buzzard, which tears at flesh near to his
feet. He looks at his wife and daughters tied to another tree
not far from his.
Lot says, “Could Abram not have left a few men behind to
cut us loose?”
Lot’s wife sits with her head down and does not bother to
answer. Suddenly, the birds take to the air in a huge flock and
233
PAUL JUSTICE
the noise from the wings deafens. Abram and his men have
returned.
As they enter the encampment, Abram and his men
gather around the hostages and Abram stands up front with a
sword in his hand. Lot slowly raises his head and tries to focus
on Abram, but the sun reflects from the blade of Abram’s
sword and blinds him and he is unable to make clear Abram’s
features. Lot says, “So you decided to return?”
He hears Abram’s voice, “So you are happy to see me
then?”
“Of course my lord am I not always?” says Lot in a dry
tone.
Abram approaches Lot and cuts the straps that tether his
wrists behind the tree. Lot sits and removes the remnants of
the restraints from his wrists. Abram helps Lot to his feet.
“We are going to gather the booty and head down to Salem in
the valley of the King and maybe stay there for one night!”
The Word, who is still present, listens to Abram and
remains undetected. When He hears Abram’s words, He
immediately leaves the group and heads for Salem. Lot, who
is weak and hungry, agrees with Abram’s plans. So, Abram
turns his attention to his men and he instructs them to cut free
the hostages and give them all refreshment before the journey.
Eshcol, Aner, Mamre, Zekk and Lot are to help Abram collect
all of the booty which belongs to the people.
Abram sends Aner and Mamre to search a portion of
tents and Zekk and Lot to search another portion of tents,
while Abram and Eshcol search the remainder of the tents.
One hour passes, as the men collect the treasure. Suddenly a
ruckus erupts inside one of the tents and as Abram exits a tent
and looks in the direction of the trouble, he sees the fabric of
the tent which moves from side to side, almost to the point of
collapse. So Abram hurries toward the tent. As he enters, he
sees Zekk and Lot who grapple on the floor and hurl fists at
one another.
234
Abram shouts at the top of his voice, “STOP FIGHTING!”

Both men stop and roll onto their backs and look up at
Abram. Zekk says, “This man sold us out to the Canaanites, my
lord!”
Abram says, “On your feet, man. You talk nonsense!”
Zekk rises to his feet and brushes the dirt from his cloths. Lot
is laid on the ground and blood trickles from his nose; he is
assisted to his feet by Abram. Abram then walks over to Zekk.
“Tell me, why do both of you fight?” Abram asks.
Zekk says, “Lot sold us to the giant man, the King of
Sodom; the one they call Bera, my lord!”
Abram looks at Lot and says, “Is this true?”
Lot stands with a serious expression on his face and begins
to shake his head to confirm the answer is no.
Abram looks at Zekk and says, “Lot denies your
accusation!”
Zekk becomes animated with his arms and points at
Lot, “Liar! Ask him about Alicia, my lord, for she is no longer
with us!”
Abram looks at Lot and asks, “What is this concerning
Alicia?”
Lot lowers his head and begins to stare at his feet and fails
to make any comment.
Abram looks at Zekk and says, “Go and help the others.
I will be with you shortly!”
“Yes my lord!” says Zekk and quickly exits the tent. Abram
walks a little closer to Lot and says in sombre tone, “Lot, no
matter how painful this may be, I want the truth!”
So Lot begins to unravel the whole story about Sodom to
Abram and he listens intently, as Lot describes what happened
to Alicia and the prisoners and how he became a recluse and
wallowed in self-pity. He relates everything that happened
over the period of a year before the cities were taken by force.
As Abram listens, his eyes well up with tears which trickle into
his braided beard. Abram speaks, with indignation in his tone,
235
PAUL JUSTICE
when he says, “Yahweh will hear about this, mark my words!”

He turns and hurries from the tent. No sooner has he left,
when Lot drops to his knees and weeps bitterly from the
depths of his very being.
k
Three days later: Abram and all the people descend into the
valley of the King and arrive in the city of Salem (now
Jerusalem). The Word waits in Salem for Abram to arrive and
He plans to make an appearance. As Abram and the large
crowd follow him into the city, the Jebusites who occupy the
land are busy and they trade in the market square; locals and
their children are occupied with daily affairs. The people
notice the large crowd walk through the city and assume they
are here to trade. The temple is a large building that features
pillars of stone with many steps which lead up to the entrance.
Inside, it is dim, with limited light and the atmosphere inside
is cool and refreshing. Outside the temple, the heat continues
to rise.
As the people arrive at the foot of the steps, Lot looks at
Abram and says, “Abram, why are we here?”
Abram says, “So all the people can give a tenth of their
wealth to the house of God!”
Lot frowns. “Is this wise my lord?”
Abram looks at Lot and says, “Wise, no. The word you
are looking for is righteous, and the answer to your question
is yes, it is righteous to give a tenth of your wealth to the
house of the living God!”
After saying this, Abram climbs the temple steps and Lot
quickly follows him,
“Can you never give a straight answer, my lord?” Lot asks.
“It would be so much easier for all of us.” he adds.
Abram stops suddenly on the top steps and Lot stops with
him. They stand together and stare into the temple, as they
watch as a man approaches them from the dark interior. The
236
man is elegant and moves with seemliness. He is young,

around thirty years old; his skin is bronze and perfectly
smooth. He has black hair and a beard well groomed with
sheen and hazel brown eyes with a brightness never seen. His
untarnished teeth so perfectly aligned give an unmatched cre-
dence to a beautiful smile, and everything about his counte-
nance is welcoming. His gown is the purest white and almost
drapes his feet; the cloth which drapes his head and shoulders
resembles translucent gold with a silver fringe. Even the san-
dals on his feet are gold and they gleam. Abram and Lot are
transfixed as they peer at the one who approaches with wel-
coming smile and open arms.
Abram squints his eyes, as he watches the man’s face
change to a brilliance much greater than the sun, with eyes
which burn like flames and sparkle like newly cut diamonds.
As Abram watches the man’s countenance glow, Lot looks and
sees only a man. Lot looks at Abram. “Why do you squint?”
he asks.
Abram fails to respond, as he is riveted to the spot and
struggles to comprehend the illusion. With both hands,
Abram rubs his eyes and looks at the man again, with his eyes
refocused, and this time he sees only a man who stands before
them.
The man looks at Abram and says, “Welcome. I am
Melchizedek, High Priest of God Most High and King of
Salem. Come, you must enter the temple and bring the peo-
ple, as I have prepared a feast!” As Abram and Lot walk into
the temple, Melchizedek puts his hand on Lot’s shoulder and
stops him, while Abram continues to walk. The High Priest
faces Lot with both hands on his shoulders and looks into his
eyes. “Tell me, why are your eyes heavy with sadness, when
the error of your ways is forgiven?” Melchizedek asks.
Lot’s eyes fill with tears as he gazes into Melchizedek’s
beautiful smiling face, and Lot experiences warmth between
them; his burdens leave him as a millstone rises from his
237
PAUL JUSTICE
shoulders. The High Priest dries the tears from Lot’s face,
lays his arm across his shoulders, then he points into the tem-
ple and says, “Go inside and rejoice!”
As Lot leaves the High Priest, he feels enlightened and
joins Abram inside where he stands near the banquet.
Melchizedek looks down the steps and calls to the people,
“Come you people, there is food for all!”
The people cheer and run up the steps. The High Priest
laughs joyfully, as he is delighted to see them happy. The peo-
ple rush past the High Priest and into the temple and quickly
gather around Abram and Lot. Abram hands bowls filled with
bread, olives, figs and various fruits to the people, and Lot dis-
penses the wine. Melchizedek remains at the top of the steps, as
he watches an old man left behind. The old man is crippled
with arthritis to the joints, but he struggles to climb the steps.
As he reaches Melchizedek, he kneels at his feet. The old
man looks up into the High Priest’s face and takes hold of
Melchizedek’s hands to gently kiss the backs of them. The old
man feels God’s spirit as it permeates his entire body, so that by
the time he rises to his feet he is healed. He rises to his feet and
stands; the man hugs Melchizedek with his head pressed into
his chest. “Thank you my lord!” he says with gratitude.
The High Priest speaks softly to the old man, “No, not I.
Thank God Most High!”
The old man rejoices, skips and runs to join the others in
the temple. As Melchizedek watches him, He laughs with
delight. Now, the High Priest enters the temple and joins the
group who eat, drink, laugh and celebrate their victory over
the Babylonians. Abram has never seen Lot so happy. The
High Priest walks among the people and rejoices with them,
until He is positioned central among them. He raises his arms,
with palms facing up, and He calls out in clear voice.
“Blessed be Abram by God Most High, Creator of
heaven and earth. And blessed be God Most High for putting
your enemies into your clutches.”
238
As the people hear these words, they rejoice. Melchizedek

approaches Abram and takes hold of his wrist. He raises his
arm and says, “Victory to Abram and to God Most High who
sent him!”
The people continue to cheer and applaud him. Abram’s
modesty is being choked so he hurries among the people. “Fill
your empty bowls with coins, jewellery and anything of value
and take them to the High Priest!”
The people immediately obey and as Abram continues
among the crowd, he approaches Lot’s wife, who stands, holds
an empty bowl. As Abram speaks, the High Priest listens,
when Abram says, “Fill the bowl with your jewellery and give
it to Melchizedek!”
Lot’s wife protests, “Must I, my lord? This jewellery
I have collected over time!”
Abram says, “It is righteous to give a tenth to the house of
God Most High!”
So Lot’s wife reluctantly removes the bangles from
her arms, her necklace and earrings and places them in the
bowl. Meanwhile, the people queue before the King of Salem
with bowls full of valuable items. As each one presents their
offering, the High Priest rests his right hand upon their heads
and blesses each one. As Lot’s wife reaches the front of the
queue, she curtsies before Melchizedek and hands Him the
bowl with contents which glisten. The High Priest blesses her
and says, “My child, you must open your ears and listen!”
She looks into his face and her expression is coy, before
she bows and leaves his presence. She hurries over to her hus-
band and says, “My lord, I wish to leave now.”
Lot nods in agreement and waits for Abram. A little time
passes and the High Priest received a tenth of all the people’s
valuables. He walks among the people, “Everyone come, and
I will walk you to the gates of Salem!”
As Melchizedek exits the temple, with Abram by His side,
all the people follow and Lot is near the rear of the assembly
239
PAUL JUSTICE
as they approach the gates of Salem. As they all pass the mar-
ket square, Lot notices a man who sits and counts his money
after a lucrative day. Lot leaves the crowd and hurries over to
the local, as his curiosity has overwhelmed him. As he reach-
es the man who sits and counts his coins, Lot says, “Excuse
me, young man!”
The man stops and looks up at Lot. “When was the elab-
orate temple built?” Lot asks.
The man says, “What temple?”
Lot says, “The temple where we just met Melchizedek,
the High Priest and King of Salem?”
The man frowns, “Who?”
Lot points to the crowd who are about to exit Salem,
“Over there, the tall man next to…?” Lot suddenly stops, as
Melchizedek is no longer with them and all he sees is Abram
who leads the people. Lot’s face is serious when he looks down
at the man.
The man looks up at Lot and laughs. “You may be suffer-
ing from heat stroke, my friend. I suggest you get out of the
midday sun!”
Lot turns and looks in the direction of the temple and
all he sees are hills and the sun soars high above. Lot is
alarmed; dread overshadows him and his knees become
weak. Lot turns and looks at the man who sits on the ground
and he has returned to counting his money. Bewildered,
Lot runs to catch up with the others who are just about to
exit Salem. As he catches up with the others, he is breathless
and retains his secret to himself. And moments later, the peo-
ple congregate outside the city while Abram stands up front.
He surveys the valley to figure out the best route to take back
to the oaks of Mamre. Suddenly, screams erupts from among
the women, as they see giant King Bera of Sodom, as he
pounds the ground on his approach. Abram is furious when he
sees him.
240
Abram walks away from the assembly to meet with the

giant, who casts a shadow which almost covers the entire
group. Abram approaches Bera and stretches his arms out, so
that his palms face the giant. He is fearless when he shouts at
the King of Sodom, “STOP! What gives you the right to set
foot in this sacred land?”
Bera snorts at Abram. “Give me the people, and you can
keep the treasure for yourself!” the giant demands.
Abram looks up at the towering giant; with indignation in
his tone, he says, “I swear by God Most High, not a single
thread or the strap of a sandal will I accept from you. No, never,
for you to sit in Sodom and boast and say, I made Abram rich’!”
Bera’s anger wells up inside him and he roars at Abram,
which showers him with spit. In a thunderous voice, he says,
“Rah, I could crush you like an ant and take those people
without your consent!”
Abram looks up at Bera. “I would not advise it! I only have
to give the word and Yahweh’s Angel will descent quicker than
you can blink, and swat you out of existence!”
The giant cannot believe his ears; he is furious and at the
same time perplexed. He lowers himself to one knee and while
he still towers over Abram, he peers into Abram’s face. “Who
are you?” he asks inquisitively.
Abram stares straight back into Bera’s large eyes and
refrains to utter a word. And after a few moments of silence,
Bera sniggers, “Ah, you are wasting my time!”
Bera rises to his feet and looks down on Abram, bemused
as to who this man really is and why he has so much authori-
ty. After a few moments, Bera turns and walks away, back in
the direction from whence he came.
Abram calls after him, “Bera, I will see to it that my men
receive your share of the treasure!”
Bera ignores Abram’s final comments and continues
to walk. Abram waits until the giant has created some distance
241
PAUL JUSTICE
between them, then he turns and faces the people who are
huddled in a group, and they look terrified. Abram calls out
to the assembly, “Do not fear the giant, as you will never see
him again!”
The people rejoice as they hear this good news; however,
Abram does not yet realise that Lot and his wife and daugh-
ters plan to return to their home in Sodom.
242
14
The Vision
A few days have passed since Abram arrived back in Mamre

with the clan; however, Lot parted company and took his wife
and daughters back to Sodom, against Abram’s advice. It is the
morning of the seventh day of their return and Abram sits in
his tent. As he plays over in his mind previous events, he is still
bemused as to why Lot insisted on his return to Sodom. Sarai
and Hagar stand side by side and prepare breakfast, when
Abram looks up at them and says, “It baffles me. I just fail to
understand why Lot returned to Sodom!”
Sarai approaches with a bowl of freshly baked bread from
the fired clay ovens dug into the earth and hands the bowl to
Abram. She says, “Who knows? No one understands the
human psyche and the heart is treacherous!”
Abram laughs and says, “I was not asking for a lesson in
psychology, a simple answer would have sufficed!”
Sarai curtsies and says, “There is no simple answer my
lord!”
She returns to Hagar and helps prepare the fruit. Abram
eats some of the warm bread and says, “No, this mystifies me.
Why would Lot want to subject himself to the orders of a
giant freak?”
Sarai swings around and says, “Giant, my lord?”
“Yes, King Bera is one of the Rephaim!” Abram says.
Hagar crushes pomegranates and pours the juice into a
flask. She takes it to Abram and says, “Maybe Lot feels pro-
tected by the giant, my lord!”
243
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram laughs and says, “I think not. Lot is afraid of Bera!”

Hagar curtsies and goes out to the clay ovens to check on
the bread. While Hagar is absent, Sarai rushes over to Abram,
who takes a drink from the flask. She says, “Would you con-
sider having Hagar as a wife my lord?”
Abram nearly chokes on the juice, wipes his mouth,
“What are you saying? You are my wife!” Abram retorts.
Sarai gives a timid laugh. “What I mean is, take her as
your second wife? Why not? I know you like her, my lord.”
Abram is about to answer, when Sarai quickly places her
hand over his mouth, “Hush, my lord!” as she sees Hagar
return with the bread.
The three now sit together and share breakfast. An
uncomfortable silence ensues, until Hagar says, “Is the bread
to your satisfaction, my lord?”
Abram coughs. “Yes, my child, it is good, and the juice is
delicious!”
Hagar smiles enthusiastically and says, “I shall fetch you
some more, my lord!”
Hagar rises to her feet and gathers more pomegranates to
make the juice. Sarai sits and looks at Abram with a serious
expression upon her face. Abram’s nervous cough continues as
he clears his throat. He rises to his feet and says, “Well, if you
would excuse me, I need to collect dry timber, for the altar
needs to be replenished.”
Abram portrays one of his famous bows before he leaves.
Sarai calls after him, “Take your staff, my lord, you may
need it.”
Abram grabs his staff and exits the tent. A few minutes
later, Hagar approaches the breakfast area, with a flask of
juice, and asks, “Where is Abram?”
Sarai looks up at Hagar and in serious tone, she says, “He
left because you embarrassed him!”
Hagar gasps and says, “Forgive me; I did not intend to
upset Abram!”
244
Sarai laughs. “Relax, Hagar,” she says. “Abram felt uncom-

fortable because he likes you!”
Hagar lowers her head, as her face has become flushed.
Sarai rolls her eyes and laughs.
Three hours later, Abram has collected a lot of timber and
it is piled up around the sacrificial altar. As it is nearly noon, it
becomes too hot to continue to work, so Abram decides to take
a break. He chooses a nearby large oak tree, dense with leaves,
and rests in the shade, with his back against the oak. Directly
opposite Abram, and at a distance, are two large oaks with a
large gap between them. Through the gap, he sees the hills in
the distance. He closes his eyes and rests in the cool shade, as
he listens to the sounds of birds that have gathered in the tops
of trees. A cool breeze gently blows against Abram and it
refreshes him. He almost drifts off to sleep, when a strange phe-
nomenon occurs. A white light, brighter than the sun, floods
the area where Abram sits. As Abram opens his eyes to look, he
flinches because of the severity of the light and quickly blocks
his eyes with his hands. Abram becomes afraid, even though his
curiosity is difficult to bear, so he tries to peek. With the backs
of his hands against his eyes, he peeps through a small gap
between them and the light glares from the large gap between
the two oaks. Abram peers into the light from between the gap
in his hands and his eyes squint. As he peers, he tries hard to
focus into the core, where the light has brilliance that he has
never experienced before. Eventually, his eyes focus upon two
figures who sit side by side upon thrones; they have the appear-
ance of human Kings, but with a brilliance far superior to any-
thing of earthly origin. The Kings in human form sparkle like
gems, but Abram cannot make out a face on either of them.
The vision perplexes and yet strangely enlightens, as a calm
voice communicates from the core, “Do not be afraid, Abram!
I am your shield and shall give you a very great reward.”
Abram peers into the light and squints. He says,
“My Lords, what use are your gifts, as I continue on my way
245
PAUL JUSTICE
childless? And as you have given me no offspring, then per-

haps a member of my own household will be my heir?”
The voice transmits from the light, “Such a one will not
be your heir; no, your heir will be the issue of your own body.”
A silence ensues before the voice continues, “Look up at
the sky and count the stars, if you can. Just so will your
descendants be!”
Abram tilts his head back and looks up into the sky, and
all he can see are branches and leaves, as the sun’s rays pass
through tiny gaps between leaves, as it is early afternoon
the stars are invisible. But as Abram looks up, a blanket of
darkness covers his vision, as though he is being transported
mentally into far distant galaxies. He gasps, as he beholds
countless billions of stars in all their glory, with beautiful
nebula in a glorious array of colours, and the spirals of the
star constellations leave an indelible impression on Abram’s
mind. After a few moments, the blanket vision of the universe
dissolves before his eyes, until reality reveals the leaves of
the oak.
Abram basks in the flood of light and guards his eyes with
the backs of his hands. Again he peers into the core and looks
at the two celestial Kings. He says, “Who do I communicate
with, my Lords, as I see more than one?”
The voice from the vision says, “I am Yahweh, who
brought you out of Ur of the Chaldeans, to give you this
country as your possession.”
Abram says, “Lord Yahweh, how can I know that I shall
possess it?”
Yahweh says, “Bring me a three-year-old heifer, a three-
year-old she-goat, a three-year-old ram, a turtledove and a
young pigeon.”
After Yahweh speaks these words, the light diffuses
among the trees and dissipates away. Abram lowers his hands
and blinks repeatedly, due to a temporary blindness. As he
tries to refocus between the gaps in the trees, all he can see are
246
millions of white spots which parade behind his eyes. He rests

his head against the tree, and Abram closes his eyes and waits
for the spots to disappear. He thinks over the things he has
just experienced. After a period of ten minutes, Abram opens
his eyes and his sight is restored to normal; once again he can
distinguish objects clearly. He rises to his feet and hurries
toward his tent, excited over the experience.
Abram enters his tent with his face aglow with enthusi-
asm, and he sees Sarai who works to prepare a meal. “Sarai,
I have seen Elohim the God family between the oaks!”
“What?” says Sarai.
Abram excitedly says, “Elohim! I have seen Elohim!” He
hurries to exit the tent.
Sarai drops the knife and hurries after him. “My lord,
what are you saying? What did God tell you?”
Abram stops, looks back at Sarai and with conviction in
his voice, says, “We are going to have a son!”
He turns and hurries to the herdsmen. Sarai stands near
the entrance to the tent and watches Abram as he hurries
through the settlement. She frowns and thinks, a son at our
age? Impossible! She begins to think more about Hagar, as she
returns inside the tent.
While she continues to cut the greens, Sarai conjures up
in her mind a plan she thinks will meet with God’s approval,
and assist toward the fulfilment of the promise. She contem-
plates the idea, as Hagar enters the tent with a pot from the
kiln. She places the pot next to Sarai. “The lamb is cooked
tender; I have tasted it!” Hagar says.
Sarai takes hold of Hagar’s arm and says, “Come, I have
some news!”
She leads Hagar to an area in the tent reserved for relax-
ing and they both sit together. She takes hold of Hagar’s
hands. “Abram and I are going to have a son!” Sarai says.
Hagar’s face lights up and she bears a broad grin. “Oh, this
is wonderful news!” Hagar says excitedly.
247
PAUL JUSTICE
Sarai says, “Wait, you do not understand. You see, I am

not pregnant.”
So Hagar frowns. “Then, what are you saying?” she says.
Sarai says, “Yahweh has promised Abram a son, and some-
times God leaves it for us to work out how to realise the ful-
filment of His promise, almost like a test. Now I am clearly
way beyond the age of childbearing, so I thought of you.”
Hagar lowers her head momentarily, then looks up at
Sarai, wide-eyed. “You want me to share with you and
Abram?” she says in serious tone.
Sarai laughs and says, “No, foolish girl. What are you say-
ing? No, you will become Abram’s second wife and he will
come to you, in your bed, and you will conceive on my
behalf.”
Hagar thinks, then looks at Sarai. “Are you sure this is
what Abram’s God wants?” she asks.
Sarai frowns and says, “Why are you questioning the
workings of God’s will? Do you perceive another way for this
to work? Because if you do, then please tell me.”
Hagar lowers her head to think again. She looks up and
says, “If it pleases my lord, Abram, then I will oblige him.”
Sarai quickly responds, “Oh it will please him, believe
me!”
Hagar giggles softly and Sarai continues, “Do not worry
I will discuss this with Abram very soon. Come, we must fin-
ish preparing the meal!”
k
Three hours have passed since Abram alerted the herdsmen
with respect to the requested livestock. Abram now stands on
top of the sacrificial structure, as the men arrive with the
appropriate animals. The men hand the animals up to Abram,
one at a time, and Abram splits them down the middle with a
sharp knife and lays them upon the altar as instructed. Birds
he leaves whole and lays them out. Now the selected animals
248
are laid out, ready. The herdsmen assist Abram down before
they leave. As soon as the men are out of sight, Abram pros-
trates himself on the ground and cries out to his God, “My
Lord, Yahweh, I have done just as you have requested!”
The sun sets, as Abram lies face down, spattered with ani-
mal blood, and he lies and he waits.
Sarai appears from the entrance to the tent and cries out
to him, “Dinner is ready my lord!” She quickly disappears
back into the tent.
Abram lies with his face in the dirt, and he thinks, that
woman, her timing is impeccable! Abram lies on the ground,
waits for a response but none is forthcoming, so he cries out
to his God a second time, “My Lord, Yahweh, the sacrifice
you requested is ready!”
Still no reply! Abram hears birds flap their wings and the
cry from birds of prey. The birds swoop down over him and
they cause a tremendous draft. He looks up and sees birds of
prey hover over the sacrifice and he is furious. He steadies
himself to his feet, takes hold of his staff and beats the birds
with it, which chases them off. This continues for some time
as the sun sets over the horizon. After Abram has chased away
the birds, he walks over to the great oak nearby and sits with
his back against the trunk to reflect over the day’s experiences
and to consider the good news of the promised heir.
Now, as the dusk creeps in, a deep dark dread overshad-
ows Abram and he becomes fearful. He sits and stares with
empty eyes as he slips into a trance. In his mind, he begins to
experience the sensations of falling. He loses consciousness of
all reality, then begins to experience a dreadful black, as
though his mind had plummeted into the deep abyss. From
the hollow realms of empty space within the depths of his
mind, Abram hears a voice call him. The voice says, “Know
this for certain, that your descendants will be exiles in a land
not their own, and be enslaved and oppressed for four hun-
dred years. But I shall bring judgment on the nation that
249
PAUL JUSTICE
enslaves them and after this they will leave, with many pos-
sessions.”
The voice pauses for a few seconds before it continues,
“For your part, you will join your ancestors in peace; you will
be buried at a happy old age.”
The voice pauses again, momentarily. “In the fourth gen-
eration they will come back here, for until then, the iniquity
of the Amorites [tribe of giants] will not have reached its full
extent.”
As soon as the voice finishes these words, a flaming pot
appears beneath the altar and a flaming torch passes over the
animal pieces, which causes a burnt aroma to ascend to the
heavens. This continues until the animal pieces are com-
pletely devoured. Then the voice returns in the depths of
Abram’s mind. “To your descendants I give this country, from
the River of Egypt to the Great River, the River Euphrates.”
After Yahweh speaks these words, the spirit of God leaves
Abram and his recovery begins. Abram feels himself rise from
the epitome of darkness, as he emerges from the abyss within
the recessions of his mind, which has left him numb and he
feels empty. As he opens his eyes, he feels drugged, as though
he emerges from the skilled techniques of an anaesthetist. And
after some time he tries to focus, he gradually realises that it
is now night, the two large oaks appear to him as black sil-
houettes with dark leaves which rustle in the cold night
breeze. Abram begins to steady himself to his feet and almost
immediately falls to the ground again, and his head remains
woozy. Abram sits on the ground with his head down and his
arm propped up on one knee, and he reflects over the infor-
mation transmitted as though it were buried in his own mind.
And yet, he reasons, how could I possibly know these things?
He mulls it all over in his mind, and he tries to connect
the two very different experiences: the vision that brought
him light and the trance that brought him darkness. He thinks
he has worked it all out and begins to mutter in an undertone,
250
“The light brought me good news, while the darkness infused

fear and a more serious message, even informed me of my
death. Maybe I should not have questioned Yahweh? Yes, that
is it! I have made God angry. Why else would He drag me
down to the bowels of hell to impart information?”
Still confused, Abram tries again to steady himself to his
feet and this time he uses his staff for support. Now on his
feet, he remains unsteady and taps his way, and uses his staff
to guide his path. He reaches the altar, and he sees that the
animal pieces are gone and that a faint whiff of smoke smoul-
ders from the charcoal stain. Abram looks up at the night sky
and calls out to his God, “My Lord, Yahweh, forgive me for
questioning your good deeds, I have faith in your promises.”
Abram continues to walk toward his tent, still unsteady on
his feet, as he taps his staff as he goes. When he reaches his
tent, he staggers through the entrance and inside he sees Sarai
and Hagar who sit together near a dim light from animal fat
placed in a bowl, and it burns mellow. Sarai rises to her feet,
“My lord, you look dreadful!” she says, concerned.
She hurries over to Abram and takes hold of his arm
to steady him, quickly followed by Hagar who takes his
other arm. They help him to a pile of cloth and make sure that
he is comfortable, while Hagar fetches his meal, which is now
cold. She hands him the bowl. “The lamb is tender, my lord!”
she says.
Abram takes the bowl and begins to eat. Sarai says,
“You are covered in blood and dirt, my lord. What has hap-
pened to you?”
Abram chews on the tender lamb, “Another close
encounter with Yahweh. He varies His approach!” he says
wearily.
Sarai and Hagar look at one another, frown, and choose to
remain silent.
251
15
Hagar
Ten years have elapsed since Abram and the clan first entered
the land of Canaan. Since the split, their numbers have dimin-
ished. This leaves Abram disenchanted about the promise of a
great multitude. The issue of a son included in the promise
puzzles Abram, now that he is eighty-six years old and Sarai in
her seventies. Sarai is bitter over her barren condition and
plans to take matters into her own hands, now that her men-
strual cycle has ceased.
k
It is morning in Abram’s tent and he and Sarai have just fin-
ished breakfast. Sarai looks at Abram and says, “I wish to talk
to you concerning Hagar, my lord?”
Abram says, “Hagar, what about her?”
Sarai says, “You know, my Lord Yahweh has prevented me
from having children. Well, I was thinking that Hagar could
bear a child for me and on my behalf?”
“What are you saying, Sarai?” asks Abram.
Sarai exhales deeply, “I will present my slave-girl Hagar to
you as your wife, and you will sleep with her every night until
she conceives. As soon as she is pregnant, you may return to
my bed. This will constitute a service to you and to me, while
fulfilling God’s promise. What do you think, my lord?”
Abram thinks and he sighs, “So, what you are saying is, we
are using a slave-girl to fulfil Yahweh’s promise, and after
which she remains a slave?”
252
“Yes, my lord!” says Sarai. Abram thinks a little more, and

he says, “So the title of wife is a veneer, in case we have a son?”
“Yes, you are catching on, my lord!”
Abram says, “Does Hagar understand the implications:
that she is being used for a purpose?”
Sarai says, “Of course, my lord. She even said she is happy
to oblige.”
So Abram responds, “Very well, I will do it!”
Sarai excitedly says, “Excellent, the ceremony is this
afternoon!”
“Ceremony?” asks Abram flabbergasted.
Sarai rises to her feet and says in authoritative tone, “Why
yes, you have to actually marry her, my lord. She will be your
second wife!”
Abram remains dumbfounded and says, “So why did you
bother to ask, when you have already arranged the marriage?”
Sarai says, “Because you needed to consent, my lord. Now
I would suggest you bathe and wear your best, as Hagar is cur-
rently being fitted with the bridal gown!” Sarai exits the tent
and leaves Abram, who looks dumbstruck.
k
Four hours later, it is mid afternoon and hot outside, where
the people gather for the wedding. Abram has bathed and he
feels refreshed as he sits and combs his beard, which has
fluffed up like white ducklings. He rises to his feet, and he
wears under garments of white while two men-slaves arrive
with his best tunic, a plush fabric of sienna with gold embroi-
dery. They place it over his shoulders and it drapes below his
knees. With his headdress of gold fabric which drapes his
shoulders, he looks elegant; he resembles a King.
Sarai is in the slave-women’s tent, and she prepares Hagar,
who is dressed entirely in white. She drapes white lace over
her nose and mouth to complete the ceremonial attire. Hagar
looks gorgeous with her beautiful dark eyes which peer over
253
PAUL JUSTICE
the veil, and her gold headband with gemstones which

decorate her forehead, triangle down to the bridge of her
nose. This item they borrowed from Abram’s stash. Now
Hagar is only twenty-six years old and remains a virgin and
for this reason Sarai removes Hagar’s anklets until after the
wedding. The crowds gather outside for what they believe to
be a serious occasion and the musicians have gathered to prac-
tice melodies. Abram stands in front of them, faces a divide
between the crowds and a long walkway from which Hagar
will be presented to him. It is customary for the first wife to
give the second wife to her husband and a particular melody
is chosen for this occasion, so when Abram hears the melody
being played he knows that Sarai and Hagar’s approach is
imminent. A few moments pass and Abram sees Sarai and
Hagar enter the walkway between the people and walk toward
him side by side. The people look on with adoration over
Hagar’s beautiful appearance. As they reach Abram the music
stops and complete silence reigns, as Sarai hands Hagar to
Abram and says, “My lord Abram, in the presence of Yahweh,
God Most High and with His blessing, I give you this woman
to be your second wife!”
Abram takes Hagar by the hand and everyone in the
crowd begins to applaud and cheer. And at this point, Abram
turns his back to Hagar and leans over Sarai with a serious
expression on his face, and he whispers, “How dare you bring
Yahweh into this? This is your seduction, not God’s!”
Sarai places her hand over Abram’s mouth. “Hush my
lord, you will spoil the occasion!”
She looks over Abram’s shoulder and smiles at Hagar, who
stands and looks vacant and concerned. Sarai pulls Abram to
one side and calls out to everyone, “Let us rejoice with food
and wine on this happy occasion; the banquet is spread, go
and help yourselves!”
The people cheer and begin to disperse to where the food
is laid out, and the musicians play a happy melody. Abram
254
takes hold of Hagar’s hand and as they walk hand in hand,

Sarai steps to one side, and she smiles. Ten slave-girls carry
woven baskets full of orchid petals and they throw handfuls of
the flowers before the newlywed’s feet; the girls giggle excit-
edly while doing so. This is Hagar’s big day, filled with joy, but
Abram struggles to muster the same enthusiasm over Sarai’s
conniving. The merry-making continues until after sundown
and many of the people begin to retire to their tents, after
they congratulate Abram and Hagar. Sarai approaches them
and after she kisses Abram on the cheek, she says, “My lord,
after such a big day, I am tired and wish to retire. I have
moved the slave-women to another tent so that you and
Hagar can enjoy privacy!”
“Very well!” says Abram and enacts one of his famous
bows before Sarai. She smiles and leaves.
Hagar looks up at Abram and says, “Should we retire, my
lord?”
Abram nods in agreement and they both retire. Abram’s
first night in Hagar’s bed is met with enthusiasm on his part,
and she conceives on the first night. Even so, he keeps going
to her each night, until he becomes worn out. So, for a further
seven nights, he has Hagar do all the work, until he feels con-
fident she has conceived. On the eleventh night, he returns to
Sarai’s bed for a full night of rest. While he lies on his back
and snores loudly, Sarai sits up in bed and nips Abram’s nose
to silence him, then she rolls him onto his side. She leans over
and whispers in his ear, “I hope Hagar is pregnant, my lord!”
She lies down with her back to Abram and says out loud,
“Because if not, you may have more work to do!”
k
Three months pass and it is clear that Hagar is pregnant and
Sarai is delighted. One day Sarai sits in her tent and sews, as
she makes clothes for her unborn child. She periodically
glances over at Hagar who reclines and does nothing, other
255
PAUL JUSTICE
than hold her womb and wipe her brow with a damp cloth.
Sarai’s fury builds and suddenly she looks at Hagar and says,
“What is wrong with you woman? You are pregnant, not
disabled!”
Hagar puffs and blows before she says, “It is the heat
Sarai, so stuffy in here!”
Sarai stops work on the clothes and looks directly at
Hagar, “Perhaps you should go for a walk. We are running
low on goat’s milk; you could walk to the herdsmen and check
on the goats?” Sarai suggests.
“What?” replies Hagar in raised voice, “The heat is worse
out there, besides perhaps you should send a slave to check on
the goats?”
Sarai keeps her eyes fixed on Hagar and says, “You are a
slave woman. How dare you?”
Hagar sniggers and says, “No, you made me Abram’s wife,
have you forgotten?”
Sarai rises to her feet and raises her voice, waves her
finger at Hagar, “How dare you speak to me in such a
tone! You are being insubordinate and rebellious! I am your
mistress!”
Hagar looks up at Sarai and says, “You were my mistress;
now you are my equal as we are both Abram’s wives and we
serve the same master!”
Sarai cannot believe her ears, she screams at Hagar, “Get
out, get out of my tent!”
Hagar rises to her feet and shouts at Sarai, “This is
Abram’s tent and so that makes it my tent!”
That said, Sarai hurries from the tent, furious, and goes in
search of Abram. Like a wild woman, she stomps around and
stops passerby, asks if they have seen Abram. One man says he
saw him with the herdsmen, so Sarai hurries to where the ani-
mals are kept. She sees Abram in a discussion with one of the
herdsmen, who repairs one of the pens, and she hurries
toward him at speed, her clothes blow behind her in the
256
breeze. She reaches Abram, and she immediately begins to

shout at him, “This is your entire fault, all of it!”
Abram throws his hands up to gesture his defence,
“What? What have I done?”
Sarai screams at him, “That woman in your tent, who calls
herself your wife, is refusing point blank to do any form of
work!”
“You mean Hagar?” says Abram.
Sarai sniggers, with sarcasm in her tone, “How many
wives have you got?” she snaps.
The herdsman looks up at Abram as he leans over the pen,
and his look implies that he does not envy Abram. Sarai con-
tinues, “Just because she is pregnant by you, she claims that
I am no longer her mistress, as if I were worthless in her eyes.
Well let me tell you this, may Yahweh judge between you and
I over this matter!”
Abram quickly responds, “Very well, Sarai, you may deal
with Hagar as you see fit, your slave-girl is at your disposal!”
With that, Sarai turns away from Abram and hurries back
to the tent, and the herdsman looks up at Abram and rolls his
eyes. Abram stands and watches Sarai recede into the distance,
he looks at the herdsman and says, “This is one big mess, my
friend!”
The herdsman stands up straight and says, “Yes my lord,
trouble you do not need and trouble of the worst kind:
women!”
Abram smiles and pats the man on the back before he
leaves.
Sarai arrives at the tent long before Abram and as she
enters, she sees that Hagar still lounges in the same spot. Sarai
speaks to her directly, “I have informed Abram of the situa-
tion, and he agrees with me that I remain your mistress and
you will do as I say, or get out!”
Hagar looks up at Sarai, “Oh! Did he really?”
Sarai screams at Hagar, “Get out, now!”
257
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram approaches and as he advances near to the tent, he

hears Sarai’s voice scream high pitched, he quickens the pace
and hurries. As he reaches the tent, he enters to find Sarai
crouched over Hagar, and she tries to choke her. Abram bel-
lows in a loud voice, “ENOUGH!”
Sarai loosens her grip from Hagar’s throat and backs away.
Hagar pants to regain her breath. Abram looks at Sarai and
the expression upon his face shows that he is highly alarmed.
In a stern voice, he says, “What on God’s earth are you doing
woman? Hagar is carrying my child and I find you trying to
choke the life out of her? When I said she is at your disposal,
I did not intend for you to take it literally!”
Sarai stands and she is clearly shaken because of the
ordeal. Abram looks at Hagar and asks, “Are you injured,
Hagar?”
Hagar sits and rubs her throat. “No my lord, it is more
shock!” she says.
Abram says to her, “Please, would you wait outside while
I talk to Sarai?”
Hagar rises to her feet and curtsies in front of Abram,
before she exits the tent. When she leaves, she stands nearby,
outside the tent, and listens.
Abram looks at Sarai and says, “What were you trying to
accomplish, exactly?”
Sarai looks up at Abram and says, “That woman has no
respect for my authority as her mistress, and I have ruled over
women for years and I always earn their deepest respect!”
Abram says, “Yes, as did Hagar, until you presented her to
me as my wife?”
Sarai moves closer to Abram and says, “Oh, so you are
taking her side now?” and Sarai points outside as she says this.
Abram says, “This is not about taking sides; this is about
analyzing the facts and getting to the root of the issue!”
Sarai frowns and says, “What are you talking about
Abram? We have a rebellious woman on our hands, and
258
this is a clear-cut case for excommunication. Normally, you

would be the first to expel any rebels, why should she be any
different?”
Abram quickly responds, “Because she is carrying my
child, your child, remember?” Sarai thinks, “Very well, my
lord, she may stay until she has the baby, but she must join the
other slaves. I do not want her in this tent!”
“As you wish!” says Abram, and he turns and exits the
tent.
As Hagar listens outside, she hears the conversation end
and quickly runs away before Abram sees her.
Now as the days pass by, Sarai’s treatment of Hagar is dis-
graceful and she gradually breaks her spirit, as she makes her
do hard labour and after completion of the task, makes her do
it all over again; she says it is not good enough. Abram’s hands
are tied as he has made a pact with Sarai, even though he is
continuously stressed over the situation. The last straw for
Hagar is when Sarai accuses her of stealing from Abram. It is
in fact Sarai who takes the headband from Abram’s stash of
jewellery; the one Hagar wore on her wedding day, and she
hides it in the slave’s tent where Hagar sleeps. One day Sarai
takes Abram to Hagar’s quarters and shows him the hidden
jewellery, she suggests to Abram that maybe Hagar took it as
a souvenir.
Abram is furious and he questions Hagar with respects to
this incident, and Hagar’s reaction is one of dismay and shock
and she denies any knowledge with respects to the jewellery
and how it got under her bed sheets. Abram believes her
because of the expression upon her face, which is one of gen-
uine shock. So Abram suggests to Sarai that they question all
of the slaves, one by one, until they find the one who is guilty,
but Sarai responds so quickly, tells Abram not to bother as it
is most certainly Hagar who is guilty in her eyes. This makes
Abram very suspicious, as he knows there is a treacherous act
of deceit apparent, a conspiracy against Hagar. However,
259
PAUL JUSTICE
because he does not know who or how many are involved,

even though he has some ideas, he lets the issue drop and con-
siders the matter closed. Sarai is furious and continues to
scheme against Hagar. So, one morning, while it is still early
and the sun is just about to peek, Hagar packs a few things and
runs away into the mountains, and she heads south.
k
First night: Hagar hides in a cave and she is alone, cold
and afraid, while her imagination heightens her anxiety. She
sits huddled in the dark and listens to night stalkers, animals
and birds driven by their nocturnal instincts, and the noises
they make create torment for Hagar, as she sits gripped
with fear. She ponders in her mind, and she has doubts con-
cerning her survival and wonders if she will ever make it to
Egypt. She hopes in earnest to make it to her homeland
under a new identity, have her baby, and settle among her
kinsmen. These thoughts play over in her mind repeatedly
until eventually she drops off to sleep, physically and mental-
ly exhausted.
The next morning as the sun rises, Hagar wakes to the
sound of birds singing, as they welcome in the birth of a new
day. She sits up, stretches, yawns, and her body aches from the
cramped sleep and cold harsh unforgiving damp floor. She
crawls on her hands and knees as she exits the cavity and the
sunlight catches her eyes, which causes her to squint. She rises
to her feet, and she looks out over the valley below, tries to
coordinate her bearings. She realises, after a glimpse of the
Eastern Desert in the far distance, that she has actually trav-
elled too far east and needs to re-route toward the west. After
she eats a couple of figs she has packed, Hagar begins her
descent from the hills toward the low plain. She struggles for
hours, and she begins to realise the descent is longer than
anticipated, but the sun begins to set long before she reaches
level ground. Hagar thinks she is going to have to spend
260
another night in the mountains which face east, and she

begins to look for a cavity among the crags.
She crawls into a hole among rocks, and she sits and waits
for nightfall, which is less than one hour away. With her knees
up, she gently touches the stinging abrasions and cuts to her
knees and her feet ooze a little blood. With arms and hands
ground in with dirt, the little water she has is reserved for
drinking, so even a wash is something she denies. Her mind is
keenly tuned to survival and the protection of her unborn
child, what were once comforts become a thing of the past.
The next day, Hagar makes a fervent effort to reach the
low plain and she does so by noon. She swings around and
heads west, she is now en route for Egypt. By the close of the
third day, she hides out among trees and brush. Now, on the
fourth day en route to Shur, she drinks the last few drops of
water from the flask that morning, so Hagar diverts toward
the springs between Kadesh and Bered, which run parallel to
one of the earth’s fault-lines where tectonic plates meet. This
is where men have dug deep holes in the earth in order to tap
into its fresh water supply. Some of these holes are one-
hundred-and-fifty feet deep and the locals call them ‘springs’,
because when the earth’s crust moves, the water builds up and
gushes from the holes in fountains of life-sustaining pure
clean water, and this is a time for celebration for the locals.
When Hagar arrives at the springs, it is hot, dry, and dusty
and the water levels are rock bottom. She stands near the edge
of the waterhole and looks down into the dark fathomless
pit. She feels the last ounce of hope gradually drain from her
soul. She stands with one hand under her womb, holds her
baby, and the other holds an empty flask, she begins to weep
and sob.
Suddenly she stops and remains still and quiet, as a rush of
irrational hope sweeps over her mind and she refuses to give
in to defeat. She lies face down on the ground, and she peers
into the well and dangles the empty flask over the void, as
261
PAUL JUSTICE
though to collect water. As the reality of hopelessness con-

sumes her being, she begins to scream into the hollow, “Rise
water, rise, rise water!”
Her screams echo as they descend into the deep well,
Hagar rolls over onto her back and weeps bitterly, and she
feels she is forced to accept defeat. A few moments later, her
cries subside, as she lies in the heat and blocks the sun from
her eyes with her arm. The empty flask remains in her other
hand, lies limp on the ground. Suddenly she hears a voice, and
the voice is calm and reassures her, “Hagar, slave-girl of Sarai,
where have you come from, and where are you going?”
Unaware to Hagar, God Most High has watched her
every move, and He has sent His Archangel named Gabriel
to assist her. Gabriel is present at the springs although he
remains invisible. Hagar sits up and looks all around to see
who speaks and she is perplexed as to how he knows her name
and that he knows who she is. But she sees no one, as she sits
with her hand in the sand and her arm props her up. She
replies to the Archangel, “I am running away from my mis-
tress, Sarai. Who are you and how do you know me?”
Gabriel says, “Go back to your mistress and submit to her,
because Yahweh says, I am going to make your descendants
too numerous to be counted.”
It begins to dawn on Hagar that she communicates with a
supreme being, and yet she remains calm.
Gabriel says to her, “Now, you have conceived and will
bear a son, and you shall name him Ishmael, for Yahweh has
heard your cries of distress. A wild donkey of a man he will be,
his hand against every man, and every man’s hand against him,
living his life in defiance of all his kinsmen.”
Hagar sits and listens intently and after Gabriel concludes
his words, a few moments of silence pass, while Hagar sits and
gazes into the direction of the voice. She keeps her eyes shad-
ed with the palm of her hand. A rumble begins to erupt and
vibrations, Hagar can feel the ground beneath her move. She
262
becomes fearful and screams, as the ground tosses her from

side to side, she hears a fearsome roar ascend from the earth
beneath her. Suddenly, the well bursts open, a tremendous
gush of pure water soars towards the sky and returns to the
earth as a refreshing cold shower. Hagar sits and looks up as
the pure water rains down upon her, and her once fearful
expression gradually morphs into a beautiful broad smile.
She rises to her feet and with arms outstretched to the
heavens, she begins to laugh, as her spirits rise with joy and
the water rains down upon her. She dances, giggles, screams
with delight and jumps around, soaked to the skin, and final-
ly she stops and looks up into the sky. She calls out, in a loud
happy voice, “You are El Roi!” meaning, “Did I not go on see-
ing here, after him who sees me?”
So Hagar fills the flask from the abundance of the pure
spring, and immediately heads back to her mistress Sarai.
k
Five days later and it is noon: Abram sits just outside of his
tent and he is deep in thought, as Hagar has been on his mind
constantly. He thinks his mind plays tricks when he suddenly
hears her voice call his name. He looks up and sees her, and
she rushes toward him from among the oaks. He rises to his
feet and hurries to greet her, and he does so with open arms.
As he reaches her, he embraces her tightly. “Hagar, where
have you been, I have suffered sleepless nights with worry!”
Hagar looks up at Abram and her face beams; overjoyed,
she says, “God rescued me in the desert, so I have returned,
my lord!”
Sarai is in the tent when she hears the commotion outside,
so she hurries to the entrance and looks out and in an under-
tone she says, “Oh no, she’s back!”
Sarai stands and watches as Abram and Hagar approach
the tent, and she is fuming inside, as Abram walks with his
arm around Hagar’s waist. As they reach the tent, Abram calls
263
PAUL JUSTICE
out in happy voice, “Sarai, Hagar has returned! Quickly, pre-

pare some food! We must celebrate!”
Sarai glowers at Abram and turns and scurries into the
tent. The tribe’s people have heard about Hagar’s return, as
news travels fast, and they begin to gather all around Abram’s
tent and they are happy, welcoming Hagar’s return. Hagar is
excited and begins to tell the people how God approached her
in the desert, and supplied water in abundance. As she speaks,
Abram listens intently.
Now, Sarai listens from inside the tent, and as she brings
bowls of food out and hands them to the people, she says,
“Are we to believe these outrageous tales?”
The atmosphere of excitement drops to a serious mood, as
Sarai’s comment has just stamped out everyone’s joy. Sarai
says, “Well, does anyone care to give me an answer?” She says
this abruptly.
An uncomfortable silence reigns and Abram says, “Sarai,
if you feel you cannot share this moment of joy, perhaps you
should leave?”
“Yes my lord, perhaps I should!” snaps Sarai. She pushes
people aside, and exits the crowd. Hagar looks at Abram, con-
cerned, and after Abram winks at her he says, “Bring out the
wine and call the musicians, this is a time to rejoice!”
Everyone cheers; Hagar laughs and four men lift her upon
their shoulders and carry her among the people. They parade
her like a Queen and Abram thanks Yahweh for saving her.
264
16
Abram’s Inauguration to
Abraham: A New Beginning
Almost fourteen years have passed since Hagar was rescued

from the desert and her son Ishmael is now a thirteen-year-
old adolescent teenager. His father Abram is now ninety-nine
years old and Sarai is eighty-nine. Hagar is thirty-nine years
old and still married to Abram. For all of these years, Yahweh
has left them to it and He has made no contact with Abram,
and Abram thinks this has something to do with Sarai’s bitter
jealousy toward Hagar and that God may have withdrawn
His blessing temporarily. Whatever Yahweh’s reasons may be,
jealousy is the green-eyed-monster who injects a serum which
penetrates the very soul of its victim, like poison. Unbearable
is the emotion, which is almost impossible to endure for both
the host and the victim of its sting. While Yahweh is said to be
a jealous God, He only displays wrath when His own become
embroidered in idolatry.
In comparison, human jealousy is a soul-destroying
disease for which there is no cure. Sarai is clearly sick; her
original plan to obtain a son has backfired upon her sevenfold.
Her bitter jealousy of Hagar eats away at her bones, and as
Yahweh loves both Sarai and Hagar in equal measure, He has
decided that enough is enough. Abram is about to receive
a wakeup call and tremendous changes are scheduled for
the old Patriarch. For the first time in thirteen-and-a-half
years, Yahweh speaks to Abram and unfolds a long list of
265
PAUL JUSTICE
instructions, in very precise detail. Abram obeys every single

word without question.
k
Abram’s tent mid morning: Abram sits and wears his best
attire, the sienna tunic with gold embroidery, since he
received the news from Yahweh at sunrise. Hagar stands
behind him and braids his hair as she has already braided his
beard; his appearance is completely transformed from that of
an unkempt old man to one fit for royalty. Now Sarai, who
currently milks the goats, is completely unaware of the new
arrangements, and she is in for a big shock. The large clay ves-
sel is almost full and Sarai asks one of the herdsmen to carry
the vessel as it is heavy. The herdsman lifts the jug up onto his
shoulder and follows Sarai to the tent.
As they enter the tent, Sarai is shocked to see Abram all
spruced up and horrified to see Hagar involved, so she tells
the herdsman to place the jug in the entrance to the tent, after
which he may leave. Sarai looks at Hagar and points her fin-
ger. “You, out!” she orders in abrupt tone.
Abram stops Hagar and says, “No Sarai, Hagar needs to
hear this too!”
Sarai places her hands on her hips and says, “Hear what?
Why are you dressed up in royal attire? You look like a
Babylonian King with your hair braided as they do, what is
going on?”
Abram says, “Sarai, you need to calm down and sit down,
as this news is important!”
Sarai sighs deeply and sits down opposite Abram, she lis-
tens intently as Abram says, “This morning, as the sun rose,
I walked among the oaks when suddenly, Yahweh spoke to me.
I immediately dropped to the ground face down and listened
to every word!”
Sarai interrupts, “After all these years, what did He
say?”
266
Abram continues, “Yahweh impressed the need for a

covenant between Him and me, which is to be made valid
through a mark in the flesh. Also, I am to change my name to
Abraham and you are to change your name to Sarah, which
means Princess!”
Sarai smiles and turns her head slightly to the side, while
she thinks. I like the name and it is God ordained! She says with
pride, as she looks at Hagar, “See Hagar, Yahweh has not
abandoned me; in fact He thinks I am a Princess, so from this
day forth you may address me as Princess Sarah!”
Hagar bows before Sarai and says, “As you wish, Princess
Sarah!”
Sarah looks at Abram and says, “And what about you my
lord, what does your new name make you – a King?” she asks.
Abram says, “No, Sarah, a King I am not. My lineage
traces back to Babylon from where Abram was delivered by
the true God. Today, after my mark in the flesh, I will be
reborn as Abraham the Hebrew, a new beginning!”
Sarah frowns, “What is this mark in the flesh?” she asks.
Abram responds, “The mark in the flesh is the removal of
the foreskin from ones penis!” he explains.
Sarah gasps, and places her hand over her mouth, her eyes
extend wide. She lowers her hand. “That is horrible, that is
not a mark in the flesh. You are talking about mutilation of the
male gender!” she retorts.
Abram laughs and says, “As horrific as it may seem, this is
what Yahweh requires. Before sundown today, every man and
boy in the camp will be cut, and any who refuse will be
expelled immediately!”
Sarah gasps again and says, “This may cause anarchy my
lord, and besides, who is qualified to perform the operation,
we have not even a Physician in the camp?”
Abram says, “Hagar has some experience with the proce-
dure, as she has watched Egyptian Physicians perform the
operation on men, boys and babies. The women-slaves will
267
PAUL JUSTICE
assist with preparations and clean and Hagar will cut and
stitch!”
Sarah looks up at Hagar and says, “I thought you were
calm about this, you know you will have to cut Ishmael?”
Hagar says, “Yes Princess Sarah, I am aware!”
Abram speaks up, “Time is pressing and we have a lot of
work to do. Come, we must inform the men!”
The three of them exit the tent together and go their sep-
arate ways, and they spread out throughout the camp, inform
everyone about the news.
k
Noon: The settlement is in disruption. Pandemonium reigns
throughout the camp as men run from one tent to another,
panicked, and inform one another of the news. Abram is in his
tent and helps Hagar and the slave-women prepare for the
mass circumcisions, while Sarah prepares food for the cele-
bration to follow. However, disgruntled men gather around
Abram’s tent and they call his name. Abram hears them and he
appears at the entrance to his tent, looks out.
One man calls out to him, “Have you lost your mind, old
man? Yahweh would never ask us to mutilate our own bodies,
nor damage our sons!”
And another man calls out, “Why are you creating dis-
ruption with this insanity?”
And yet another says, “You have disunity in your own
household, is this not enough for you, you want us all to suf-
fer, is that it?”
Abram steps forward and says, “Listen men, you do not
understand the implications here. Yahweh has made a covenant
with me to establish a dynasty of Kings with far reaching bene-
fits, and all He asks is a tiny clip of skin, a mark in the flesh to
validate the covenant, and for us to demonstrate our obedience!”
The men who surround the tent all begin to laugh, and
one of them steps forward and says, “Dynasty of Kings, is this
268
why you are dressed as a King, which one are you, Nimrod the
Mighty?”
Again, laughter ripples through the crowd of men and
another man shouts out, “He even looks like Nimrod, look at
the pleats in his beard!”
The laughter continues, and Abram raises his arms to
silence the men, then says, “If you are not for change, and if
you do not wish to enter this covenant with Yahweh, you are
all free to leave, but you must be gone before sundown today,
otherwise you may incite Yahweh’s wrath upon yourselves and
your families!”
The men begin to back away and one of them calls out,
“Do not worry old man, we are tired of your insanity!”
The men disperse and run to their own tents. They gath-
er their families and belongings together, and one man with
four sons is one of the first to leave. Throughout the after-
noon, families exit the settlement; some head north toward
Haran and others head east toward the Jordan plain. Long
before sundown, two-thirds of the men have left with their
families, and this includes sons and daughters.
Sarah stands next to Abram as they watch the people
leave. Sarah looks up at Abram and says, “See, I told you!” she
says with sarcasm.
Abram ignores Sarah’s comment and she moves back
inside the tent. Abram’s group now consists mainly of women.
The male population has been reduced to less than two hun-
dred men and boys. A far cry from when they left Egypt.
Abram’s ranks shrink and Sarah is concerned; she too thinks
he may be losing it.
Mid afternoon and everything is prepared for the mass
circumcision to be performed in Abram’s tent. Abram double
checks knives are sharp before they begin. Men and boys
queue outside the tent to the number of one hundred and
eighty three, two of which are babies held by their mothers at
the front of the queue. The first mother enters the tent and
269
PAUL JUSTICE
hands her baby to the slave-women who bathe the child over
a bowl of water; the baby is handed to Hagar who performs
the circumcision.
As the baby screams, the men who queue look at one
another and feel apprehensive. They see the mother exit the
tent; she carries her bloodstained baby and weeps. Now, as the
afternoon progresses, Hagar has cut around half of the men
and boys and those who remain in the queue become more
and more apprehensive, as some of the men shout out because
of the painful procedure. Some stagger from the tent and hold
blood stained cloths against their crotches.
Ishmael, who stands next to his father in the tent and
watches the operations, looks up at Abram and says, “Father,
must we do this? There is such a lot of blood!”
Abram rests his arm across Ishmael’s shoulders and hugs
him tightly. “Yes Ishmael we must, this is very important!”
Abram explains.
Ishmael looks up at his father with a look of concern on
his face. Now, the men who continue to queue, they become
agitated and some begin to slip away from the queue and run
toward the hills at speed, and they do not look back. Ten of
the escapees are slaves without families and the other six run
to their wives. Abram loses another sixteen men that after-
noon. Next to Hagar is a bowl almost full of foreskins and she
is covered in blood. As the sun begins to set, Hagar looks out
of the tent to see how many men remain, and there are only
ten, plus Abram and Ishmael. Hagar says to Abram, “Let me
cut you and Ishmael while there is sunlight, after which I will
finish the ten.”
So Abram agrees and tells Ishmael to go next, and as soon
as he is circumcised he goes and lies down at the rear of the
tent. It is dusk when Hagar completes the circumcisions and
she stands in the entrance to the tent, then looks out under
very subdued light, with wide dark eyes which peer over the
blood-spattered veil. Her right hand still holds the knife and
270
her hands are drenched in blood, and likewise her tunic. She
resembles an assassin on a mission more than a Physician.
Abram sits on the ground outside the tent and gently rocks to
his pain, he stops and looks up at Hagar, who stares into the
dusk. Abram says, “Why do you still hold the knife and stare,
as though you were in a trance?”
Hagar looks down at Abram. “I feel sick, weak and tired.
Never ask me to do this again, my lord.” she says in a low
tone.
Hagar drops the knife and slowly walks to her tent. Abram
watches her leave. Sarah appears at the entrance of the tent,
looks out. She looks at Abram and asks, “Is the genital mas-
sacre over, my lord?”
Abram does not bother to look up at her. “We do not need
your sarcasm, Sarah!” he says abruptly.
Sarah laughs and says, “Good, I will bring out the food
and wine and the celebrations may begin!”
The slave-women assist Sarah to bring out the bowls of
food and the wineskins, and all the tribeswomen begin to
gather toward the centre of the settlement for the celebra-
tions. The men however, remain in their tents, to lie on their
backs and nurse their wounds, and the last thing they want is
to celebrate. So the women eat, drink and dance and Sarah
leads a group of twenty in singing, and as the women enjoy
themselves and continue distracted, Abram takes a slow walk
towards Hagar’s tent. He is crouched and holds his crotch
while he walks. On arrival, Abram silently enters the tent and
sees Hagar naked as she baths over a large bowl, and the water
in the bowl is red. Abram watches her clean her arms with the
cloth, her breasts hang over the bowl and almost touch the
water. She sees Abram and gasps. Startled, she quickly grabs a
sheet and covers herself as she feels uncomfortable. Abram
speaks, “You are beautiful Hagar and you look sensual!”
Hagar forces a half-smile and looks bashful, “What brings
you, my lord?” She says in surprised tone.
271
PAUL JUSTICE
Abram says, “I would like you to be present for my speech.

Get dressed and come join the celebrations!”
Hagar bows and says, “Yes, my lord, I will be with you
shortly!”
Abram re-enacts one of his famous bows and exits the
tent. It is night when Abram returns to the celebrations.
Women dance and run with flaming torches in their hands,
laugh and excitedly wave flames toward the night sky. Abram
laughs as he hobbles, crouched over, among the women en
route to his tent. When he reaches his tent, he goes inside and
prepares for his speech. He removes the clips from his hair
and unravels the pleats, and with his fingers he ruffles his hair
so that it hangs loose. He removes the braided pleats from his
beard and ruffles this too, fluffs it out with his fingers. He no
longer looks elegant but rather unkempt. He removes his best
tunic and changes into his red and purple stripes, and the head
covering which drapes his shoulders is crimson. He looks very
old, with unofficial attire, and Abram approaches the exit and
looks out over the congregation of women who continue with
their celebration. Abram raises his arms and calls out, “Listen,
everyone, I have an announcement to make!”
The noise from the women gradually subsides to silence,
and Abram sees Hagar join the crowd. After a few moments
silence, he projects his voice, “Today we have all witnessed a
change, because Yahweh has severed Abram the Babylonian
from leading his people any further. I stand before you all as
your new leader, reborn as Abraham the Hebrew, father of a
new nation. Blessings will issue for eternity as I, Abraham,
become father to a great multitude. So from this day forward,
you will address me as father Abraham!”
After his speech, Abraham retires into his tent, after a
continued silence, the women return to their celebrations as
though they have not understood a single word of what
Abraham has just said.
272
17
Celestials Visit
One year later: Yahweh plans to visit Abraham, disguised as a

man, and He has assigned two Archangels to accompany Him:
Michael and Gabriel. They too will appear as men.
It is mid afternoon and very hot over the settlement by the
oaks of Mamre. Abraham sits on the ground, not far from his
tent, and faces the oaks a short distance away; he looks down
and doodles in the sand with a stick. A bright light catches his
attention. He looks up and sees a flash of white light among
the oaks; the light disperses quickly. He looks toward the
vicinity of the trees; Abraham shields his eyes from the sun
and squints as he peers. He sees three men who stand beneath
the trees; the one in the middle is dressed entirely in white.
The other two wear darker clothes. Abraham steadies himself,
rises to his feet, and he continues to peer at the men, and he
tries to focus clearly. He reasons in his mind, thinks, a flash of
light, suddenly three men; this has to be a celestial’s visit?
Abraham hurries toward the three men and as he reaches
them, he lowers himself to the ground, prostrates with palms
to the earth at their feet. Abraham looks up at the one dressed
in white and says, “My lord, if I find favour with you, please
stay and have your feet washed and enjoy a meal with us,
before you continue on your way.”
Yahweh offers the palm of his hand to Abraham and says,
“Do as you say!”
So Abraham rises to his feet and hurries toward his tent,
filled with excitement, and the three men follow him at a dis-
273
PAUL JUSTICE
tance. On arrival at the tent, he hurries inside and grabs

hold of Sarah, who has her back to him. She sorts through
linen and she jumps with fright. “Abraham, you scared me!”
she gasps.
Abraham responds breathlessly and cannot speak quickly
enough. “Quick, knead three measures of best flour and make
loaves.” he says at speed.
Sarah is intrigued. “Why, my lord?” she asks.
Abraham hurries from the tent; he calls back to her,
“Because Yahweh is here!”
Sarah gasps and shouts, “What?” just as Abraham disap-
pears from the exit. So Sarah hurries toward the exit and looks
out, and she sees three tall men approach, the one in white
stands out, and she mutters under her breath, “Oh my good-
ness!” She turns and hurries inside.
Abraham runs as fast as he can toward the herdsmen and
this sudden burst of exercise is too much for him. His heart
pounds from his chest as he reaches one of the herdsmen, and
he is completely out of breath, “I need the best calf; we have
visitors!” he pants.
Surprised, the herdsman exclaims, “May I suggest you
choose, my lord?”
Abraham nods in agreement and walks toward the pen
where the calves are kept. While he stands in the midst of the
calves, leans over them and examines their ears for parasites,
he sees in his peripheral vision that Ishmael approaches and
runs toward him a short distance away. Ishmael leaps over the
pens perimeter and hurries toward his father, and a little
breathless he speaks excitedly, “Father! Who are those men by
the oak?”
Ishmael points toward the great oak when he says this.
Abraham continues to inspect the calves and mumbles,
“Visitors; they will be staying for a meal!”
Ishmael responds with concern in his tone, “Father, the
three women-slaves who washed their feet returned to
274
the tent scared, their voices trembled when they explained,

‘The men have chrysolite-eyes like the tiger’?”
Abraham finally chooses a calf, stands upright, and looks
at Ishmael as he explains, “This is because they are celestial
beings, my son, and you must not fear them. They are here to
bring a blessing.”
Ishmael excitedly responds with enthusiasm, “Do you
mean Angels, Father?”
Abraham nods in agreement and begins to lead the calf
by the ear, while Ishmael follows him with animated enthusi-
asm. “Father, may I see the Angels up close? I want to see
those eyes!”
Abraham stops and looks at Ishmael and his face shows
amusement before he speaks. “My child, you must not look
into the Angels eyes. No, you must keep your head covered
and bowed while in their presence.” Abram explains.
“Why father?” asks Ishmael.
Abraham continues, “Respect! Here, take this calf to the
servant and help him prepare it, and when it is cooked and
tender you may serve it to the guests.”
Ishmael is delighted and hurries to the servant, while he
almost drags the calf behind him by one ear. Abraham watch-
es the boy and laughs.
Concerned over the women slaves, Abraham decides to
walk back to the tent and have a word with the three who
washed the guest’s feet. On arrival, he enters the tent and
approaches Sarah, who slices the freshly baked bread, and
Abraham stops her from her work momentarily, “Which three
slaves washed the guest’s feet?” he asks.
Sarah turns and points them out. “Why, my lord?” she
questions.
He answers, “They are afraid and I cannot allow it!”
Sarah’s expression is one of amusement as she rolls her
eyes. Abraham approaches the three woman-slaves and he
addresses them directly and in a stern voice, “You must not
275
PAUL JUSTICE
be telling tales concerning our guests, and you must not fear
them. When in their presence keep your heads covered
and low.”
And the three women curtsy with heads bowed, “Yes my
lord!” They all say in unison.
Abraham exits the tent and approaches the visitors out-
side. He stands under the large oak near to the guests and
keeps his head lowered. Soon after, Hagar appears from the
tent, followed by the three slave-women and they all carry
bowls of food with contents of bread and olives. The women
serve the guests, and keep their heads bowed low. They place
the bowls on the ground by the visitor’s feet and return to the
tent. The guests begin to eat the bread and olives. Michael
looks up and with inquisitive tone he addresses Abraham,
“Where is your wife Sarah?”
Abraham raises his head slightly to respond. “She is in the
tent, my lord!”
Yahweh looks at Abraham directly. “I will return again
this time next year, and by then, your wife Sarah will have
a son.”
Now Sarah hides just inside the entrance to the tent, hides
behind cloth and listens to the conversation outside, and when
she hears Yahweh say she will have a son, she smiles and
laughs inwardly. She ponders in her mind, Now that I am past
childbearing and Abraham is old, am I to be pleasured again and yet
behold my very own son? And again she laughs in secret.
A few moments later, Ishmael arrives with the succulent
roast in a clay vessel from the kiln, and he grips it with cloth,
as it is hot. Sarah greets him, “Boy, give the roast to me!”
They grapple over it and Ishmael is vexed. “Father said
I could serve the tender calf!”
Sarah tugs and her face shows annoyance, “Yes, but first
I need to carve the meat so it is presentable, foolish boy!”
Ishmael loosens his grip and allows Sarah to take the
roast. Hagar stands nearby, and she watches. Sarah now
276
selects a large receptacle, woven from tough reeds, and she

carves the tender roast and lays out the slices evenly over the
tray. Steam rises from the tender beef, it is hot and smells deli-
cious. Sarah looks at Ishmael. “You can serve it to the guests,
but do not drop it!” she demands.
As Ishmael leaves the tent with the tray of beef, Sarah can
feel Hagar’s look. Sarah turns and faces Hagar and frowns.
“Well, I know what fourteen year old boys are like!” she
exclaims.
“Do you, Princess Sarah?” Hagar says, a little curtly.
With a cloth in one hand, Sarah places both fists upon her
hips, then stares at Hagar. Her tone is authoritative when she
says, “As you are standing there doing nothing, you can dress
the figs.”
Sarah storms off and the three slaves who eavesdrop begin
to snigger. Hagar just looks at the three and walks away to
gather the figs. Just outside the tent, Ishmael has stopped and
he looks at the backs of the visitors and wonders with appre-
hension. He supports the tray with one hand while he pulls his
hood forward so that it hides half of his face He supports the
receptacle in both hands and he walks slowly toward the
guests. As he arrives at the feet of Yahweh, he keeps his head
low, and he stands and holds the tray of tender sliced beef. As
Ishmael looks at the meat, he sees three hands take a slice each
before they recede from his line of vision. Ishmael slowly low-
ers himself upon his haunches and places the tray at the visi-
tor’s feet. Very slowly and so as to be secretive, he raises his
head and peeps at Yahweh from shaded eyes, and as Yahweh
smiles at him, Ishmael sees the glint in God’s eyes. He quick-
ly drops his head to face the ground. Yahweh knows what
Ishmael is up to, as He knows everything, so He reaches for-
ward and places His right hand upon Ishmael’s head. The boy
becomes afraid, as he feels power which fortifies his soul and
he hears Yahweh speak, “Ishmael, you are a blessing and your
life will become prosperous. You are going to father twelve
277
PAUL JUSTICE
sons and they will become Princes, so you are welcome to

look at me without being secretive.”
Yahweh removes His hand from the boy’s head, while He
keeps His eyes fixed upon him. The boy remains afraid
although he is eager to look. After he plucks up courage,
Ishmael raises his face and looks at the guest who wears white.
The boy’s face is shaded from his hood, so that only his nose
and mouth are clearly visible. Yahweh allows Ishmael to
receive a glimpse of what life is like in heaven, and He shows
it to him through His eyes. Ishmael’s jaw slowly drops open as
he peers from beneath the hood, as what he sees is awesome
and almost incomprehensible. Yahweh smiles at the boy’s
response. After he stares for what seemed to be a long time,
but is actually only seconds, Ishmael rises to his feet and slow-
ly backs away from the guests. He bows before Yahweh, runs
back to the tent. At speed he runs into the tent, full of excite-
ment, Ishmael cries out, “Mother, mother!”
Hagar, who slices the figs, turns to face her son and
Ishmael rushes up to her with his face aglow. “Yahweh spoke
to me, touched me and blessed me, and I saw beautiful things
in His eyes, mysterious things mother”
Hagar smiles and laughs before she kisses her son’s fore-
head with tenderness. Sarah stands at a distance and listens,
and she does not like what she has just heard; she is jealous. So
Sarah charges up to Hagar and begins to shout, “Hagar, where
are those figs? I could have grown them in as much time!”
Hagar slides the bowl of dressed figs toward Sarah, who
snatches the bowl and hurries from the tent. Hagar hugs
Ishmael and they both watch as Sarah leaves in a tizzy.
Outside, Sarah approaches the guests, and carries the bowl of
figs. She keeps her head covered and low, and she sees the
three celestials take a fig each from the bowl. Yahweh address-
es Abraham, while He keeps His eyes fixed on Sarah, and with
an inquisitive tone, He projects His voice, “Why did Sarah
laugh and say, am I to have a child now that I am too old?
278
Nothing is impossible for Yahweh, is it? This time next year

I will return and Sarah will have a son.”
Abraham keeps his head down, at a loss as to how to
respond. He is not even aware that this has happened. So
Sarah decides to lie and responds, “I did not laugh, my Lord!”
Yahweh responds quickly and in a brusque tone, “Oh yes,
you did laugh!” He is angry.
Sarah becomes fearful as she raises her head to look at
Yahweh, and when she sees His eyes stare, she drops the bowl
of figs due to impulsive fright, and she stares straight back.
What she sees in God’s eyes fills her with dread. She walks
backwards slowly, to create distance between them. All the
while, Yahweh’s eyes are fixed upon her. Suddenly, she turns
and runs back to the tent. Abraham is bemused and does not
know what to make of it.
She runs into the tent, and Sarah drops to her knees and
begins to weep bitterly. Hagar tries to console her with soft
voice, “Princess Sarah, why do you weep so?”
Sarah is crouched on the ground as she sobs, and her cry-
ing voice is high pitched and pitiful, “I did not see anything
beautiful in His eyes, I could only see me, horrible ugly ME”
and she weeps uncontrollably.
Hagar tries to console her further with soft voice. “But
you are beautiful, Princess Sarah!” she assures her.
Sarah sobs, “No! I saw what I am on the inside and it
scares me.”
Hagar tries to place her hand upon Sarah to comfort her,
and Sarah looks up at Hagar, tears stream down her face. She
screams at the top of her voice, “Get away from me, and leave
me alone!” She collapses in a heap, sobs and cries.
This alarms Ishmael who runs from the tent and contin-
ues to run, until he reaches his favourite place among the
oaks, where he hides. He climbs one of the trees and stays
there till dark. The three slave women in the tent have moved
to one side and they are concerned. Hagar walks to stand near
279
PAUL JUSTICE
the exit and she is tearful. Abraham sees Hagar as she stands
just inside the entrance, and he heard Sarah’s screams, so he
makes a move toward the tent. Yahweh stops him and stares
directly at him, “No Abraham, it is for her own good, she will
come around when she is ready!” He advises.
That said, the three guests rise to their feet and thank
Abraham for his hospitality, and as they leave the sun is about
to set. Abraham decides to go with them. Hagar sees them
leave so she says to the slave-women, “We can collect what
remains of the food, the men have left.”
So the women exit the tent and begin to gather food, but
to their surprise it appears as though the food has not been
touched. One of the slaves says to another, “Did we not watch
them eat?”
And the other slave says, “Hush, the more they leave, the
more there is for us!”
So the women continue to collect the food and take it
into the tent. As they enter the tent, they see that Sarah has
retired to her private quarters and that Hagar has begun to eat
some of the tender beef, and the women are keen to partake
of the same.
k
Night and the men have arrived in the mountains to the east
which overlooks the Jordan plain. Their position looks over
the southern tip with the cities of Sodom, Gomorrah and
Zoar near the foot of the mountains, so Abraham and the
celestials congregate to discuss their next move. The guests
think that Abraham should return home.
So Michael and Gabriel leave and make their descent
toward Sodom, and Yahweh stays with Abraham in the hills.
Abraham walks to the edge of the cliff and looks down into
the valley, but the darkness restricts his vision, as all he can see
are distant city lights and the moon reflected back from
the surface of the sea of Arabah. A cold wind buffets around
280
Abraham, as he stands with his clothes which flap against him.

All he can hear is the whistle of the wind as it blows through
his hair and beard. Yahweh stands at a distance; He looks at
Abraham and thinks, Shall I conceal from Abraham what I am
going to do, as Abraham will become a great and powerful nation
and all nations on earth will bless themselves by him?
Yahweh decides to tell Abraham and says, “The outcry
against Sodom and Gomorrah is so great and their sin is so
grave, that I shall go down and see whether or not their
actions are at all as the outcry reaching me would suggest.
Then I shall know.”
Abraham hears Yahweh clearly, despite the wind, and he
turns to look at Him with an expression of concern. He walks
closer to Yahweh, and Abraham says, “Will you really destroy
the upright with the guilty? Suppose there are fifty upright
people in the city. Will you really destroy it? Will you not
spare the place for the sake of the fifty upright in it? Do not
think of doing such a thing: to put the upright to death with
the guilty, so that upright and guilty fare alike! Is the judge of
the whole world not to act justly?”
Yahweh says, “If I find fifty upright people in the city of
Sodom, I will spare the whole place because of them.”
Abraham says, “I know I am being presumptuous
here, but suppose there are forty-five upright people in the
city of Sodom. Will you destroy them because they are five
short?”
Yahweh says, “If I find forty-five upright people, I will not
destroy Sodom on account of the forty-five.”
Yahweh knows that Abraham intends to persist, and that
he will continue to plead, so He allows him to see the destruc-
tion of the cities in His eyes, and as Abraham looks up into
Yahweh’s eyes, he sees swirling flames and combustion. This
terrifies him as he moves back quickly, trips and falls to the
ground, and among rocks he lies on his back. But he fails to
get the message and continues to question.
281
PAUL JUSTICE
Abraham remains on the ground and looks up at Yahweh

with a worried expression, “I hope you are not angry with me,
my Lord, but consider this, there could be forty righteous
souls in Sodom?”
Yahweh responds in mellow tone and smiles, “If there are
forty worthy of life, I will spare the cities on their account.”
Abraham sits up and lowers his head to think, and God is
patient with him. Abraham looks up at Yahweh, and he puz-
zles a little further, “I know I am nothing but mere dust and
dirt, and I have no right to be questioning God Most High,
but I was just thinking, would you consider thirty, my Lord?”
Yahweh looks down upon Abraham with his burning eyes
and explains, “If there are thirty, then the cities will be saved.”
Despite God’s fairness, Abraham feels the need to keep up
the interrogation, and so he looks up and pleads further,
“Suppose there are only twenty there?” He says.
Yahweh responds positively, “If I find twenty there, then
I will not do it.”
Abraham looks up at Yahweh and frowns, “I trust my Lord
will not be angry if I speak once more: perhaps there will only
be ten?”
Yahweh looks at Abraham and reassures him again, “If
I find ten good souls, I will preserve the entire plain for the
sake of the ten.”
Abraham looks up at Yahweh and smiles, despite his fear
because of His eyes.
Yahweh offers his hand to Abraham and assists him to his
feet, and places both hands upon Abraham’s shoulders. He
looks into his face and reassures with conviction. “Abraham,
I know of your deepest concerns, trust me?” Yahweh says.
Abraham lowers his head, as he is afraid to look at God’s
eyes any longer, so Yahweh lowers His hands and turns His
back to Abraham. As he looks up and sees the back of his God,
Abraham walks past Him towards the cliffs edge and he stops
and looks down into the valley below, and after he peers at
282
distant lights, he turns to speak to Yahweh, and he sees that

Yahweh has gone. So Abraham begins to search the area and
looks for his God, and after some time he fails to find even a
trace, not so much as a clue.
Confused and lost, Abraham sits down among the rocks
and begins to ponder in his mind. He thinks, I know it was
wrong for me to question Yahweh to such an extent, but I just had
to know. He continues alone, cold and in the darkness, while
the wind howls all around him; it blows white strands of hair
over his headdress. He is unaware, but the jackals have begun
to gather in the hills just above him, and they wait in silence,
as they watch him with shoulders stooped low, and the lunar
light which surrounds him is subdued. After a long rest and
unable to figure out in his mind how Yahweh could just sud-
denly disappear, he decides it is time to leave. He rises to his
feet and begins his journey home, and the jackals follow him;
they hide among the rocks above and maintain a short dis-
tance behind Abraham.
Because it is night and visibility is poor and Abraham has
no torchlight to guide his path, he stumbles a few times on his
descent and while this is so, he receives a few cuts and abra-
sions to his arms and legs. The dogs begin to howl as they
sense easy prey, and this instils fear in Abraham, which causes
him to quicken the pace. One of the jackals stealthily creeps,
with its body stooped low, and climbs down onto a ledge
which overlooks Abraham. The dog leaps and pounces upon
his back; the impact pushes him to the ground and the dog
rolls. The jackal regains its composure and leaps upon
Abraham to go for his throat. Abraham wrestles with the
beast, his hands tightly gripped around its neck and he keeps
its sharp teeth which drip saliva from slashes to his face.
Suddenly, Abraham feels his body infused with power and as
the strength builds in his arms he tightens his grip. Now with
handfuls of the dog’s skin and hair, he is ready to kill the beast,
as the ferocious jackal yelps. Abraham hurls the dog to one
283
PAUL JUSTICE
side with such force that it bounces off rocks and plummets
over the cliff’s edge. He can hear its screams as it cascades over
jagged rocks to its eventual death. The other dogs see this,
and jackals in the hills above begin to retreat. Abraham stead-
ies himself to his feet, and although shaken from the incident,
he composes himself and continues on his way. He reaches the
low hills, the settlement comes into view; he feels encouraged
and he hurries to reach the low plateau.
Abraham is tired, scuffed, bleeding, and his soiled clothes
are torn, but he reaches base. He emerges from between the
oaks and he staggers toward his tent and almost falls through
the entrance. He looks at Hagar and Ishmael, who have wait-
ed up for him, worried sick.
Abraham sighs and in gravelly voice, croaks, “Lot’s life is
in danger.”.
Hagar and Ishmael rush over to him and throw their arms
around him; they hug him tight.
Hagar says, “Where have you been, my lord? We thought
you would be safe with those men, and as the night pro-
gressed, we worried.”
Abraham wraps his arms around each of their shoulders
and calmly says, “My assumption was wrong about the visi-
tors; they are here as assassins to destroy Sodom!”
Ishmael’s face lights up with enthusiasm as he looks up at
his father. “Assassins, father?” he says joyfully.
Abraham looks down into his son’s face and wearily
answers, “Ishmael, this is no time to be joyful, thousands of
people are about to die, including my nephew Lot!”
284
18
Paranormal Assassins
The two Angels have reached the bottom of the mountain,

after they left Abraham with Yahweh. Now, in the Jordan
valley, they are surrounded by trees and lush undergrowth.
The moon is just visible through the leaves of the trees.
Immediately ahead, they can see a clearance, and lights which
flicker draws their attention. They move forward, it soon
becomes clear where there are: not very far from the entrance
to Sodom. As the Angels emerge from among the trees, they
see before them a huge sphinx, not dissimilar to those found
in Egypt. Its appearance is blue because of the moonlight,
although the dark side seems to blend in with the earth. As
they approach the sphinx, they stop to look at it, and they
absorb every detail. They ponder over the inscriptions carved
into its chest but the Angels’ faces show no emotion; they are
expressionless. They walk toward the city gate, the flames
from the torches on either side of the entrance is what caught
their attention from among the trees. They stop when they
spot the figure of a man who sits on the ground near the
entrance to Sodom: it is Lot.
His senses detect that someone is present, and Lot raises
his head and looks in the direction of the sphinx. He sees two
men who stand and look at him, dressed almost entirely in
black. They stand in the shadow of the sphinx, so it is difficult
for Lot to make out their faces. Lot’s intuition warns him
to be cautious, as these visitors are not human, but rather
are supernatural assassins. Lot rises to his feet slowly and
285
PAUL JUSTICE
approaches the two men. As he advances, their appearance

sharpens. He notices their eyes and he becomes aware and
drops to his knees; he spreads his palms before them.
“My lords” he says in humble tone, “please, allow your
servant to offer you shelter, food and rest.”
Michael says, “No, in the city square, we will spend the
night.”
The men walk away from Lot and proceed toward the
entrance to Sodom; Lot rises to his feet and scurries after
them. He resembles a beggar, and persists with his offer of
hospitality. The men ignore him and continue to walk toward
the city gates. They reach the gates, and see they are sealed
shut, and large chains hang from each one. Michael looks at
Lot and demands, “Who opens these gates?”
Lot responds quickly, “About eight horses, my lord!”
Michael looks at Gabriel and nods, both Angels take hold
of the huge chains and begin to walk backwards and the grind
of stone against stone deafens, yet the assassins open the gates
with ease. Lot’s jaw drops as he watches them. They enter the
city and walk a short distance, then stop, and they survey the
inner city. It is as if they have entered a new world. With its
unique architecture and enormous walls, Sodom is a fortress
and a centre for worship, signified by the large but impressive
ziggurat in the centre of the city. While the celestials take note
of the inner city, Lot crouches at their feet. With hands
grasped tightly, as if about to pray, he pleads with the Angels.
“Please, I beg of you,” he pleads, “the city is not safe, they
will kill you. May your servant protect you in my humble
abode?”
The men look down. “As you wish!” Gabriel says.
Lot’s concern is the evil inhabitants of the city, despite the
fact that he chose to live there, and because Lot’s house is
deep within the city, they have a distance to go before they
reach the refuge of his house. Inside Sodom at night, it is dark
and eerie, infested with evil spirits and unwelcoming. The
286
flames from the wall lights do little to guide their way, so Lot
leads the men by a familiar route to his home. They pass
through the streets and structures that house the poor, men,
woman and children approach and lurk in the darkness; they
surround Lot and the Angels. The men of the city reach out
and grab hold of the visitors, and they grope at their clothes
and mutter, “Have you come to save us?”
Lot attempts to push them back, while the women dance
provocatively and rub themselves against Michael and
Gabriel, and with their sexually charged voices, they attempt
to lure the Angels, “Such beautiful, erotic sexual beings;
come and have intercourse with us, my lords!” the women say
invitingly.
Lot lashes out and strikes one of the women across the
face and the woman snarls and spits upon Lot. Michael grabs
hold of Lot’s wrist and in authoritative tone, demands, “No,
Lot, now lead the way!”.
Lot pushes the children to one side and continues to walk.
The children are particularly vicious, they run circles around
them and hiss and spit like wild cats. Beggars come and crawl
from the dark corners of streets. Naked and on hands and
knees, they crawl like skeletons overlaid with infected skin;
they cry out like lepers. “Spare what you have and give to us!”
they plead.
The celestials become tired of these pitiful creatures and
as a sense of urgency prevails; they take hold of Lot and press
forward toward his home, followed by a malicious entourage
of savages. They reach home and Lot enters his house, fol-
lowed by the Angels, who close the door behind them. As the
angry crowd is greeted with the thud of solid oak, they quick-
ly disperse throughout the city and spread the news about the
two Angels.
Lot and his guests stand against the door on the inside
of Lot’s house and wait for the angry crowd to disperse. Now,
in the peace and tranquillity of his home, Lot introduces the
287
PAUL JUSTICE
two men to his wife and two daughters. He informs his

family that they will stay the night. Lot’s daughters peer
through veils which cover their mouths, and they giggle,
while they lower their heads to gesture a welcome. Minutes
later, Lot’s wife prepares food: unleavened bread, fruit and
wine. While the daughters wash the feet of the visitors, Lot is
busy and prepares the beds for his guests. As the night draws
on, they all settle around the food. In a dimly lit room, the six
of them are draped around the room and enjoy a late supper,
while they discuss the situation in Sodom. Lot is deeply
engrossed in conversation with Gabriel, while Michael stares
at Lot’s wife. He appears to study her in detail: the fine clothes
she wears and the excessive amount of jewellery draws his
attention. His eyes pan over her anklets which sparkle, his
eyes move up to the bangles and arm bracelets; he turns
his attention to her gem-studded necklace, before he observes
her face. The veil which covers her nose and mouth is almost
transparent, and it seems to hold particles of gold which
sparkle. He raises his eyes to her headdress, which glistens
partially in subdued light. She notices his attention but
quickly looks away. He asks in a perplexed tone, “Are you
happy in Sodom?”
She looks at him curiously. “Yes my lord, very happy!”
He continues, “Tell me. Which of the two do you hold
dear to your heart, spiritual or physical gifts?”
She looks at him for a few moments, then frowns.
“Forgive me, my lord; I fail to understand your question?” she
says, bemused.
To which Michael says, “Yes, sadly you do!”
It is late and the night draws on, everyone is tired and
Lot’s daughters have already begun to fall asleep. Without
their knowledge, the inhabitants of the city have begun to
advance toward Lot’s house; every man, woman and child and
from every corner. They stealthily creep and in silence, they
288
surround Lots house. At the forefront of the crowd stands

Bera, the King of Sodom. The giant stands proudly, with a
torch in one hand and a large rock in the other. Also in the
crowd are Lot’s two sons-in-law to be, betrothed to Lot’s
daughters, but this does not stop their attendance for the
onslaught, as they too are eager to see the Angels. Bera steps
forward from the crowd, and with all of his strength, he hurls
the rock at Lot’s door; it creates a loud thud on impact and the
wood splits. Immediately, the large crowd of hundreds of peo-
ple begin to cheer, chant and scream. Like a war cry, the noise
deafens. Inside the house, Lot’s daughters awake in fright, and
fearfully they run and hide under their beds. Lot’s wife runs to
him and embraces him. She trembles. Lot holds his wife and
tells her to remain calm.
“I will deal with this!” he reassures her.
The Angels remain seated, as though unconcerned. Lot
releases his wife’s embrace and walks over to the door.
Carefully he opens the door very slightly, and he peers out at
the angry crowd.
Lot’s wife whispers, “Who is it?”
Lot looks over his shoulder and frowns. “Everyone!” he
whispers.
His wife frowns back at him, then replies in a soft voice,
“What do you mean everyone?”
Again, Lot replies, quietly, “Everyone!”
Lot closes the door and turns to face his wife. “I will go
out there and enquire as to their business,” he says.
Lot’s wife walks over to him, takes hold of his hand. “Be
careful!” she says concerned.
Lot looks over her shoulder, then looks at the two Angels,
who sit devoid of any expression. He steps outside and closes
the door behind him, and is faced with a very large crowd of
angry people; the steps which lead to his house give him ele-
vation over the crowd, although Bera still towers over him.
289
PAUL JUSTICE
The noise is pandemonium, so Lot raises his palms before the

crowd so as to gesture for silence. As the noise from the
people diminishes, Lot can hear individuals call out. “We
want the men!” some of them shout.
Bera steps forward, then points at Lot. “Where are the
men who came to you tonight?” he demands.
Before Lot can make a reply some of the women call out.
“Bring them out to us so that we may have intercourse with
them!” they shout.
Lot pleads, “My brothers, please, do not act with evil
intentions.”
Lot looks at Bera and continues to plead, “May I beseech
the King, look! I have two daughters who remain virgins; you
can have them both, to do as you please.” Bera bellows forth
an insidious laugh, infectiously causes the crowd to laugh.
Lot’s future sons-in-law, who are in the crowd, look at each
other because of what was said, and they fail to detect humour.
Bera raises his arms to silence the crowd, then steps forward
closer to Lot, who trembles.
Bera shouts, in a very loud voice, “Look at this pathetic
man who stands in my way, a foreigner in our midst, is he to
play the judge over us?”
Laughter ensues from the crowd, and Bera turns to the
crowd and silences them. He swings around and points at Lot.
“Release those men to us or we will do worse to you, than we
intended for them,” he demands angrily.
The angry crowds cheer in agreement. Bera stoops down,
leans over Lot and says, “Move out of my way, for your tiny
mind does not grasp what is about to happen here; those men
you hide are not men, they are Gods.”
Bera rises and takes two steps back, and he shouts in thun-
derous voice, “I want to converse with the men about their
mission, before the women rape them for their seed.”
Bera lunges forward and pushes Lot so that he slams
back against the door. Bera turns to the crowd and raises his
290
voice above them, and he cries out, “Everyone, storm the

house!”
As the people surge forward and begin to press in on
Lot, the door opens and the two Angels seize hold of Lot,
and they pull him back into the house. Michael steps outside,
with his back to the door, men and women begin to grope
him and tug at his clothes. The women convulse and beg
for his seed, they shake their bodies in a ritualistic frenzy,
while Bera stands and towers over the crowds, and he stares at
the Angel.
Michael, who stands as tall as the door, stares back at Bera
and calls out over the vicious noisy people. “I know what you
are and I know your father. He is inferior to me, so what
makes you think you can interrogate me?”
Bera’s face fills with rage, and he bends down to pick up a
stone to throw at Michael. The Archangel relinquishes his
human appearance and reveals his supernatural glory, which
almost lights up the whole of Sodom, and while streaks of
light stream from the entity brighter than the sun, some of the
people are blinded instantly. The light diffuses quickly, as
Michael regains his human appearance. He steps back inside
Lot’s house. The Canaanites who witness this strange phe-
nomenon, become fearful and quickly disperse, they run off
into the darkness and in all directions. As for Bera, he drops
the stone and begins to rub his eyes, he and a few others
inflicted with blindness wear themselves out as they try to find
the door to Lot’s house.
Inside the house is an atmosphere of panic among Lot’s
family, so one of the guests turns to Lot and says, “Is there any-
one else we should know about? Sons, Daughters, Relatives?”
Lot thinks. “I have two sons-in-law betrothed to my
daughters and they are in Sodom!” he explains.
Gabriel is urgent with Lot. “Go! You will be safe now. Go
find them and bring them here. Quickly! For we must destroy
this city”
291
PAUL JUSTICE
Lot rushes to his feet and heads for the door; he gathers a
torch to light his way and leaves.
Lot wanders through the streets of Sodom for almost an
hour; he still has not found them. It is very late, and Lot is
tired, cold and loses heart. He just wants to go home and
sleep. Finally, he sees the sons-in-law who sit by the well near
the entrance to the city; they also see him. One says to the
other, “Who is this approaching waving a torch?” to which
the other one says, “I think it is crazy old Lot.”
Lot rushes over to them and says, “On your feet, we
must leave the city before dawn, the Angels are going to
destroy it!”
The men burst out with laughter and begin to mock Lot,
“You old fool, that white light has affected your mind.”
“White light?” questions Lot, “What do you mean?”
One of the men continues, “Have you not heard the
rumours? A white light has caused blindness to some who
were at your house tonight. People are terrified; they hide in
their homes.”
Lot becomes suspicious and continues to question, “Were
you both at my house tonight, among the crowd?”
The men begin to sneer at Lot while one answers, “Yes we
were there, and we left after you offered your daughters to
Bera, you crazy old fool. What were you thinking, offering
your only daughters’ lives, our future wives?”
The men are clearly furious and want Lot to leave, Lot’s
persistence just fuels their wrath and hatred for him, and he
can see in their faces that the situation is hopeless, so he excus-
es himself. “Time is pressing I must leave now,” he says.
To which one of them says, “Please do!”
Lot’s torch has almost burnt out, so he drops it and runs
home as fast as he can, stops for no one. By the time Lot
reaches his home, the dawn is almost upon him. The night’s
experiences have left him exhausted. All he wants to do is
sleep. Lot enters his house, and sees his guests who wait for
292
him, and they are anxious over time. Lot stands, pants and
catches his breath, while at the same time he struggles to
speak, “They, they did not believe me!”
He staggers toward his guests and drops to the floor. The
Angels look at each other and remain silent. Lot’s wife and
daughters sleep, and enough time to reach safe distance is
about to reach its limit.
293
19
The Holocaust
Lot is laid on the floor and he sleeps, while the guests feel a
sense of urgency as the dawn closes in. Michael kneels before
Lot and shakes him awake. He says, “On your feet, we must
leave the city now for fear you may be swept away with it,
wake your wife and daughters, we must go!”
Gabriel hurries up the steps to wake Lot’s wife and daugh-
ters. The situation is tense. Lot’s family are sleepy and they
procrastinate about the need to leave the house. After a
stretch and a yawn, one of the women complains, “It is yet still
dark outside, why are we up so soon?”
Michael is agitated and his tone is urgent, “Wake up!
We do not have time for this, we must leave now,” he
demands.
Lot struggles to gather himself together, while his wife
responds, “But I need to gather a few things together for the
journey.” She points toward her bedroom while she says this.
The patience of the Angels has now expired. Gabriel takes
hold of Lot’s hand and the hand of his wife; he forcefully drags
them from the house and leads them through the streets of
Sodom, heads toward the exit. They are followed closely by
Michael who leads Lot’s daughters by the hand. The tension
rises as they flee the city, and their swift exit has not gone
unnoticed. The Canaanites run from their homes and shout,
“There they are, kill them all!”
A vicious crowd assembles and gives chase, hot on their
trail with murderous intent. The Angels run at such speed
294
that Lot and the others struggle to keep up, and they almost
lose their grip. The younger of the two daughters finally
loosens her hold; she falls to the ground with a thump, creates
clouds of dust on impact, and scrapes the skin from her
arms and legs. Michael senses this, releases the other daugh-
ter, who continues to run for her life. As Michael turns to look
back, a malicious band of henchmen scream and advance
toward him. Although some distance prevails, they close in
fast. The young woman weeps as the Angel crouches down
to pick her up. Michael scoops her up in his arms, and he rises
to his feet and holds her in a cradle position. Again, he looks
at the angry vicious crowd of Canaanites who fast approach.
The Angel contemplates how he needs to slow them down,
and he uses a form of telepathy, he commands the scorpions
of the ground to attack the vicious band of killers. The scor-
pions immediately advance in vast numbers, crawl from the
dust of the ground and fall from the crevices of the walls,
they gather like a large army. The scorpions shimmer like a
carpet of black satin, move in waves toward the towns’ people,
cling to their ankles and climb up their legs. The scorpions
inject a venomous sting from their tails. The people scream in
pain, while others fall to the ground, some hop from one
foot to another while they try to persist. As the vicious clan
of Canaanites, eager to advance, press forward, the venom
seizes their bodies. Paralyzed, they fall to the ground, one
after another.
Satisfied with the result, Michael turns and continues to
run toward the city’s exit. The young woman carried, gazes
admiringly into the Angel’s face; she smiles and rests her head
against his chest. Gabriel and the rest of Lot’s family have
pressed on and they are now outside Sodom. Lot and his wife
and daughter stand next to the Angel, not far from the sphinx,
they look down over the Jordan plain, when Michael exits the
city with Lot’s young daughter cradled in his arms. They join
the others, and Michael lowers the young woman to her feet
295
PAUL JUSTICE
and says to everyone, “I have delayed the people of Sodom,

but we must act quickly!”
The young woman continues to stare up at Michael,
bleary-eyed, as though infatuated. Her older sister notices,
takes her younger sister by the hand, and she leads her away
from Michael and whispers in her ear, “Stop it! He only car-
ried you!”
The Angels gather around Lot and instruct him, with a
sense of urgency. One of them points over to the West
Country, the mountainous region where they came from. He
says to Lot, “Flee to the hills! Do not stand still and do not
look behind you. You must find refuge quickly. The entire
plain will be destroyed and every living thing will die. Take
your family and run!”
Surprisingly though, Lot continues to delay; he feels
weary and weak through lack of sleep, the thought of a climb
up into the mountain is too much to bear, so he responds,
“No! My lords, not the hills, for I am weary and I fear that
I may perish!” He says.
Lot takes hold of Gabriel by his sleeve, and leads him to
the edge of the valley, points toward Zoar and says, “See that
city? May I flee to it and be safe, it is not very far and I can
reach it before sunrise!”
Gabriel grants him his wish and Michael says, “Yahweh is
merciful on this occasion, but hurry! For we cannot do any-
thing until you are safely within the city!”
Lot runs over to his family and takes hold of his younger
daughter’s hand, he leads her into the valley plain, followed
closely by his wife and elder daughter. Michael calls after
them, “Keep running and do not stand still, and do NOT
LOOK BEHIND YOU!” The Angel raises his voice progres-
sively.
They run for their lives and continue to run, as fast as they
can. The valley plain is covered in lush vegetation and the
thick undergrowth restricts their progress. They are all very
296
tired and begin to slow down; eventually, they stop to rest

about half way. Lot, now breathless, crouches with his hands
on his knees, tries to regain his composure. Lot’s wife,
although breathless, begins to nag him, “Why did you not lis-
ten to the men? They gave good advice; we could have been
in the hills by now?”
Lot ignores her, stands up, then says to his daughters,
“Come! We must move on!”
They all continue and press forward, beat back large
leaves and push aside tall reeds, hope to soon find the clear-
ance which leads to the city of Zoar. Lot stops again and
breaks free a leaf which contains a pool of dew, he rests while
he takes a drink. Lot’s elder daughter says, “Father! Did not
the men say hurry and not to stop or look back?”
Lot finishes his drink, looks at his daughter and says, “Yes
daughter! And they also said that their hands were tied until
we reach the city of refuge.”
That said, they begin to push forward through the bush
and finally they break free into a clearance a short distance
from the marshland. They can see clearly Zoar ahead of them.
They are near the fringes of the bog and a mist rises from the
ground. Lot’s wife is anxious and resents every minute of this
ordeal. This is so obviously reflected in the tone of her voice,
when she says to Lot, “Now what!”
Lot takes his daughters by the hand and says, “Follow me
and stay close.”
Lot’s wife looks on in disgust; she follows anyway at a
short distance. Lot continues with caution, tests the ground
with every step, while his daughters cling to him, and they
restrict his movement. Suddenly Lot’s wife screams out pan-
icked, “I am stuck!” she shouts.
Lot looks over his shoulder and sees his wife struggle in
the tar, and he calls out loudly, “Keep still!”
He continues to lead his daughters to safety. Lot settles
his daughters by an oak tree nearby, finds a long stick and
297
PAUL JUSTICE
goes back for his wife. Lot’s wife is now up to her waist and
sinks; she continues to cry for help. By the time Lot reaches
her, she is panic-stricken and wriggles, which makes the situ-
ation worse.
“Keep still!” Lot shouts. As he gets closer, he reaches out
with the stick, which just falls short. “You have waded out too
far!” he says. Grunts and complaints issue from Lot as he
reaches a little closer, Lot tries again with the stick, this time
it not only reaches but hits her on the side of the face. Lot
continues, and instructs, “Keep tight hold on the stick, and
I will pull you out!”
Lot grunts, puffs and blows and he continues to pull with
all of his strength, as he finally leverages his wife to solid
ground.
Now that she is free, she embraces her husband with grat-
itude and keeps tight hold of his hand, and Lot leads her to
solid ground. As the family congregates by the oak tree, Lot
looks over to the east and sees the sun peek over the mountain
range; he turns to his family and says, “Hurry! We must press
on as the sun is about to rise.”
They all run toward the city of Zoar without an attempt
to look back, as the sun rises and illuminates the ground
behind them. As they reach Zoar, they continue to run,
through the gates and into the city of refuge, just as solar rays
chase the ground behind them and almost touches their heels.
They stop as they reach the square, now that they have
entered the city. Out of breath, they take a few seconds to
recuperate, before Lot looks up to see some of the people of
Zoar, who stand and stare at them.
k
Zoar: The city of refuge
Lot has made a poor decision to come here and his wife knows
it. Lot and his wife and daughters have composed themselves
298
and are huddled together in the city square. The inhabitants

gather and now surround them. Lot looks up into the sky and
squints; he sees what could be the potential of a glorious day,
but this is soon about to change. Lot now turns his attention
to the crowd of wary savages as they close in; he calls out to
them, “We come in peace!”
The giant King from the midst of the crowd steps for-
ward, he wears animal skin loincloth and bones as jewellery;
he points a finger at Lot and says, “What is your business
here?”
Lot says, “Our business is peaceful; our only need is a
room, a place to stay, my lord!”
The giant leader moves closer to Lot; he studies them fol-
lowed by a demand, “Show me the women who hide behind
you?”
Lot gestures with both hands for his wife and daughters
to step forward; they reluctantly and very timidly appear from
behind Lot, and they stare up at the giant. He laughs, as he
senses their fear; he proceeds to remove their jewellery, items
of bronze, gold and some precious stones. He holds the jew-
ellery in his hand and peers at it, looks at Lot and says, “I will
keep these as payment for your accommodation!”
Lot nods his head in agreement. The giant backs up into
the crowd and as their leader; he immediately orders them to
seize the intruders. The group of savages rush in and seizes
hold of Lot and his family. As they lift each one of them
above their heads, the Canaanites begin to chant and scream
as they carry Lot and his wife and daughters toward the city
gates. The giant calls out in a loud voice, “Throw them in the
tar pits!”
Before they manage to reach the city gates, a very loud
clap of thunder echoes through the valley, causes them to stop
dead in their tracks. The tribe of savages become silent. They
stand and hold Lot and his wife and daughters above their
heads, while they ponder with fearful expressions upon their
299
PAUL JUSTICE
faces. A second clap of thunder rips through the valley, simul-

taneous to flashes of lightning in the skies above. The
Canaanites panic. They shout and scream, drop their victims
to the ground, and run to seek places to hide. Lot and his wife
and daughters are left on the ground. As Lot lies on his back,
he stares up into the sky, and he watches as it morphs in to
swirling clouds of dark colours, with intermittent flashes of
pale blue lights which cascade across the sky. The storm
clouds gather and as they roll across the sky, the entire valley
plain is plunged into darkness. All of the people within the five
cities are petrified; they wander aimlessly, gaze up into the sky,
and watch as swirling clouds intermingle with colours of yel-
low, red and purple. Translucent flashes of light give the sky
an eerie appearance.
k
While all of this happens, Bera and his Royal Guards, along
with a few of the townspeople, wander around the streets
of Sodom, and grope their way, still blinded. Bera raises
his face to the sky, his eyes are opaque white, and he sees
nothing of what occurs, and he only hears the thunder. He
lifts his arms to the sky and calls out to his Gods and pleads
fervently in a loud voice, “Where are my healers? Father, what
is happening?”
Bera lowers his arms, drops to his knees and lowers
his head, in a low defeated tone, he says, “I have been
forsaken!”.
The storm clouds continue to roll across the sky, with
flashes of light and bangs of thunder. An earthquake ricochets
throughout the Jordan plain, which causes some buildings to
tumble, while others split under the ground’s movement. In
Zoar, Lot and his family roll under the earth’s movement,
tossed this way and that. The giant King Zoar stands and
gazes into the sky, while he tries to keep his balance under the
earth’s movement. The noise is loud as the earth splits open,
300
and this gives way to cracks which appear in the walls of the
city. The people run and scream, to look for cover; some are
buried under fallen rocks as the earthquake continues to
strike. After a period, the earthquake subsides. Soon after,
pure white crystals begin to fall from the sky and dark swirling
clouds yield forth toxic salt, which descends to the earth like
pellets. Although small in size, these crystallized pellets of
salt sting the flesh of the people on impact. The salt covers
the entirety of the Jordan plain and within one hour, the
Canaanites which dwell inside the five cities, wade knee-deep
in salt crystals and the fumes which rise from the toxins choke
the people.
Zeboiim’s people flee from the city for fear they might
be completely buried alive. They plod knee-deep and carry
their children. In the city of Admah, the people climb the
ruins to avoid the rise of salt; most of their houses have
shaken to the ground during the earthquake. Gomorrah grad-
ually disappears, due to the devastation caused by the earth-
quake and the high levels of salt. Some of the inhabitants
of Gomorrah who have survived the earthquake attempt to
flee to the mountains in the west, but as the hail falls and the
pellets sting, the people continue to fall, only to be buried
alive. Sodom has withstood the earth tremors, apart from
a few cracks in the walls of houses, but the hail of salt gradu-
ally builds up against the city and its inhabitants struggle
to survive.
Inside Zoar, Lot and his family try to gain access to one
of the buildings and they have wrapped strips of cloth around
their heads so that only their eyes show, because of the toxic
gases which rise from the salt. They come across a large
building with double doors and Lot is anxious to gain entry.
They all try to pull on the doors, but the doors are wedged
shut and the salt continues to rise against them. The family
pull with all of their strength, until the doors weaken to the
sound of crack. Finally, they manage to open one of the doors
301
PAUL JUSTICE
slightly and the gap is just big enough for them to squeeze
through. Lot’s elder daughter goes through the gap in the
door first, followed by her mother. Lot looks to see if anyone
is around. His younger daughter squeezes through the gap
in the door, followed by Lot. Inside, the building is dark and
as their eyes adjust they begin to see they have entered a large
storehouse full of sacks and containers piled to the roof. Lot
looks at his daughters and says, “We may have just found the
perfect place to hide!”
302
20
Lot’s Wife and
the Fall of Salt
Lot begins to search the storehouse in the dark. The only

light is a transmitted glow from the salt outside the doors; it
sends a subdued beam across the floor from the gap. He
climbs upon some sacks and tries to peer deeper into the
storehouse. As his eyes adjust, he sees the dark outline of some
crates. He looks back at his family, gestures and muffles
through the fabric, “Come, we can progress further in!”
As Lot scrambles over the sacks and disappears into the
darkness, his daughters quickly follow him, but his wife
remains still and watches them recede into the dark, she peers
over the cloth which covers her face. She stands, feels pan-
icked, thinks if we stay here we will become trapped as this build-
ing is buried in salt and the fumes will kill us. No, we must get out
and quick. She cries out to her family but her voice is muffled
through the cloth, “Lot, daughters, we must get out of here
now before we become trapped!”
She waits for a reply and hears nothing. Since she feels anx-
ious, her mind becomes irrational. She thinks, got to get out,
I will take my chances with Sodom, besides everything I own is there.
No, got to go, I am sure my family will understand? Lot’s wife turns
and steps toward the gap in the doors, takes one final glance
into the storehouse in the direction she last saw her family, then
squeezes through the gap and exits the building. She stands
outside, then looks up at the storm clouds and squints her eyes
303
PAUL JUSTICE
as the salt continues to fall. She wades through the streets of

Zoar to head for the exit. The salt restricts her progress; the
toxic gas rises and chokes her as she coughs and splutters. Her
eyes water as she occasionally looks over her shoulder, in case
anyone follows. She reaches the gate, and she stops and turns
to take one final look at Zoar. She whispers, “My dear family,
may Yahweh protect you and always be with you!”
She turns and exits the city. The salt piles up in the valley
and she looks up and stares directly at Sodom. She sees the
salt pile up against the huge walls and the sphinx is almost
buried. Disillusioned and overwhelmed with false hope, her
warped mind has convinced her she can still make it home.
She begins to wade through the salt and plods toward Sodom.
The incline is arduous and the salt makes it difficult to move
one foot in front of the other. In earnest, she persists, and
chokes on fumes. Her body begins to tingle as she feels it burn
throughout, and her arms and legs sting. The salt continues to
fall; it covers her head and shoulders. She feels her joints stiff-
en, which slows her down. She looks at her hands; covered in
salt, they sting and painful sensations shoot through her fin-
gers. She tries to wriggle her fingers, but the movement is
slow, until she can no longer move them at all, as they turn to
crystal. Finally, she slowly raises her face and absorbs a final
glance of Sodom, and her face turns to crystal, one second
before she dies. Lot’s wife has crystallised in the pose of some-
one who yearns, with her arms outstretched toward Sodom.
The salt continues to build up around her until she is com-
pletely buried and becomes a pillar of salt.
A while later the salt suddenly stops and the whole of the
Jordan plain glows white, while the storm clouds continue to
gather overhead.
k
Back in the storehouse: Lot and his daughters search among
sacks and wooden crates. While they rummage in the dark,
304
they have found sacks full of grain and fruit, while crates full
of clay vessels contain water and some contain beer. Lot has
discovered a pile of flasks fashioned in hide which contain
wine, next to a large pile of empty sacks. Lot looks at his
younger daughter and muffles through the cloth which wraps
his face, “Tell your mother what we have found!”
His daughter climbs over crates, leans on a pile of sacks
and peers through a gap between crates. She looks toward the
doors, but she cannot see her mother. She climbs out from
among the store of goods, and searches the storehouse, while
she gropes in the dark. With eyes that peer over the cloth
which wraps her face, she calls in a quiet muffled voice,
“Mother, we have found food and drink, where are you?”
She approaches the doors and peers through the gap,
looks outside, and she sees that the salt has ceased to fall. She
turns and hurries toward the gap in the crates; she pulls the
cloth down from her mouth and calls out in a tone of urgency,
“Father, mother has gone and the salt has ceased!”
Lot emerges from the dark and faces his daughter. He
muffles, “What? Where is she?”
His daughter shrugs her shoulders. Lot pulls the cloth
from his face and looks over his shoulder. He calls out to his
elder daughter, “Get three empty sacks and fill them with
food and drink! We are leaving!”
Lot looks at his younger daughter and says, “You wait
here and I will hand the sacks over!”
She nods in agreement, then watches her father recede
into the dark. Soon after, her father reappears with the first
sack filled with fruit and pouches of grain and nuts. His daugh-
ter takes it and lowers it to the ground, and this is shortly fol-
lowed by the second sack filled the same. As his daughter takes
hold of the third sack, her arms are almost wrenched out as the
sack hits the floor, as Lot has filled it with flasks of wine.
Lot and his elder daughter climb out from behind the
crates. Lot approaches the doors and peers through the gap,
305
PAUL JUSTICE
then looks outside. His eyes water and he begins to cough, so

he pulls up the cloth to cover his nose and mouth. He moves
back inside and grabs hold of one of the sacks. As he squeezes
the sack through the gap in the doors, he pushes the sack out-
side, and returns for the others, until all three are outside. He
looks at his younger daughter, “Cover your face, it is lethal
out there!” he advises her.
She quickly obeys, as she pulls the cloth up over her nose
and mouth, and she peers at her father. Lot takes her by the
hand and leads her to the gap in the doors. He gestures for her
to go through, then he beckons for his elder daughter to go
through, and he follows them. Outside, they stand central in
the city square and gaze at the dead who are scattered every-
where. Some lie on the ground, covered in salt, while others
stand, crystallized in various poses, as though frozen in time,
and like sculptures they glisten. Lot looks at his daughters, his
eyes water and he points down at the sacks. He gestures with
his hands and mimes how they need to strap them to their
backs. Lot assists his daughters to secure the cargo on their
backs and they lift the heavy sack together and secure it to
Lot’s back. The three of them head for the gates and plod
knee deep through the compound.
As they reach the gates, they stop and look up at the sight
of the King of Zoar, who has frozen in time, like a giant stat-
ue. He stands near the gates, with arms outstretched ahead of
him, as though he clamoured for the exit to escape and did not
quite make it before he died. Lot and his daughters continue
on and exit Zoar, into the Jordan plain. They stand in the val-
ley, face east, and look at the mountains, which are free of salt.
They also look at the dead, who are scattered as far as the eye
can see. Some are laid down while others stand locked in a
pose, which identifies their plight.
Lot catches his daughter’s attention and points to the
mountains in the east, and he beckons for them to follow him.
They trudge through salt, as they press on and head east, and
306
they cough and choke, with eyes that stream. They all have
doubts with regards to their survival. They reach the base of
the mountains and the daughters stop to rest, while Lot goes
in search of a low incline. He finds a suitable spot and he
waves for his daughters to follow. All three begin to climb.
The higher they climb, the tougher it gets, as the hills steep-
en. After the climb continues for some time, and now reason-
ably elevated from the valley, Lot rests and clings to the rocks,
as he waits for his daughters to catch up. When his daughters
reach him, they cling to the rocks like limpets on either side
of him. Lot looks up and sees a ledge high above them, so he
looks at his daughters, then gestures with his head for them to
look up. After they have looked up, he gestures again to signi-
fy their point of reference and his daughters nod to concur.
Lot continues the climb and his daughters follow. He climbs
higher; they are now just under the ledge and Lot tries to
reach it. Strenuously he reaches out with the remainder of his
strength; he just touches the fringe of the ledge and he needs
to get closer. The ledge is elevated from his point of view; he
needs to hoist himself up. Lot precariously shuffles a little
closer, until he has both hands firmly fixed on the ledge. He
tightens his grip, and with all of his might, he pulls himself up,
grunting all the way. Finally, he makes it onto the ledge and
flops face down, as he pants and wheezes. Lot raises his eyes
and sees the mouth of a cave which stares straight at him.
Thank God he thinks to himself.
Meanwhile Lot’s daughters are stuck on the mountain
face, exhausted and fearful they are not going to make it. Lot
rises to his feet and stands, then looks over the edge. The
wind blows around him and his headgear smarts as it flaps
against his cheek. As Lot peers down upon his daughters’
struggle, he thinks of ways to assist them. He removes his fab-
ric belt, wrapped several times around his waist, as he thinks
this may help. He finds that it only flaps violently in the
strong wind. He twists the fabric as tightly as he can, then ties
307
PAUL JUSTICE
knots at intervals. He lies face down on his stomach, with his

arms hung over the cliff edge, then he dangles the cord, while
he keeps a strong grip on two of the knots with both hands.
The cord swings to and fro in the wind, not far from his eld-
est daughter’s head.
His daughter looks up and sees the cord and she nervous-
ly loosens the grip of her right hand from the rock. As she
reaches above her head, she waves her arm and tries to catch
the cord that blows in the wind. She manages to grab hold just
above the bottom knot, with her left hand, then she leaves
hold of the rock and reaches up to grab the cord with both
hands. Her life is now in Lot’s hands. Lot lifts her up, as he
advances on the knots. As she gets close, she grabs hold of
Lot’s arms and he pulls her to safety and onto the ledge.
Lot’s younger daughter has climbed as high as she can; she
is just below the cliff edge but too far away, as she clings to a
crevice in the rocks. She is afraid to move any further. Very
reluctantly and with great care, she reaches out with her left
hand, as she feels for crevices in the rocks. This is followed by
her left foot which feels for cracks in the rocks, which have
torn the skin from her toes. She repeats this process, as she
shuffles and as soon as she is close enough; her father and
sister reach out, seize hold of her, and they pull her to safety.
The young daughter is traumatised and begins to weep.
Although relieved, the stress of the experience has been too
much for her. The three of them stand huddled together on
the cliff edge and they look over the valley. The howl from
jackals is carried in the wind and the valley below is white with
salt. As Lot looks up into the sky, the storm clouds continue
to gather and he senses that danger lurks. So, Lot and his
daughters, weary from their ordeal, begin their search for a
way into the cave.
Settled into the cave, they drop their sacks onto the
ground. Lot lies down next to his daughters and looks out of
the cave. A strange aurora rises from the salt which covers the
308
plain and as he watches the tranquil colours from toxic gases,

he soon drops off to sleep.
Later that same day, Lot and his daughters are abruptly
awakened by the noise of rumbles and bouts of thunder. Lot
sits up and looks out of the mouth of the cave. He sees flash-
es of lightning and streams of fire which fall from the storm
clouds above. On his hands and knees, he crawls over to the
mouth of the cave for a closer look. His daughters are hyster-
ical and scream, “Father, what is happening?”
Lot peers out into the valley and sees flames of fire every-
where, swirling and driven by a strong wind. Rocks, engulfed
in a blue flame which leave a blue trail, shoot from the sky and
bombard the five cities below. Lot jumps with fright as one
blue stone whizzes past the mouth of the cave with a tremen-
dous hiss. The heat from the valley begins to push him back.
Lot turns his head to look at his daughters, who sit with their
heads between their knees, and they scream continuously, as
they are petrified. He notices that the inside of the cave is now
illuminated from the horrific light display behind him. He
sees many loose rocks in the cave, so he scurries over to his
daughters and shakes them. “Hurry, we must block the mouth
of the cave. Grab some of those rocks and pile them up!” he
says with urgency.
The three of them begin to collect the large rocks and roll
them over the floor of the cave. They pile them up at the
mouth of the cave, until they are almost sealed in, and they sit
huddled together and face the pile of rocks from a short dis-
tance within the cave. They sit and watch as flashes of light
show through the gaps in the rocks. The noise from the val-
ley horrifies them.
309
21
Abraham’s Lament
One day earlier: It is the morning of the holocaust and

Abraham has barely slept all night, worried sick about his
nephew Lot. He rises to his feet and leaves his tent to walk
over to the oak tree, where he had previously entertained the
Angels. He sits down under the great oak, just as the sun rises
over the horizon. He sits with his head lowered, and he med-
itates on the words spoken to him by Yahweh on the day of the
visit, as he tries to absorb into his mind the enormity of what
lies ahead. While his thoughts are negative and deep over the
issue, with Lot in Sodom, the ground beneath his feet is grad-
ually overshadowed with a darkness that creeps. Abraham
looks up to see the sun embellished by storm clouds which
gather. He rushes to his feet and runs to a plateau at the base
of the mountains for a closer look. As he gazes into the sky,
the formations of clouds are surreal. A nauseous dread fills
his stomach.
Abraham runs to his tent to alert Sarah, who sleeps.
He rushes in and almost falls on top of Sarah. He shakes
her. “Wake up!” Wake up!”he says, with panic in his voice.
Sarah, startled from sleep, sits up too quickly. She is
woozy. “What? What is it?” she says in tired voice.
“It has begun. Get up!” Abraham says.
Sarah is confused. “What has begun?” she asks.
Abraham rushes around, gathers his staff and a few extra
clothes and as he drapes more clothes over his head, he says to
Sarah, “During my absence, bake extra bread and cakes; I will
310
be returning with Lot and his wife and daughters and maybe
more, just as Yahweh has promised!”
Abraham hastens, does not wait for a reply, and swiftly
exits the tent. He hurries east toward the mountains, as
he intends to return to where he stood with Yahweh on the
previous day. He reaches the hill country, where he begins
his difficult climb to the top. The sky continues to darken,
which makes visibility poor for Abraham’s ascent. He stops
on occasion to look into the sky, but continues, perplexed
at what he sees: clouds flare flashes of light with intermittent
streams of fork lightning which strike out. The claps of thun-
der instil a foreboding dread and spark his imagination into
fear of the worst. Abraham continues to climb, as he wonders
if Lot is ever likely to make it out of Sodom alive.
He uses the staff he has brought with him to find crevices
in the rock face and to secure footholds throughout his climb.
He remembers how the visitors took an easier route the
day before.
Suddenly, an earthquake erupts in the Jordan plain,
which sends out shock waves that penetrate the mountains
on either side. Rocks stream down toward Abraham from
above. He tries to cover his head, but loses his grip and
tumbles. As he falls, he watches as his stick streamlines past
him with such grace and ease, compared to the clumsy
thumps and thuds Abraham himself elicits on the way down.
Finally, a convenient ledge breaks his fall. He lies on his
back, and looks up into an eerie sky, while earth tremors
continue to loosen rocks that head straight for him. He rolls
over on the ledge and packs himself tight against the rock
face, terrified. He remains in this position until the tremors
have stopped.
Some time passes and eventually a calm silence prevails.
Abraham rises to his feet and continues his climb, now with-
out the aid of his staff, which continues on its effortless jour-
ney. He climbs and eventually finds an easier incline, which
311
PAUL JUSTICE
helps his progress and makes up for lost time. Abraham hur-
ries on his way.
He hears what sounds like torrential rainfall. When he
looks up into the storm clouds, he sees white pellets descend
into the valley, their whiteness almost illuminates the moun-
tain peaks. Unaware that the valley is being consumed in toxic
salt, Abraham continues his journey. Almost at the top, the
incline steepens where it leads to the place where he stood the
day before with Yahweh. As Abraham continues his climb and
finally reaches the top, he clambers over to the spot where he
had been previously. He stands and looks over the cliff’s edge
while the wind buffets around him; when he looks down into
the valley, he is dumbfounded. He thinks no one could possibly
survive this! He walks away and sits down among the rocks; he
feels devastated and sick to his stomach. He again worries
about Lot, as he thinks, I hope he has found somewhere to hide
until this passes! He decides to sit and wait, in case Lot is some-
where in the mountains and perhaps he may climb in
Abraham’s direction. But he waits and he waits, and finally he
begins to lose hope. His countenance falls, and he sits with his
head tucked into his knees. He begins to rock to and fro, as he
mutters nonsense under his breath.
Suddenly, the continuous hiss and the noise from the fall
of salt ceases. Abraham raises his face and looks up. Although
the storm clouds still gather, he rises to his feet and walks over
to the cliff’s edge and peers into the valley. The white glow
hurts his eyes, as he stands, squints, and surveys the area. He
sees no sign of Lot.
Abraham turns and wanders forlornly away from the edge,
with head and shoulders stooped. The feel of hopelessness con-
sumes him as he lowers himself to his knees. He begins to weep.
k
Abraham crouches to the ground, as he grieves his loss. He
continues to weep, but a sudden loud bang of thunder jolts
312
him to stop. As he raises his face, he sees the ground before

him illuminated with sporadic and intermittent flashes of
light. He quickly rises to his feet and looks over the valley.
Fork lightning strikes the ground incessantly, followed by
more claps of thunder. He looks up into the sky, and he is
filled with awe, as he sees stones which omit a blue flame, and
they shoot from the clouds above. As they whizz past him,
they spin on their way into the valley below and the trail they
leave is a fire blue glow. He looks down into the valley and
sees swirling combustion, which immediately reminds him of
the vision in God’s eyes. He shrieks out loudly, turns his face
to look up, and he cries out in shrill voice, “No, God, no!”
The heat from the valley pushes him back and he pushes
forward against the scorched wind to peer down into the val-
ley. All he can see is thick black smoke and the heat is like the
heat from a furnace. With scorched face and hands, Abraham
backs away from the edge of the cliff; he feels defeated,
depressed and betrayed.
Lot should have been with him by now, had he followed
the visitors’ instructions. Abraham slumps to the ground, with
his head lowered, and he thinks, No human could possibly survive
what I have just seen! He assumes that Lot is dead and feels sor-
row over the vast loss of human life, and the obliteration of
paradise. He rises to his feet and rips the cloths from his chest.
He rends his clothes apart and falls to his knees and covers
himself with dirt.
Saddened deeply by what he has seen, Abraham gets up
and proceeds with his descent down the mountain and back to
his settlement. By the time he reaches the base, it is late after-
noon and his mission has been a disaster. Tired, hungry and
dying of thirst, he is almost home.
While Abraham was in the mountains, Sarah excelled her-
self and prepared the banquet, with the help of Hagar and
other slaves. The food is laid out ready and Hagar, who
returns from the herd, carries a vessel upon her head and
313
PAUL JUSTICE
catches sight of Abraham in the distance, staggering from side

to side. She drops the vessel and calls out to Sarah, “Quick,
Sarah, come and see!”
Sarah stops her work and rushes out of the tent. They
both run to greet Abraham. As they reach him, he falls to the
ground. They both rush forward to help him. They seize hold
of his arms and assist him to his feet. Sarah immediately
enquires about Lot. “Where are Lot and the others?” she asks.
Without an attempt to look at Sarah, he replies solemnly,
“I believe they are all dead!”
Sarah cries out in a shrill voice, “Dead! What happened?
Abraham continues, as they walk toward the tent. “From
the cliff’s edge, I looked into the valley. All I could see was
thick black smoke and the heat, the heat pushed me back!” he
explains.
At this point, Hagar speaks up, “Can you not see, Princess
Sarah? Look, his face glows like the sunset!”
Sarah snaps back harshly, “Of course I can see, foolish
woman!”
Abraham’s mouth is extremely dry and his lips cracked and
sore, but he manages to raise his voice enough to chastise
them both. “Stop bickering! Hagar run ahead, I need a flask
of water!” he croaks.
“Yes, my lord!” she says, and immediately runs toward the
tent.
Abraham’s legs fail him. Sarah wraps her arms around him
and almost drags him the remainder of the distance and into
the tent. In the tent, Sarah lowers Abraham on the floor, rests
his head upon her lap. Hagar approaches with a vessel of
water and kneels beside him. “Your water my lord!” she says.
She pours a little water into the palm of her hand, and
she places her hand close to his chapped lips. Abraham’s
lips quiver as he delicately sips the water. Hagar looks at
Abraham’s legs and feet, notices the cuts, bruises and blisters.
She removes his sandals and pours cool water over his injuries.
314
Abraham shouts out from the discomfort and Sarah begins to

wave her hands to gesture disapproval. Sarah shouts at Hagar,
“No Hagar! Leave him be, I will nurse his wounds.”
Hagar swiftly raises her head, then glares at Sarah with
those beautiful large brown eyes for a moment, lowers her
head, and mutters in a low tone, “As you desire!”
Abraham is sick of it, and after he coughs he manages to
say a few words with a croak in his voice. “How many times
do I have to remind you both to stop quarrelling, I am sick of
it!” he says.
Hagar kneels at Abraham’s feet with her head lowered.
“Forgive me, my lord!” she says apologetically.
Abraham continues, “Hagar, give the vessel of water to
Sarah and go gather the food and remove it all from the tent!”
Hagar nods in agreement and hands the vessel of water to
Sarah, as she proceeds to gather the food together, and wraps
it in cloth. As Hagar carries bundles of food from the tent,
Sarah tears a piece of cloth from her clothes. She soaks it in
water and proceeds to fold the cloth neatly, then lays it across
Abraham’s brow to help defuse the heat which emits from his
face. Sarah sits and nurses Abraham, completely at a loss as to
what to say or do. After a few moments of silence Abraham
says, “Sarah, I need some time alone. Leave the tent and take
care of everyone, including Hagar. Be sure no one enters this
tent, not even you, no matter how many days go by. Just leave
me plenty of water, now leave!”
Sarah feels that this is the wrong time to question
Abraham’s motives; she simply responds, “Yes, my lord!”
Sarah makes sure that Abraham is comfortable and has
plenty of water to drink before she leaves the tent. As Sarah
leaves the tent, Hagar runs to greet her. “How is he?” she says
and looks concerned.
“Suffering, I have never seen him like this before!” Sarah
says. “Listen Hagar, you must not enter the tent until Abraham
comes out, and make sure that no one enters the tent.”
315
PAUL JUSTICE
Hagar stands with a puzzled expression on her face.

“Why?” she asks.
Sarah looks at Hagar seriously and shakes her head in dis-
may. “I do not know why; these are my orders and it is not for
us to question.”
Hagar puts her arm around Sarah as they walk together to
another tent. Abraham is alone in his tent and he grieves; he
strips himself naked and pours water all over his body before
he rolls in the dirt. Abraham covers himself in soiled cloth,
and settles down in one corner of the tent, amongst a pile of
animal skins. He rocks to and fro, mutters unintelligible
words in soft tones; he chants dirges and lamentations. The
sun sets on another day and Sarah is worried about Abraham’s
condition and state of mind.
316
22
Lot’s Cave
Lot and his daughters are huddled together in the cave, as

they watch and wait for the holocaust to end. The tempera-
ture in the cave has risen to uncomfortable levels throughout
the firestorm. After a while, flashes of light through the gaps
in the rocks stop and the hiss and whir with bangs of thunder
cease. Eventually, the roar from the fire also gradually sub-
sides. Lot suggests to his daughters that it is time to get some
sleep and reassures them that the holocaust has ended. He lies
down next to his daughters and soon they all sleep.
Next day and it is mid afternoon: Lot is the first one
awake and sits up, then peers at the pile of rocks which cover
the mouth of the cave. He listens for any noises outside, but
all seems quiet. After a few moments, he moves toward the
mouth of the cave and while on his knees, he begins to remove
the boulders, and he lifts them down one by one until the
mouth is clear. He crawls out onto the ledge, then rises to his
feet and begins to survey the area. He looks down over the
whole of the Jordan plain and sees devastation as far as the eye
can see. The ground continues to smoulder and smoke still
rises from the hot ash. Lot’s expression is one of horror as he
thinks, this was once a glorious paradise and I cannot believe my
eyes! He moves a little further along the ledge and looks west
toward the five cities, but the five cities are gone, with barely
a shadow from where there once stood. Where tall majestic
walls once stood, ash smoulders among the remains. Lot turns
317
PAUL JUSTICE
his attention to the Sea of Arabah and sees steam rise from the
surface. The water itself is milky in colour, so dense with salt
and ash. A beautiful body of water, once full of life, is now a
dead sea. Lot looks up into the sky, sees that the storm clouds
have cleared but the sky is so thick with smoke that the sun’s
rays are blocked. The sun itself appears opaque, while it strug-
gles to give light.
Lot begins to ponder the situation over in his mind and
wonders what to do. He begins to imagine that he and his
daughters are the only survivors and that this same scenario
may have been repeated throughout the land. He thinks for a
while and returns to the cave and crouches down at the
entrance, then crawls in toward his daughters. He shakes
them. “Wake up, we have work to do!” he says.
Lot’s elder daughter opens her eyes slightly. “Work?” she
questions.
The younger daughter rolls onto her other side, and just
moans. Lot shakes her again. “Come on, wake up!” he repeats.
The young daughter sits up and looks at the mouth of the
cave. “Father, you have removed the stones.” she says, alarmed.
Lot says, “Yes and I have looked into the valley; every-
thing is dead. We may be the only ones alive.”
Lot’s daughters stare at him with expressions of shock and
concern.
Lot says, “I will go up into the mountains to search for
dead wood; we will need a campfire tonight. You clear these
rocks out of the cave to give us more room.”
The daughters nod in agreement and Lot leaves. A little
time passes and Lot’s daughters sit together, as they try to wake
up; they sit with their heads down and look at the ground.
After a while, the elder daughter suddenly looks up. “Only
ones alive, what are we going to do?” she says, concerned.
The younger looks up and says, “No idea!”
The elder looks at her sister. “How can you be so relaxed
about this?” she questions.
318
“What do you mean?” she answers.

Her elder sister says, “The tone of your voice, all noncha-
lant!”
She looks at her sister without an answer and begins to
shuffle around, then grunts as she rolls a large boulder from
the cave. The elder daughter sits and watches her until she
disappears from the mouth of the cave. A few moments later,
screams of excitement and joyous giggles drift into the cave.
The elder daughter crawls on her hands and knees to the
mouth of the cave and looks out. She sees her sister roll rocks
over the cliff’s edge and a few seconds later, she screams
with delight. The elder approaches her to investigate. “Watch
this!” her sister says.
She collects a boulder and rolls it to the cliff’s edge, after
its release it falls, the rock cascades down the embankment at
speed, bounces and spins on route to the bottom. Upon
impact amongst salt and ash, circles of dust move out from the
core and gradually disperse. The elder daughter frowns.
“How is this funny?” she asks.
Her sister says, “I just like doing it, have some fun?”
So the elder begins to gather rocks from the cave and joins
her sister in this new sport. Rather adolescent behaviour for
two young women approaching the age of forty. Eventually,
their arms become tired and they decide to quit before they
crawl back inside the cave, they look for food. They search
one of the sacks and find some figs from among the fruit, and
they sit together and eat. As they eat, the elder daughter
strikes a conversation. “What will we do when this food runs
out?” she asks.
Her sister shrugs her shoulders. “Father can hunt!”
The elder says, “Hunt what?”
Her sister chews on the fig and does not bother to answer.
A silence prevails for some time and the elder sister says,
“I was thinking, as we are the only survivors, how are we to
marry and bear children?”
319
PAUL JUSTICE
Her sister says, “We cannot, we will grow old and barren,
never having the pleasure!”
The elder says, “Why would God do this to us?”
Her sister sighs, “Who knows? When God gets angry, His
rage soars. Maybe He strikes and thinks after He realises the
blunder?” She says.
“Hmm, maybe!” says the elder. Suddenly they hear a
noise outside and the younger says, “Hush, listen!”
Lot pokes his face into the cave and says, “Did I scare
you?”
His daughters laugh but do not reply. Lot crawls into
the cave, drags a bundle of sticks behind him, then he shuffles
around in the cramped space, organises himself before he
piles up the sticks just outside the mouth of the cave, with the
idea to keep smoke out and the heat in. He tears a few fibres
from one of the sacks to assist ignition. He rubs wood against
wood near the fibres; it is not very long before he has a camp-
fire ablaze, which gives a warm glow throughout the cave.
Now dusk, Lot and his daughters huddle together and sit near
the fire and they search among the sacks for food. They share
it among one another and eat a selection of fruit, grain and
nuts. Lot says, “Bring out the wine as this is a time for cele-
brations!”
As the elder pulls out a flask of wine, the younger looks
excited. “What are we celebrating Father?” she asks.
Lot takes the flask from his daughter. “Think of it as a
new beginning: the three of us sit here on the threshold of a
new world. We are celebrating the loss of the old world, to
welcome in the new,” Lot explains.
The elder daughter is curious. “What will the new world
be like, Father?” she asks.
Lot says, “It will be what we make it, as there is no one
else!”
His elder daughter lowers her head and begins to mull
over Lot’s words. Lot finally gets the flask open and takes a
320
sniff of the contents before he takes a drink. After a brief taste,

his reaction is filled with enthusiasm when he says, “Oh my
goodness, this is potent!”
He immediately takes another drink. He hands the
flask to his elder, and she drinks with far less enthusiasm,
before she hands the flask to her sister. The younger takes a
drink and almost chokes; she hands the flask to her father.
After the wine has been passed around a few times, Lot’s
younger daughter loses her balance slightly. “Oh I feel
funny!” she giggles.
Her sister laughs.
The younger asks, “Do you know any stories, Father?”
After more wine, Lot says, “Here I sit at the ripe old age
of seventy and you ask if I know any stories? Of course I do
my child!”
She leans close to her father and says, “Tell us one father,
something erotic?” Her choice reflects failing inhibitions and
Lot begins to laugh. The elder looks at her sister and rolls her
eyes, unimpressed. After his brief chuckle, Lot says, “Erotic
stories are beyond my imagination, but I can tell you both a
true story!”
“Please do!” she says excitedly.
Lot takes another drink from the skin and shuffles a little
closer to his daughters before he begins: “It was the season
when days were long and the sun sets late, Abram and I were
young at the time, we were in the woodlands to hunt wild
boar. Our fathers taught us to hunt from an early age; it was
customary among our kinsmen.” Lot pauses to take a drink
from the wineskin.
“What did you use for the hunt father?” the elder asks,
now that she pays attention to his story.
Lot continues: “Bow and arrow! They were the best, our
fathers taught us to use olive tree branches for flexibility,
tough oak for the arrows with sharpened flint tips, and these
were lethal weapons. So Abram and I laboured all day on the
321
PAUL JUSTICE
hunt although the animals were swift and agile, we caught

nothing that day.”
Lot drinks more wine before he continues: “It was late in
the day, we retraced our steps and about to leave the forest,
when…!” Lot pauses to drink more wine,
“When what, father?” says the elder daughter.
He continues: “When Abram saw a large bird in the trees
just ahead of us, we failed to recognise the species, Abram
said, “Watch this!” He drew an arrow across his bow, flexed it
to the limit and let go.”
Lot laughs, then raises his voice: “Whoosh! He missed the
bird completely; it flew off and the arrow embedded in a
branch of the tree. Abram said it had penetrated straight
through, but I think he exaggerated; besides I was the better
archer.”
Lot laughs and his daughters join in with the laughter.
After more wine, Lot continues his story. “It was at this
moment in time when it happened!”
“What happened father?” says the younger, excitedly.
He continues: “As we stood and gazed up at the arrow
stuck in the branch, we heard wood crack and rustles in the
brush from behind us, a loud thump, thump caused the
ground to vibrate which made us turn and look.”
The young daughter stares at Lot wide-eyed and curious.
“What was it, father?” she says.
Lot puts his arms around both daughters and pulls them
in close and lowers his voice to a whisper, “The trees swayed
from side to side, the thump, thump, thump got louder
and louder and suddenly.” Lot raises his voice and shouts,
“A GIANT, APPEARED!”
Lot’s daughters scream in unison followed by laughter.
His daughters continue to listen intently as he continues, “It
stood, held back the trees and just stared at us, it was as tall as
the tallest trees, and it was huge and fearsome. Suddenly it
released a vocal sound from the depth of its soul, a roar but
322
human not like animal. Abram and I looked at each other and
we turned and ran, we ran and ran without looking back and
we just ran as fast as we could.” Lot stops temporarily to take
another drink of wine; his speech becomes progressively
slurred as he advances through the story.
His elder daughter asks, “Was this giant like Bera?”
Lot slurs, “No this one was ugly and much bigger; it had
teeth like a horse and very long hair.”
“Err, it sounds horrible!” she says, with her face all
scrunched up.
Lot continues the story: “Anyway, Abram and I just ran
until we saw the clearance ahead of us, Abram shouts “Run for
the hills!” So we ran until we reached high ground and
because these creatures clumsily advance and they are poor at
running, this gave us the advantage to get away.” Lot puts his
head back, raises the wine skin; and in his mouth, he catches
the last few drops of wine from the empty flask. Lot sits and
thinks, with his head down.
“Is that it?” says the elder daughter.
Lot continues to think, with a prolonged stare, and his
younger daughter asks, “Do you miss Abram, Father?” as she
watches a single tear trickle down the side of his nose.
“What?” says Lot, as though he had not heard. Lot watch-
es his elder daughter build up the fire with more sticks, and
she turns to look at her father and confirms, “This should last
most of the night. Father, you look shattered; you should
sleep now?” she suggests.
Lot nods in agreement and struggles to get undressed,
then falls to one side. Both daughters rush to him, help him
get undressed; they place a bundle of clothes for his head,
then Lot lays his head down. Within minutes, his snore
echoes in the cave.
The younger sister informs the elder, “I will sleep over
there away from the firelight!” She points toward the back of
the cave and moves to the rear. Lot’s elder lays down a short
323
PAUL JUSTICE
distance away from her father and watches him sleep. She
props herself up on one arm, then she lies and looks at her
father’s nakedness, as he lies on his back, with an orange glow
from the fire which illuminates his body. She thinks, “I wonder
what he meant by a new beginning? Could this be an invitation for
us to share our bodies and copulate, how else could they be a new
beginning, I wonder?”
She looks to the rear of the cave to see if her sister
sleeps, after which she turns her attention to her father
and thinks, “Yes I have decided, we must preserve our line of
descent and bring forth a new generation, for the birth of a new
world.”
She checks again to see if her sister sleeps, she gets
undressed, and she moves over to join her father. Lot’s snores
have stopped and as he breaths lightly, she lies over him, after
a few brisk minutes, she leaves. He appears to be unaware. She
sighs and gets dressed, checks on her sister who is sound
asleep. She lies down next to her sister and within minutes she
drops off to sleep.
k
The next morning in Lot’s cave: Lot wakes first and his head
thumps as he winces from the pain. He slowly sits up and
looks toward the mouth of the cave and sees burnt out sticks
and ash, and he turns his head and looks for his daughters who
sleep at the rear. His head thumps from back to front as he
mutters, “Ooh!” As he thinks a brisk climb into the hills will
help him recover, he begins to get dressed and leaves the cave.
A while later, the elder wakes and she immediately wakes her
sister, and after they have both sat up and complained about
the hard floor, they begin to rummage in the sacks and look
for food. After they select overly ripe figs, which are squishy,
they begin to eat.
As they eat breakfast together, the elder blurts out, “I cop-
ulated with father last night and I hope to be pregnant!”
324
The younger almost chokes on ripe fruit, and she looks at

her sister, responds in an alarmed tone, “You did what?”
The elder laughs, “Calm down. Where is Father any-
way?”
The younger frowns. “He is probably in the hills to col-
lect sticks. Why did you have sex with him?” she asks.
The elder says, “He invited us to when he spoke of a new
beginning!”
“Us?” says the younger, perplexed.
Her sister continues, “Yes, I think you should have sex
with him tonight.”
“No way, he is old!” says the younger profoundly.
Her sister laughs, “You are thinking about this all wrong,
this is not about passion or “erotic” as you like to call it. No,
this is about survival of the species, us, we must pass our genes
on to the next generation.”
The younger looks impressed. “My word, you can give a
speech when it suits you!” she says.
“Well, what do you think?” says the elder. Her sister
sits with her head down, thinks, looks up and then in a low
tone she says, “I am not sure about this, what will Yahweh
think?”
Her elder sister laughs after which she says, “I cannot
believe you have brought God into this, the Elohim are to
blame for our predicament!”
“Hmm, I know!” says the younger, as she rests her head
upon her knees.
Her sister says, “Look! If you are worried about
Yahweh, as you call Him, stop it, because you will be doing
God’s will.”
The young sister looks up quickly and says, “How so?”
Her sister says, “Think about it? Did not God tell our
ancestors to be fruitful and become many, subdue the earth
and fill it? How do you think they did it? They had sex with
their kinsman, which is how they filled the earth.”
325
PAUL JUSTICE
So the younger thinks momentarily before she looks up

with a positive response, “Very well, I will do it, but only after
drinking wine, as I need to be relaxed!”
Her sister rolls her eyes. “You better be relaxed, not
stupid drunk, because you need your senses sharp!” she
snaps.
Her sister frowns. “What if father does not want to have
sex?” she asks.
The elder laughs and reassures her. “He will have no
choice; we will serve him with wine, until he is unconscious!”
she says.
That said, the women exit the cave and wait on the cliff’s
edge and look for Lot. They wait for hours and as the dusk
begins to descend, they become worried and return inside the
cave. More time passes and as it starts to become dark, Lot
returns with a bundle of sticks. He lights a fire, sits and hugs
his daughters with his arms draped over their shoulders. They
eat, and they all begin to drink wine, talk and laugh while
Lot’s elder makes sure he is adequately intoxicated before he
falls asleep. As soon as Lot begins to snore, they quickly
undress him, and the younger removes her clothes and sits on
top of him, while the elder sits and watches. The young
woman exerts herself and almost enjoys the experience before
she leaves, and both daughters retire to the rear of the cave
and whisper to one another, discuss what they have done with
a sense of innocence.
k
Three months later: Lot’s daughters are visibly pregnant, so
Lot begins to hunt for animals to provide food and skins to
make a tent. Once the tent is complete, they leave the cave
and move up into the mountains, then settle in a clearance
surrounded by trees and foliage. His daughters give birth to
two boys and over time Lot copulates with his daughters until
they give birth to females, as their sons will need wives. As the
326
years go by the tribe grows and eventually splits into two

tribes. One group is the Moabites from the elder daughter,
and the other the Ammonites from the younger. The two
tribes spread out into the mountains and remain in the east,
cover the whole of the region. Eventually they begin to fight
with the Israelites in the West Country, where Abraham once
lived. War breaks out between them, even though they are
related through the bloodline of Abraham and Lot. However,
Abraham’s descendants feel that Lot’s descendants are mutant
hybrids who have no right to occupy the Promised Land, so
they seek to destroy them.
327
23
Leaving Hebron
Abraham has been in his tent for ten days in solitude, and he
has fasted and grieved over his loss. Finally, on the morning of
the eleventh day, he emerges from his tent. His appearance is
frail and weak. He wanders like a lost soul over to the sacrifi-
cial altar and as he reaches it, he drops to his knees. He
searches his mind for answers, only to find none, and his God
Yahweh remains silent. Suddenly, startled by a shrill cry which
calls his name, he looks up to see Sarah who runs toward him,
with open arms, and he drops his head, disillusioned. Sarah
reaches Abraham and throws her arms around him. “I have
been worried sick, my lord!” she says.
Abraham looks up at Sarah and with tears in his eyes he
says, “Why? I do not understand! Why did Yahweh destroy
paradise after He promised?”
Sarah looks at him with a pitiful expression and reassures,
“Surely it is beyond our knowledge, come! Let me help you,
as you need refreshment!”
Sarah helps Abraham to his feet; she walks with him slow-
ly, guides his steps toward Hagar’s tent, where Hagar has pre-
pared food. As Sarah enters the tent with Abraham, Hagar
rushes over to help them. They find a comfortable place for
Abraham to sit, while they serve him with freshly baked bread,
olives, fruit and fresh water to drink.
Abraham eats and feels a little revived. He says to Hagar,
“Listen Hagar! I want you to go to everyone in the camp and
328
tell them to congregate around the sacrificial altar by noon,

I have some news!”
Hagar bows, “Yes, my lord!” she hurries out of the tent.
Sarah looks at Abraham so as to suggest an inquisitive
mind. “What is this news, my lord?” she asks
Abraham responds, “We are to leave Hebron, as I have
had enough of this place; besides, I do not think much of this
Promised Land, do you?”
Sarah gasps and steps back, bows before Abraham,
“Forgive me, my lord, as I wish to make a suggestion, is not
the Promised Land what we make of it, I mean do we not have
to work at it?”
Abraham raises his voice, “No woman, of course not!
Yahweh gave us green pastures to inhabit, “take it all” God
said, from North, South, East, West, and He turns the best
part into salt and ash.”
Sarah slowly backs away from Abraham, “Oh, I see!
Maybe we should stay, my lord?”
Abraham looks at Sarah for a few moments with a serious
expression before he raises his voice, “Stay? You have not seen
what God has done to the valley, what was once the most
beautiful area of the Promised Land is now trashed, and you
say stay? Pack your things we are leaving!”
Abraham rises to his feet and brushes the crumbs from his
beard, and he exits the tent and goes in search for Hagar. After
a short distance, he sees Hagar who runs toward him with
Ishmael, who runs alongside her. As they reach Abraham, he
smiles and pats the boy on the head, and he addresses Hagar,
“Have you told everyone?”
She says, “Yes my lord I have, and some of them have
questions!”
Abraham laughs, “Of course, some of them always do!”
Abraham looks in the direction of the sacrificial altar
and sees people gather in droves: men, women and children.
Abraham looks at Hagar, “It is almost time, quick run to
329
PAUL JUSTICE
the tent, inform Sarah as she must congregate with everyone

else!”
As Hagar runs toward the tent, Ishmael looks up at
Abraham and enquires, “May I come with you, Father?”
Abraham looks down on the boy, smiles, “Of course!” says
Abraham. The boy looks up at his father, grins from ear to ear.
Abraham and Ishmael walk together toward the crowd of peo-
ple, and as Sarah and Hagar emerge from the tent. Sarah sees
Abraham walk with the boy and she is jealous. Hagar notices
Sarah’s frown and squinted eyes.
As everyone is now assembled, Abraham climbs up onto
the sacrificial altar, so that his point of view is elevated over
the crowd and Ishmael stands alongside his father as he
speaks. A drone of voices rumbles among the gathered people,
and Abraham raises his arms for silence. After a few moments
of silence Abraham speaks in a loud clear voice, “I have gath-
ered everyone here today for some news! We are to move out
from among the oaks of Mamre!”
Mutters ensue among the crowd. Abraham continues,
“Listen everyone, as I do not want any questions after my
speech, we are to move out westward toward the sea, to a
place called Gerar near Gaza by the coast.”
Ripples of voices come from the people. Abraham contin-
ues, “Listen! Some of you may stay here if you wish, and as for
those of you who wish to follow me, you must be packed and
ready to leave by first light. Make sure you have plenty of
water to drink, as we will travel for several weeks; be packed
and ready by dawn. Whatever your decision may be, may
Yahweh continue to bless you all!”
Cheers and applause erupt from the midst of the crowd,
while Abraham climbs down from the sacrificial altar. Sarah
fights through the crowd and tries to reach Abraham, while
Abraham refuses to answer questions from an indecisive few.
As he struggles to get away he hears questions called out.
One says, “Is Yahweh involved in this move?”
330
Another calls out, “Is it your decision?”

Abraham ignores them and presses forward toward his
tent. The tribe becomes divided overnight, as some are uncer-
tain as to how to make a decision; they have questions which
Abraham refuses to answer. Is this Gods will or his? What should
we do? The people look to Abraham for the answers, but none
are offered.
Humidity is high through the night and people are rest-
less. Abraham, in his tent, paces the floor and he is anxious.
He looks at Sarah, who lies in bed and watches him; she beck-
ons for him to come to bed. Abraham hesitates momentarily,
gets undressed and joins his wife in bed. Like newlyweds, they
re-unite for the first time after a period of months, and on this
occasion Sarah conceives for the first time, she conceives Isaac
and she is aged ninety. Outside of Abraham’s tent, members of
the tribe rush around and prepare for the next day. He lies in
bed and watches as shadowy figures run past his tent into the
early hours. After only a few hours sleep, the dawn breaks and
the noise from busy people fills the camp; children cry while
they are removed from their beds early and tents are disman-
tled and packed onto the backs of domestic animals.
The settlement begins to look sparse, because so many
have gathered their things and are ready to leave – only a few
scattered tents remain among the indecisive. From among
these tents, a few men have grouped together in the hope
that they may negotiate with Abraham; they congregate
near his tent and wait for him to show. As Abraham leaves
his tent, he wears his best attire; he stops when he sees the
congregated men. As he looks directly at them, he says, “Ah
just what I need, strong capable men with nothing to do!”
Abraham walks a little closer to the men before he orders,
“I would be pleased if you could dismantle my tent and load
the camels ready for the journey. And see to it that Sarah,
Hagar and Ishmael are mounted on camels so that they are
comfortable!”
331
PAUL JUSTICE
Some of the men begin to laugh although one very astute

man steps forward. After he silences the others, he says to
Abraham, “Of course we will do as you ask, however we would
like to ask a favour from you!”
Abraham stands, looks at the men, remains silent, and he
waits to hear about this favour. The intelligent man continues,
“We would simply like to know, and you are the only one that
can tell us, did Yahweh instruct you to move location? Or is
this another one of your flights of fancy?”
“Excuse me?” says Abraham. He takes a step back and
continues, “Have you forgotten whom you address? I stand
before you a prophet of God Most High, and you dare to
question my motives?”
The crowd of men prolong their stare at Abraham while
their leader speaks up, “Forgive me lord Abraham, for it is the
“not knowing” that has unsettled us. We would be happy to go
with you if only we had Yahweh’s blessing!”
Abraham responds, “Look all around you and what do you
see?” The men gaze all around. Abraham continues, “Land,
you see green pastures everywhere do you not? This is the
land of promise, the land of plenty which Yahweh has given to
you as a gift and as part of your inheritance. Seize it, keep it
and nurture it while you raise your families without fear. For
Yahweh has already blessed you!”
After they hear Abraham’s words the men huddle togeth-
er and whisper to debate their decision. The leader of the
group steps forward to speak to Abraham, “We have listened
to your advice and come to a unanimous decision, and we have
decided to keep our inheritance and stay here!”
Abraham smiles and responds, “As you wish! Now would
you kindly do the work I asked of you?” The men agree and
bow before Abraham and leave his presence in order to carry
out his wishes. Abraham makes his way over to the mountain
plateau in order to pave the way for the assembled tribe. He
turns and looks at the large entourage of assembled people
332
and domestic animals that have gathered behind him. He

looks for his family, then he walks the length of the caravan of
people and calls out their names; he finds them near the back
of the trail. He sees Sarah, Hagar and Ishmael seated on
camels as instructed. Abraham is ready to press on and as he
runs alongside the assembly, he calls out to everyone and
shouts “Move ahead and into the mountains!”
The huge crowd of people begins to move and follows
Abraham’s lead. The journey is perilous and taxing upon the
people and even the animals become stubborn when faced
with ascents and descents. Some individuals among the tribe
begin to bicker due to tiredness and their children cry.
Nonetheless, Abraham presses on with persistence until sun-
down. The journey to Gerar takes several weeks, while they
stay between Kadesh and Shur along the way, and because
they take the long route, they covered a huge distance. So
Abraham heads south toward the low depression with a lesser
decline into the region of the Negev, the perfect wetland and
pasturage for animals to graze. Situated between Kadesh and
Shur, this is where the assembled people pitched tent for three
days and nights. When they leave here, the masses lead by
Abraham continue. They journey North West, on a slight
incline and pass through an area of trees; the coastline soon
becomes visible. On this final day of their long journey, the
people can see ahead of them numerous buildings that make
up the coastal city of Gerar, occupied by the Philistines.
333
24
Same Old Dog,
Same Old Tricks
As Abraham and his tribal followers emerge from the trees of

the plain near the coast of the Mediterranean Sea, a group of
soldiers on horseback charge toward them and they carry
spears. When they reach them, the Superior General in com-
mand holds his arms outstretched, then orders the army of
soldiers to halt. As Abraham stands and holds the reins of the
camel that carries Sarah, he raises his arm to signal everyone
to remain calm. The Commander looks directly at Abraham
and speaks with authority, “Lower your arm and explain your
presence?”
Abraham obeys, “We are simple nomads and we come in
peace, I thought I may engage in some business with your
King?”
The soldiers begin to laugh scornfully at Abraham’s bold-
ness, before their Commander gestures for them to be silent.
At the snap of his fingers, an immediate silence prevails while
he looks over the crowd of congregated people. He looks at
Abraham, “This is a mixed crowd, they are not all equal race.
Should I suspect a conspiracy?”
Abraham immediately responds, “My lord, I would never
dream of any conspiracy; we are simply tribal drifters and we
search for a new settlement. May I offer trade for a patch of
land near the coast?”
334
The Commander responds, “Land? What do you have to

offer in exchange for a patch of land?”
Abraham responds enthusiastically, “I carry much gold,
silver and precious stones; also I have livestock at my disposal
and I thought the King may wish to accommodate some of my
slave-girls for his pleasure?”
Again, bursts of laughter erupt from among the soldiers.
The Commander swings his head around to an amused army
and shouts, “Silence! Ignorant fools! You will all stay here and
guard the crowds.”
The noise of laughter subsides, as the General looks at
Abraham to address him further. “Very well! Follow me to the
King’s Palace; my men will guard your people until we return!”
Abraham nods in agreement and walks alongside the
Commander’s horse on route to the King’s Palace. On arrival,
the Commander dismounts his horse and leads Abraham to the
King’s throne, whose name is Abimelech. As they walk through
the courtyard, Abraham takes note of his surroundings, thinks
about the amount of wealth needed to build such beautiful
buildings. He feels positive about meeting the King and won-
ders about possibly settling here. Finally they arrive at the door
to the King’s Majestic abode, the General orders Abraham to
wait while he approaches the King. As the Commander enters
the room, he approaches the throne and bows before the King.
Abimelech is seated and pampered by several maidservants
who are dressed sparingly. A translucent material of fine silk
draped over their hips falls elegantly to the floor, split either
side to their upper thigh. The King snaps his fingers to dismiss
the young women. “Speak, General,” he says.
The General rises to his feet and speaks, “My lord, I have
arrested a drifter who wishes to trade with the King for a
patch of land!”
Abimelech laughs and with humour in his tone of voice,
“Where is this drifter?”
To which the General replies, “He waits outside my lord!”
335
PAUL JUSTICE
“Then bring him in!” says the King.

The General excuses himself and leaves to collect
Abraham, and on their return Abraham is forced to the floor
and ordered to kneel before the King. Abimelech sits and
looks at Abraham and smiles. “On your feet!” he says.
Abraham rises to his feet and looks at Abimelech. The
King prolongs his smile. “I have been informed that you wish
to do business in exchange for land. What could you possibly
offer me?” The King laughs heartily and gestures for Abraham
to reply.
Abraham answers, “My lord I have brought with me many
valuable goods, and this includes jewellery, women-slaves and
livestock. If it pleases the King, you may have it all, without
exception, in exchange for one piece of land.”
The King looks at the General curiously. “Does this man
speak truth?” he asks.
The General steps forward so that he stands next to
Abraham; he says to the King, “My men are over by the plain
near the trees to keep control of a very large crowd of people,
which this man brought with him. They are mixed race and
numerous with various domesticated animals. This man is
their leader!”
The King says, “Bring me ten of his women and a collec-
tion of the jewellery!”
The Commander continues, “Yes, my lord!” Abimelech
looks at Abraham for a few moments, turns his attention to
the General, “Remove this man and return him to his people.
Have your men escort the tribe and their animals to a suitable
area near the sea and not too close to the city. Choose ten
women and the jewellery and bring them all to me!”
The General bows before the King, “Yes my lord!” He
leads Abraham to the door.
As they leave the King rises to his feet and calls out,
“Wait!” They turn to face the King who points at Abraham,
“What is your name?”
336
“Abraham, my lord!” he answers, and the King gestures

for him to leave and the General forcefully removes Abraham
from the Kings presence.
The assembled tribe are surrounded by the soldiers
on horseback when the General and Abraham return. The
soldiers have engaged themselves in a little recreation
while their leader dealt with business. With sharp spears
they have teased and taunted the assembled crowd, unsettled
animals have been difficult to restrain. The soldiers see
the General’s approach and they back away from the crowd.
The Commander dismounts and walks among the crowds
to select women; he gathers nine and looks up at Sarah seat-
ed on the camel, he says, “You dismount, you will make up
the ten.”
Abraham rushes over. “Excuse me my lord, this one is my
sister.”
The General says, “You said without exception, this was
the deal!”
As Sarah dismounts, the General takes hold of her arm
and leads her to group with the others who stand near the
horses, the General looks at Abraham, and asks, “Where is the
jewellery?”
Abraham points into the crowd and rushes in among
the people to alert the men. Moments later, two men
approach, who carry the box of silver and gold jewellery, and
they place it on the ground near the General’s horse. The
General mounts his horse and gestures for his men to pay
attention. “Four men take these ten women to the King and
two men take this box of jewellery to the treasurer, the rest
of you escort these people to the coast not too close to the
city and allow them to pitch tents, after which return to
the barracks”
The General whips his horse to speed him on his way as
he returns to the Palace. The Palace Watchmen in their
watchtowers sound the horn on sight of the Commanders
337
PAUL JUSTICE
speedy approach, the gatekeepers hear and open the Palace

gates and the Commander speeds straight through into the
courtyard, and finally brings his horse to a halt, he dismounts.
He walks through large corridors and he returns directly to
the King’s throne. Abimilech and the General converse when
four men arrive with ten women, the four men bow and line
up the women before his throne. The King looks at them all
and rises to his feet, parades round them while he walks slow
and feels their breasts and buttocks for firmness while he
makes his decision, he stops at Sarah and looks into her beau-
tiful eyes, then removes the veil from her face. The tone of his
voice suggests surprise, “My word, you are a beautiful crea-
ture, what is your name?”
Sarah stares at the King. “Sarah, my lord!”
The General speaks up, “This one is Abraham’s sister,
my lord!”
The King’s alarmed, “Sister? Abraham is very old, so if
you are his sister, how old are you?”
Sarah says, “Ninety years old, my lord!”
Abimilech laughs heartily over the dryness of Sarah’s voice
as she spoke. The King’s laughter subsides and as he regains
his composure he says, “Nonsense woman, you do not look a
day past fifty. How old are you really?”
Sarah says, “Well, it was my birthday just last week, so
I could say eighty-nine if you prefer, my lord!”
Again the King erupts with hysterical laughter, which car-
ries infectiously to the King’s men who join in the hysterics.
As the laughter subsides and Abimilech wipes the tears from
his eyes he looks at the General and declares, “I will take this
one, she is hysterically funny.”
The General bows, “Indeed my lord, as you wish!” The
General orders two of his men to remove the other women
and two of his men take Sarah to the King’s harem, to have
her bathed and dressed accordingly. Abimilech sits on his
throne, while the General explains to him that his men have
338
taken the box of jewellery to the treasurer, and that the con-
tents are highly valuable. He bows before the King, “Will that
be all, my lord?”
The King gestures, waves his hands for the General to
leave, as he is preoccupied as he thinks about Sarah. As the
General leaves, Abimilech thinks and smiles and after a few
moments he chuckles to himself as thoughts of Sarah tickle
him. What Abimilech does not realise is that Sarah is five
weeks pregnant with Isaac, and the King is in deep trouble
with God. Yahweh will protect His very own at any cost.
339
25
A Supernatural Dream
It is night and very humid throughout the city of Gerar; the

whole city is calm, with not so much as a breeze from the sea.
The ocean gently flips its waves, which invariably reflect a lit-
tle of the lunar lit sky. Abimilech lies between two women in
his bed and they peacefully sleep, after they served the Kings
needs. Abimelech looks content as he gently breathes; while
he sleeps, the flames from the torches on the wall create a dim
light over his face. The atmosphere in the room is still and
silent, even the torches on the walls, with flames which dance,
burn mellow.
Quiet prevails, until suddenly, all of the torches are extin-
guished, simultaneously, as though a gust of wind has passed
through the room. The atmosphere in the room remains still
in the dead of night. A wisp of smoke rises from the extin-
guished nightlights, as a foreboding tension hangs in the air.
From the darkness of the room, an eerie voice in soft tones,
issues forth with these words which threaten the King,
“Abimelech, tonight you are to die as you have taken another
man’s wife!”
The King is restless in his sleep and begins to toss and
turn as he hears these words; he mutters unintelligible words.
As Abimelech turns from side to side, he wakes both women,
who sit up in bed and stare into the pitch darkness. They
become afraid as they sense a presence in the room. They
leave the King’s bed and grope in the darkness to feel for the
wall. Terrified, they search for a passageway in which to hide
340
themselves from the supernatural presence. The voice contin-

ues to disrupt the King’s sleep, in his dream, he can hear dul-
cet tones call his name, “Abimelech, I know the desire of your
heart is yearning to have Sarah in your bed, and I am preventing
you from touching her. Return the woman to Abraham, or you will
perish along with all who are yours!”
The King sits up in bed, startled and confused. Still
drowsy from sleep, his eyes try to focus in the darkness and his
voice reflects fear. “Who is it, who is there?” he says.
A few moments of silence unnerve the King, his eyes shift
around the room as he tries to focus on shadows which move
and dark objects which seem to intermingle, with his height-
ened anxiety and fear. Abimelech makes an attempt to speak,
nervously,
“I am innocent! Are you going to punish a blameless man,
lord? The people you speak of, they both lied to me. I really
am innocent!” he pleads.
Although the King cannot see anyone, as the voice replies,
it sounds very close, and as though next to him; this terrifies
the King, who almost jumps out of bed,
“I know you are innocent. That is why I did not allow you to
touch her, despite your longing!”
Abimelech pulls the bed sheets up to his chin, backs away
from the voice which continues in a low tone:
“Now send the man’s wife back, for he is a prophet and can
intercede on behalf of you for your life. But understand this, if you
do not send her back, this will mean death for you and all who
are yours!”
After the King heard those words projected to him in a
soft voice, Abimelech continues to listen for words which
threaten to continue, but the room remains completely
silent for some time, and the King remains afraid. Suddenly,
the torches on the wall all ignite simultaneously, which
causes the King to scream out with shock. Tense over the
ordeal, the King slumps in his bed, as he fights to stay awake
341
PAUL JUSTICE
because of the encounter, but sleep overtakes him before

dawn.
It is morning and daylight floods in to the King’s room.
Abimelech wakes to the sound of a female whimper, as he sits
up in bed. He listens; the sound carries from one of the corri-
dors and it is the sound of a muffled weep. The King leaves
his bed and searches the passageways for the woman who
weeps; on finding her, he kneels before the young woman and
sees that she is soaked in blood from her own womb; he
assumes there has been a miscarriage and that she has lost an
early foetus. As he scoops her into his arms, he notices that
her silk skirt is soaked in what appears to be menstrual blood.
Abimelech carries the young woman into his room, in order
for her to bathe, and as he lowers her into the sunken bath,
the water turns red as it surrounds her body; she clings to his
arms, unable to let go because of her fear. Abimelech tells her
to remain calm and wash herself thoroughly, while he leaves
her to go and seek a nursemaid.
As the King approaches the corridor steps to exit his
room, a man runs up the steps to meet him and with panic in
the tone of his voice, he says, “Come quickly my lord, we have
a dilemma on our hands!”
The King quickens his pace and follows the man through
corridors, which leads to the harem of numerous women.
Abimelech reaches the female quarters and sees women laid
everywhere haemorrhaging from the womb; they weep and
wail, and some of them crawl on all fours in menstrual blood.
The King immediately doubles over, retches to vomit, and as
he rises to turn and run, he begins to slip and slide in blood,
before he hits the ground with a thump. As the King steadies
himself to his feet and clings to the wall, he looks at one of the
slave-girls who kneels in blood and retches; he catches her
attention. “Where is Sarah’s room?” he asks.
She holds her nose with one hand because of the vile smell
in the air, then she points to Sarah’s room with the other.
342
Abimelech looks at her with an expression of disgust, before

he clambers on his way toward Sarah’s room and clings to the
wall every step of the way. He stumbles into Sarah’s room and
stands near the entrance; his appearance is that of a man who
has been attacked by a she-bear which protects her cubs.
Sarah sits and hugs the corner of the room with her arms
wrapped around her legs near the knees and her head lowered;
she is dressed as one of the King’s concubines and wears only
the appropriate silk transparent skirt. Slowly she raises her
head, and peers at the blood-spattered King who stands in the
doorway; she can see he is furious. Abimelech speaks, “What
is this you have done to us?”
Sarah continues to peer at the King, speechless. The King
raises his voice, “Well! Have you anything to say?”
Sarah raises her head a little more. “It is not I, my lord.
Yahweh has done this to your house!”
The King answers quickly, “Yahweh? Who is Yahweh?”
Sarah says, “God Most High, my lord!”
The King says, “Your God has created this mess? What
has God done to the women?”
Sarah says, “He has taken their ovaries, my lord. You must
have offended Him.”
Abimelech flares up in a rage and shouts and points at
Sarah. “Your brother must answer for this! Change into your
own clothes, as you are leaving as soon as I speak with
Abraham!”
Sarah lowers her head onto her knees as the King makes
a hasty exit; he leaves her room in such a rage that he slips in
the blood and this time he lands on his back.
He tries to get up, and he gags with the stench. Two Court
Officials rush to his aid, while they slide in blood, but the
King waves them back. “Leave me and go and fetch the
Military Commander, I need to speak with him urgently!”
The Officials hurry toward the exit as the King continues
to flounder, and the women who weep and wail drive him crazy.
343
PAUL JUSTICE
Two hours later, Abimelech has had time to bathe and

dress appropriately, as he intends to meet with all of his sub-
jects, with exception to the women. He makes his way down
the steps and corridors which lead to his throne, where he
remains seated, and waits for the General of his military force
to arrive as instructed. Finally, the Commander enters the
room and bows before the King.
As Abimelech is agitated, he quickly gestures for the
General to rise before he gives instructions. “Where is
Abraham the drifter?”
The Commander says, “He is settled near the coast my
lord, between here and Gaza!”
The King demands, “I want Abraham collected and
brought here; first though, I want you to instruct everyone in
the Palace to gather in the Courtyard immediately, exclude
the woman. Now go, this is urgent!”
The Commander bows before the King and turns to exit
the room. About to reach the door, he stops and looks at the
King curiously. “Forgive me for asking my lord as you seem
agitated, may I ask if there is a problem I should perhaps know
about?”
The King pauses and answers, “The problem as you so
cautiously put it is Abraham!”
The General replies immediately, “I suspected this may be
the issue, my lord, allow me the honour of killing him myself
and I will have my men slaughter the entire tribe?”
Abimelech jumps to his feet and slams his fists down
onto the arms of his throne. The King shouts, “No General,
do you not think I know of your capabilities? You must not
harm Abraham or his people for he is a prophet. His God is
powerful and will completely annihilate us; he must be
brought to me unharmed, as he is the only one who can solve
this problem!”
The General acknowledges the King’s request respectful-
ly, before he leaves.
344
He runs through passageways which lead to the courtyard

and as he exits the Palace into open space, a watchman in the
North Tower observes the General from a bird’s eye view per-
spective and ponders over the urgency. As the General runs
across the Palace Grounds and reaches the barracks, the
Commander finds his soldiers in leisure time as they play
games. A few of the soldiers catch sight of the Commander who
runs toward them and they quickly alert the others; the infantry
shuffle themselves into an orderly group as the General arrives.
Breathlessly, the General calls out to his men, “Here are the
King’s orders, and he has issued all to gather in the Palace
Courtyard immediately. First though I need one volunteer!”
From this large crowd of capable strong men, not one
man steps forward. Disappointed, the Commander draws his
sword and paces two and fro around his infantry, pays partic-
ular attention to the expressions on their faces. He carefully
studies them until he finds one who’s appearance threatens the
least; the Commander stops and stares straight at him. With
his sword, he reaches across the shoulders of the men in the
front line and rests the blade upon the shoulder of the man he
has chosen, “You, step forward!”
The General withdraws his sword and returns it to its
sheath before he takes a few steps back, while the men stand
aside and allow the soldier to stand before his Commander.
The General reaches forward and plucks a single hair from
the soldier’s head and wraps it around his fingers, he pulls the
strand of hair straight. He places it before the soldier’s eye.,
“You will go to the nomad settlement to collect Abraham and
bring him here!”
The Commander snaps the hair between his fingers,
before he continues, “If you harm one single hair on
Abraham’s head, your execution will be just as swift. Now go,
take your horse and collect Abraham!”
The soldier acknowledges and quickly prepares his
horse. The rest of the men stand to attention, wait for their
345
PAUL JUSTICE
instructions, and the General says, “As for the rest of you
men, spread out throughout the city and gather all of the men,
bring them to the Palace Courtyard to hear the King’s words,
this is urgent now go!”
The soldiers immediately saddle their horses, ready for
the task ahead, and the Commander returns to the Palace.
Abimelech and the Commander enter the Palace courtyard
and walk side by side, a large crowd of men have gathered and
their mutter while their conversations fill the air in the Palace
Grounds. The sight of their King and the General, who stand
together, causes the humdrum of verbal noise to subside into
silence. In the centre of the courtyard is a platform of eleva-
tion with steps which lead to a level top, as Abimelech walks
toward it the crowds part to the sides and allow the King
access. He walks through the crowd of people who are filled
with anticipation, before he climbs the steps to the top of the
platform. As he looks over the crowd he sees many faces peer
up at him and, filled with expectation, they wait to hear his
words. The King speaks in a loud clear voice:
“Men of Gerar, I have called you here today for I have
urgent news. Last night I had a dream, and in this dream God
spoke to me and said, “You and the subjects of your Kingdom
are as good as dead!”
The gathered men erupt and deafen with the sound of
panic and confusion. The King attempts to regain order, but
the crowd does not listen to him. The Commander, who
stands near the Palace Doors, withdraws his sword and raises
it above his head and vertical into the air. The sun’s rays
reflect light from the blade and the glint catches the eye of the
soldier positioned in the watchtower. The General draws his
attention and gestures for him to sound the horn. The sound
produced from the horn far exceeds that which ascends from
the crowd; within minutes, order is restored and the soldier
stops the horns note. Now that calm and silence prevails, the
King continues:
346
“Yesterday a drifter wandered into our city, brought with

him numerous mixed-race and crowds of people. He offered
trade for land and so I took his sister and it turns out that he
lied to me. The God that spoke to me said that I have taken
his wife!”
Various men begin to call out from the crowd, “Who is
this man?” While another shouts, “What is his name?”
Others call out, “Execute him!”
The King responds in a loud clear voice, “His name is
Abraham and he is a prophet of God Most High, the one they
call Yahweh!” They heckle and shout at their King, and the
King continues, “This situation will not be resolved through
violence and death. I have summoned for Abraham to be
brought here, as he is the only one who can rectify our dilem-
ma, as only he can appease the God who threatens us.”
The assembled men are angry and as the King steps
down from the platform, disgruntled men prevail throughout,
while Abimelech surges through the crowds toward the
Palace Doors. The King reaches the General, and Abimelech
gives him orders, “Instruct your men accordingly, send ten
men to the herdsmen and bring me various animals in good
health, not from surplus stock, but only from the best. Send
one of your men to the treasurer and bring me one thousand
pieces of silver and Abraham’s treasure. Send ten men
among the homes of the wealthy and remove the slaves from
their masters, both male servants and slave girls, and bring
them all to me. The rest of your men will remain here, go
and hurry!”
The General immediately begins to push through the
crowds of angry men and heads for the gates, and he looks
up and sees one of his men approach mounted on horseback
and with Abraham. As Abraham dismounts the horse and
walks toward the General, the angry crowd surge and press
in on Abraham while they curse and spit upon him. The
Commander draws his sword and circles it in the air, he
347
PAUL JUSTICE
commands his men to charge the crowds. The soldiers draw

their swords and in combat formation, they charge the crowd
of men, push them back. In the bustle of crowd control, some
of the angry men are injured and fall to the ground; they are
trampled on as the ruckus continues and fists lash out and
barely miss Abraham’s head. Finally, the General breaks free
from the crowd and drags Abraham, who closely follows as
they hurry toward the Palace Doors. As they enter the Palace,
the General barricades the doors from inside, before he takes
Abraham to the King’s throne. Abimelech waits in anxious
suspense, as he needs to quickly resolve the issue over Sarah.
348
26
The Conclusion
Outside the Palace Doors, angry men pound their fists against
red cedar, and they cry out in one voice, “Kill Abraham! He is
a liar and a cheat!”
The soldiers struggle to regain control and to establish
order in the grounds of the Palace. Some of the soldiers lash
the men with their swords, then strike them across the backs
of their legs, and cause them to fall to the ground. As the
injured men roll on the ground in agony, they hold onto
their wounds while blood pours from the lacerations on their
legs. As they see this, many of the men become fearful and
begin to run off in all directions before they run for the
gates. The military gives chase and as the men exit the court-
yard; the soldiers lash out with their swords and inflict
wounds upon some as they fall near the gates. A dispersed
crowd of angry men continues to run; occasionally some look
back to see if the soldiers endure the chase. When the sol-
diers return to the courtyard, they find injured men have lit-
tered the Palace Grounds and groan with pain as they
struggle in their attempts to stand up.
The soldiers who gave chase have sheathed their weapons
and begin to point and mock, as they watch the wounded men
flounder. The soldiers walk in amongst the men and laugh as
they push them back down to the ground, and they turn a
potential blood bath into a game of cat and mouse. The Palace
Doors open and out steps their Commander, who is furious at
349
PAUL JUSTICE
what he sees. He calls out to his men, “What is this? Games

in the middle of a crisis? Seize those men by the ankles and
drag them out from the Palace Grounds. Get cleaned up and
return to the barracks!”
As the soldiers drag the men from the Palace Grounds,
the Commander walks over to the barracks and waits for his
men to return. He sits on the ground and draws in sand with
his finger; the Commander hears his men march. He looks up
to see them approach and a grin of sarcasm spreads across his
face, for his men march with heads held high, as though they
have just conquered an Entire Kingdom. The Commander
jumps to his feet, brushes the sand from his amour and walks
toward the infantry. The army stops and the soldiers stand to
attention as their Commander approaches.
“I want ten men to go to the herdsmen,” the Commander
says, “and collect the best from among the live stock, cattle
and sheep of the finest quality and bring them to the Palace
Courtyard. I also want ten men to visit landowners and
masters who keep slaves. You will confiscate the slaves from
their masters and bring them to the Palace Courtyard. One
man must go to the treasurer and collect one thousand pieces
of silver and present them to the King, and have the atten-
dants bring Abraham’s jewellery. The rest of you stay here!”
As the men with assignments prepare their horses,
the General returns to the King’s Palace. Abimelech is
seated on his throne, with Abraham and Sarah who stand
before him. The questions continue, as the General enters the
Courtroom,
“My lord!” he says, as he bows before the King. “I have
instructed my men accordingly, the goods you ordered will
soon be in the Courtyard!”
The King says, “Very well! I want you to stay and listen
to this!”
The King looks at Abraham. “Tell us, why you lied to the
General with respects Sarah’s true identity?” he says.
350
Abraham looks at the King. “My lord, it was not intended

to be a lie; you see Sarah is my sister, who is on my father’s
side and not my mother’s!”
Abimelech laughs at the irony embedded in Abraham’s
answer, while Sarah peers at the King through her veil covered
and expressionless face. Abimelech continues, “Nonetheless,
she is your wife and you hid this fact from me and deceived me,
why?”
Abraham continues his explanation: “My lord, when we
arrived here and I saw all of those soldiers, I became fearful
for my life!”
“So what is your point?” asks the King.
Abraham continues, “My point is, my lord, that if the mil-
itary knew that Sarah was my wife, they would have killed me
and taken her hostage!”
Abimelech looks at the General and laughs; the General
laughs with him. The King looks at Abraham and with laugh-
ter in his voice. “Do you mean to suggest that we are barbar-
ians?” he asks.
Abraham retorts quickly, “No my lord!”
The King looks over the top of Abraham’s head and sees
a soldier who stands in the doorway, and he holds a bronze
box, and the two attendants behind hold Abraham’s box of
treasure. Abimelech waves for them to enter the room. The
soldier approaches and after he bows before the King, he
hands him the bronze box,
“The silver is all present my lord, counted and
correct!”
The attendants enter and lower the box and bow before
their King. The King takes the bronze box from the atten-
dant. “Very well, you may leave!”
Abimelech opens the box and peers inside, closes the box
and he rises to his feet and approaches Sarah. He hands the
box to Sarah. “I would like you to accept this box, and it con-
tains one thousand pieces of silver. Take it as payment for
351
PAUL JUSTICE
services rendered, this will allay any suspicions about your

purpose and attendance!”
The King turns to Abraham. “You are vindicated! You
may choose as much land as you wish within reason,” he says.
The King returns to his throne and sits, then he looks at
Abraham. “I am giving you cattle and sheep of the finest qual-
ity, as well as slaves both male and female, who are trained to
a strict regime. The General will take you to collect these
from the Palace Courtyard. Also, I have returned your treas-
ure. Now you may leave and take your wife with you!”
The King looks at the General and gestures for him to
remove Abraham and Sarah. As they leave the King’s presence
and are almost at the doors, Abimelech calls out, “One
moment!”
They all turn to look at the King and Abimelech says to
Abraham, “All I ask is that you intercede with your God on
my behalf!”
Abraham nods in agreement. “Consider it done my lord!”
The Commander tugs on Abraham’s coat and leads him
and Sarah toward the Palace Courtyard. As they walk through
the corridors toward the exit, Sarah hands the box which con-
tains silver to Abraham, just as they reach the Palace Doors,
as the box is heavy. The two attendants follow, and carry
Abraham’s treasure. They step outside, Abraham cannot
believe his eyes, as the Courtyard brims with livestock, and
men and women of mixed race wear tattered clothes and they
are all assembled. The people and animals are surrounded by
soldiers on horseback, who wait for the General’s orders. The
Commander steps forward and calls out to his men, “The
slaves and the livestock are Abraham’s property; see to it that
none escape en route to his settlement. Prepare a horse for
Abraham and Sarah ready to leave!” The soldiers begin to
usher the people and livestock ready for the journey.
As Abraham and Sarah approach the settlement on horse-
back, followed by a large crowd with soldiers on either side,
352
some of Abraham’s tribesmen come and run to greet them.

Abraham dismounts his horse and hands the reins to one of
his tribesmen. He says, “Take this horse with Sarah into the
camp and alert the herdsmen, as there are many animals for
them to collect!”
He turns to another and says, “See all of these men and
women who are slaves, lead them into the camp and assign
each one to a family!”
As Abraham’s people rush around to fulfil his wishes, one
of the soldiers approaches Abraham to give him a final
reminder. Abraham looks up at the soldier on horseback and
says, “I will take control from here!”
The soldier says, “Do you have orders from the King of
Gerar?”
“Yes, my lord!” Abraham answers.
The soldier nods and steers his horse away from
Abraham, rejoins the others who are prepared to leave. The
soldiers whip their horses, and speed off on their way.
Abraham stands and watches them leave, hopes deep down
that he will never have to see them again.
k
Night: The Palace in Gerar remains relatively quiet, with the
exception of an occasional whimper which drifts in from the
women’s quarters. The women are anaemic and weak from
blood loss. Eunuchs who serve the King’s harem have worked
all day to clean blood from the cracked stone floor of the liv-
ing quarters; they have used countless vessels of clean water
while doing so. Even after hours of hard labour, that men-
strual odour still lingers in the air and continues to rise into
the King’s bedroom. The humid night air aggravates the
aroma that drifts through the passageways of the Palace.
As the King lies on his bed, he is restless and uncomfort-
able. Stricken with insomnia, which prolongs his agony,
Abimelech turns from one side to another, as his nightgown
353
PAUL JUSTICE
sticks to him with sweat. Finally, after he tosses and turns for
hours, the King gradually drifts off into a deep sleep. All
remains quiet throughout the Philistine Palace and the atmos-
phere is still. Abimelech lies on his bed, alone in a dark room.
Only a little light reflected from the moon peeps in from the
veranda. The King becomes restless and irritable in his sleep,
as the spirit of God permeates his room while it brings a sick-
ness. The King’s temperature begins to rise to dangerous lev-
els as the sting and itch from a feverous rash spreads over his
body like an army of red ants. He is lathered from head to foot
in his very own sweat, which infuriates the rash. As his body
swells, the King struggles to breathe, and his skin lifts with
boils and blisters, which give way to lesions and weep blood
and bodily fluids. Engulfed in a burning fever, the King sud-
denly sits upright in bed and his eyes have become wide and
stare into the darkness as though in a trance. At the foot of his
bed, Abimelech sees the shadowy figure of Abraham, who
dances jovially and laughs like his very own jester.
The King has slipped into delirium and hallucinates,
almost like a mirage this ghostly image of Abraham is pro-
jected from the King’s mind before he flops back onto his bed.
Abimelech is extremely ill and as his fever soars, he screams
and calls out to God, “Why? What have I done?”
His screams continue throughout the night. The two
night watchmen, who parade the adjacent Palace walls which
overlook the Courtyard, hear the King’s screams and immedi-
ately run to his aid. They run up the steps to the King’s quar-
ters. As they enter the room and approach the King’s bed,
Abimelech convulses with wide eyes that stare, void of any
expression.
The men slowly back away and one says to the other,
“The King is possessed by devils!”
The other answers, “No, he has a fever; look his flesh
crawls with disease. Quick! Run and seek the Physician while
I wait and watch over the King!”
354
One of the guards runs for the exit and hurriedly seeks
help from the Palace Physician. As the night watchman stands
near the King’s bed, he senses a presence in the room; a sud-
den chill surrounds his body, which causes the hairs on the
back of his neck to tingle. The watchman backs up slowly
toward the veranda and draws his sword. He says, “Show
yourself, who are you?”
The absence of a reply gives way to the sound of hurried
footsteps on the stairs leading to the King’s room. The
Physician enters the room and runs to the King’s bed, fol-
lowed by the other night watchman. The Physician leans over
Abimelech and tests his pulse. “This man is smitten with
infectious disease!”
“Infectious?” says one of the guards.
The other says, “The King shook when we arrived!”
Abimelech tries to speak from a dry mouth, and though
his mutters are barely heard, the Physician lowers his face
with his ear close to the King’s mouth.
Abimelech speaks into the Physician’s ear and with a low
croak in his voice, “There is a spirit of vengeance in this room,
and it will harm you.”
The Physician immediately looks at the two guards, who
peer close from the foot of the bed, and one of the guards
enquires, “What did the King say?”
The Physician answers, “He is delirious! I need a good
supply of cold clean water and clean cloth; we must get his
temperature down, hurry!”
The night watchmen quickly exit the room. The
Physician rests his hand on the King’s brow to find that his
skin is hot and burns; he continues to examine his entire body
to find fluids leak and ooze from his sores. Abimelech is clear-
ly about to die. As the Physician sits by the King’s bed, he
ponders over in his mind various ways he may be able to assist
the King, the temperature of the room gradually drops to
almost freezing. The Physician shudders and hears very
355
PAUL JUSTICE
quietly spoken words in what is almost a whisper, “Do you

think you can cure your King?”
The Physician looks at Abimelech, “What did you say?”
The lack of a response arouses curiosity in the Physician, who
leans over the King and checks to see if he is awake, only to
find that the King is unconscious and that he breathes very
slow. The Physician sits and wonders, then concludes that his
tiredness plays tricks with his mind. A few seconds elapse and
a soft voice from the darkness repeats, “Do you think you can
cure your King?”
The Physician jumps to his feet. “Who speaks? Reveal
yourself?”
The voice continues, “Touch Abimelech and feel his tem-
perature!”
The Physician’s eyes rove all around the dark room, while
he reaches over and rests his hand upon the King’s brow and
the Physician responds, “Impossible! His temperature is nor-
mal and yet this man is sick! Who are you? Step out of the
darkness!”
The solemn voice continues, “Your King will live, as he
obeyed my commands!”
The Physician peers into the darkness, and crouched he
cautiously moves toward the blackness of the room, antici-
pates he might see who speaks in that sombre tone of voice.
The Physician freezes on the spot, as he sees a hooded man
who resembles the grim reaper as he lurks in the dark and the
absence of a face beneath the hood unsettles the Physician.
The Physician peers at this dark figure with an eerie pres-
ence and with a tone of perplexity in his voice he enquires,
“Who are you?”
The figure in the dark responds, “Atonement is required
for the sickness to leave your King!”
After these words are spoken, the Physician watches, as
the creepy figure gradually recedes into the blackness of the
room. The Physician stands slightly crouched and stares into
356
darkness, when the night watchmen return with vessels of

water and clean linen.
Stunned from his experience, the Physician fails to hear
them enter the room, until one of them speaks, “What are you
looking at?”
The Physician shouts out loudly, as he almost leaps out of
his very own skin. His heart pounds as he is frightened half to
death. The Physician turns to face the guards and regains his
composure, “Do you have to sneak?”
The guards laugh amusedly and the Physician says,
“Good! You have brought the water and linen. Put them down
by the Kings bed!”
As one of the night watchmen lowers the water jars to the
floor, he looks at the Physician curiously, “What were you
looking at?”
The Physician says, “Not long before you arrived, I talked
to a stranger, a man I think!”
The guard quickly rises to his feet. “You think? Who is he,
where is he and what did he look like?”
The Physician answers, “I do not know! I could not see
his face in the dark. He wore a cloak with a hood and he said
something about retribution!”
The other guard drops the linen on the bed. “Come
quickly! We must find this man!”
Both night watchmen draw their swords and run toward
the exit. As they flee the scene, the Physician calls after them,
“I would suggest you take torches from one of the passage-
ways, he may be hiding and he is well camouflaged!”
The guards ignore him and continue to run. The
Physician walks over to the King’s bed to check on him, the
King sleeps and breathes very slowly. He takes hold of
the King’s wrist and notes a slow pulse and that his tempera-
ture is just slightly below normal; the King is out of danger for
now. He tears strips of cloth and begins to dress the King’s
wounds; he notices that some of the lesions have scabbed over
357
PAUL JUSTICE
and thinks they may heal. After he dressed the King’s sores
and inflamed areas of skin, the Physician finally rests by
Abimelech’s side and thinks about the night’s activities before
he drifts off into a restful sleep.
The atmosphere in the room remains chilled, which helps
with the King’s temperature and all remains calm and quiet.
The Physician has only been asleep for a relatively short time,
when the sun begins to rise, then just peeks over the moun-
tains in the east and sends its rays which shimmer over the
surface of the Mediterranean ocean. Sea birds swoop to catch
some small creatures abandoned by the tide and a beautiful
scene encapsulates the ancient city of Gerar on the birth of a
new day.
k
Morning: The Physician dreams in a light sleep when he
hears the words from a stern voice, which causes him to
jump almost out of his skin when the voice shouts, “Wake
up!”
He opens his eyes to see the General of the Military who
stands before him with his hands placed on his hips.
The General says, “The King asks for a drink of water,
I suggest you give it to him!”
The Physician rises to his feet and collects one of the ves-
sels of water, and while he offers a drink to the King from
water poured into the palm of his hand.
The Commander says, “I hear there was a stranger in this
room last night?”
The Physician looks at the Commander, “Yes General,
strange man who wore a hood.”
“Strange man, what do you mean?” says the General.
The Physician lowers the vessel of water to the ground
and stands to face the General, “Well, it was very dark and I
could not see his face. I remember his dress was unusual, a
dark cloak with a large hood, maybe Egyptian?”
358
The Commander’s eyes widen, as he quickly answers,

“Egyptian! Was he an Egyptian?”
The Physician paces the floor, looks at the Commander.
“I do not know my lord!”
The General becomes agitated. “You must know? Tell
me!”
The Physician stands, thinks, and he looks at the
General again. “I remember he said something about making
amends!”
As the General hears these words his face morphs into a
display of wrath before he utters the name, “Abraham!”
The Physician responds, “Who?” with a frown upon his
face.
The General looks at the Physician. “Never mind, stay
here and care for the King until I return!” The General turns
and leaves the room in a hurry, rushes through passageways
toward the Palace Doors, and his fury rages while he thinks
about Abraham. He leaves the Palace, and the Commander
runs, and runs all the way to the Military Barracks. On arrival
at the barracks, he finds that his men lounge in their beds and
some still sleep. Their bed bunkers in the ground are filled
with sand and layered with papyrus leaves. He quietly leaves
the barracks and walks over to his horse and dresses it as
though ready for battle.
He removes the whip from the saddle and runs back to the
men’s quarters, furious, then rushes around their bunkers in a
rage and whips his men and shouts,
“Wake up you idle cretins, get up and get dressed before
I make you sleep forever!”
The men jump out of their beds and hop from one foot to
another while they try to get dressed, under the occasional
lash and sting from the tail of the whip. The General contin-
ues to shout at his men, “We have business to attend to and
you men continue to slumber like lazy half-breed dogs?
Saddle your horses and prepare fully armoured, this is urgent
359
PAUL JUSTICE
business!” The men continue to dress as the Commander

leaves the barracks.
The General returns the whip to the sheath on the saddle
of his horse, and mounts his horse and steers it toward the
entrance of the barracks and waits for the soldiers to emerge.
The soldiers run from the barracks heavily armoured and
ready for battle; they all mount their horses and steer them
into an orderly formation before their Commander.
The General speaks in a loud clear voice, “The King is
smitten with disease and he is very sick! I know who the cause
is and I must speak with him immediately. We are going to the
nomad settlement between here and Gaza but, there will be
no confrontation just yet. When and if it is time for the
drifters to be slaughtered, I will give the command.
Understood?”
With one unanimous voice the soldiers reply, “Yes,
Commander!”
The General says, “Very well, without loitering, let us
speed on our way!” The Commander turns his horse and
whips it; the soldiers speedily follow him and while they race
past the Palace, people stand in groups, and watch as the army
charges past them. The people are perplexed and wonder
what may be behind the urgency for such a speedy exit from
the city of Gerar.
It is almost noon when the Philistine army reaches
Abraham’s settlement near the coast southeast of Gaza. The
sun beats down on the soldiers and reflects off their armour
which causes a temporary blindness to onlookers. Two of
Abraham’s tribesmen, shade their eyes, and squint as they look
toward the army, the men walk toward them as the General
calls his forces to a halt. As the men look up at the General
seated on his horse one of them speaks, “What brings you
here, my lord?”
The General replies in serious tone, “Where is your
leader Abraham?”
360
The young man says, “In his tent, as his wives prepare
food my lord!”
The general says, “Then go and alert him quickly as my
patience wears very thin!”
The young man responds, “Yes, my lord!” Both men run
to Abraham’s tent and as they reach it, they rush inside to find
Abraham reclined and relaxed, while Hagar feeds him grapes
from the bunch.
Abraham pushes Hagar’s hand away and looks at the
young men, “Why the intrusion?”
With urgency in the tone of his voice one of the young
men says, “My lord, hurry! The Philistines are here; a whole
army of them and their leader is furious!”
Abraham clambers to his feet and says to the young men,
“Lead the way!” The men turn and leave the tent followed by
Abraham; the young men rush two paces ahead of him as they
lead Abraham to the assembled Philistine army.
As he runs toward the military, one of the young men calls
out, “Look General, the man approaches!” The General sniggers.
Abraham finally reaches the General’s horse and breath-
less he tries to regain his composure before any attempt to
speak. He looks up at the General, “I thought our business
was complete General?” The General’s facial expression
changes as his eyes widen, for he cannot believe Abraham’s
cheek and the irony in his question.
The General says to Abraham, “I now know of your true
identity; you are a liar and a cheat, a charlatan full of tricks.
You infiltrate your way into Kingdoms which possess wealth,
in order to feed your greed!”
Abraham is furious and takes a few steps back. “This is
preposterous slander! Did not your King himself offer me
some of his wealth willingly?”
The General says, “Why yes! And in return you have
smitten the King with deadly disease, after you received pay-
ment in full!”
361
PAUL JUSTICE
Abraham looks surprised. “Smitten? What do you mean

General?”
The General leans over slightly and looks Abraham in the
eye. “I know you returned to the Palace last night like a sly
thief incognito, and used your wizardry to infect the King
with disease. Are you about to stand there and deny it?”
Abraham is outraged and again tries to defend himself.
“General I swear by God Most High, I was here all night!”
The General sits upright before he circles his horse
around Abraham. The soldiers look on in anticipation, just
itching for their General to give the command to strike. The
Commander stops his horse and looks at Abraham. “The
King is very sick and an infectious disease is about to kill him,
and I am holding you responsible. Know this Abraham, if the
King dies you die and all who are yours. Every man, woman
and child will die by the sword and your entire settlement will
be plundered by these soldiers!”
The General steers his horse toward his men, turns his
horse to give Abraham his final warning. “Whatever magic it
is that you conjure up, I suggest you get to work on it and cure
the King, because if I have to return to this stinking settle-
ment, you will face death!” he warns.
The Commander turns his horse and orders his men to
leave, whips their horses to speed them on their way and as
Abraham watches; the infantry quickly disappear beyond
the horizon. As soon as the Philistine army is out of sight,
Abraham lets out a very deep sigh and looks at the two young
men. The men stand nearby and look at Abraham dumb-
founded.
Abraham says, “Go run to the woodland and collect wood,
and bring it to the beach!”
Both men respond, “Yes, my lord!” and immediately run
off toward the east into an area at the foot of the mountains
where there is foliage and trees. It is now the hottest part of
the day, as Abraham walks back to his tent. On arrival, he
362
enters the tent and finds Sarah, Hagar and various maidser-
vants have prepared a spread of delicious food. Abraham com-
ments on the good smell from the food and instructs, “After
you have eaten, I want you all to alert everyone in the camp to
congregate on the beach, and within one hour!”
As Abraham turns to leave, Sarah calls out, “Stay and eat
my lord!”
Abraham ignores her and continues to walk; he heads
toward the herdsmen on the outskirts of the camp. As he
approaches, one of the herdsmen runs to greet him and as
Abraham arrives, he says, “Where are the cattle and sheep
which arrived yesterday?”
The herdsman responds, “In a separate pen, my lord,
away from the others!”
Abraham says, “I want you to choose one of each from
among the cattle and the sheep and choose the best. Inspect
them thoroughly for parasites as these animals must be fault-
less. They are to be used as a sacrifice so make a careful selec-
tion, and bring them to the beach within one hour. Alert the
other herdsmen to attend!”
The herdsman says, “Yes, my lord!” And he hurries
toward the appropriate animals. The tide is out for some dis-
tance when Abraham arrives on the beach, and steam rises
from the wet sand which gives an indication of the heat which
bears down on Abraham.
He walks out toward the sea and inspects the area while he
gravitates toward large rocks covered with shells and seaweed.
Abraham struggles to climb a large rock and occasionally slips
on seaweed and grazes his shins. He reaches the top of this rel-
atively flat rock and notes that he has good elevation; he can
see for some distance. He looks toward the settlement and sees
people in droves walk toward the beach: men, women and chil-
dren and many of them approach hand in hand and in family
groups. As he sees them all united, Abraham is touched, as he
thinks about how he may have endangered their lives through
363
PAUL JUSTICE
his bad judgment of the Philistines. As the people progress

toward him, he raises his arms above his head and he gestures
for the people to congregate around him. Abraham looks over
the huge assembly of men, women and children, and they all
peer up at him with faces full of expectation.
Abraham calls out in a loud clear voice, “Please remain
calm, people, for what I am about to say. The Philistines have
threatened us with expulsion from this land!”
Murmurs emit from the assembled crowd, before
Abraham continues, “Listen people, we are going to build a
sacrificial altar to Yahweh so that He will protect us!”
Men who have families call out to Abraham, “The
Philistines escorted us here, why the sudden change?”
Another man calls out, “Yes! We were promised residen-
cy provided we kept away from the cities, why do we have to
leave?”
Abraham raises his voice to silence the people, “Where is
your faith, people? Is Yahweh the Judge of all the earth going
to allow his people to fall by the sword?”
People from the crowd call out, “We thought the issue
was about eviction?”
Another man shouts out, “Now you tell us we are going
to die!”
A man steps forward from the crowd and calls up to
Abraham, “Yes tell us Abraham, what is it to be? Tell us the
truth!”
Abraham calls out to the people, “An animal sacrifice will
ensure our safety, trust me, I know!”
The man up front says, “So what must we do?”
Abraham responds, “We only have about three hours
before the tide returns; we must quickly gather wood and
build the sacrificial altar so that I may appease our God, as
only Yahweh can protect us. Everyone spread out along the
coastline and gather driftwood; whatever you find if it is com-
bustible bring it!”
364
The people begin to disperse to the left and the right,

while two men step forward and assist Abraham down from
the rock. As Abraham searches for a suitable spot to build the
altar, the people are like ants as they swarm the coastline to
collect debris, and even the children run to Abraham with
crab shells and seaweed. As Abraham collects everything
together, he places the rubbish in the middle and driftwood
on the outside.
As the men help him construct the altar, the two young
men approach Abraham and drag branches from trees still
fresh with leaves and as they reach Abraham, he reacts harsh-
ly, “What is this? You were supposed to collect dead wood!”
The young men look at each other, and Abraham uses it
anyway.
As the people continue to swarm the coastline, Abraham
looks up and sees four herdsmen approach with the sacrificial
animals, two of which have the animals tethered to their
wrists. As they arrive, Abraham says, “We must slaughter
these immediately, did you bring cutting implements?”
One of the herdsmen responds, “We always carry a knife
my lord!”
Abraham holds his hand out, and waits to receive the
knife, “We will do the heifer first; hold it still while I do the
cutting!”
It takes four men to hold the animal while Abraham sev-
ers the main artery in its neck. The children play nearby and
stop to watch and one little girl screams as blood squirts from
the cow’s neck; it is not long before her mother runs and
scoops her up to take her away from the scene. The animal
struggles for a while as its life force drains away and finally, it
becomes limp and it drops to the ground. Four men take hold
of a leg each and roll the animal onto its back, while Abraham
slits the animal open on the full length of its underside.
Abraham waves for extra men to help lift the carcass onto the
pile of branches and sticks, which represent the sacrificial
365
PAUL JUSTICE
altar. The men pull the animal’s legs apart, break its ribcage so
that all of its internal organs are exposed and face the heavens.
They repeat the same process with the sheep, so that two of
the finest animals are spread evenly as sacrifices. Abraham
pulls a few strands of fibre from his cloths and uses this, cou-
pled with a piece of dry wood and friction, he manages to
cause the cloth to smoulder and eventually lights the fire. In a
short period of time, the sacrifices are ablaze and smoke
ascends to the heavens.
The people see the flames of the fire, and those who have
spread out along the coastline now return for the celebrations,
as they do not want to miss Abraham do what he does best,
communicate with God. The people congregate around the
fire as the smell of burnt flesh is carried in the sea breeze, and
they watch as Abraham prostrates himself face down in the
sand not far from the altar. They listen intently as Abraham
cries out to his God in a way that could not be replicated by
anyone else. The assembled people begin to witness why
Abraham is the only one who can intercede with the creator
of heaven and earth. As they listen to the intensity of his
prayer, his very being screams out as though in agony. For it
moves onlookers and sometimes disturbs others, as children
hide their faces parents cling on to them with intensity.
Abraham concludes his communication with his God and lies
on the ground as though exhausted, and the assembled crowd
keep watch in anticipation of a favourable result.
An unusual silence permeates the coastline, even the
sound from crashing waves is barely noticed and the tide
creeps in unawares to everyone present. A few minutes have
passed when Abraham hears a voice in his mind and it talks to
him softly with a calm influence, “Abraham, I have heard your
cries and seen your anguish so why are you afraid? Abimelech
is soon to be healed, and my people will no longer be threat-
ened by the Philistines. Rejoice, for I will heal and comfort my
people!”
366
Abraham steadies himself to his feet and turns to face the

assembled crowd of anxious people; he raises his arms above
his head and calls out in a loud voice, “Yahweh has spoken and
He has reassured me, we have no need to fear the Philistines
and to rejoice, for He will heal and comfort His people!”
After the people hear those words, all among the assem-
bly begin to cheer and applaud, as they are overjoyed with the
result. As Abraham walks toward the vast assembled crowd,
they stand aside, create a pathway, and as Abraham walks
through the midst of the people they reach out and touch him,
as four men lift him onto their shoulders.
As Abraham is carried like a Royal King back to the set-
tlement, people press in all around and try to touch him
because he represents the very presence of their God. The sun
begins to set over the mountains in the west as the tide wash-
es over the spot where Abraham lay and pleaded with his God.
Waves crash against the shore while flames are extinguished in
a foaming sea.
As the dusk descends upon the settlement it is filled with
rejoicing and the people prepare a huge banquet. This is pre-
pared by the women who lead in recreational activities, and
Sarah has the final say over the finer details which concern
appropriate dress, food and drink. She leaves the choice of
music, song and dance to the musicians.
Before the party begins Abraham is raised above the
crowds and calls out in a loud voice, “Listen everyone for this
is a happy occasion. Eat, drink and rejoice with song and
dance for today, Yahweh has delivered us from our enemies.
Glorify your God because Yahweh is for all eternity!”
Joyful cheers erupt from the assembled people followed
by music played from various stringed instruments. The cele-
brations continue in to the early hours, and with a mass con-
sumption of food and wine, everyone retires to their tents
fulfilled and happy.
k
367
PAUL JUSTICE
Night falls on the Philistine Palace and sickness continues to

disable the King. The subjects of a once powerful Kingdom
feel abandoned and uncertainty prevails. The Commander of
the Military waits patiently and on tender hooks as he con-
templates the outcome of the King’s condition. The soldiers
in the barracks eagerly await the General’s orders to attack,
and they drool over the thoughts of pillaging the nomad set-
tlement. The city of Gerar rests in the stillness of the night
like a ghost town, as a warm and gentle breeze drifts inland
from the Mediterranean Sea. The torches gently flicker in the
King’s bedroom, as Abimelech lies asleep on his sickbed.
The King lies naked on his bed and alone, boils, bumps
and blisters cover the entirety of his body and the bitter
sting from the rash continues to eat his flesh. The Physician
and his assistants have decided to leave their King alone to die
in solitude, as they have no idea as to what to do in order to
save the King. This pestilence is unknown to them, and they
cannot find a cure. Abimelech lies motionless in his own per-
spiration which has soaked into the bed sheets and the room
is filled with a threatening odour and the smell of death. The
temperature of the room changes as a spirit sent from God
enters the room invisibly and with perfect stealth. The spirit
lingers over the King’s bed and a healing process begins. The
rash embedded in his flesh begins to disappear, as the boils
and blisters which bear scabs and lesions retract and give way
to healthy skin. Abimelech’s complexion gradually changes
from a sickly pale to a healthy colour. His pulse quickens the
pace and his breathing is restored to normal. Abimelech
remains still and continues to sleep throughout the healing
process. The spirit moves away from the King’s bed and
searches the entire Palace for anyone sick, weak and on the
brink of death. The dormitory which houses the King’s con-
cubines is full of sick women and unattended by the eunuchs
who sleep, and as the spirit enters and passes over the male
servants their genitalia are restored. The spirit drifts from
368
room to room and touches every woman while it passes over

them; their wombs become fertile as their ovaries are restored
with twice as many eggs as previously. As the spirit permeates
every passageway and every room of the Palace it searches
among the people, and when it finds the slightest scar or the
smallest mole on the skin, the individual is instantaneously
healed. God kept his promise to Abraham and the Philistine
Kingdom is restored to full health.
k
Morning: Abimelech wakes from a restful sleep and his eyes
rove around the room as he contemplates how much better he
feels. He sits up in bed and looks over his body and an expres-
sion of amazement enraptures his face, as he sees the disease
has left him. The King leaves his bed and immediately bathes
before he gets dressed into his finest attire kept for special
occasions. Abimelech stands on the veranda with a beautiful
sea view and he looks out over the ocean, and the King sees a
glorious day which brims with potential. Two of the Palace
Guards enter the King’s room full of excitement and carry
good news, and one of the men approaches the veranda,
“My lord and King we have good news to declare, your
concubines are healed and ready to meet your requirements!”
Abimelech turns to face his men with a smile that beams
from a countenance that glows, “I know and it is wonderful,
look at me, I generate more health than ever before and I feel
better than I did in my youth!”
The men stare at the King flabbergasted before one of
them speaks, “My lord what has happened to us, everywhere
in the Palace people are ecstatic with new found vigour!”
The King laughs with enthusiasm, “Can you not compre-
hend it? We have all been touched by the living God as a ges-
ture of good will for my obedience!”
The two guards look at each other and frown. The King
continues, “Go to the treasurer and have him bring my crown
369
PAUL JUSTICE
and jewels to the throne, and alert the General as I would like
to speak with him too!” The guards respond, “Yes my lord!”
before exiting the room.
k
One hour later: Abimelech sits on his throne and mulls over
in his mind the changes he is about to implement into the
revived Kingdom. While the King sits and thinks, the treas-
urer approaches the throne and carries elaborate cloth which
bears the Kings crown and jewels. He kneels before his King
and presents the Royal Emblems. Abimelech says, “Rise and
dress your King accordingly!” The treasurer rises to his feet
and places the crown upon Abimelech’s head, before he places
a necklace of jewels over the King’s shoulders.
The treasurer bows before the King, “Does this please the
king?”
The King responds, “It does and as from today your
wages will be doubled. You may leave and tell everyone who
works in the Palace that they too will receive an increase in
wages!”
The treasurer bows again, “Thank you most kindly, my
lord, I will see to it that the others are informed!” The treas-
urer leaves the King’s presence and exits the room.
A few moments pass before the General enters the room
and kneels before the King, “It is good to see that you are
well, my lord!”
The King smiles, “On your feet, General, as I have impor-
tant news!”
The General stands and faces the King, “What is this news,
my lord? As the King’s attire suggests a special occasion?”
“Special occasion indeed!” says the King. Abimelech con-
tinues, “As from today, I am implementing new rules to be
obeyed by everyone throughout my Kingdom. I require you
and your army to enforce these rules as from today!”
The General bows, “Of course my lord!”
370
The King continues to prep the Commander, “Firstly and

of utmost importance, Abraham and his people are to be
treated with the utmost respect and given whatever they
require. Secondly, everyone who works for the Palace is to
have their wages doubled, and this includes you and the
Military Staff. The people in the city of Gerar are to be treat-
ed with fairness and I expect you and your men to serve as
equalizers, see to it that the wealthy give up their surplus to
the poor. And finally, any exiles which may drift into my
Kingdom will be given a place of refuge and treated humane-
ly and with kindness, any questions?”
The General’s face has transformed into a picture of dis-
may and confusion before he replies to the King, “My lord,
the transformation is too severe, my men are trained in brutal
techniques of combat and they are ignorant savages who know
no better. It is impossible for me to transform them into
Guardian Angels!”
The King responds, “Oh! I did not pre-empt a problem.
I suggest you recruit new members with intelligence!”
The General becomes alarmed, “My lord this will leave us
wide open to attack, suppose the Egyptians or the Assyrians or
worse still the Babylonians hear about our vulnerability? They
will attack us like parasites which prey on sick animals!”
The King responds, “Then you must recruit both, good
men and evil. You can then apportion the assignments accord-
ingly!”
The General responds in a negative tone of voice, “Very
well my lord! May I ask what has driven you to this form of
reason?”
Abimelech rises to his feet and holds both arms out-
stretched, “Can you not see it General? I am radiant with health.
I have been touched by the living God, by Abraham’s God, the
one he calls Yahweh, so my desire is to share my prosperity!”
The General’s face is one of disbelief and bewildered he
simply bows before the King and leaves his presence. As the
371
PAUL JUSTICE
General hurries through passageways and heads for the Palace

exit, he sees the Physician walk toward him and as the General
attempts to rush past, the Physician stops him, “General how
is the King?”
The General looks at the Physician and frowns, “The dis-
ease has left him if this is what you mean?”
The Physician says, “Good!”
The General changes his tone, “It is not all good; the
King has completely lost his mind. As from today the
Kingdom will be ruled by insanity!” The General walks away
and leaves the Physician who stands dumbfounded.
What began as a fruitful day has quickly turned into one
of negativity and mistrust, as a once United Kingdom has
turned into one that is divided and lacks mutual trust. It is
now only a matter of time before the Philistine Kingdom col-
lapses. As time rolls out the carpet of uncertainty and the
years pass by, Abimelech is pronounced mentally incapable of
ruling and he is dethroned. Eventually he is exiled on the
island of Cyprus as deemed unfit to rule as King, and
Abimelech spends the remainder of his years alone, and with-
out a wife or children.
As people learn about him and listen to stories, they ostra-
cize the area where he lives in fear of reproach for listening to
his insane ramblings. People on the island of Cyprus become
weary and tired of his stories about Abraham and the God he
calls Yahweh, and how he once ruled a Kingdom close to the
coastal mainland. Tired of the same story over and over, how
he became sick to the point of death until he felt the touch of
God and was healed. Abimelech lived to be very old, as God
extended his life by scores of years; his loneliness and the stig-
ma of his supposed insanity remained with him as a blemish
until the day he died.
372

Sodom - Five Ancient Cities

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Sodom - Five Ancient Cities

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

S O D OM

Paul Justice is hereby identified as author of this

The book cover picture is copyright to Paul Justice

This book is published by

A CIP record for this book

Years of research preceded the writing of this book. My

February 19, 1929 – April 4, 2010

man over the centuries, translated into many languages, loved

Bronze Age Middle East: A nomad tribal leader named

other on the west. Set in a very low depression within the

cities and Lot admires the city of Sodom. Awestruck at the

Chapter 1: The City of Ur 1

When Terah was seventy years old, he fathered Abram, who

into mature men, they decided to take wives for themselves

The morning of the procession, the Chaldeans are prepared

The Commander looks Terah up and down, as he has

gestures for the soldiers to storm the house. “Arrest these

and they wait in line for their opportunity to worship Sin. As

every kind of fruit grows in abundance. We should go there;

The widow is a wealthy woman who owns property; this

it with you?” Lot laughs joyously, hugs Abram with the

chambers. Abram ponders over the drawing and, looking at

Sarai speaks up. “I can see why the widow is so eager to

Abram sits up and stretches and yawns. “It’s highly

Terah remains seated and watches as Abram and Lot grad-

A man from Nineveh approaches, followed by ten young

“Sacrilege!” Abram retorts, under his breath, before he

contraband. The women must continue to make tents as

outside, Abram calls out to the widow, telling her in a loud

Six weeks have passed since their departure from Akkad

Abram shakes his head. “Lot! You have nothing to worry

ney to Nineveh. He collects water-skins, a bag of ashrafi coins

and they whisper in secret. Prostitutes emerge from the win-

“Prophet?” asks the man.

The General laughs again, as he looks back at his soldiers,

palm reader mean when she said, ‘Your nephew is in danger?’

As he arrives at Terah’s tent, Abram sees Terah lying on

Sarai nods in agreement. “Tell me, my lord,” she says,

Abram exits the tent, carrying his father’s clothes and

Abram walks and approaches the slight incline toward the

Terah is lying on his side, with his back to Abram, as he con-

“Lot, why are there so many women in your tent?” Abram

“It is not for us to make a decision,” the attendant says.

system is very productive and this production you have

“The Physician is here!” cries Lot, as he enters the tent.

Outside the tent, Abram sees Lot approach with plenty of

Abram gestures his approval and the guards leave. He

and the merry-making continues late into the evening. Terah’s

spirits of our ancestry. The locals call them ‘Gava-dag,’ mean-

On arrival in the community, Abram sees that people are

“Yes,” Abram says. “Tales that concern you having your

Abram awakes, lathered in sweat, with the dream still fresh in

it! God is leading us to paradise, to prosper in a glorious land

“Nonsense!” shouts Terah. “This is all about wealth;

son in battle is present in the crowd. In a loud and clear voice,

Abram remains silent. Sarai kneads the bread and ques-

“I do!” snaps Sarai. Without another word, they both con-

look at Abram. “Think about it Abram,” he says. “Think

Abram finishes a drink from the wineskin. “This wine of

inspiration suddenly occurs to him. He looks up and says to

Soft breathing is the only sound in the room, when Abram

No sooner has he said these words, he drops to his knees